JP7540577B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, such as pachinko machines.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines , there are some that transition to a winning state when a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot results in a winning. Some of these gaming machines aim to increase interest by providing multiple types of winning possibilities with different degrees of advantage.

JP 2003-325886 A

However, there is a demand for further improvement.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in playing the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in claim 1 has a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball, a specific area that the gaming ball launched by the launching means can reach, a first ball entry means provided at a position where the gaming ball that has reached the specific area can enter, a second ball entry means , a first benefit providing means for providing a first benefit based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means, a second benefit providing means for providing a second benefit different from the first benefit based on the gaming ball entering the second ball entry means, and a ball entry control means for controlling the ball entry into the specific area. a variable means for varying the position of the game ball between a first position where a predetermined game ball that has reached a predetermined position can enter the first ball entry means and has difficulty entering the second ball entry means, and a second position where the predetermined game ball has difficulty entering the first ball entry means and has possibility of entering the second ball entry means; and a variable control means for varying the variable means to the first position based on the establishment of a first condition, and to the second position based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, wherein the variable means is constituted by one variable member, and the predetermined The gaming machine is configured to be controllable so that a gaming ball that has reached the specific area in a gaming state of the first ball entry means has difficulty in entering either the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and the gaming machine has a drive means capable of supplying at least a first drive force for varying the variable means to the first position and a second drive force for varying the variable means to the second position, the first position being a position where the gaming ball that has reached the specific area can be guided in the direction of the first ball entry means by flowing down in a first direction, and the second position being a position where the gaming ball that has reached the specific area can be guided in the direction of the first ball entry means by flowing down in a first direction, It is a position where the game ball can be guided toward the second ball entry means by flowing it down in a second direction different from the first direction, and the gaming machine is configured to be able to flow the game ball that has reached the specified area downstream of the variable means without changing its direction of travel, at least when the game ball that has passed through the specific area and reached a specified area flows downstream of the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means without entering either the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and the driving means is composed of a single driving source .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the gaming machine has a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball, a specific area that the gaming ball launched by the launching means can reach, a first ball entry means provided at a position where the gaming ball that has reached the specific area can enter, a second ball entry means, a first benefit providing means for providing a first benefit based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means, a second benefit providing means for providing a second benefit different from the first benefit based on the gaming ball entering the second ball entry means, and a ball entry means for providing a ball entry point that has reached the specific area. and a variable means for varying at least between a first position where a given game ball can enter the first ball entry means and has difficulty entering the second ball entry means, and a second position where the given game ball has difficulty entering the first ball entry means and can enter the second ball entry means, and a variable control means for varying the variable means to the first position based on the establishment of a first condition, and to the second position based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, wherein the variable means is constituted by one variable member, and the variable means is configured to vary the given game state between a first position where a given game ball can enter the first ball entry means and has difficulty entering the second ball entry means, and a variable control means for varying the variable means to the first position based on the establishment of a first condition, and to the second position based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. and a controllable state in which a game ball that has reached the specific area is difficult to enter either the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, the game machine has a drive means capable of supplying at least a first drive force for varying the variable means to the first position and a second drive force for varying the variable means to the second position, the first position being a position where the game ball can be guided toward the first ball entry means by flowing down the reaching game ball in a first direction, and the second position being a position where the game ball can be guided toward the second ball entry means by flowing down the reaching game ball in a second direction different from the first direction, the game machine is configured to be capable of causing the game ball that has reached the specified area to flow down downstream of the variable means without changing its direction of travel when a game ball that has passed through at least the specific area and reached a specified area flows down downstream of the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means without entering either the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and the drive means is composed of a single drive source .

This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the display area of a three-pattern display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on a third pattern display device in the first embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a continuous transformation performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of a display mode when a transformation is successful in the continuous transformation performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when the transformation is successful in the continuous transformation performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when the transformation is unsuccessful in the continuous transformation performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of a transition effect displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the change over time in the presentation mode of a development effect. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating a change over time in the presentation state when a variable display with a continuous transformation presentation is executed in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the variation pattern table for big wins, (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the variation pattern table for misses (normal), and (d) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the variation pattern table for misses (high probability) FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of various counters according to the first embodiment. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the transformation performance selection table in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the development performance mode selection table in the first embodiment. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device according to a first embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating images displayed when the power is turned on. 1A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface A, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a transfer data table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the start winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing normal pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a through-gate passing process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and presentation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a transformation setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing a performance update process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing the transformation performance start determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing the effective period processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a process during success notification executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a process during failure notification executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing processing during transition performance executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing a stop type command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing an opening command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing a number of rounds command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing a rear image change command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing an error command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing transformation performance related command processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing a schematic diagram of the change over time in the presentation pattern when a variable display is executed in the second embodiment, in which a continuous transformation presentation with a maximum number of transformations of four is set. 10A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the transformation performance selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the development performance mode selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the period selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring and performance process 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the performance update process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a second effective period process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment; 13 is a flowchart showing a display period process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the transformation feasibility determination table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring and performance processing 3 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a transformation setting process 3 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the development performance mode selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the transformation feasibility determination table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment, (c) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the press tendency table in the fourth embodiment, and (d) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the non-press tendency table in the fourth embodiment. A block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the RAM of a voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring and performance process 4 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a valid period process 4 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a transformation setting process 4 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of a display mode during execution of a search performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the fifth embodiment. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a change over time in the presentation mode when a variable display with a continuous transformation effect set is executed while a player who has been determined to have a low frequency of participation in continuous transformation effects is playing in the fifth embodiment; and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a change over time in the presentation mode when a variable display with a continuous transformation effect set is executed while a player who has been determined to have a high frequency of participation in continuous transformation effects is playing in the fifth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of a voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the valid period count table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a voice lamp control device in a fifth embodiment. A flowchart showing the performance update process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. 13A is a flowchart showing the transformation performance start determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the effective period process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a transformation setting process 5 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing processing during an alarm state executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. A flowchart showing the transition performance process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a pressing tendency update process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. A diagram showing a schematic example of a change over time in the presentation style of a transition presentation in a modified example of the first embodiment. FIG. 13 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a sixth embodiment. (a) is a front oblique view showing the left specific winning port in the sixth embodiment when it is in a state where a ball can be scored, and (b) is a front oblique view showing the right specific winning port in the sixth embodiment when it is in a state where a ball can be scored. 13A is a top view of each movable member in the sixth embodiment, FIG. 13B is a top view of each movable member in the sixth embodiment when the movable member 650Rb is positioned in the protruding position, and FIG. 13C is a top view of each movable member in the sixth embodiment when the movable member 650Lb is positioned in the protruding position. 13A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the sixth embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing a special pattern variation start process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing a jackpot control process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. A front view of a pachinko machine in a modified example of the sixth embodiment. 13A is a top view of a movable member in a modified example of the sixth embodiment, FIG. 13B is a front view of a movable member in a modified example of the sixth embodiment, FIG. 13C is a side view of a movable member in a modified example of the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 13D is a front oblique view of a movable member 650b in a modified example of the sixth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the flow direction of the game ball when the movable member and the left specific winning port are close to each other in a modified example of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the flow direction of the game ball when the movable member and the right specific winning port are close to each other in a modified example of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a seventh embodiment. 94(a) is a front view of the special prize winning device of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special prize winning device along line XCIV-XCIV in FIG. 94(a). (a) is a diagram showing the direction in which the game ball flows when a right V opening pattern is determined in the seventh embodiment and the player hits with the left hand, and (b) and (c) are diagrams showing the direction in which the game ball flows when a right V opening pattern is determined in the seventh embodiment and the player hits with the right hand. A figure showing an example of the display mode of the selection effect executed in the first round of a jackpot in the seventh embodiment. 13A is a diagram showing the change over time in the movable position of each movable part when a right V opening pattern is set in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the change over time in the movable position of each movable part when a left V opening pattern is set in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment, and (c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing the big win control process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing an abnormality process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 7 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing a win-related command processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a close command processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the processing of a special prize winning command executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. 13A is a front oblique view of the movable member in the eighth embodiment, FIG. 13B is a front view of the movable member in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 13C is a side view of the movable member in the eighth embodiment as seen from the left side when viewed from the front. 13A is a front oblique view showing the movable member in the intermediate position in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a front oblique view showing the movable member in the protruding position in the eighth embodiment. 13A is a diagram showing the change in movable position over time when the movable member in the eighth embodiment is moved according to movable pattern A, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the change in movable position over time when the movable member in the eighth embodiment is moved according to movable pattern B. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the eighth embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing the big win control process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing the configuration of a rotating member in a modified example of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a front view of a pachinko machine in a ninth embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing the flow path of a game ball hit to the right in the ninth embodiment, for each movable position of the electric device. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the ninth embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the second winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the ninth embodiment, and (c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing special pattern variation processing 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. A flowchart showing the start winning process 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 9th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing normal pattern change processing 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. A flowchart showing the electric role start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 9th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 9 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a front view of a pachinko machine in a tenth embodiment. A front view of the detour device in the tenth embodiment. A figure showing an example of the display mode during a jackpot displayed on the third pattern display device in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a front view of a pachinko machine in an eleventh embodiment. (a) is a front oblique view showing the state in which the opening and closing door of the right variable winning device in the 11th embodiment is closed, and (b) is a front oblique view showing the state in which the opening and closing door of the right variable winning device in the 11th embodiment is in the process of being opened. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the opening and closing door of the right variable winning device in the 11th embodiment when it is completely open, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the opening and closing door of the right variable winning device in the 11th embodiment when it is completely closed. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the change in the state of the right specific winning port over time when an opening pattern that allows for a V win is set in the 11th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the change in the state of the right specific winning port over time when an opening pattern that makes it difficult to win a V win is set in the 11th embodiment. This is a diagram showing in more detail the state of the opening and closing doors during one opening period when an opening pattern that allows for a V prize is set in the eleventh embodiment. This figure shows an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device at the start of one round of a jackpot in which an opening pattern that can result in a V win is set in the 11th embodiment. A front view of a pachinko machine 10 in a modified example of the seventh embodiment. A front view of a special prize-winning device in a modified example of the seventh embodiment. A figure showing the changes over time in the state of the movable members and each flow path distribution valve during a jackpot game in a modified example of the seventh embodiment. A front view of a modified example of the game board in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of each movable member in a second modified example of the sixth embodiment. 13A is a top view of each movable member when the drive motor is driven in the positive direction in a second variant of the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a top view of each movable member when the drive motor is driven in the negative direction in a second variant of the sixth embodiment. A front view of the game board in the twelfth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the direction of travel of the game ball when the protruding overlap state is reached in the 12th embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the direction of travel of the game ball when the movable member is moved to the retracted position first after the protruding overlap state is reached in the 12th embodiment, and (c) is a diagram showing the direction of travel of the game ball when the electric device is moved to the retracted position first after the protruding overlap state is reached in the 12th embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the right-hit navigation effect executed during the interval period of a jackpot in the 12th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the storage effect executed when a normal pattern hit occurs during the round period of a jackpot in the 12th embodiment, resulting in a protruding overlap state. A figure showing the change over time in the presentation pattern during a jackpot game in the twelfth embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing main processing 12 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. A flowchart showing the performance update process 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 12th embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the jackpot process 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 12 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. A flowchart showing the normal opening command processing 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 12th embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a hit-related command processing 12 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a state command process 12 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. A front view of a game board in a modified example of the twelfth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the flow direction of game balls during a jackpot round in a modified example of the 12th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the flow direction of game balls during a normal pattern winning period in a modified example of the 12th embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the direction in which the game ball flows when only the electric device is positioned in the protruding position in the second modified example of the 12th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the direction in which the game ball flows when the protruding overlap state is in the second modified example of the 12th embodiment.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. Fig. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having numerous nails and winning holes 63, 64, etc. is attached to the inner frame 12 so that it can be detached from the back side. A pinball game is played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is also fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at approximately the center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls that juts out forward and is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a. In addition, a frame button 22 is provided above the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 2) described below, or when changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The stage refers to a presentation mode that provides uniformity to the various presentations displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and this pachinko machine 10 has two stages, the "Sandy Stage" and the "Deep Sea Stage". The various presentations, such as the variable presentation and reach presentation that are performed when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when no variable presentation is being performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, the stage is repeatedly changed in the order of "Sandy Stage" → "Deep Sea Stage" → "Sandy Stage" → .... Also, immediately after the power is turned on, the "Sandy Stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third pattern display device 81 is configured such that when a normal reach presentation is started, and the normal reach is to be developed into a super reach, a selection screen for the super reach presentation mode is displayed during the normal reach, and if the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the content of the presentation during the super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks by lighting or blinking the built-in LEDs, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that the player is in the reach just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see Figure 1) is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating an illumination unit such as LED that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see Figure 2) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in order to create a more dazzling appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 in the pachinko machine 10.

Below the window 14c, a ball lending operation unit 40 is provided. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out according to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 in the center, which is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is arranged, which is operated by the player to shoot balls into the front of the game board 13. Inside the operating handle 51, there are built-in touch sensors 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, push-button-type shooting stop switch 51b that stops the shooting of balls while it is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the control handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation, and the ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes in accordance with the amount of rotation of the control handle 51, thereby shooting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Also, when the control handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the shot stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower part of the lower tray 50 when viewed from the front, which is used to eject the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are ejected. The ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

2, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails, windmills and rails 61, 62 for guiding balls, a general winning opening 63, a first ball opening 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display unit 80, etc., on a wooden base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first ball opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. In addition, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Below, the configuration of the game board 13 will be explained mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed from a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and outer rail 62 surround the front periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area on the front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an approximately circular area (an area where winning holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) on the front of the game board 13, partitioned by the two rails 61, 62 and the arc member 70.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2), which prevents the ball once guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back to the center while reducing its force. In addition, between the tip of the lower right side of the inner rail 61 and the tip of the upper right side of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed with an arc on the inner side connecting the rails is driven into the base plate 60 and fixed.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a lottery for a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, and when a ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery for a special symbol performed for a ball entering the first ball entrance 64, a judgment is made as to whether or not a special symbol is a jackpot, and if a special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, the type of jackpot is also judged. When a special symbol is a jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a special game state, and the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have entered), and this opening is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, and a larger number of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of jackpots for special symbols: "jackpot A" and "jackpot B." After the special game state ends, the player is given a gaming value (game value) according to the jackpot type as added value after the jackpot ends.

When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts displaying the special symbol, and after a predetermined time (e.g., 7 to 90 seconds) has elapsed, the special symbol showing the result of the drawing is displayed stationary. If a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the first symbol display device 37 is displaying the variable display, the number of balls entering is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display by the first symbol display device 37 ends, if there are still reserved balls remaining for the first ball entrance 64, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. The specific winning hole 65a, which opens and closes when the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the special game state, is provided immediately below the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits the ball in an attempt to make it enter the specific winning hole 65a, so many balls also enter the first ball entry hole 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first ball entry hole 64 will be at its maximum (4 times).

Meanwhile, in the lottery for the normal symbol that is conducted when a ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, a determination is made as to whether or not the normal symbol is a winning symbol. When a normal symbol is a winning symbol, the electric device 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), making it easier for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. In other words, when a normal symbol is a winning symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, and as a result, it becomes easier to draw the special symbol.

When the normal pattern (second pattern) is drawn, the second pattern display device 83 starts displaying the normal pattern in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time (e.g., 3 or 30 seconds) has elapsed, the normal pattern indicating the result of the lottery is displayed stationary. If a ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 while the variable display is being displayed on the second pattern display device 83, the number of passes is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and is also shown by the second pattern reserved lamp 84. When the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, if there are still reserved balls remaining for the normal ball entrance 67, the next normal pattern is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery starts.

As mentioned above, there are two types of special jackpot patterns: "jackpot A" and "jackpot B."

In both cases of "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B", the game enters a special game state with 16 rounds (16R jackpot). In addition, when the jackpot type is "Jackpot A", the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a high probability state of special symbols (special symbol probability change) as an added value after the jackpot ends. This high probability state of special symbols continues until the next jackpot of a special symbol occurs. On the other hand, after the end of "Jackpot B", the winning probability of normal symbols increases as an added value until 100 special symbol lotteries have been completed.

Here, "high probability state of special symbols" refers to a state in which the probability of winning with special symbols is increased, that is, a so-called probability state of special symbols (during special symbol probability change), in other words, a game state in which it is easy to transition to a special game state (16R jackpot). In contrast, when there is no "high probability state of special symbols", it is called a "low probability state of special symbols", which indicates a state in which the probability of winning is lower than in the probability change state of special symbols, that is, the probability of winning with special symbols is normal (normal state of special symbols). In addition, "time-saving state of normal symbols" (during time-saving state of normal symbols) refers to a game state in which the probability of winning with normal symbols is increased and it is easy for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. In contrast, when there is no "time-saving state of normal symbols", it is called a "normal state of normal symbols", which indicates a state in which the probability of winning with normal symbols is normal (a state in which the probability of winning is lower than during time-saving).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the special symbol jackpot is the same regardless of the type of jackpot, and the "high probability state of special symbols" or the "time-saving state of normal symbols" after the end of the jackpot is changed depending on the type of jackpot. In contrast, the number of rounds may be changed depending on the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for some types of jackpots. In addition, for example, the period during which the "time-saving state of normal symbols" is entered may be changed depending on the type of jackpot. In addition, as the time-saving state of normal symbols, the time for which the electric device 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened may be lengthened, or the number of times the electric device 64a is opened for one hit of a normal symbol may be increased.

In the upper right corner of the play area when viewed from the front (upper right corner of FIG. 2), a first symbol display device 37 is provided with a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LEDs") 37a as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display 37b. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to the various controls performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the game status of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a change display by indicating whether or not a lottery for a special symbol performed in conjunction with a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning) is being performed, by lighting up, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the lottery result for the special symbol as a stop symbol after the change is completed is displayed by lighting up, and the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not yet been changed among the balls that entered the first ball entrance 64, is displayed by lighting up.

If a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the first pattern display device 37 is displaying a changing special pattern (first pattern), the number of balls that enter is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and also by the third pattern display device 81. In this embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved times is not limited to four times, and may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times).

The seven-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different light color (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of these light colors makes it possible to display various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (such as a high probability state for special symbols or a time-saving state for normal symbols) with a small number of LEDs. The LEDs 37a not only show whether the special symbol lottery result as the symbol to stop after the fluctuation has ended is a jackpot or not, but also show a special symbol (first symbol) according to the type of jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) if it is a jackpot.

The play area is also provided with a number of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. A variable display device unit 80 is also provided in the center of the play area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 made up of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 made up of LEDs. A center frame 86 is provided in this variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third pattern display device 81 displays decoratively in accordance with the display of the first pattern display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), this triggers the first pattern display device 37 to display a varying special pattern (first pattern). Furthermore, the third pattern display device 81 displays a varying third pattern corresponding to the varying special pattern in synchronization with the varying special pattern.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three pattern rows, left, center, and right, are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of multiple patterns, and these patterns are scrolled vertically for each pattern row, so that the third pattern is variably displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. In this embodiment, the game status is displayed in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 by the first pattern display device 37, while the third pattern display device 81 displays decoratively according to the display of the first pattern display device 37. Note that the third pattern display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of a display device.

Now, referring to FIG. 4, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. The third symbols (first special symbol or second special symbol) are each composed of 10 types of special symbols that resemble the numbers "0" to "9". Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the result of the lottery by the main control device 110 described below is a jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols line up (for example, "777"), and the jackpot occurs after the variable display has ended.

Specifically, the main display area Dm displays three pattern columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, center, and right. The above-mentioned third patterns are displayed in a specified order in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3. That is, the main patterns are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3, and the display changes by scrolling from top to bottom periodically for each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3.

In addition, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed stopped on the pay line L1. If the third symbol is stopped on the pay line in a jackpot symbol combination (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot animation is displayed as a jackpot.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols made up of odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "probability variable symbols." When a 16R probability variable jackpot "jackpot A" occurs, there is a possibility that the same combination of probability variable symbols will be displayed. Also, the main symbols made up of even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "normal symbols." When a 16R normal jackpot "jackpot B" occurs, the same combination of normal symbols will always be displayed. Also, in some cases of "jackpot A," the same combination of normal symbols will be displayed. This allows players to expect that they will get jackpot A, even when normal symbols are displayed.

The manner in which the patterns are displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the variable display of the patterns in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above, and for example, a pattern combining an image such as a figure or character with a number may be configured as the third pattern.

A small display area Dm4 is formed in the upper right corner of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm4 is configured to be able to simply display the variable display of the third symbol. Here, a case where a variable display is executed in the small display area Dm4 is, for example, a case where a display effect such as a performance in which a specific character performs an action or a performance that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 is executed in the main display area Dm. During the execution of the display effect, a more easily understandable effect can be provided by displaying the effect in the larger main display area Dm. Also, by simply displaying the variable display of the third symbol in the small display area Dm4 during the execution of the display effect, the player can easily understand that the variable display of the third symbol is continuing.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. In this sub-display area Ds, a reserved pattern consisting of a black circle is displayed as shown in FIG. 4(b). As described above, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the first pattern display device 37 is performing a variable display, the number of balls entering is reserved up to a maximum of four. The reserved patterns displayed in the sub-display area Ds are the same number as the number of reserved balls entering. In this embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls is set to four, so a maximum of four reserved patterns are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In this embodiment, the number of reserved symbols is variable in accordance with the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of reserved balls may be displayed as a number.

Next, referring to Figures 5 to 7, the continuous transformation effect, which is one type of display effect in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, will be described. The continuous transformation effect is a display effect that may be executed when a reach state occurs during the variable display of the third pattern. Here, the reach state refers to a state in which the left pattern column Z1 and the right pattern column Z3 are displayed as main patterns consisting of the same numbers, and only the center pattern column Z2 is being displayed in a variable manner. When the reach state occurs, the center pattern column Z2 is displayed as a stopped pattern, which makes the player aware that there is a possibility of three identical patterns being lined up, thereby increasing the player's anticipation of a big win.

The continuous transformation effect is an effect that is executed after a reach state has occurred in order to further increase the player's sense of anticipation for a big win, and will be described in detail later, but it is an effect in which a boy character 811 (see FIG. 5(a)) displayed in the main display area Dm transforms (changes its form) 0 to n times (n is a natural number equal to or greater than 1) as time passes or depending on the player's operation (pressing) of the frame button 22. In this continuous transformation effect, the more times the character 811 transforms, the higher the expectation of a big win becomes, and it is an effect in which the character 811 can potentially transform up to five times.

The maximum number of transformations in one continuous transformation performance (the type of the continuous transformation performance) is determined in advance before the continuous transformation performance starts. More specifically, the number is determined to be one of 1 to 5 by lottery using the transformation performance selection table 222b (see FIG. 15(a)) described later. This continuous transformation performance ends when the predetermined upper limit number of transformations is successful or the performance time set for each type of the continuous transformation performance is reached before the upper limit number is reached. In the first embodiment, the maximum number of transformations in the continuous transformation performance is determined by lottery using the transformation performance selection table 222b. In other words, the maximum number of transformations is determined according to the type of the continuous transformation performance, but this is not limited to this, and it is sufficient if the maximum number of transformations can be determined before the continuous transformation performance starts. Specifically, for example, the upper limit number of transformations in the continuous transformation performance may be set according to the number of changes after the previous big win has ended. If the number of variations is increased, the upper limit number of times increases, so that the player can feel that there is an advantage to continually losing the lottery for the special symbol, and even if the player keeps losing the lottery for the special symbol many times in a row (so-called "getting addicted"), the player's motivation to play can be prevented from decreasing. Also, if the number of variations is decreased, the upper limit number of times increases, so that if the player wins a jackpot in a short interval (so-called consecutive win state), the player can feel that there is an advantage other than winning the prize ball, and the player can enjoy it more. Furthermore, if the upper limit number of times increases within a specific range (for example, a range of 100 to 200 variations), the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 within the specific range can be improved.

5(a) is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when a transformation development mode is displayed, which indicates that this continuous transformation performance will start (develop into a continuous transformation performance). As shown in FIG. 5(a), when the transformation development mode is displayed, a boy character 811 is displayed in the lower center of the main display area Dm, and a display area HR1 having a horizontally elongated rectangular shape is displayed above the character 811. In this display area HR1, the words "Continuous transformation chance" and "The more transformations, the higher the expectation!" are displayed. Note that "Continuous transformation chance" is the name of the performance indicating the continuous transformation performance. These words displayed in the display area HR1 make it easy for the player to understand that the continuous transformation chance (continuous transformation performance) is starting. This transformation development mode continues to be displayed for one second, and when one second has elapsed, the continuous transformation performance starts.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), when the transformation development mode is displayed, a small display area Dm4 is formed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm to display a simple variation display of the third pattern. This allows the player to easily understand that the variation display is continuing. This simple display of the third pattern continues for the duration of the continuous transformation performance and the subsequent development performance.

In the continuous transformation performance set after the display time of the transformation development mode has elapsed, a performance is displayed that encourages the pressing of the frame button 22 (see FIG. 1). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5(b), a display area HR2 having a horizontally elongated, substantially rectangular shape is displayed to the left of the character 811 in the main display area Dm, and an image (PUSH button PB) that imitates the frame button 22 is displayed inside the display area HR2. In addition, below the PUSH button PB inside the display area HR2, a scroll bar SB with diagonal lines is displayed, the length of which shortens as time passes. This scroll bar SB indicates the remaining time of the operation effective period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effective. In this embodiment, the operation effective period is set to 5 seconds, so the length of the scroll bar SB becomes 0 over 5 seconds after the operation effective period starts. By displaying this scroll bar SB, the player can easily recognize the remaining time of the operation effective period.

In this embodiment, the remaining time until the operation valid period ends is displayed (suggested) by the length of the scroll bar SB, but this is not limited to this. For example, the remaining seconds may be displayed as numbers and counted down as time passes, so that the remaining operation valid period can be recognized by the player. In addition, the color of the PUSH button PB, which imitates the frame button 22, may be changed according to the remaining operation valid period, so that the remaining time can be suggested to the player. Specifically, for example, when the remaining time is 4 seconds or more, the color of the PUSH button PB may be displayed in blue, when the remaining time is 3 seconds or more but less than 4 seconds, the color of the PUSH button PB may be displayed in green, when the remaining time is 2 seconds or more but less than 3 seconds, the color of the PUSH button PB may be displayed in yellow, when the remaining time is 1 second or more but less than 2 seconds, the color of the PUSH button PB may be displayed in orange, and when the remaining time is less than 1 second, the color of the PUSH button PB may be displayed in red. Furthermore, it is not necessary to indicate to the player the time remaining until the end of the valid operation period. By omitting the indication of the remaining time of the valid operation period, the display control can be simplified, and the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition to the display area HR2, a speech bubble-type display area HR3 with the words "PUSH to transform!" is displayed on the right side of the character 811 when viewed from the front. The display contents of the display area HR2 and the display area HR3 can make the player aware that pressing the frame button 22 may cause the character 811 to transform (the appearance of the character 811 to change).

In addition, a display area HR4 having a horizontally elongated, approximately rectangular shape is formed on the lower right side of the display area HR3 to indicate the total number of times the character 811 has transformed in this continuous transformation performance. In this display area HR4, for example, as shown in FIG. 5(b), the characters "Transformation x 0" are displayed. These characters are updated according to the number of successful transformations. Specifically, when the character 811 successfully transforms once, the characters are updated to "Transformation x 1", and when the character successfully transforms twice, the characters are updated to "Transformation x 2". Similarly, when the number of transformations reaches three, the characters are updated to "Transformation x 3", when the number of transformations reaches four, the characters are updated to "Transformation x 4", and when the number of transformations reaches five, the characters are updated to "Transformation x 5". By checking the characters displayed in this display area HR4, the player can easily understand the number of transformations in this continuous transformation performance.

6(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the player presses the frame button 22 within the set operation valid period and the character 811 succeeds in transforming. As shown in FIG. 6(a), when the frame button 22 is pressed within the operation valid period, the display area HR2 is changed to a mode that looks like the PUSH button PB is pressed, and the operation valid period ends. The mode of the character 811 is also changed to a mode that imitates, for example, an adventurer holding a sword and shield. In addition, in the display area HR4, the characters indicating the number of transformations are updated by adding 1. FIG. 6(a) shows an example of a case where it is updated to "Transformation x 1". This mode (success notification mode) that notifies the player that the transformation has been successful continues for one second, and after the success notification mode ends, the operation valid period is set again. Then, from then on, the operation valid period and the success notification mode are repeated until the number of transformations reaches the upper limit or the performance period has elapsed.

On the other hand, FIG. 6(b) shows a case where the player does not press the frame button 22 within the set valid period and the transformation is successful. As shown in FIG. 6(b), even if the frame button 22 is not pressed, if it is determined that the maximum number of transformations has not been reached and the performance time remains for a predetermined period or more (the remaining change time is greater than or equal to a predetermined lower limit time), a success notification mode is executed in response to the expiration of the effective operation period. The details will be described later, but the predetermined lower limit time is specified in the transformation performance selection table 222b in association with the type of successive transformation performance (maximum number of transformations).

When the frame button 22 is pressed during the valid operation period, or when the frame button 22 is not pressed until the valid operation period has elapsed, if the maximum number of transformations has not been reached and the remaining change time is equal to or greater than a predetermined lower limit time, the success notification mode is executed. However, in this embodiment, the presentation period is set so that if all transformations are executed triggered by the elapse of the valid operation period, the presentation period will be long enough to elapse before the maximum number of transformations (success notification mode) is executed. In other words, the valid operation period is set so that the sum of the maximum number of valid operation periods (and the presentation periods of the maximum number of success notification modes) is longer than the presentation period of the continuous transformation presentation.

By configuring in this way, in each operation effective period set in one continuous transformation performance, if the frame button 22 is pressed and the character 811 is not transformed before the operation effective period elapses, it is impossible to execute the maximum number of transformations set for each performance type. In addition, the shorter the period from the start of the operation effective period to the pressing of the frame button 22, the earlier the start timing of the operation effective period set thereafter can be made, so that the number of transformations that can be executed can be increased within the range of the upper limit value. Therefore, for a player who wants to perform the maximum number of transformations (want to perform as many transformations as possible), the frame button 22 can be actively pressed during each operation effective period. Therefore, the player's motivation to participate in the continuous transformation performance can be improved. In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation performance (does not press the frame button 22) plays this pachinko machine 10, the performance period of the continuous transformation performance will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations, even in the case of a continuous transformation performance that is originally highly anticipated (has a large upper limit number of transformations). This can result in a small number of transformations, and can cause cases where the continuous transformation performance ends with a small number of transformations due to the passage of the performance period, even though the continuous transformation performance has a large upper limit (i.e., a high expectation of a jackpot). This can increase the expectation of a jackpot even when the continuous transformation performance ends with a small number of transformations.

Figure 7(a) is a diagram showing an example of a case where the character transforms into a form other than an adventurer in the success notification mode. The example in Figure 7(a) shows a case where the character 811 transforms into a form resembling a gunman when the character has transformed three times. In this first embodiment, multiple forms are prepared according to the number of transformations, such as the form resembling this gunman and the form resembling the adventurer described above.

In the first embodiment, the mode of a successful transformation is fixed according to the number of transformations, but this is not limited to this. For example, the mode of the character 811 may be determined by lottery or the like each time a success notification mode is performed. This allows the variation of the continuous transformation performance to be diversified, thereby increasing the player's interest in the continuous transformation performance. In addition, when the mode of the success notification mode is determined by lottery or the like, a configuration may be provided in which a mode can be determined only in the case of a variable display that results in a special pattern being a jackpot, a mode that is likely to be determined in the case of a variable display that results in a special pattern being a jackpot, or a mode that is likely to be determined in the case of a variable display that results in a miss for the special pattern. By configuring in this way, the player can play during the continuous transformation performance by paying attention not only to the number of transformations but also to the display mode of the character 811 when the transformation is successful.

Figure 7(b) is a diagram showing the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 when a mode (failure notification mode) is displayed to notify that a transformation has failed during a successive transformation performance. As shown in Figure 7(b), when a transformation has failed, the PUSH button PB in the display area HR2 is displayed as being split in half, and the character 811 is displayed with a disappointed expression. In addition, to the upper right of the character 811, a display area HR5 is displayed with the words "Ended...". These displays allow the user to recognize that the successive transformation performance has ended (the number of transformations has been confirmed).

In the first embodiment, after the continuous transformation performance ends, the game transitions to a development performance to notify the player of whether or not a jackpot has been won. There are multiple types of development performance, and one type of development performance is selected and executed depending on the remaining variable time and the result of the current special symbol lottery. Details of this development performance will be described with reference to Figures 8(a) and (b).

First, FIG. 8(a) is a diagram showing the display mode of a transition effect indicating a transition from a continuous transformation effect to an advanced effect. As shown in FIG. 8(a), when a transition effect is executed, an image of a character 811 and a monster 812 glaring at each other is displayed in the main display area Dm, and a display area HR6 with the letters "VS" is displayed between the character 811 and the monster 812. Additionally, the letters "Defeat the enemy!!" are displayed in the display area HR1. These display contents allow the player to easily recognize that a jackpot will be achieved if the character 811 defeats the enemy (i.e., the monster 812).

Also, as shown in FIG. 8(a), when the transition performance is executed, a display area HR7 is displayed below the monster 812. In this display area, one or more star marks are displayed to indicate the expectation of the development performance to be executed after the end of the transition performance. FIG. 8(a) illustrates a case where two star marks are displayed. The number of these star marks is the same as the number of transformations in the continuous transformation performance. Although not shown in the figure, the appearance of the monster 812 is changed in conjunction with the number of star marks (i.e., in conjunction with the number of transformations in the continuous transformation performance). That is, the more star marks there are, the weaker the monster 812 looks (i.e., the more likely the character 811 looks to win), and the fewer the star marks there are, the stronger the monster 812 looks (i.e., the more likely the character 811 looks to win). By configuring in this way, the player can have the impression that the result of the continuous transformation performance (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) and the subsequent development performance are linked. This allows players to more easily understand that the number of transformations in the continuous transformation performance (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) indicates the likelihood of hitting the jackpot.

In addition, the length of the display period of this transition performance and the above-mentioned failure notification mode (see FIG. 7(b)) is variable depending on the remaining change time at the time when the failure notification mode is executed. This is because the performance period of each development performance is fixed (either 30 seconds, 33 seconds, 36 seconds, 39 seconds, 42 seconds, or 45 seconds), while the period required from the start of the continuous transformation performance to the end of the final operation effective period is variable depending on the timing when the player presses the frame button 22. Therefore, in this embodiment, the remaining change time is determined at the timing when the operation effective period ends (i.e., the start timing of the failure notification mode), and the development performance with the longest performance period that can be executed in the remaining change time is selected. Then, the failure notification mode and the transition performance are executed using the difference between the remaining change time and the performance period of the selected development performance. This makes it possible to reduce the variation in the performance time of the development performance, and therefore the capacity of various data for displaying the development performance can be reduced. In addition, by dynamically varying the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition performance according to the remaining change time, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a discrepancy between the remaining change time at the start of the development performance and the performance time of the development performance. In other words, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the change of the third pattern does not stop even though the development performance has ended due to the remaining change time being longer, or conversely, the development performance does not end at the time when the change of the third pattern has ended due to the performance period of the development performance being longer. Therefore, since the end timing of the development performance and the end timing of the change display of the third pattern can be matched, a display performance without a sense of incongruity can be provided. Note that, no matter how many seconds the performance time of the transition performance is set to, a large change in the mode is not caused with respect to the mode shown in FIG. 8(a) during the period in which the transition performance is set so that the switch to the development performance does not become unnatural. That is, the image shown in FIG. 8(a) is displayed as a still image, or the characters 811 and 812 are configured to only change their appearance by periodically raising and lowering their shoulders in accordance with their breathing, etc. (without performing any special action). This allows the display appearance to be the same when switching to a development performance, regardless of the execution period of the transition performance, and therefore prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the appearance when switching from the transition performance to the development performance.

Next, referring to FIG. 8(b), the change in the presentation mode of the development presentation over time will be described. In this first embodiment, 12 types of development presentations are provided: winning development presentations A-F and losing development presentations A-F. Both winning and losing development presentations A are display presentations with a presentation period of 30 seconds, and both winning and losing development presentations B are display presentations with a presentation period of 33 seconds. Similarly, winning and losing development presentations C-F are configured as display presentations with presentation periods of 36 seconds, 39 seconds, 42 seconds, and 45 seconds, respectively. At the end of the final effective operation period in the continuous transformation presentation, the development presentation with the longest presentation period that does not exceed the remaining change time is selected.

As shown in FIG. 8(b), in this first embodiment, data on the display performance (base performance) that is the basis for executing the development performance is prepared. This base display performance (base performance) has a display period of 45 seconds, and is configured to be able to execute the development performance of the corresponding performance period by executing the performance from the beginning or midway of this base display performance (base performance). In other words, separate development performances are not prepared for each performance period, but rather data on the development performance of each display period is generated using data on a single base performance. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the data for executing the development performance, thereby reducing the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 8B, the first three seconds of the base performance are displayed in a zoomed-in display mode of the character 811. Then, in the next three seconds, a performance in which the character 811 attacks the monster 812 is executed. Next, a display mode in which the enemy monster 812 is zoomed-in is displayed for three seconds, and then a display mode in which the monster 812 attacks the character 811 is displayed for three seconds. After that, a display mode in which the faces of the character 811 and the monster 812 are zoomed-in is displayed for three seconds, and then a performance in which the character 811 and the monster 812 are engaged in a fierce offensive and defensive battle, and a performance in which the outcome of the battle is announced, are displayed for 30 seconds. In this way, the base performance is roughly divided into five three-second display modes and one 30-second display mode. By starting the display performance from the dividing position of one of these display modes, the advanced performance can be displayed without any awkwardness.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8(b), when a winning or losing development performance A is executed, the display mode for 30 seconds from 15 seconds in the base performance is displayed, thereby executing a development performance with a performance period of 30 seconds. Similarly, when a winning or losing development performance B is executed, the display mode for 33 seconds from 12 seconds in the base performance is displayed, and when a winning or losing development performance C is executed, the display mode for 36 seconds from 9 seconds in the base performance is displayed. Also, when a winning or losing development performance D is executed, the display mode for 39 seconds from 6 seconds in the base performance is displayed, and when a winning or losing development performance E is executed, the display mode for 42 seconds from 3 seconds in the base performance is displayed. On the other hand, when a winning or losing development performance F is executed, the base performance is displayed from start to finish, thereby executing a development performance of 45 seconds.

In addition to the base effect, which is the battle with the monster 812 described above, several other display effects are prepared. Which display effect is used as the basis for the development effect is determined by lottery. In addition, each base display effect is prepared in a form for a big win and a form for a loss.

In addition, in this first embodiment, the base performance is configured to be reusable even after the execution of the continuous transformation performance. In other words, after a reach state occurs, the base performance is executed directly or via another advance notice performance, without going through the continuous transformation performance, so that it is possible to notify whether or not a jackpot will be reached. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the base performance, and therefore reduce the data required to execute the performance. Also, even when the base performance is executed without going through the continuous transformation performance, the performance is configured to be able to be executed from the beginning or midway through the base performance in accordance with the change time of the variable display to be executed. This makes it possible to execute a performance using the base performance even for variable displays with different change times.

In this way, in the first embodiment, a base performance for displaying the development performance is prepared, and good division points for the performance are set in the base performance for the number of development performances. Each division point is set so that the remaining performance time matches the performance time of each development performance. This makes it possible to provide a natural-looking display performance that spans the performance time of each development performance. Furthermore, by configuring multiple development performances with different performance times to be executable from a single original performance mode, it is possible to reduce the data required to display each development performance compared to the case where separate performance data is prepared for each type of development performance (performance time). This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10.

In the first embodiment, multiple advanced effects with different presentation times can be executed based on the base effect, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to execute a display effect with a completely different display format depending on the presentation time of the advanced effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the advanced effects, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to Figures 9(a) and (b), we will specifically explain the change over time in the display mode when a continuous transformation effect is set as the display effect. In Figures 9(a) and (b), we will explain using as an example a case where a continuous transformation effect with a maximum number of transformations set to three is set. First, Figure 9(a) is a diagram showing the change over time in the effect mode when the player does not press the frame button 22 even once during the execution of the continuous transformation effect.

As shown in Figure 9(a), the continuous transformation effect is set during the execution period of a 60-second transformation effect (super reach). In the transformation display in which this continuous transformation effect is set, the third symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm for 10 seconds from the start of the transformation (see Figure 4(b)). Then, when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the transformation, a reach state occurs and a transformation development mode (see Figure 5(a)) is displayed for one second, suggesting to the player that the transformation will develop into a continuous transformation effect.

When the display period of the transformation development performance has elapsed, the operation valid period corresponding to the first transformation is set. If the player does not press the frame button 22, this operation valid period continues for 5 seconds (until 16 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change). Then, the first success notification mode is displayed when the operation valid period has elapsed. This success notification mode continues for 1 second, and when 1 second has elapsed (17 seconds from the start of the change), the success notification mode ends and the operation valid period corresponding to the second transformation is set. This second operation valid period also continues for 5 seconds (from 17 seconds to 22 seconds after the start of the change) unless the frame button 22 is pressed. Then, after the success notification mode for 1 second has been set, the third operation valid period is set. This third operation valid period also continues for 5 seconds (from 23 seconds to 28 seconds after the start of the change) unless the frame button 22 is operated. Then, 28 seconds after the start of the transformation (32 seconds of remaining transformation time) when the operation valid period ends, it is determined that the remaining transformation time is short (less than 38 seconds, which is set as the lower limit), and a failure notification mode is set for 1 second, even though the upper limit number of transformations has not been reached. In other words, even though the upper limit number of transformations was set to 3, the continuous transformation performance ends when the number of transformations is 2.

The conditions for determining whether or not sufficient presentation time remains to set the success notification mode are stipulated by the transformation presentation selection table 222b (see FIG. 15(a)), which will be described later. Specifically, a lower limit (threshold) of the remaining transformation time for which the success notification mode can be set is stipulated according to the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (i.e., according to the type of presentation of the consecutive transformation presentation). If the effective operation period ends with the remaining transformation time above the lower limit, the success notification mode is set, provided that the upper limit number of transformations has not been reached. On the other hand, if the effective operation period ends after the remaining transformation time falls below the lower limit, the failure notification mode is set, regardless of whether the upper limit number of transformations has been reached.

Next, referring to FIG. 9(b), we will explain how the presentation changes over time when the maximum number of transformations is set to three and the player actively presses the frame button 22 during the valid operation period.

As shown in FIG. 9(b), if a player presses the frame button 22 at 1 second (12 seconds after the start of the change) during the effective operation period corresponding to the first transformation, the effective operation period is terminated and the first success notification mode is displayed. When the display period of the success notification mode of 1 second has elapsed, the effective operation period corresponding to the second transformation is set (13 seconds after the start of the change). If a press on the frame button 22 is detected again at 1 second (14 seconds after the start of the change) during this second effective operation period, the effective operation period is terminated in the same manner and the second success notification mode is displayed. Then, when the display period of the success notification mode of 1 second has elapsed (15 seconds after the start of the change), the third effective operation period is set. If a press on the frame button 22 is detected at 2 seconds (17 seconds after the start of the change) after the start of this third effective operation period, there is still plenty of time left (43 seconds) for the change, so the third success notification mode is displayed. After that, the fourth valid operation period is set when the display period of the third success notification mode has elapsed. If a press on the frame button 22 is detected again after two seconds have elapsed during this fourth valid operation period (20 seconds after the start of the change), the failure notification mode is set because the maximum number of transformations for this consecutive transformation performance has already been performed.

The display period of the failure notification mode (and the transition performance after the failure notification mode) is determined based on the difference between the remaining change time of 40 seconds and the performance time of the development performance executed after the transition performance. As described above, the type of development performance is selected as the type of performance time with the longest performance time within the range that does not exceed the remaining change time. If the remaining change time is 40 seconds, taking into account the shortest display period of 2 seconds for the failure notification mode and the transition performance, a maximum of 38 seconds can be used for the development performance. However, as described above, only six performance times for the development performance are prepared: 30 seconds, 33 seconds, 36 seconds, 39 seconds, 42 seconds, and 45 seconds. Therefore, a development performance (development performance C) of 36 seconds, which has a performance period shorter than 38 seconds, is set as the current development performance. Then, the difference of 4 seconds between the remaining change time of 40 seconds and the performance period of the development performance C of 36 seconds is set as the display period of the failure notification mode and the transition performance. Specifically, four seconds is divided equally, and two seconds is set as the display period for the failure notification mode and the display period for the transition effect.

In this way, by absorbing the difference between the remaining change time and the performance time of the development performance by the display period of the failure notification mode and the performance period of the transition performance, the timing of the change stop and the timing of the end of the development performance can be reliably matched even if the variation in the performance time of the development performance is small. This reduces the variation in the performance time of the development performance, so the capacity of various data for displaying the development performance can be reduced. In addition, by dynamically varying the display period of the failure notification mode and the transition performance according to the remaining change time, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a discrepancy between the remaining change time at the start of the development performance and the performance time of the development performance. In other words, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the change of the third pattern does not stop even though the development performance has ended because the remaining change time is longer, or conversely, the development performance does not end at the time when the change of the third pattern has ended because the performance period of the development performance is longer. Therefore, it is possible to match the end timing of the development performance and the end timing of the change display of the third pattern, so that a display performance without discomfort can be provided.

As shown in Figure 9 (b), when the remaining fluctuation time is 40 seconds and the timing for starting the failure notification mode arrives, the display time for the failure notification mode and the transition effect is set to 2 seconds each. Then, after the transition effect ends, development effect C, which has a performance time of 36 seconds, is executed. This makes it possible to exactly match the timing at which the fluctuation of the third pattern stops (the timing when 60 seconds have passed since the fluctuation started) with the timing at which the development effect ends.

In this way, by the player actively pressing the frame button 22 during the operation valid period, the operation valid period can be shortened and more success notification modes can be displayed. In other words, in the continuous transformation performance, it becomes easier to perform transformations up to the set upper limit number of transformations, so the expectation level of the performance can be more accurately predicted from the number of transformations. Therefore, since the player can be made to actively press the frame button 22, it is possible to improve the desire to participate in the continuous transformation performance. In addition, if a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation performance (does not press the frame button 22) plays this pachinko machine 10, even in the case of a continuous transformation performance that is originally highly expected (has a high upper limit number of transformations), the performance period of the continuous transformation performance will pass with a relatively small number of transformations. As a result, it is possible to generate a case where the number of transformations is small, and even if the continuous transformation performance has a high upper limit number of transformations (i.e., a high expectation level of a jackpot), the performance period will end with a small number of transformations due to the passage of the performance period. As a result, even if the continuous transformation performance ends with a small number of transformations, the expectation of a jackpot can be increased.

In this embodiment, the display time of the failure notification mode and the display time of the transition performance are varied to absorb the gap between the remaining variable time and the performance time of the development performance, but this is not limited to this. For example, the performance period of the failure notification mode may be fixed and only the display time of the transition performance may be varied, or conversely, only the performance period of the failure notification mode may be varied. Also, the display periods of the failure notification mode and the transition performance may be fixed and only part of the performance period of the development performance (for example, the period during which the third pattern is displayed as confirmed) may be varied.

Returning to FIG. 2, we will continue the explanation. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery for the normal symbol, which is performed when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, is being executed by changing the lighting state, and indicates the normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result for the normal symbol as the stopping symbol after the variable has ended by changing the lighting state.

More specifically, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol, "○" and "×", are alternately lit each time a ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67. When the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the electric device 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64 is activated (opened) for a predetermined time, making it easier for balls to enter the first ball entrance 64. The number of times that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above and is also displayed by the second symbol reservation lamp 84. Four second symbol reservation lamps 84 are provided, the number of maximum reserved, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The normal pattern (second pattern) change display may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device 83 as in this embodiment, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp 84 may be lit by a part of the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls passing through the normal ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times, as in the first ball entrance 64, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37, the second pattern reserve lamp 84 may not be lit.

A first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the first ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a special pattern is performed by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37. The first ball entrance 64 also serves as one of the winning entrances from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters it.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in the approximate center of the device. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on to show the jackpot stop symbol, and the third symbol stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in normal times. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have been entered).

This specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 comprises a horizontally long rectangular opening plate that covers the specific winning hole 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the opening and closing of the opening plate forward around the lower edge of the opening plate. The specific winning hole 65a is normally in a closed state in which balls cannot or do not easily win. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening plate downward toward the front, temporarily creating an open state in which it is easy for balls to win the specific winning hole 65a, and the device operates to alternate between this open state and the normal closed state.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to a big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening 65a is open, a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, triggering the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a to be opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, forming a game state that is a special game state.

The left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13 are provided with attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is further provided with an outlet 66. Any balls that do not enter any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a are guided through the outlet 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 is provided with numerous nails to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various components (gimmicks) such as windmills are also provided.

As shown in FIG. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115) and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 10). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 10. Fig. 10 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. Note that in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to Figures 11 and 12. As shown in Figure 11(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 stores at least a first win random number table 202a, a first win type selection table 202b, a second win random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as part of the fixed value data described above.

The first win random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first win random number counter C1, which will be described later. Details will be described later together with the explanation of the first win random number counter C1, but if the value of the first win random number counter C1 obtained based on the start winning matches any of the determination values specified in the first win random number table 202a, it is determined to be a jackpot with a special symbol.

The first winning type selection table 202b (FIG. 11(b)) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining the jackpot type is stored, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is specified in correspondence with each jackpot type. Specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 49" is specified in correspondence with jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 11(b)). Also, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99" is specified in correspondence with jackpot B (see 202b2 in FIG. 11(b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot with a special symbol is determined, the value of the first winning type counter C2 obtained based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b, and the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 is selected.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 11(c)) is a data table in which winning judgment values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of normal symbols, "5 to 28" are stipulated as the judgment value for a winning normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 11(c)). Also, in the high probability state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" are stipulated as the judgment value for a winning normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 11(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal ball entrance 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referenced to determine whether or not a winning normal symbol has occurred.

The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12) is a data table in which the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is specified for each display mode. Details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with an explanation of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing special symbols, drawing normal symbols, setting the display on the first symbol display device 37, setting the display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting the display on the third symbol display device 81. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, referring to FIG. 13, the counters provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to draw special symbols, draw normal symbols, set the display on the first symbol display device 37, set the display on the second symbol display device 83, and set the display on the third symbol display device 81.

The first winning random number counter C1 used for the drawing of special symbols and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 uses the first winning random number counter C1 used for drawing the special symbols, the first winning type counter C2 used for selecting the big winning type of the special symbols, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type of the losing special symbols, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the change type counter CS1 used for selecting the change pattern. In addition, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for drawing the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 30), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4), and each of these areas stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. The RAM 203 is also provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4), and each of these areas stores the value of the second winning random number counter C4 in accordance with the timing of the ball passing through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side.

Each counter will be explained in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 399) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 399 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 399). In particular, when the first hit random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 30).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, and is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. The value of the random number that results in a jackpot for the special symbol is set by the first winning random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number table, it is determined that the special symbol has won. In addition, this first winning random number table 202a is divided into two types: one for a low probability of the special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and one for a high probability of the special symbol having a higher probability of winning than the low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot included in each type is set to be different. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot changes when the probability of a special pattern is low and when the probability of a special pattern is high.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be explained. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) that is judged as a win in each game state in the lottery of the special symbol is set. Specifically, in the case of the special symbol probability state, in the lottery of the special symbol, it is judged whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "0 to 9", and if it is "0 to 9", it is judged as a jackpot. Since there are 400 possible values of the first winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 399", and the judgment value for a jackpot is 10 from "0 to 9", the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol during the probability state of the special symbol is 1/40 (10/400). Also, in the case of the low probability state of the special symbol, it is judged whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "200", and if it is "200", it is judged as a jackpot. The first winning random number counter C1 can have 400 possible values between 0 and 399, and only one value, 200, determines a jackpot, so the probability of a jackpot with a special symbol in a low probability state is 1/400.

In this embodiment, the random number value for the jackpot stored in the first random number table for low probability and the random number value for the jackpot stored in the first random number table for high probability are set so that they do not overlap. If there is a value that is always used as the random number value for the jackpot regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, this random number value may be input from outside, making it easier to win a jackpot illegally. In contrast, as in this embodiment, the random number value for the jackpot is changed depending on the state (i.e., depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state for the special pattern or a low probability state for the special pattern), making it difficult to predict the random number value for the jackpot for the special pattern, and thus preventing fraud.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 when a special pattern jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and is stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that results in a jackpot for the special pattern, in other words, if it is a random number that results in a miss for the special pattern, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that of a miss for the special pattern.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number that results in a special pattern jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that of a special pattern jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot will be the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter with a range of 0 to 99. As described above with reference to FIG. 11(b), when the random number value in this first winning type counter C2 is "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "jackpot A" (see 202b1 in FIG. 11(b)). When the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B" (see 202b2 in FIG. 11(c)). In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that two types of winning types (jackpot A, jackpot B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first winning type counter C2.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a miss occurs, and selects one of three stop (performance) patterns: a "reach before and after miss" (for example, 98, 99) in which the final stop symbol stops just one before or after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, a "reach other than before and after miss" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops other than before or after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and a "complete miss" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64.

The random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. In this embodiment, the table is divided into one for when the special symbol has a high probability and one for when the special symbol has a low probability, and the range of random numbers set for each losing stop type is changed depending on the table. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state for a special symbol or a low probability state for a special symbol.

For example, in a high probability state, since a jackpot is likely to occur, a table for high probability with a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete miss" is selected so that reach effects are not selected more than necessary, making it easier to select "complete miss". In this table, the "reach for front or rear miss" is narrowed to 98,99, and the "reach other than front or rear miss" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "front or rear miss" or "reach other than front or rear miss". Also, in a low probability state, a table for low probability with a narrow range of random numbers from 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type of "complete miss" is selected to ensure time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, making it difficult to select "complete miss".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front or rear miss" is widened to 80 to 97, making it easier to select "reach other than front or rear miss". Therefore, in a low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with long presentation times, so that the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, making it easier for the third pattern display device 81 to continue to display the changes. Note that in the latter table as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front or rear miss" is set to 98, 99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines the rough display mode, such as the so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the pattern variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main processing (see FIG. 30) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated during the remaining time in the main processing. Note that the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12), which stores the random number value that determines one variation time of the pattern variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1, is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, as described above.

Here, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to Figs. 12(a) to (d). As shown in Fig. 12(a), this variation pattern selection table 202d has at least a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see Fig. 12(b)), a miss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see Fig. 12(c)), and a miss (high probability) variation pattern table 202d3 (see Fig. 12(d)).

First, referring to FIG. 12(b), the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 12(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is a data table that specifies the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) to be selected when the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot. The jackpot fluctuation patterns that are specified are various normal reaches (30 seconds), various super reaches (60 seconds), and special reaches (90 seconds). In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1, each fluctuation pattern is associated with each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Specifically, the range of "0 to 50" as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with the fluctuation patterns of various normal reaches (30 seconds), the range of "51 to 179" is associated with the fluctuation patterns of various super reaches (60 seconds), and the range of "180 to 198" is associated with the fluctuation patterns of various special reaches (90 seconds). When selecting a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern in which a judgment value corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set from the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

Figure 12 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. The miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table that specifies the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss in a low probability state of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss, as described above, the stop type is determined by the value of the stop type selection counter C3 from the stop type selection table (not shown) as to whether the stop type is a complete miss (non-reach) or a reach miss (common to reach) according to the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in a low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete miss is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", a miss reach (front and rear miss reach, reach other than front and rear miss) is set.

Here, if the fluctuation pattern type is a complete miss, either a short miss (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time or a long miss (10 seconds) with a relatively long fluctuation time is set. For a short miss (7 seconds), "0 to 98" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and for a long miss (10 seconds), "99 to 198" is set.

For missed reaches, the range of the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 from "0 to 149" is set to various missed normal reaches (30 seconds), the range of "150 to 197" is set to various missed super reaches (60 seconds), and "198" is set to various missed special reaches (90 seconds).

In this way, when the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss during normal game mode, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type, and selects a fluctuation pattern from the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained from the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2.

Figure 12 (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the miss (probable chance) fluctuation pattern table 202d3. This miss (probable chance) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is a data table that specifies the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) that is selected when the special symbol lottery result in a miss in the special symbol's probable chance state. In this miss (probable chance) fluctuation pattern table 202d3, the value of the set fluctuation type counter CS1 is different from that in the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 described above.

As mentioned above, when the game state is a sure-win game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), a complete miss is determined, and if it is in the range of "90 to 99", a miss reach (front or rear miss reach, reach other than front or rear miss) is determined.

In this way, when in a probability variation game state, the probability of reaching a winning jackpot in the event of a miss is set lower than in a normal game state. This prevents the time it takes for a miss to fluctuate during a probability variation game from becoming longer, and the time it takes to hit a jackpot from becoming longer. This prevents the game from becoming drawn out during a probability variation game state, when a jackpot is more likely to occur, and makes the player feel bored.

Returning to FIG. 13 for further explanation, the second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 239). When the second winning random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically, for each timer interrupt process, and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol is set by a second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 11(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol set by the second winning random number table, it is determined that the normal symbol has won. This second winning random number table is divided into two types: one for low probability of a normal symbol (period in which the normal symbol is in its normal state) and one for high probability of a normal symbol winning (period in which the normal symbol is in its time-saving state) when the probability of a normal symbol winning is higher than the low probability, and each type contains a different number of random numbers that result in a big win. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that result in a win different, the probability of a win is changed between low probability of a normal symbol and high probability of a normal symbol.

As described above with reference to Figure 11(c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random number values that will result in a winning normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28" (see 202c1 in Figure 11(c)). These random number values are stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random number values that will result in a jackpot is 24 out of a total of 240, so the probability of a jackpot with a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a normal pattern, if the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal pattern is executed for 30 seconds on the second pattern display device 83. If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a win, and after the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, a "circle" pattern is displayed as the stop pattern (second pattern), and the first ball entrance 64 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a normal pattern, if a normal pattern is hit, the first ball entrance 64 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time", but the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be set to "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, there are 200 random number values that will result in a jackpot for a normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204" (see 202c2 in Figure 11(c)). These random number values are stored in the second jackpot random number table for high probability. Thus, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that will result in a jackpot is 200 out of a total of 240, so the probability of a jackpot for a special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a normal pattern, if a ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal pattern is executed for three seconds on the second pattern display device 83. If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be a win, and after the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, a "circle" pattern is displayed as the stop pattern (second pattern), and the first ball entrance 64 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the normal pattern is in a high probability state, the variable display time is very short (from 30 seconds to 3 seconds) compared to when the normal pattern is in a low probability state, and further, the opening period of the first ball entrance 64 is very long (from 0.2 seconds x 1 time to 1 second x 2 times), so that the ball is easily allowed to enter the first ball entrance 64. In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where there is a high probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entrance 64 opens "1 second x 2 times" when a normal symbol wins, but the opening time and number of times can be set as desired. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times."

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see Figure 22) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see Figure 30).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control unit 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters and the like.

Returning to FIG. 10, the explanation will continue. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 13, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.

The RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on due to the recovery from the power outage; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 30) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 29) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 28) as the power outage processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 has at least a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, and a time-saving counter 203f.

The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4), and each of these areas stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3.

More specifically, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (initial entry), the values of the counters C1 to C3 are obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) in order of the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to older winning events is stored, and the first holding area stores data corresponding to the oldest winning event. Note that if data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a special symbol, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a decision such as the lottery for the special symbol is made based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area, the reserved area 1 becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4) to the reserved area with the area number one smaller (reserved area 1 to reserved area 3). In this embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas in the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a where winning data is stored (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4).

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start entry) and the values of the counters C1-C3 are obtained in response to the start entry, various information that would be obtained if the original lottery were held is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the counters C1-C3, in addition to the jackpot lottery for the original special symbol. In this way, predicting various information that would be obtained if the original lottery were held based on the data corresponding to the start entry (the values of the counters C1-C3) before the lottery for the original special symbol is held is hereafter referred to as pre-reading the lottery result for the special symbol. The various information includes whether it was a win or a loss, the stop type, and the variation pattern.

When the look-ahead is complete, a winning information command including the various information obtained by the look-ahead (win/lose, stop type, and fluctuation pattern) is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning/lose, stop type, and fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores them as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, like the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, the value of counter C4 is obtained when a ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 4) in order of the area with the smallest area number (1 to 4). In other words, just like the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, the order in which the winning balls were won is maintained and data corresponding to the winning balls is stored. Note that if data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a winning normal symbol, the value of counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a determination such as the lottery for a winning normal symbol is made based on the value of counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area, the reserved area 1 becomes empty, and a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the other reserved areas to the reserved area with the area number one smaller, just like in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, data shifting is only performed for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see S404 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 23).

The value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c (the number of reserved times N of the variable display of the special pattern) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball count command (see S206 in FIG. 23 and S405 in FIG. 25). The reserved ball count command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 can obtain the actual number of reserved balls of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command sent from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c is changed. As a result, even if the reserved ball number of the variable display managed by the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual reserved ball number of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the deviation can be corrected by the reserved ball number command received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and sends a reserved ball number display command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the number of reserved balls each time the number of reserved balls changes. The display control device 114 displays a reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of a ball through the normal ball entrance 67, up to a maximum of four. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is initially set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see S604 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is executed (see S505 in FIG. 26).

When a ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved normal symbol variable display M) is less than 4, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, when a ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S603 in FIG. 27: No).

The probability change flag 203e is a flag that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability change state for a special symbol (high probability state for a special symbol). If the value of the probability change flag 203e is 1 or more, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability change state for a special symbol, and if the value of the probability change flag 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state for a special symbol (low probability state for a special symbol). This probability change flag 203e is initially set to off, and is set to on when the jackpot A for a special symbol ends (see S1014 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, if a jackpot is obtained in the lottery for a special symbol, it is set to off when setting the start of the jackpot (see S213 in FIG. 23).

When the MPU 201 executes the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24), a lottery is held for the special symbol. In the special symbol variation start process, the probability change flag 203e is referenced, and if the flag is on, a lottery is held for the special symbol based on the first random number table for high probability, whereas if the probability change flag 203e is off, a lottery is held for the special symbol based on the first random number table for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 24).

The time-saving counter 203f is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state for normal symbols. If the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 1 or more, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state for normal symbols, and if the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state for normal symbols. The initial value of this time-saving counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn in the main control device 110 and a jackpot B is obtained, the value is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot B (see S1013 in FIG. 31). In addition, regardless of the type of jackpot, if a jackpot is obtained by drawing a special symbol, the value is set to 0 when setting the start of the jackpot.

When a lottery is held for a winning normal symbol, the value of the time-saving counter 203f and the state of the probability change flag 203e are referenced, and if the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 1 or greater or the state of the probability change flag 203e is on, it is determined that the time-saving normal symbol is in progress. In this case, a lottery is held for a normal symbol based on the second winning random number table for high probability (see S509 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0 and the state of the probability change flag 203e is off, it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol is in progress, and a lottery is held for a normal symbol based on the second winning random number table for low probability (see S510 in FIG. 26).

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37, the second pattern display device 83, the second pattern reservation lamp 84, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the specific winning port 65a to open and close forward around the lower edge of the opening/closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role 64a, and the like, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

In addition, the input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 consisting of a group of switches and sensors (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process is immediately executed as a process during a power outage.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the settings of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and continuous preview performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the audio and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, etc.

The audio and lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, it controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or to change the performance content during a super reach, and also instructs the display control device 114. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that a rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Here, the rear image refers to the image displayed on the rear side of the third pattern, which is the main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error based on commands from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display without delay an error message image according to the error type (e.g., a vibration error) indicated by the received error command.

Now, with reference to Figures 14 and 15, the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described in detail. First, Figure 14(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in Figure 14(a), the ROM 222 is provided with at least a variation pattern table 222a, a transformation performance selection table 222b, and an evolution performance mode selection table 222c.

The variation pattern table 222a is used to specify the detailed display mode of the variation performance based on the rough display mode (variation time) of the variation performance selected by the main control device 110 with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202d. More specifically, when a variation pattern command for notifying the display mode selected by the main control device 110 is received, one variation pattern (detailed display mode of the variation performance) is extracted (specified) from the variation patterns specified in the variation pattern table 222a (see S5003 in FIG. 42). Of the variation patterns specified in this variation pattern table 222a, the variation patterns corresponding to super reaches with a variation time of at least 60 seconds also include information indicating whether or not the above-mentioned continuous transformation performance (see FIGS. 5 to 7) is to be executed.

The transformation effect selection table 222b is a data table that is referenced to determine the presentation mode of a successive transformation effect when a change pattern involving the successive transformation effect is selected from the change pattern table 222a. Details of this transformation effect selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 15(a).

Figure 15(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the transformation effect selection table 222b. As shown in Figure 15(a), this transformation effect selection table 222b specifies the performance mode of the successive transformation effects for each type of change pattern (win/lose) and the value of the performance counter 223n provided in the RAM 223. As shown in Figure 15(a), there are five types of performance modes for the successive transformation effects, namely successive transformation effects A to E.

The continuous transformation performance A is a continuous transformation performance in which the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification mode) is one, and no lower limit is set for the remaining change time during which transformations are possible. Therefore, when the continuous transformation performance A is executed, regardless of whether the player presses the frame button 22 during the effective operation period, the success notification mode is displayed once, and then the failure notification mode is displayed. As shown in FIG. 15(a), the continuous transformation performance A can be selected only in the case of a winning super reach and when the value of the performance counter 223n is "0". In other words, if the maximum number of transformations is one, it is determined that the continuous transformation performance A is set to be a big win. As mentioned above, in the continuous transformation performance, the expectation of a big win increases as the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) increases, but the configuration is such that a big win is determined as an exception only in the case of the continuous transformation performance A (when the maximum number is one). This makes it possible to provide a surprising performance.

Continuous transformation performance B is a continuous transformation performance in which the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification modes) is two, and in the case of a winning super reach, it is selected when the value of the performance counter 223n is in the range of "1 to 19". On the other hand, in the case of a losing super reach, it is selected when the value of the performance counter 223n is in the range of "0 to 44". Since the performance counter 223n is a loop counter that is updated in the range of "0 to 99", continuous transformation performance B is determined at a rate of 19% (19/100) in the case of a winning super reach in which continuous transformation performance is determined, and at a rate of 45% (45/100) in the case of a losing super reach in which continuous transformation performance is determined. For this reason, the probability of continuous transformation performance B being determined is higher in a losing super reach (low expectation of a jackpot).

In addition, in the continuous transformation performance B, the lower limit of the remaining change time during which transformation is possible is set to 41 seconds. Here, the first operation effective period of the continuous transformation performance starts when the remaining change time is 49 seconds (when 11 seconds have passed since the start of the change, see Figures 9(a) and (b)). Therefore, if the period from when the first operation effective period of the continuous transformation performance is set to when the second operation effective period ends is not kept within 8 seconds (49 seconds - 41 seconds), the number of times the successful notification mode is displayed will be limited to one. In other words, if the operation effective periods set for the first and second times are not terminated midway by pressing the frame button 22, the lower limit of the remaining change time during which transformation is possible will be exceeded in the middle of the second operation effective period. As a result, unless the operation effective period is actively terminated by pressing the frame button 22, it becomes impossible for the player to distinguish whether the number of transformations has become one due to the setting of the continuous transformation performance A or the number of transformations has become one due to the setting of the continuous transformation performance B. As described above, while continuous transformation performance A is a performance that guarantees a jackpot, continuous transformation performance B is a performance that has a low probability of winning a jackpot. Therefore, by distinguishing between continuous transformation performance A and continuous transformation performance B, the player can accurately know the probability of winning a jackpot, and can be encouraged to actively press frame button 22 during the valid operation period.

Continuous transformation performance C is a continuous transformation performance with a maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification mode) of three times, and is selected when the value of the performance counter 223n is in the range of "20 to 44" in the case of a winning super reach. On the other hand, in the case of a losing super reach, it is selected when the value of the performance counter 223n is in the range of "45 to 89". Therefore, continuous transformation performance C is determined at a rate of 25% (25/100) in the case of a winning super reach where a continuous transformation performance is determined, and at a rate of 45% (45/100) in the case of a losing super reach where a continuous transformation performance is determined. For this reason, the rate at which continuous transformation performance C is determined is higher in a losing super reach (low expectation of a jackpot). Also, compared to continuous transformation performance B, the rate at which it is determined in the case of a winning super reach is higher, so the expectation of a jackpot is higher for continuous transformation performance C compared to continuous transformation performance B.

In addition, in the continuous transformation performance C, the lower limit of the remaining change time during which the transformation is possible is set to 38 seconds. Therefore, unless the period from when the first operation valid period of the continuous transformation performance is set to when the third operation valid period ends is within 11 seconds (49 seconds - 38 seconds), the number of times the successful notification mode is displayed will be limited to two times. This is because if the frame button 22 is not pressed and each operation valid period is completed, the second operation valid period ends exactly when 11 seconds have passed (first operation valid period 5 seconds + first successful notification mode 1 second + second operation valid period 5 seconds). As a result, unless the operation valid period is terminated by actively pressing the frame button 22, it is impossible for the player to distinguish whether it is the continuous transformation performance C or the continuous transformation performances D and E, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the continuous transformation performance C described below. Therefore, players who want to accurately predict the expectation of the current change display from the number of transformations (the number of times the successful notification mode is displayed) can be made to actively press the frame button 22.

The continuous transformation performance D is a continuous transformation performance in which the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification modes) is four, and in the case of a winning super reach, it is selected when the value of the performance counter 223n is in the range of "45 to 79". On the other hand, in the case of a losing super reach, it is selected when the value of the performance counter 223n is in the range of "90 to 98". Therefore, the continuous transformation performance D is determined at a rate of 35% (35/100) in the case of a winning super reach in which a continuous transformation performance is determined, and at a rate of 9% (9/100) in the case of a losing super reach in which a continuous transformation performance is determined. For this reason, the successive transformation performance D is determined at a higher rate (higher expectation of a jackpot) in the case of a winning super reach. Also, compared to the continuous transformation performances B and C, the rate at which it is determined is higher in the case of a winning super reach, and the rate at which it is determined is lower in the case of a losing super reach, so the expectation of a jackpot is higher compared to the continuous transformation performances B and C.

In addition, in the continuous transformation performance D, the lower limit of the remaining change time during which the transformation is possible is set to 38 seconds, the same as in the continuous transformation performance C. Therefore, unless the period from when the first operation valid period of the continuous transformation performance is set to when the third operation valid period ends is kept within 11 seconds (49 seconds - 38 seconds), the number of times the success notification mode is displayed will be limited to two times. Even if the period until the third operation valid period ends is kept within 11 seconds, if the period until the fourth operation valid period ends exceeds 11 seconds, the number of times the success notification mode is displayed will be limited to three times. As a result, unless the operation valid period is terminated by actively pressing the frame button 22, it becomes impossible (difficult) for the player to distinguish which of the continuous transformation performances C to E it is. Therefore, a player who wants to accurately predict the expectation of the current change display from the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) can be made to actively press the frame button 22.

The continuous transformation performance E is a continuous transformation performance with a maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification modes) of 5 times, and is selected when the value of the performance counter 223n is in the range of "80 to 99" in the case of a winning super reach. On the other hand, in the case of a losing super reach, it is selected only when the value of the performance counter 223n is "99". Therefore, the continuous transformation performance E is determined at a rate of 20% (20/100) in the case of a winning super reach where a continuous transformation performance is determined, and at a rate of 1% (1/100) in the case of a losing super reach where a continuous transformation performance is determined. For this reason, the probability that the continuous transformation performance E is determined is higher in a winning super reach (higher expectation of a jackpot). Also, since the rate at which it is determined in the case of a losing super reach is extremely lower than the continuous transformation performances B to D, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than in the case of continuous transformation performances B to D.

This continuous transformation performance E is the type in which the greatest number of transformations can be performed among the types of continuous transformation performance. If five transformations are successful in the continuous transformation performance E, the failure notification mode is not displayed thereafter, and the direct transition performance (see FIG. 8(a)) begins after the display period of the fifth success notification mode has elapsed.

In addition, in the continuous transformation performance E, the lower limit of the remaining change time during which transformation is possible is set to 38 seconds, the same as in the continuous transformation performances C and D. Therefore, unless the period from when the first operation valid period of the continuous transformation performance is set to when the third operation valid period ends is kept within 11 seconds (49 seconds - 38 seconds), the number of times the success notification mode is displayed will be limited to two. Even if the period until the third operation valid period ends is kept within 11 seconds, if the period until the fourth operation valid period ends exceeds 11 seconds, the number of times the success notification mode is displayed will be limited to three. Furthermore, even if the end timing of the operation valid period up to the fourth time is kept within 11 seconds, if the end timing of the operation valid period for the fifth time exceeds 11 seconds, the number of times the success notification mode is displayed will be limited to four. As a result, unless the operation valid period is terminated by actively pressing the frame button 22, it becomes impossible (difficult) for the player to distinguish which of the continuous transformation performances C to E it is. Therefore, players who want to accurately predict the expected outcome of the current variable display based on the number of transformations (the number of times the successful notification mode is displayed) can proactively press the frame button 22.

In this way, five types of effect types are provided for the continuous transformation effect of this embodiment. Each effect type is configured with a different upper limit number of transformations, and is configured so that the number of times the character 811 has transformed (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) can indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. Furthermore, for continuous transformation effects B to E, it is configured so that the upper limit number of transformations cannot be displayed unless the player actively presses the frame button 22 during the valid operation period to end the valid operation period. This allows players who wish to know the exact likelihood of the continuous transformation effect to actively press the frame button 22 during the valid operation period, thereby improving the player's motivation to participate in the game.

Furthermore, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation performance (does not press frame button 22) plays this pachinko machine 10, the performance period of the continuous transformation performance will pass with a relatively small number of transformations, even in the case of a continuous transformation performance that would normally have a high expectation (high upper limit of transformations). This can result in a case where the number of transformations is small, and even if the continuous transformation performance has a high upper limit (i.e., high expectation of a jackpot), it ends with a small number of transformations as the performance period passes. Therefore, even if the continuous transformation performance ends with a small number of transformations, the expectation of a jackpot can be increased.

Returning to FIG. 14(a), we continue the explanation. The advanced performance mode selection table 222c is a data table that specifies the performance mode of the advanced performance. This advanced performance mode selection table 222c is referenced when the last operation valid period in the continuous transformation performance ends, and is used to determine the mode of the advanced performance based on the remaining change time. The details of this advanced performance mode selection table 222c will be explained with reference to FIG. 15(b).

Figure 15 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the advanced performance mode selection table 222c. As shown in Figure 15 (b), this advanced performance mode selection table 222c specifies the type of advanced performance to be selected for each remaining fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation time T) and the type of current fluctuation display (whether it is a miss super reach or a win super reach).

Specifically, if the remaining change time T is in the range of 32 seconds <= T < 35 seconds at the end of the last valid operation period, a development effect with a 30-second presentation time is selected. In other words, if the current change display is a winning super reach, a winning development effect A with a 30-second presentation time is selected, and if it is a losing super reach, a losing development effect A with a 30-second presentation time is selected.

In addition, if the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 35 seconds≦T<38 seconds and the current fluctuation display is a winning super reach, a winning development performance B with a performance time of 33 seconds is selected, and if it is a losing super reach, a losing development performance B with a performance time of 33 seconds is selected. If the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 38 seconds≦T<41 seconds and the current fluctuation display is a winning super reach, a winning development performance C with a performance time of 36 seconds is selected, and if it is a losing super reach, a losing development performance C with a performance time of 36 seconds is selected.

Similarly, if the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 41 seconds≦T<44 seconds and the current fluctuation display is a winning super reach, a winning development performance D with a performance time of 39 seconds is selected, and if it is a losing super reach, a losing development performance D with a performance time of 39 seconds is selected. If the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 44 seconds≦T<47 seconds and the current fluctuation display is a winning super reach, a winning development performance E with a performance time of 42 seconds is selected, and if it is a losing super reach, a losing development performance E with a performance time of 42 seconds is selected. If the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 47 seconds≦T<48 seconds and the current fluctuation display is a winning super reach, a winning development performance F with a performance time of 45 seconds is selected, and if it is a losing super reach, a losing development performance F with a performance time of 45 seconds is selected.

As mentioned above, in order to prevent mismatch between the end timing of the variable display and the end timing of the developing presentation, the display time of the failure notification mode and the display time of the transition presentation are varied according to the difference between the remaining variable time T and the presentation time of the developing presentation selected from the developing presentation mode selection table 222c. This allows the end timing of the developing presentation to coincide with the end timing of the variable display, regardless of the length of the remaining variable time T. This makes it possible to provide a presentation that does not feel strange to the player.

Next, the details of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 14(b). FIG. 14(b) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the RAM 223.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a valid period flag 223e, a valid period timer 223f, a transformation count counter 223g, a transformation performance in progress flag 223h, a success notification mode timer 223i, a failure notification mode timer 223j, a transition performance time timer 223k, a development performance storage area 223m, and a performance counter 223n.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In this pachinko machine 10, when a start winning is detected in the main control device 110, various information (win/lose, stop type, variation pattern) that will be obtained when a lottery for a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110 from the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained in response to the start winning, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning information command, the various information notified by the winning information command (win/lose, stop type, change pattern) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in the available areas of the four areas (area 1 to area 4) in order of the area number (1 to 4) starting from the area with the smallest area number. In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to older winnings are stored, and the first area stores data corresponding to the oldest winnings.

The special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b, like the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control unit 110, is a variable performance (variable display) performed by the first pattern display unit 37 (and the third pattern display unit 81), and is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable performance reserved in the main control unit 110 up to a maximum of four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls using the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is increased by a ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or when the variable display of a special pattern is executed in the main control unit 110 and the number of reserved balls is decreased, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c after the increase or decrease is sent to the voice lamp control unit 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, it obtains the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command and stores it in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b (see S4908 in Figure 41). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b according to the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, so that it can update its value in synchronization with the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110.

The value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball count pattern on the third pattern display device 81. That is, in response to receiving a reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b, and transmits a display reserved ball count command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the stored value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, it controls the drawing of the image so that the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, i.e., the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113, is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which a variable display is pending.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S4902 in FIG. 41), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set (see S5002 in FIG. 42). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 during the command output process (see S4002 in FIG. 33) of the main process executed by the MPU 221. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the third pattern is displayed in the third pattern display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command sent from the main control unit 110 is received (see S4905 in FIG. 41), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third pattern display device 81 (see S5009 in FIG. 42). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) (see S5011 in FIG. 42).

The valid period flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not it is within the period of the operation valid period in the continuous transformation performance. If this valid period flag 223e is on, it means that it is within the operation valid period, and if it is off, it means that it is not within the operation valid period. This valid period flag 223e is set to on when it is determined that the start timing of the continuous transformation performance has arrived (see S4403 in (a) of FIG. 37). It is also set to on when it is determined that the display period of the success notification mode has elapsed and the number of times the success notification mode has been displayed (the number of transformations) is less than 5 (see S4605 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, it is set to off when a press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, and when 5 seconds set as the operation valid period has elapsed without detecting a press on the frame button 22 (see S4201 in FIG. 35). While this valid period flag 223e is on, the press (operation) on the frame button 22 is treated as valid. That is, when the frame button 22 is pressed while the validity period flag 223e is on, a transformation setting process (see FIG. 35) is executed to display the success notification mode or the failure notification mode.

The valid period timer 223f is a timer for counting the remaining time of the operation valid period in the continuous transformation performance. When the start condition of the valid period is met (when the start timing of the continuous transformation performance is reached or the end timing of the success notification mode is reached), a timer value (5000) corresponding to 5 seconds is set for this valid period timer 223f (see S4403 in FIG. 37 and S4605 in FIG. 38). When the timer value of this valid period timer 223f is 1 or more, the value is decremented (updated) by 1 by the valid period process (see FIG. 37(b)) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The value of this valid period timer 223f determines whether the operation valid period has elapsed, and when it is determined that the operation valid period has elapsed, a transformation setting process (see FIG. 35) is executed to display the success notification mode or the failure notification mode.

The transformation count counter 223g is a counter for counting the number of times that the success notification mode (see FIG. 6 and FIG. 7(a)) is displayed (the character 811 has successfully transformed) in one consecutive transformation performance. The counter value of this transformation count counter 223g is incremented (updated) by one each time the display of the success notification mode is determined. In the consecutive transformation performance in this first embodiment, whether or not the upper limit number of transformations has been reached is determined based on whether or not the value of this transformation count counter 223g has reached the upper limit value (see FIG. 15(a)) set for each performance type of the consecutive transformation performance (see S4203 in FIG. 35). As described above, if the success notification mode is displayed for the upper limit number of transformations and then the effective operation period ends, the failure notification mode is displayed regardless of whether or not the lower limit value of the remaining change time has been reached at the time of the end. This allows the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations in each performance type of the consecutive transformation performance to be differentiated, so that the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations can suggest the expectation of a jackpot.

The transformation performance in progress flag 223h is a flag that indicates whether or not a successive transformation performance is being performed. If it is on, it means that the successive transformation performance is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the successive transformation performance is not being performed. Here, the successive transformation performance is being performed means the period from the end of the transformation development mode (the start of the first operation valid period) to the end of the transition performance (the start of the development performance). This transformation performance in progress flag 223h is set to on when it is determined that 11 seconds have passed since the start of the transformation performance, which is the start timing of the transformation performance, in the change display in which the execution of the successive transformation performance has been decided (see S4404 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, this transformation performance in progress flag 223h is set to off when it is determined that the display period of the transition performance has elapsed (see S4804 in FIG. 40).

The success notification mode timer 223i is a timer for timing the display time of the success notification mode. When the display condition of the success notification mode is met, a timer value corresponding to the display period of the success notification mode is set for this success notification mode timer 223i. The condition for the success notification mode to be displayed is, as described above, that the number of times the success notification mode is displayed is less than the upper limit number of times set for each type of continuous transformation performance, and the remaining change time at the end of the operation effective period is equal to or greater than the lower limit time set for each type of continuous transformation performance. When it is determined that the display timing of the success notification mode has arrived, the success notification mode timer 223i is set to a timer value (1000) corresponding to one second (S4212 in FIG. 35). Then, in the performance update process of the main process (see S4012 in FIG. 33), the value is decremented (updated) by one during the success notification mode process executed every millisecond (see S4601 in FIG. 38).

The failure notification mode timer 223j is a timer for timing the display time of the failure notification mode. When the display condition of the failure notification mode is met, a timer value corresponding to the display period of the failure notification mode is set for this failure notification mode timer 223j. The condition for the failure notification mode to be displayed is, as described above, that the number of times the success notification mode is displayed is equal to or exceeds the upper limit number of times set for each type of consecutive transformation performance, or the remaining change time at the end of the operation effective period is less than the lower limit time set for each type of consecutive transformation performance. When it is determined that the display timing of the failure notification mode has arrived and the performance mode of the development performance is selected, the failure notification mode timer 223j is set to a timer value corresponding to the remaining change time and the display time according to the performance time of the development performance (see S4208 in FIG. 35). Then, in the performance update process of the main process (see S4012 in FIG. 33), the value is decremented (updated) by one in the failure notification mode process executed every 1 millisecond (see S4701 in FIG. 39).

The transition performance time timer 223k is a timer for timing the display time of the transition performance. When the display conditions of the transition performance are met, a timer value corresponding to the display period of the transition performance is set for this transition performance time timer 223k. The transition performance starts to be displayed when the display time of the failure notification mode has elapsed or the display time of the fifth success notification mode has elapsed in the continuous transformation performance E. At the start of the transition performance, this transition performance time timer 223k is set to a timer value corresponding to the difference between the remaining change time and the performance time of the development performance to be executed after the transition performance (see S4610 in FIG. 38 and S4704 in FIG. 39). Then, in the performance update process of the main process (see S4012 in FIG. 33), the value is decremented (updated) by one during the transition performance process executed every 1 millisecond (see S4801 in FIG. 40).

The development performance storage area 223m is a memory area for storing information indicating the type of development performance. When a development performance mode is selected from the development performance mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 15(b)) according to the remaining change time based on the end of the final operation validity period of the continuous transformation performance, data corresponding to that mode is stored in this development performance storage area 223m. When the transition performance starts, the mode (performance time) of the development performance is determined from the data stored in this development performance storage area 223m, and the difference between the remaining change time and the performance time of the development performance is set as the display time of the transition performance. In addition, when the transition performance ends, the type of development performance to be started is identified based on the data stored in this development performance storage area 223m.

The data corresponding to the type of development performance is composed of, for example, 4-bit data, and the 1st to 3rd bits are used as an area to store data indicating the change time, and the 4th bit is used as an area to store data indicating whether the performance is a win or a loss. Specifically, if the 1st to 3rd bits are "001B", it indicates a development performance with a performance time of 30 seconds, if it is "010B", it indicates a development performance with a performance time of 33 seconds, and if it is "011B", it indicates a development performance with a performance time of 36 seconds. Also, if it is "100B", it indicates a development performance with a performance time of 39 seconds, if it is "101B", it indicates a development performance with a performance time of 42 seconds, and if it is "111B", it indicates a development performance with a performance time of 36 seconds. If the most significant bit (4th bit) is 1 (high), it means that the development performance corresponds to a win, and if the most significant bit (4th bit) is 0 (low), it means that the development performance corresponds to a miss. Therefore, for example, if the data "1010B" is stored in the development effect storage area 223m, it means that the current development effect is a winning development effect (i.e., winning development effect B) that will have a production time of 33 seconds.

The effect counter 223n is a counter used to select a variation pattern and to select various effects. This effect counter 223n is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and the value is incremented by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 33) is executed. Note that the effect counter 223n has a separate counter for each type of effect.

The RAM 223 also has a command memory area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command memory area is configured as a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 41) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area is read out from the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes the command and performs processing corresponding to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the variable display (variable performance) of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 and the continuous preview performance based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. Details of this display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 16.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 28) normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 16. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via bus line 240. The image controller 237 is connected to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to the output port 239 via bus line 241. The output side of the output port 239 is also connected to the third pattern display device 81.

Incidentally, even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with different lottery probabilities for a special jackpot or different numbers of prize balls paid out for one special jackpot, there are models with the exact same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, we will first explain the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236, and then explain the work RAM 233.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in command pointer 231a, reads and fetches the command code stored at the address indicated by the command pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the command code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply device 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power recovery from a power outage. The same applies below). When the system reset is released, the command pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time a command code is fetched, the value of the command pointer 231a is incremented by one. Also, when the MPU 231 executes a command to set the command pointer, the value of the pointer indicated by the command to set is set to the command pointer 231a.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the various fixed value data used in the control program are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for a large capacity in a small area. This allows sufficient storage of not only image data but also control programs, etc. Furthermore, if the control programs, etc. are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control programs, etc. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on multiple pages, the data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from when the address is specified until the data is output. Also, when reading non-contiguous data, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As such, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it may take a long time to read the commands that make up the control program, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, this may deteriorate the processing performance of the display control device 114.

In this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to and stored in the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As described below, the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read the commands that make up the control program without delay. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated presentations.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, which are connected to the image controller 237.

This character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as the main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has at least a second program memory area 234a1 that stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third pattern display device 81, and a character memory area 234a2 that stores data for images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The NAND flash memory has the characteristic of being able to obtain a large storage capacity in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using a NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character memory area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, in order to further increase the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and can also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control programs and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, without having to provide a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. This reduces the number of parts in the display control device 114, reducing manufacturing costs and preventing an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads out the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a, etc., and outputs the data to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks to which data cannot be written. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and also performs known data address conversion so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data blocks.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, including error bits. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing based on erroneous data and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Furthermore, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the bad data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the bad data blocks, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can easily access the character ROM 234 without having to consider the address positions of the bad data blocks, which differ in each NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b determines whether one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If the data is not set, the buffer RAM 234c reads one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR flash memory 234d) and temporarily sets it in the buffer RAM 234c. The ROM controller 234b then performs a known error correction process and outputs the data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is made up of two banks, and one page's worth of data from the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. This allows the ROM controller 234b to, for example, output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using one bank while data is set in the other, or to perform parallel processing of transferring one page's worth of data, including data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237, from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and reading data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 from the other bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or image controller 237. This improves the responsiveness of the character ROM 234 when reading it out.

The NOR flash memory 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is configured to have a much smaller capacity (e.g., 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a in order to complement the NAND flash memory 234a. This NOR flash memory 234d is provided with at least a first program memory area 234d1 that stores, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs that are not stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 executes this boot program first after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program memory area 234d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, then 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) from the instruction to be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (i.e., one page of the NAND type flash memory 234a) of this boot program. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" has been specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type flash memory 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and specifies the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating a program stored in the NOR type flash memory 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads out from the buffer RAM 234c the instruction code at the corresponding address from the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type flash memory 234d, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, the reason why not all of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but rather a predetermined number of commands from the boot program, starting with the command that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR flash memory 234d, is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem specific to NAND flash memories in that, when reading data from the first page, it takes a long time from when an address is specified until the data is output.

If all the control programs are stored in such a NAND type flash memory 234a, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the command code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (command code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND type flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. And, because of the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the command code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, which results in a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

In contrast, since the NOR flash memory 234d is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of commands from the boot program, starting with the command to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. When the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (command code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the command code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start up the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is programmed to transfer the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, i.e., the control programs excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d, and the fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table, which will be described later) to the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). Then, the MPU 231 first transfers and stores the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c in which the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released.

Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the address of the internal bus being specified as "0000H", the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, since there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a. As a result, after the system reset is released, when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 can read out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a and execute various processes. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control programs from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads out the control programs transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches the instructions, and executes various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

The control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed to set the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1, and then executes the remaining boot program included in the transferred control program.

This remaining boot program executes a process of transferring all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (e.g., a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) from the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a that corresponds to the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 43) that is executed after the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 43) is completed is set.

The MPU 231 executes the remaining boot program, and all of the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, by transferring the control program to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM, which is composed of a DRAM with a fast read speed, and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated presentations can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR flash memory 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding the extremely small capacity NOR flash memory 234d to the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of the character ROM 234 associated with this shortening of the time can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third pattern display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws one frame of an image based on a drawing list (see FIG. 21) sent from the MPU 231, and displays the drawn image in one of the first and second frame buffers 236b and 236c, which will be described later, while outputting the image information for one frame previously displayed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 performs the drawing process for this one frame of an image and the display process for this one frame of an image in parallel within the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 45(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes drawing processing of the next frame of image and also executes processing to display the image previously developed by drawing on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from image controller 237 and issues drawing instructions to image controller 237, so that image controller 237 can receive image drawing instructions from MPU 231 at image drawing and display processing intervals (20 milliseconds). Therefore, image controller 237 will not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing and display processing are completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also performs processing to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 or transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Images are drawn using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (such as mask ROM and EEPROM). In contrast, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer a portion of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. Then, as described below, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to remain resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that are to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

When the display control device 114 uses image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 to draw an image, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. As described below, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw the image. However, when drawing the image, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the time required for reading can be saved, so that the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to keep all image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. This makes it possible to suppress the increase in costs that would otherwise be caused by providing the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a consisting of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (start address of the source storage) and the end address (end address of the source storage) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, the destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236). Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the end address of the source storage.

In accordance with the various information in this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 reads one block of data from a specified address in the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and transfers the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. This process is then repeated until all of the image data stored from the storage start address to the storage end address indicated by the transfer instruction has been transferred.

This allows image data that is read out from the character ROM 234 over a long period of time to be temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of image data while the image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied by the transfer of image data, which makes it impossible to use the video RAMs 235 and 236 for the image drawing process, and as a result, prevents the image from being drawn or displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in time for the required time.

In addition, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, so that the period during which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not being used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily determined, simplifying the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used to hold image data transferred from the character ROM 234 without being overwritten while the power is on, and is provided with a power-on main image area 235a, a back image area 235c, a character design area 235e, and an error message image area 235f, as well as a power-on variable image area 235b and a third design area 235d.

The power-on main image area 235a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that displays the lottery results performed by the main control device 110 through a variable presentation when a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 begins, the MPU 231 sends a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 43).

Now, referring to Figure 17, the image that changes when the power is turned on will be described. Figure 17 is an explanatory diagram that explains the image that is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on.

Immediately after power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b, and then transfers the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. 17(a) using the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a.

At this time, when the display control device 114 receives a display pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a command to start the change, the display control device 114 alternately displays a power-on change image with a "○" pattern in the lower right position on the display screen of the power-on main image as shown in FIG. 17(b) and a power-on change image with a "×" pattern in the same position as the "○" pattern as shown in FIG. 17(c) during the change period. Then, the display control device 114 judges the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 from the display pattern command and stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the change pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, and if it is a "jackpot for special patterns", the image shown in FIG. 17(b) is displayed for a certain period after the change performance stops, and if it is a "miss for special patterns", the image shown in FIG. 17(c) is displayed for a certain period after the change performance stops.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235. This allows players and hall staff to check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the remaining image data that should be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take the time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, since players can recognize that some processing is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, they can wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped while the remaining image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operational checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on. Furthermore, by using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of operational checks from deteriorating.

Furthermore, if a player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the first entrance ball 64, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw a power-on variable image using image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that is always resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, and to alternately display the images shown in Figures 17(b) and (c) on the third pattern display device 81. This allows a simple variable presentation to be performed using the power-on variable image. Therefore, the player can be sure that a lottery has been drawn by the simple variable presentation, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on variable performance image is already resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, so if a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variable performance can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 16, the explanation will continue. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Here, referring to FIG. 18, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be explained. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining two types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, with FIG. 18(a) showing rear A corresponding to the "sand beach stage" and FIG. 18(b) showing rear B corresponding to the "deep sea stage".

As shown in FIG. 18, the back images corresponding to each of the back faces A and B are prepared in the character ROM 234, and are both longer horizontally than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images (hereafter referred to as "scrolling images") prepared for each back surface A and B are configured so that the back surface images continue at positions a and c. The images between positions c and d and between positions a and a' are configured with images that cover the horizontal width of the display area, and after the images between positions c and d are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, when the images between positions a and a' are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, the back surface images are scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth connection.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 first sets the corresponding back image between positions a and a' as the initial position of the display area, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Then, over time, the display area is moved from left to right relative to the scrolling image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, when the display area reaches the image between positions c and d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the image from position a to position a'. Thus, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth connection as if they flow to the left.

Next, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c for each rear image will be described. As shown in FIG. 18(a), the entire range of rear image A corresponding to the initial stage, the beach stage, i.e., all image data corresponding to positions a to d, is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage, the beach stage, is displayed, so by keeping all image data of rear image A corresponding to the frequently displayed beach stage resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, for rear side B, which corresponds to the deep sea stage, as shown in FIG. 18(b), only image data corresponding to a portion of that rear side, i.e., the image between position a and position b, is stored in the rear side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235.

The operation of the frame button 22 by the player to change stages is performed at any timing based on the player's will. Therefore, in order to instantly change the rear image when the frame button 22 is operated at any timing, it would be ideal to keep the full range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235. However, doing so would require a RAM with a very large capacity to be used as the resident video RAM 235, which could lead to increased costs.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed to the range from position a to position a', and image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b, including the initial position, is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, when the stage is changed at any timing by the player's operation of the frame button 22, the initial position of the back B can be displayed immediately on the third pattern display device 81 by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the display can be scrolled or the color tone can be changed over time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of the image is stored for the back B, the increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, the range from position a to position b of rear side B is set so that, after the image at the initial position is displayed, while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that after scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data stored in the rear side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the range from position b' to position d can be scrolled without delay using the image data corresponding to the rear side image stored in the normal video RAM 236 and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, for rear side B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear side images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 16) of the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the rear side image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to rear side images from being overwritten by other image data, so that the rear side image can be displayed reliably.

In addition, on the rear side B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 overlap with each other, with the image data corresponding to the image between position b' and position b being stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the image from position b' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, so that the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth connection.

Furthermore, the MPU 231 uses image data from the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between positions c and d is displayed as a display area on the third pattern display device 81. Next, the MPU 231 uses image data from the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between positions a and a' is displayed as a display area on the third pattern display device 81. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling in a smooth connection, as if they are flowing to the left.

Returning to FIG. 16, the explanation will be continued. The third pattern area 235d is an area for storing the third pattern used in the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81. That is, the third pattern area 235d stores image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns (see FIG. 4) that imitate the numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns. As a result, when performing a variable performance on the third pattern display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so that even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the variable performance can be started quickly on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started on the third pattern display device 81 after the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, even though the variable performance has been started on the first pattern display device 37.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a fish character 311, a female character 312, and a male character 313 are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e. When the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads the image data that is resident in advance in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character design can be changed instantly even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message that is displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Also, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of that error together with the type of error by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing players from committing fraud and protecting players from errors, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is pre-resident in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 can instantly draw each error message image in the image controller 237 by reading out the image data pre-resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message can be displayed immediately after the error command is received.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data required for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into multiple sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to a specific sub-area in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the type of image data should be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads out the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the specified specific sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The instruction to transfer image data is given by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. This allows the MPU 231 to issue an instruction to draw an image and an instruction to transfer image data simply by sending the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for displaying an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame of an image drawn in accordance with instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby displaying one frame of an image in that frame buffer, and while displaying an image in one of the frame buffers, reads out one frame of image information previously displayed from the other frame buffer and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal, thereby executing a process for displaying the one frame of an image on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can display one frame of image drawn in one frame buffer while simultaneously reading out one frame of image previously displayed from the other frame buffer, and display the one frame of image that has been read out on the third pattern display device 81.

The frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read in order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are alternately designated by the MPU 231 as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs, and is composed of DRAM. This work RAM 233 has at least a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

The data table storage area 233b is an area that stores a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 over time for a performance that is displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a transfer data table that specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in a performance that is displayed based on the display data table.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third pattern display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

Here, we will explain the details of the various data tables. First, a display data table is prepared for each presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110. For example, display data tables corresponding to variable presentations, opening presentations, round presentations, ending presentations, and demo presentations are prepared.

The variable performance is an effect that is started in the third pattern display device 81 when a display variable pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variable pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variable performance is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is a miss, the stop pattern indicating the miss is finally stopped and displayed, whereas if the stop type of the variable performance is either jackpot A or jackpot B, the stop pattern indicating the respective jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually checking the stop pattern in this variable performance, and can easily determine the game value awarded according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect to inform the player that the pachinko machine 10 is about to enter a special game state and that the specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect is an effect to inform the player of the number of rounds that will be started. The ending effect is an effect to inform the player that the special game state has ended, and to inform the player of the game value that will be awarded to the player after the jackpot ends (short period for normal symbols), or to inform the player that the lottery result for the reserved special symbols will be a jackpot.

By announcing the time period of the normal symbol in the ending performance, the player can easily recognize the time period of the normal symbol. The longer the time period of the normal symbol, the more opportunities there are for the ball to pass through the normal ball entrance 67, so there are more opportunities for the lottery of the normal symbol to be held, and there are more opportunities for the normal symbol to be won. Therefore, there are more opportunities for the electric role 64a to be opened when the normal symbol is hit, so the ball is more likely to enter the first ball entrance 64, and the lottery of the special symbol is more likely to be held. Therefore, the longer the time period of the normal symbol displayed, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be hit, and the more motivated the player to participate in the game. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is a prize entrance from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters it, so when a normal jackpot occurs and the electric device 64a is opened, making it easier for balls to enter the first ball entrance 64, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the balls held are unlikely to be reduced or are not reduced even when playing, so the player can have a sense of anticipation that a jackpot with a special pattern will be obtained when the balls held are unlikely to be reduced or are not reduced. This increases the player's motivation to participate in the game, and allows the player to continue to be motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a predetermined time has passed since the first variable effect stopped, but the next variable effect associated with a start winning does not start. The third symbol, consisting of sub-symbols that do not have the numbers "0" to "9", is displayed frozen, and only the back image changes. If the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no play is being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening performance, round performance, ending performance, and demo performance. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is the display data table for variable performance, will have one table per variable performance pattern, for a total of 32 tables. In addition, the display data tables corresponding to each game menu screen are also stored in this data table storage area 233b.

Now, with reference to FIG. 19, the display data table will be described in detail. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display data table (variable display data table) for variable effects among the display data tables. Display data tables such as the variable display data table correspond to an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit, and specify in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of an image to be displayed at that time.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that constitutes one frame's worth of image, and also specify drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, according to the sprite type.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification ratio is information for specifying the magnification ratio relative to a standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed according to that magnification ratio is specified. Note that if the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is displayed reduced compared to the standard size.

The rotation angle is information used to specify the angle of rotation when a sprite is rotated for display. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite is visible through the image. The alpha blending information is information used to specify a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information is information used to specify the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. And the filter specification information is information used to specify the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing that sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing information for each sprite, such as one background image, nine third patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light in the image, and characters used for various effects, is specified for each address as the drawing content for one frame corresponding to each address. Note that information regarding effects and characters is specified as one or more pieces according to the content to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are constant over time, so the variable display data table specifies only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of rear image. This rear type contains information specifying whether to display either rear A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either the "sand beach stage" or the "deep sea stage"), or whether to display a rear image different from rears A and B. In addition, when specifying that a rear image different from rears A and B is to be displayed, the rear type also contains information specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

When the MPU 231 determines that either back face A or B should be displayed based on the back face type, it determines the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player from back face A or B as the drawing target, and also determines the range of the back face image to be displayed for that frame in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it determines that a back face image different from back face A or B should be displayed, it determines the back face image to be displayed from the back face type.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only the rear surface type is specified as the drawing content of the rear surface image in the display data table. Alternatively, the rear surface type and position information indicating which range of the rear surface image corresponding to that rear surface type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the rear surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) based on this display data table was started. In this case, the MPU 231 determines the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the rear image that was displayed at the stage when drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started based on the display database, and the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started, as indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, depending on the type of back surface, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began, or, together with the back surface type and position information, type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display database (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began) may be specified as the drawing content of the back surface image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating the address where the range of the back surface image to be displayed is stored, rather than information indicating the elapsed time.

For the third patterns (Pattern 1, Pattern 2, ...), pattern type offset information is recorded as pattern type information for specifying the third pattern to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern. The reason offset information is determined rather than the type of third pattern directly is that the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance and the stopping pattern of the current variable performance, and the pattern offset information from the start of the fluctuation until a specified time has elapsed records the offset information from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started, offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 is recorded. This makes it possible to stop the fluctuation performance at the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110 are managed by the number assigned to the third symbol, and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers assigned to each third symbol, so that the third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time during which the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance is set to be the time during which the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed. While the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed, the third pattern is not visible to the player. Therefore, by switching the pattern offset information from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance during that time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player cannot recognize the interruption in the continuity of the numbers.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H," contains "Start" information indicating the beginning of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 19) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be specified by that display data table is written.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, reads the selected display data table from the data table storage area 233b, stores it in the display data table buffer 233d, and initializes the pointer 233f. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image content to be drawn next is specified based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) is created. This drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 to instruct the image to be drawn. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, and the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 can change the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in response to commands (e.g., display variation pattern commands) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

Here, if a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is changed, as in conventional pachinko machines, a large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing programs that become more complex and expansive as the effect images become more diverse, which may limit the processing power of the display control device 114 and result in a limit to the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. In contrast, with this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed simply by replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, so a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

The reason why the display data table is prepared in accordance with each performance mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the performance mode to be displayed, and the drawing list can be created frame by frame according to the set data table is because the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning in the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore it is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each performance mode as described above. In this way, the configuration of preparing a display data table in accordance with each performance mode, setting a display data table buffer according to the performance mode to be displayed, and creating a drawing list frame by frame according to the set data table can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each performance, and as described above, the transfer data information and transfer timing are specified for transferring image data of sprites used in the performance specified in the display data table that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

If all image data for sprites used in the effects defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, then no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and describes the transfer data information of the image data of the sprite (hereinafter referred to as the "image data to be transferred") that should start being transferred at the time indicated by that address (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in Figure 20 correspond to this). Here, the transfer start timing of the image data to be transferred is set so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite starts according to the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified in the transfer data table in correspondence with the address corresponding to that transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, null data is specified, which means that there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table (this corresponds to address "0002H" in Figure 20).

The transfer data information includes the start address (start address of the source) and the end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

The first address of the transfer data table, "0000H", contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, just like the display data table, and the last address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 20) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is contained.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc., and if a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table exists, it reads the transfer data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores it in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later is created, and transfer data information of the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time is obtained from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 20, when pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at that address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and sends the drawing list after the addition to image controller 237. On the other hand, when pointer 233f is "0002H", null data is specified at address "0002H" in the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no image data to be transferred and transfer should begin thereafter, and the transfer data information is not added to the created drawing list, and the drawing list is sent to image controller 237.

Then, if transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information.

As described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from character ROM 234 to image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in image storage area 236a without fail. Then, the image data stored in that image storage area 236a can be used to draw the specific sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 sets a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in that display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This makes it possible to manage and control the transfer of image data for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, which should start being transferred at the time indicated by the address, is specified in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Therefore, the timing of the start of transfer can be specified so that the image data of a specified sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before that image data is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, a wide variety of performance images can be easily displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in Figures 17(a) to (c). This simple image display flag 233c is set to ON in the main processing (see Figure 43) executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM (see S6005 in Figure 43). Then, when all resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, it is set to OFF in order to display images other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 (see S7605 in Figure 55(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 45(b)). When the simple image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 45(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 45(b)) are executed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, a command determination process (see FIGS. 46 to 51) and a display setting process (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed so that various images are displayed in response to commands transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during V interrupt processing (see S7501 in FIG. 55(a)). If the simple image display flag 233c is on, resident target image data exists that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, so a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) is executed to transfer the image data required for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. The MPU 231 determines the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113, selects a display data table corresponding to the performance mode from the data table storage area 233b, and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 21) that describes the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the performance corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and generates a drawing list (see FIG. 21) for each frame that describes image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. When storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Note that if all the image data of the sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared, and the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that no image data to be transferred exists in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, if the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is specified (i.e., if no null data is specified), the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described below that specifies the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame.

As a result, if the drawing list received from the MPU 231 contains transfer data information, the image controller 237 executes a process of transferring the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information. Here, as described above, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a specified address in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the specified sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specified sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is used to specify an address from which the corresponding drawing contents or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. The MPU 231 initializes the pointer 233f to 0 once when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, during the display setting process (see S6303 in FIG. 45(b)) of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, a pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 52) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated in this manner, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, creates a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described below, and also obtains transfer data information for the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

In addition, when a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used to draw a sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a based on the transfer data table until the drawing of the sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. In addition, by writing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of an image, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Now, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame's worth of images, and as shown in FIG. 21, it describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, such as the back image used in one frame's image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), the character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., error pattern). The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer specified image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its address. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) also includes display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information. The image controller 237 performs enlargement/reduction processing according to the magnification ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, semi-transparency processing according to the semi-transparency value, composition processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction processing according to the color information, filtering processing according to the filter specification information in a manner specified by the information, and then performs various processing on the standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read from the various video RAMs, and draws the image obtained by performing various processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates. The drawn image is then expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, as specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a reserved image displaying a reserved ball count pattern, a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), and creates a drawing list by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address for the sprite (display object) data are generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type identified from the contents of other images. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data for that sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data for that sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) from the detailed information of each sprite as is, as specified in the display data table.

When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites in one frame's worth of images in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest back to the sprite that should be placed in the foreground, and describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by detailed information corresponding to each sprite in the following order: third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern), and various comments.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting them. Therefore, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed at the backmost side (backmost drawing layer), and the last sprite drawn can be placed at the frontmost side (foreground drawing layer). Note that when the comment display function is on, the image placed at the frontmost side (foreground drawing layer) is the text image that makes up the comment. By placing the comment at the frontmost side (foreground drawing layer), the comment can be more clearly seen by the player.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in transfer data table buffer 233e, MPU 231 adds the transfer data information (the source start address and source end address in character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the destination start address of the sub-area in image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred should be stored) to the end of the drawing list. When the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, image controller 237 reads image data from a specified area in character ROM 234 (area indicated by the source start address and source end address) based on the transfer data information, and transfers the image data to be transferred to a specified sub-area (destination address) in image storage area 236a in normal video RAM 236.

The timing counter 233h is a counter that counts the presentation time of the presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When the MPU 231 stores a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, it sets time data indicating the presentation time of the presentation displayed based on that display data table. This time data is the presentation time divided by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of image are completed, each time the display setting process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45(b)) is executed by the MPU 231, the timing counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 52). As a result, when the value of the timing counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and executes various processes that should be performed in conjunction with the end of the presentation.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is a flag indicating the storage state, for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, indicating whether the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" for all sprites, indicating that they are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction is set for image data to be transferred that corresponds to a sprite during the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage status corresponding to the sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, image data for other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will necessarily be in an unstored state due to the storage of the image data of the one sprite, so the storage status corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

In addition, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i to determine whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 56). If the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, it sets a transfer instruction for that image data (see S7714 in FIG. 56) and causes the image controller 237 to transfer that image data from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer process of that image data is stopped. This prevents unnecessary transfers from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a flag for specifying one of the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) into which the image drawn by the image controller 237 is expanded (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer"); if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, information on this specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 57).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process in which the image drawn based on the drawing list is displayed on the designated drawing target buffer. In addition, the image controller 237 executes a display process in which the image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by reading out previously displayed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and transferring the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is sent. In addition, the drawing list is sent each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image is completed (see S7802 in FIG. 57).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

<Regarding control processing of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 22 to 31. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly divided into start-up process which is started when the power is turned on, main process which is executed after the start-up process, timer interrupt process which is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt process which is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and main process will be described.

Figure 22 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second win random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second win random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (399, 99, 99, and 239, respectively, in this embodiment), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Next, a special pattern change process is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first pattern display device 37 and also sets the change pattern of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81, and a start winning process is executed in response to a win (start winning) in the first ball entry port 64 (S105). Details of the special pattern change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to Figures 23 to 25.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol change process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process associated with the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67 is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol change process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26 and FIG. 27. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and further, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the launch of the ball is on or off, on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. When the launch of the ball is on, the main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 23, the special pattern change process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this special pattern change process (S104). This special pattern change process (S104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is a process for controlling the change display of the special pattern (first pattern) performed by the first pattern display device 37, the change display of the third pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81, etc.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S201). The special symbol jackpot period includes the period during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and the period during which a predetermined time has passed since the end of the special symbol jackpot game. If the determination results in a special symbol jackpot (S201: Yes), this process ends.

If the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and if the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display of the special symbol is reserved N) is obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special pattern reserved ball counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special pattern reserved ball counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern reserved ball counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, a special pattern change start process is executed to start the change display in the first pattern display device 37 (S208). The special pattern change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 has elapsed (S209). The change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and if this change time has not elapsed (S209: No), the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is updated (S210), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the change time of the executing change display has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern of the first pattern display device 37 is set (S211). The setting of the stopped pattern is performed in advance by the special pattern change start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 24. When this special pattern change start process is executed, a lottery for a special pattern is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not a special pattern jackpot has been won is determined according to the value of the first win random number counter C1, and if a special pattern jackpot has been won, whether it will be jackpot A or jackpot B is determined according to the value of the first win type counter C2.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot A occurs, the blue LED in the first pattern display device 37 is turned on, and if a jackpot B occurs, the red LED is turned on. If a miss occurs, the red and green LEDs are turned on. The LEDs are turned off when the next variation display starts, but may be turned on for only a few seconds after the variation stops.

After the process of S211 is completed, when the ongoing variable display is started in the first symbol display device 37, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol performed by the special symbol variable start process (the current lottery result) is a special symbol jackpot (S212). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S212: Yes), the probability variable flag 203e is reset to OFF, and the value of the time-saving counter 203f is reset to 0 (S213), and the start of the jackpot is set (S214). When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the process of S214, if the jackpot control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed, the process branches to S1001: Yes, and an opening command is set. As a result, the jackpot presentation is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S212, if the current lottery result is a miss for the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203f is greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S215), and if the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 1 or greater (S215: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S216), and the process proceeds to S217. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0 (S215: No), the process of S216 is skipped and the process proceeds to S217. In the process of S217, a stop command is set to stop the variation of the special symbol (S217), and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 24, the special symbol change start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is a process for drawing a lottery (determining whether or not a "special symbol jackpot" or a "special symbol miss" based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and for determining the presentation pattern (variable presentation pattern) of the variable presentation performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are obtained (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variable flag 203e of the RAM 203 is ON (S302). The probability variable flag 203e is a flag that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability variable state with a special symbol. If the probability variable flag 203e is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability variable state with a special symbol, and if the probability variable flag 203e is OFF, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state (low probability state) with a special symbol.

When the probability bonus flag 203e is on (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability bonus state for the special symbol, so the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the first winning random number table for high probability (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 10 random number values stored in the first winning random number table for high probability. As described above, the 10 random number values "0 to 9" are set as the random number values for the special symbol jackpot, and if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches these random number values for the jackpot, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. Once the lottery result for the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if the probability of winning flag 203e is off (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol, so the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the first winning random number table for low probability (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first winning random number table for low probability. Only "200" is set as the random number value for a jackpot of the special symbol, and if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches "200", it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. Once the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In the process of S305, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol obtained by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), the display mode at the time of the jackpot is set based on the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 obtained by the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 obtained by the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first jackpot type selection table, and it is determined which jackpot type is one of the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B). As described above, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined to be a jackpot A (16R guaranteed jackpot) (see 202b1 in FIG. 11(b)), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot B (16R time-limited jackpot) (see 202b2 in FIG. 11(b)).

In the process of S306, the display mode (illumination state of LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). In addition, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the change pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S307). When the change pattern is set in the process of S307, the change time (display time) of the change performance in the first pattern display device 37 is set, and the change time of the third pattern until it stops at the big win pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is determined. At this time, the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the change time of the pattern change such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the change type counter CS1. Note that the relationship between the value of the change type counter CS1 and the change time is specified in the change pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12) as described above. When the process of S307 is completed, the process proceeds to S310.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S305 that the special pattern is a miss (S305: No), the display mode at the time of the miss is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the missing pattern, and the stop type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is set to be a forward or rear miss reach, a reach other than a forward or rear miss, or a complete miss, based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 obtained in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete miss is set, if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than front and rear miss is set, if it is "98, 99", a reach other than front and rear miss is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete miss is set, if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than front and rear miss is set, if it is "98, 99", a reach other than front and rear miss is set.

Next, the variation pattern in the event of a miss is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first pattern display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third pattern until it stops at a missing pattern on the third pattern display device 81 is determined. At this time, similar to the process of S308, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the specified contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d (see Figure 12) to determine the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. When the process of S309 is completed, the process proceeds to S310.

In the process of S310, which is executed after the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 (S310). Next, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 30). The voice lamp control device 113 sends the stop type command as is to the display control device 114. When the process of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed within the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and determines whether or not there has been a win in the first ball entry port 64 (start winning). If there has been a start winning, it is a process for reserving the values indicated by the various random number counters, and for pre-reading the lottery results for the special symbols from the values indicated by the various random number counters that have been reserved.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entry port 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entry (winning) into the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (winning) (S401: Yes), the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of reserved times N of the variable display of the special pattern) is obtained (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, if there is no winning ball in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or if there is a winning ball in the first ball entrance 64 but the value (N) of the special pattern reserved ball counter 203c is not less than 4 (S403: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is a winning ball in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special pattern reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the value (N) of the special pattern reserved ball counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command is set indicating the value of the special pattern reserved ball counter 203c changed by the calculation (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S405, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the first area of the free reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) of the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a in RAM 203 (S406). Note that in the process of S406, the value of the special pattern reserved ball counter 203c is referenced, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved area 2 is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved area 3 is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved area 4 is set as the first area.

Next, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S406, the lottery result for the special symbol is predicted (whether it is a jackpot or not), its stop type (if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type), and its fluctuation pattern (S407).

After the process of S407 predicts the winning or losing outcome of the special symbol lottery, the stop type (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot), and the fluctuation pattern, a winning information command including the predicted winning or losing outcome of the lottery, the predicted stop type, and the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S408), and this process ends.

The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice and lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice and lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it extracts the winning or losing result, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores this information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, referring to FIG. 26, the normal symbol change process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol change process (S106). This normal symbol change process (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is a process for controlling the second symbol change display performed by the second symbol display device 83, the opening time of the electric device 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64, etc.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (S501). The normal symbol (second symbol) is winning when the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a win and when the electric device 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64 is being controlled to open and close. If the result of the determination is that the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning (S501: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the normal pattern (second pattern) is not winning (S501: No), it is determined whether the display state of the second pattern display device 83 is changing (S502), and if the display state of the second pattern display device 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved variable display times M for the normal pattern) is obtained (S503). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained (S507).

Next, it is determined whether or not the current state is the time-saving state for the normal pattern (S508). Specifically, it is determined that the current state is the time-saving state for the normal pattern when the value of the time-saving counter 203f in the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or the high probability flag 203e is on, and it is determined that the current state is the normal state for the normal pattern (not the time-saving state) when the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0 and the high probability flag 203e is off.

If it is determined in the process of S508 that the time-saving state for normal symbols is in effect (S508: Yes), the result of the lottery as to whether or not the normal symbol is a win is obtained based on the value of the second win random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507 and the second win random number table for high probability (S509). Specifically, the value of the second win random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second win random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the normal symbol is a win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", it is determined that the normal symbol is a miss (see 202c2 in FIG. 11(c)).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S508 that the normal symbol is not in the time-saving state (S508: No), the result of the lottery as to whether or not the normal symbol is a win is obtained based on the value of the second win random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507 and the second win random number table for low probability (S510). Specifically, the value of the second win random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second win random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the normal symbol is a win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", it is determined that the normal symbol is a miss (see 202c1 in FIG. 11(c)).

Next, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the normal symbol obtained by the processing of S509 or S510 is a winning normal symbol (S511), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a winning symbol (S511: Yes), the display mode at the time of the winning symbol is set (S512). In the processing of S512, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has ended, it is set so that a "○" symbol is lit and displayed as the stopping symbol (second symbol), and the processing proceeds to S514.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S511 that the normal pattern is a miss (S511: No), the display mode in the event of a miss is set (S513). In this process of S513, after the variable display in the second pattern display device 83 has ended, the "X" pattern is set to be lit and displayed as the stopping pattern (second pattern). Once the setting of the display mode in the event of a miss has been completed, the process proceeds to S514.

In the process of S514, it is determined whether or not the time-saving state of the normal pattern is in progress (S514), and if the time-saving state of the normal pattern is in progress (S514: Yes), the time for the variable display in the second pattern display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S515), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S514 that the normal pattern is in the normal state (S514: No), the time for the variable display in the second pattern display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S516), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during a big win of a special pattern, when the probability of the normal pattern is high, the time for the variable display becomes very short (30 seconds → 3 seconds) compared to when the probability of the normal pattern is low, so that the frequency of the lottery of the normal pattern increases. Therefore, as the frequency of winning the lottery of the normal pattern increases, the electric role 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 becomes easier to open, and the state becomes easier for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64.

In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second pattern display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the changing display being executed in the second pattern display device 83 has elapsed (S517). Note that the change time here is the time that was previously set by the process of S515 or S516 before the changing display was started in the second pattern display device 83.

In the process of S517, if it is determined that the change time has not elapsed (S517: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S517, if it is determined that the change time of the executed change display has elapsed (S517: Yes), the stop display of the second pattern display device 83 is set (S518). In the process of S518, if the lottery for the normal pattern is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S512, the "○" pattern as the second pattern is set to be stopped (illuminated) on the second pattern display device 83. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal pattern is a loss and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "X" pattern as the second pattern is set to be stopped (illuminated) on the second pattern display device 83. When the stop display is set by processing S518, the next time the second pattern display update process (see S907) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) is executed, the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, and the stop pattern (normal pattern) is displayed stopped on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by processing S512 or S513.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 starts, it is determined whether the lottery result (current lottery result) of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol variable processing is a winning normal symbol (S519). If the current lottery result is a winning normal symbol (S519: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the current normal symbol is in a time-saving state (S520). If it is determined that the current normal symbol is in a time-saving state (S520: Yes), the opening time and the number of openings of the electric device 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64 are set to "1 second x 2 times" and the process proceeds to S523. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol is in a normal state (not in a time-saving state) in the process of S520, the opening time and the number of openings of the electric device 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64 are set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time" and the process proceeds to S523.

In the process of S523, the start of opening and closing control of the electric role 64a is set for the time and number of openings set in the process of S521 or S522 (S523), and this process is terminated. When the start of opening and closing control of the electric role 64a is set by the process of S523, the opening and closing control of the electric role 64a is started when the electric role opening and closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is next executed, and the opening and closing control of the electric role 64a is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S521 or S522 are completed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S519 that the current lottery result is a miss for the normal pattern (S519: No), the processes of S520 to S523 are skipped and this process is terminated.

Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed within the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) and is a process for determining whether or not a ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and, if a ball has passed through, acquiring and retaining the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved normal symbol variable display times M) is obtained (S602). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

If the ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S601: No), or if the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 but the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the first area of the empty reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) of the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S605), and this process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal reserved ball counter 203d is referenced, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Next, referring to FIG. 28, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt process stores information on the occurrence of a power outage in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the information on the occurrence of the power outage in the RAM 203 as the setting of the information on the occurrence of the power outage (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout/firing control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the RAM 213. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control currently being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 29, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the main control unit 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is initiated by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control units (peripheral control units such as the voice lamp control unit 113 and the dispensing control unit 111) to become operable (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, so in this case too, the process proceeds to S812.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S805: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S806). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S807: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process also proceeds to S812. Note that, as will be described later in the process of S914 in FIG. 30, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 is saved correctly.

In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S813, S814).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S813, S814) is executed. Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S813, S814) is executed. In the RAM initialization process (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After the RAM 203 initialization process is executed, the process proceeds to S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), power outage information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S807: Yes), the power outage information is cleared (S808) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command upon power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power was cut off (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes capable of starting payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S810, a performance permission command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various performances. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to the main process described below.

Next, referring to FIG. 30, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up processing will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic process with a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update processes of S910 and S911 are executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), an external output process is executed to transmit output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S901). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special pattern variation process (see FIG. 23) or the start winning process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output process, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. required for the third pattern display device 81 to display the variation of the third pattern are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 31) are sent to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when a ball is to be fired, a ball firing signal is sent to the firing control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball count signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, a jackpot performance is executed and a jackpot control process is executed to open or close the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the variable winning device 65 (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the specific winning port 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is met, the specific winning port 65a is closed. This opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric reel opening/closing process is executed to control the opening/closing of the electric reel 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64 (S905). In the electric reel opening/closing process, when the start of the opening/closing control of the electric reel 64a is set by the process of S523 in the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 26), the opening/closing control of the electric reel 64a is started. Note that this opening/closing control of the electric reel 64a continues until the opening time and the number of openings set by the process of S521 or the process of S522 in the normal pattern change process are completed.

Next, a first pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display device 37 (S906). In the first pattern display update process, when a change pattern is set by the process of S307 or S309 of the special pattern change start process (see FIG. 24), the change display according to the change pattern is started in the first pattern display device 37. In this embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED of the LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37 is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED color were to be changed each time the main process was executed, the player would not be able to see the change in the LED color. Therefore, to allow the player to see the change in the LED color, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED color is changed. In other words, the LED color is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 when the LED color is changed.

In addition, in the first pattern display update process, when the change time corresponding to the change pattern set by the process of S307 or S309 of the special pattern change start process (see FIG. 24) ends, the change display being performed in the first pattern display device 37 is terminated, and the stopped pattern (first pattern) is displayed as stopped (lit) in the first pattern display device 37 in the display mode set by the process of S306 or S308 of the special pattern change start process (see FIG. 24).

Next, a second pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the second pattern display device 83 (S907). In the second pattern display update process, when the normal pattern (second pattern) change time is set by the process of S515 or S516 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 26), the second pattern display device 83 starts a change display. As a result, the second pattern display device 83 performs a change display in which the "○" pattern and the "×" pattern as the second pattern are alternately lit. Also, in the second pattern display update process, when the stop display of the second pattern display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 26), the change display being executed in the second pattern display device 83 is terminated, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed (lit) in a stopped state on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S512 or S513 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 26).

Then, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S908). If information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in RAM 203 (S908: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not interrupted. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S909). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and each of the processes from S901 onwards described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S909: No), the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911) until the predetermined time is reached, i.e., within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process.

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 and 239 in this embodiment), the counter is cleared to 0. The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated in the same manner as in the processing of S902 (S911).

Here, the execution time of each process from S901 to S907 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next main process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, it is possible to randomly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, if the power interruption information is stored in the RAM 203 in the process of S908 (S908: Yes), the power is interrupted due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1, which means that the NMI interruption process in FIG. 28 is executed, so the process at the time of power interruption from S912 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interruption process is prohibited (S912), and a power off command indicating that the power has been interrupted is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S913). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (S914), and access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 203.

The processing of S908 is executed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change in the game state performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, so when returning from the power interruption state, the processing can be started from the processing of S901 after the start-up processing is completed. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S901, just as in the case of initialization in the start-up processing. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power interruption, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting processing (see S801 in FIG. 29), so that the processing can be started from the processing of S901. Therefore, the control burden on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed during the main process (see FIG. 30), and is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a special jackpot will start (S1001). Specifically, the process of S214 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) is executed, and if the start of a special jackpot is set, it is determined that a special jackpot will start. In the process of S1001, if a special jackpot will start (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and this process ends.

The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, it sends a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, an opening performance is started in the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if a special jackpot has not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether or not a special jackpot is in progress (S1003). The period during which a special jackpot is in progress includes the period during which the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 are displaying a special jackpot (including during a special jackpot game), and the period during which a predetermined time has passed since the end of the special jackpot game. In the process of S1003, if a special jackpot is not in progress (S1003: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1003, if a special symbol is in the jackpot (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1004). If it is time to start a new round (S1004: Yes), the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1006). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, it transmits a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number to the display control device 114. When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round performance is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1004 that it is not the time to start a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a has been met (S1007). Specifically, it is determined that the closing condition has been met if a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a was opened, or if a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 10 balls) have entered the winning hole after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a was opened.

In the process of S1007, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is met (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008) and this process ends. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not met (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending performance (S1009). Specifically, it is determined that it is time to start the ending performance when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger number of prize balls are paid out than usual has ended.

In the process of S1009, if it is the timing to start the ending performance (S1009: Yes), an ending command is set (S1010) and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the ending performance is initiated in the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined in the process of S1009 that it is not the start timing of the ending performance (S1009: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ending performance (S1011), and if it is determined that it is within the end timing of the ending performance (S1011: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is the end timing of the ending performance (S1011: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is jackpot A (S1012).

If it is determined in the process of S1012 that the jackpot is not A (i.e., that the jackpot is B) (S1012: No), the value of the time-saving counter 203f is overwritten with 100, so that a time-saving period of 100 normal symbols is granted after the jackpot ends (S1013), and the process proceeds to S1015. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1012 that the jackpot this time is A (S1012: Yes), the probability-changing flag 203e is turned on, so that a probability-changing state of a special symbol is granted after the jackpot ends (S1014), and the process proceeds to S1015.

In the process of S1015, which is executed after the process of S1013 or S1014, a status command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the lottery status of the special symbol after the jackpot ends (whether the special symbol is in a guaranteed bonus state or a low probability state for the special symbol) (S1015), the end of the jackpot is set (S1016), and this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 32 to Fig. 42, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The process of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, referring to FIG. 32, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S3901). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup process was started during the execution of the power-off process of S4018 (see FIG. 33) due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (S3902). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 33, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S4015: Yes in FIG. 33), it executes the power-off process of S4018. Before the execution of such power-off processing, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of S4017 is in progress can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off in the processing of S3902 (S3902: No), the current startup processing was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off processing of S4018 was completed, or the processing was started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been corrupted (S3903).

The confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of S3906. Therefore, by checking the data stored in that specific area, if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S3903: Yes), the process proceeds to S3904, and initialization of RAM 223 begins. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3903: No), the process proceeds to S3908.

If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3903: Yes) and the process proceeds to S3904. On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the power cut process of S4018 is completed, or if the startup process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so the data in RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3903: No) and the process proceeds to S3908.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S3902: Yes), this startup process was started after a momentary power outage occurred, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset while the power-off processing of S4018 was in progress. In this case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct, since the power-off processing is in progress. Therefore, in this case, control cannot continue, so the process proceeds to S3904 and initialization of the RAM 223 begins.

In the process of S3904, the entire storage area of RAM 223 is checked (S3904). The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM 223 clears all storage areas of RAM 223 to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all memory areas of the RAM 223 (S3905: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S3906). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data destruction has occurred in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any memory area of the RAM 223 (S3905: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S3907) and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the abnormality in the RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S3908, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S3908). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4018 is executed (see S4017 in FIG. 33). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4018 is executed, so the process of S3908 is reached with the power-off flag on if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of S4018 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3908: Yes), the working area of the RAM is cleared (S3909) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S3910), interrupt permission is set (S3911), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the working area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, when the power-off flag is off and the process reaches S3908, this occurs because, for example, the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, and so the process went from S3904 to S3906 and then to S3908, or because noise or the like caused only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 to be reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3908: No), S3909, which is the process of clearing the working area of RAM 223, is skipped and the process proceeds to S3910, where the initial values of RAM 223 are set (S3910), interrupt permission is set (S3911), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The clearing process of S3909 is skipped because when the process proceeds from S3904 to S3906 and then to S3908, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S3904, and when the start-up process is initiated after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the data in the working area of RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, allowing control of the voice lamp control device 113 to continue.

Next, referring to FIG. 33, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the current processing of S4001 was executed (S4001). If 1 ms or more has not elapsed (S4001: No), the processing of S4002 to S4012 is not executed and the processing proceeds to S4013. The reason for determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed in the processing of S4001 is that, whereas S4002 to S4012 are mainly processing related to display (performance) and do not need to be edited in a short cycle (within 1 ms), it is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S4013 and the processing of updating the variable display setting processing of S4014 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4013 at short intervals, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control device 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4014 at short intervals, it is possible to set up the variable performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination process.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the processing of S4001 (S4001: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by each processing of S4003 to S4014 are sent to the display control device 114 (S4002). Next, the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set to the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S4008 described later (S4003), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S4004). The power-on notification processing is a processing for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. In addition, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the notification by the power-on notification processing is not performed and the processing proceeds to S4005.

In the process of S4005, a customer waiting performance process is executed, and then a reserved ball number display update process is executed (S4006). In the customer waiting performance process, when a predetermined time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is sent as a command to the display control device 114. In the reserved ball number display update process, a process is performed to light up the reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b.

After that, a frame button input monitoring/performance process is executed (S4007). This frame button input monitoring/performance process monitors whether the frame button 22 has been pressed, and sets a corresponding performance when input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In other words, this is a process for displaying a success notification mode or a failure notification mode when the frame button 22 is pressed during the effective operation period of the continuous transformation performance. Details of this frame button input monitoring/performance process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S4008), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S4009). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the settings.

After processing of S4009, the LCD performance execution management process is executed (S4010), and then the menu setting process is executed (S4011). In the LCD performance execution management process, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4008 is executed based on the time set in this LCD performance execution monitoring process. The sound editing and output process of S4009 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the menu setting process, processing is executed according to the operation content of the player when the game menu screen is displayed.

After the processing of S4011, a presentation update process is executed (S4012) to vary the presentation mode according to the remaining time for the change and the values of various timers while the changing display is being executed, and the process proceeds to S4013. Details of this presentation update process (S4012) will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

In the processing of S4013, a command determination process is performed in which processing is performed according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S4013). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. Then, when the command determination process ends, a variable display setting process is executed (S4014). In the variable display setting process, a display variable pattern command is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

When the processing of S4014 is completed, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4015). Information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored when a power outage command is received from the main control unit 110. If information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the processing of S4015 (S4015: Yes), both the power outage flag and the power outage processing in progress flag are turned on (S4017), and the power outage processing is executed (S4018). After the power outage processing is executed, the power outage processing in progress flag is turned off (S4019), and the processing then loops infinitely. In the power outage processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. The stored information on the occurrence of a power outage is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure information is not stored in the process of S4015 (S4015: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4016). If the RAM 223 is not destroyed (S4016: No), the process returns to S4001 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4016: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if the RAM is determined to be destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a store clerk or the like to repair the pachinko machine 10. In addition, if it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, referring to FIG. 34, the frame button input monitoring and performance process (S4007) executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring and performance process. As described above, this frame button input monitoring and performance process (see FIG. 34) is a process that monitors input of the frame button 22, and sets a corresponding performance when input of the frame button 22 is confirmed.

In the frame button input monitoring and performance process (see FIG. 34), first it is determined whether the valid period flag 223e is on or not (S4101). If it is off (S4101: No), this means that it is not the valid operation period, and this process is terminated. This is because if it is not the valid operation period, even if pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, there is no possibility of displaying the failure notification mode or success notification mode.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4101 that the valid period flag 223e is on (S4101: Yes), this means that the current period is the valid operation period, and it is then determined whether pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S4102). If it is determined in the process of S4102 that pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S4102: Yes), a transformation setting process is executed to set the success notification mode or failure notification mode (S4103), and this process ends. Details of this transformation setting process (S4103) will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4102 that pressing of the frame button 22 has not been detected (S4102: No), the process of S4103 is skipped and this process ends as is.

Next, the above-mentioned transformation setting process (S4103) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 35. In this transformation setting process, first, the valid period flag 223e is set to OFF, and the valid period timer 223f is reset to 0 (S4201). This sets the end of the valid operation period for the successive transformation performance.

When the processing of S4201 is completed, the value of the transformation count counter 223g is read (S4202), and it is determined whether the read number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) matches the upper limit number of transformations for the continuous transformation performance currently being performed (S4203). In the processing of S4203, if it is determined that the value of the transformation count counter 223g matches the upper limit value (S4203: Yes), the remaining change time in the change display is identified (S4204), and the performance mode of the development performance corresponding to the identified remaining change time (T) is selected from the development performance mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 15(b)) (S4205).

When the processing of S4205 is completed, data corresponding to the presentation mode of the selected development presentation is stored in the development presentation storage area 223m (S4206), and the display time of the current failure notification mode is calculated from the difference between the remaining change time identified in the processing of S4204 and the presentation time of the development presentation selected in the processing of S4205 (S4207). Specifically, half the time obtained by subtracting the presentation time of the development presentation from the remaining change time T is identified as the display time of the failure notification mode. Next, the timer value corresponding to the display time of the identified failure notification mode is set to the failure notification mode timer 223j (S4208), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4203 that the value of the transformation count counter 223g is less than the upper limit (S4203: No), it is determined whether the remaining change time (T) is within the period in which the success notification mode can be displayed (whether the value is equal to or greater than the lower limit value corresponding to the current performance type) (S4209). If it is determined in the process of S4209 that the success notification mode can be displayed (S4209: Yes), each process of S4210 to S4212 is executed to set the display of the success notification mode. That is, the value of the transformation count counter 223g is updated by adding 1 (S4210), the success notification mode according to the value of the transformation count counter 223g is set (S4211), the timer value corresponding to 1 second is set to the value of the success notification mode timer 223i (S4212), and this process ends.

In contrast, if it is determined in the process of S4209 that the success notification mode cannot be displayed (the remaining change time T is less than the lower limit value specified in the transformation performance selection table 222b) (S4209: No), the above-mentioned processes of S4204 to S4208 are executed to set the display of the failure notification mode, and this process ends.

By this transformation setting process (see FIG. 35), by pressing the frame button 22 within a range not falling below the lower limit of the remaining change time set for each performance type, the success notification mode can be displayed up to the upper limit of the number of transformations. In addition, if the frame button 22 is pressed below the lower limit of the remaining change time, the failure notification mode can be displayed regardless of whether the upper limit of the number of transformations has been reached. This makes the player want to display as many success notification modes as possible within a range not falling below the lower limit of the remaining change time, so that the player can be made to actively press the frame button 22. Therefore, the player's motivation to participate in the continuous transformation performance can be improved. In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation performance (does not press the frame button 22) plays this pachinko machine 10, the performance period of the continuous transformation performance will pass with a relatively small number of transformations, even in the case of a continuous transformation performance that is originally highly anticipated (has a large upper limit of the number of transformations). This can result in a small number of transformations, and can cause cases where the continuous transformation performance ends with a small number of transformations due to the passage of the performance period, even though the continuous transformation performance has a large upper limit (i.e., a high expectation of a jackpot). This can increase the expectation of a jackpot even when the continuous transformation performance ends with a small number of transformations.

Next, the above-mentioned performance update process (S4012) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 36. This performance update process (S4012) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 33) of the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, is a process for varying the performance mode during execution of the variable display in accordance with the remaining variable time, the values of various timers, etc. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this performance update process.

In this performance update process (see FIG. 36), first, it is determined whether or not a change display is being performed (S4301), and if it is determined that a change display is not being performed (S4301: No), this process ends and returns to the main process (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that a change display is being performed (S4301: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the transformation performance in progress flag 223h is on (i.e., whether a continuous transformation performance is being performed) (S4302). If it is determined in the process of S4302 that the transformation performance in progress flag 223h is off (S4302: No), a transformation performance start determination process is executed to determine whether or not to start a continuous transformation performance based on the remaining change time (S4303), and this process ends. Details of this transformation performance start determination process (S4303) will be described later with reference to FIG. 37(a).

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S4302 that the transformation performance in progress flag 223h is on (S4302: Yes), since the continuous transformation performance is being executed, it is first determined whether or not the valid period flag 223e is on (S4304), and if it is on (S4304: Yes), valid period processing is executed to determine whether or not the valid operation period has ended (S4305), and this processing is terminated. Details of this valid period processing (S4305) will be described later with reference to FIG. 37(b).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4304 that the valid period flag 223e is off (i.e., the operation is not in the valid period) (S4304: No), it is then determined whether the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is greater than 0 (whether the success notification mode is being displayed) (S4306). If the value is greater than 0 (S4306: Yes), a process during the success notification mode is executed to determine whether it is time to end the success notification mode (S4307), and this process is terminated. Details of this process during the success notification mode (S4307) will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

If it is determined in the process of S4306 that the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is 0 (i.e., the success notification mode is not being displayed) (S4306: No), it is then determined whether the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is greater than 0 (whether the failure notification mode is being displayed) (S4308). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S4308: Yes), a failure notification mode process is executed to determine the timing for ending the failure notification mode (S4309), and this process is terminated. Details of this failure notification mode process (S4309) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

In the process of S4308, if it is determined that the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is 0 (i.e., the failure notification mode is not being displayed) (S4308: No), it is determined whether the value of the transition performance time timer 223k is greater than 0 (i.e., whether the transition performance is being executed) (S4310). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S4310: Yes), a transition performance in progress process is executed to determine whether to switch from the transition performance to the development performance (S4311), and this process is terminated. Details of this transition performance in progress process (S4311) will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. On the other hand, in the process of S4310, if it is determined that the value of the transition performance time timer 223k is 0 (S4310: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 33).

By executing this performance update process (see Figure 36), appropriate control can be executed according to the progress of the consecutive transformation performance, so that the performance mode in the consecutive transformation performance can be updated appropriately.

Next, the details of the transformation performance start determination process (S4303) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 37(a). As described above, this transformation performance start determination process (S4303) is a process for determining whether or not to start a continuous transformation performance based on the remaining change time.

In the transformation start determination process (see FIG. 37(a)), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the continuous transformation performance (the timing when 11 seconds have passed since the start of the transformation) (S4401), and if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the continuous transformation performance (S4401: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is time to start the continuous transformation performance (S4401: Yes), first, a display command for starting the continuous transformation performance is set (S4402). Next, a timer value (5000) corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the validity period timer 223f, and the validity period flag 223e is set to ON (S4403). Then, the transformation performance in progress flag 223h is set to ON (S4404), and this process ends.

By executing this transformation effect start determination process (see FIG. 37(a)), the continuous transformation effect can be accurately executed at the same timing each time a variable display set to execute the continuous transformation effect is executed.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned valid period processing (S4305) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 37(b). As described above, this valid period processing (S4305) is processing for determining whether or not the valid operation period has ended.

In the valid period process (see FIG. 37(b)), first, the value of the valid period timer 223f is updated by subtracting 1 from it (S4501). Note that since the valid period process (see FIG. 37(b)) is executed every 1 millisecond, the value of the valid period timer 223f is subtracted by 1 every 1 millisecond.

When the processing of S4501 is completed, it is next determined whether the value of the valid period timer 223f after the subtraction in the processing of S4501 has become 0 (S4502). If the value of the valid period timer 223f is not 0 (S4502: No), it is not time for the valid period of operation to end, so this processing is terminated.

In contrast, if it is determined in the process of S4502 that the value of the valid period timer 223f after subtraction has become 0 (S4502: Yes), the transformation setting process described above (S4503, see FIG. 35) is executed to determine the display mode to be displayed according to the number of transformations (number of times the successful notification mode has been displayed) and the remaining change time (T), and this process ends. Note that the details of the transformation setting process (S4503) have already been described above with reference to FIG. 35, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned process during the success notification mode (S4307) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 38. As described above, this process during the success notification mode (S4307) is a process for determining the end timing of the success notification mode.

In this process during the success notification mode (see FIG. 38), first, the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is updated by subtracting 1 (S4601), and it is determined whether the value of the success notification mode timer 223i after subtraction has become 0 (S4602). In the process of S4602, if it is determined that the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is not 0 (S4602: No), it is not time to end the success notification mode (the success notification mode continues), so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4602 that the value of the success notification mode timer 223i after subtraction is 0 (S4602: Yes), this means that the display time (5 seconds) of the success notification mode has elapsed, so the processes of S4603 to S4611 are executed to set the performance mode after the display period has ended. Specifically, it is first determined whether the value of the transformation count counter 223g is 5 or not (S4603).

If it is determined in the process of S4603 that the value of the transformation count counter 223g is not 5 (S4603: No), a display command for notifying the start of the effective operation period is set (S4604). The display command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display command for notifying the start of the effective operation period, it executes a display mode (see FIG. 5(b)) corresponding to the effective operation period in the third pattern display device 81.

After the process of S4604 is completed, the timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the valid period timer 223f, and the valid period flag 223e is set to ON to set the start of the valid operation period (S4605), and this process is terminated. This allows a new valid operation period to start.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4603 that the value of the transformation count counter 223g is 5 (S4603: Yes), this means that five success notification modes have already been displayed and there is no need to set any more effective operation periods, so the development presentation and transition presentation modes corresponding to the remaining change time (T) are determined. Specifically, the remaining change time (T) of the change display is identified (S4606), and the presentation mode of the development presentation corresponding to the identified remaining change time (T) is selected from the development presentation mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 15(b)) (S4607).

When the processing of S4607 is completed, data corresponding to the presentation mode of the selected development presentation is stored in the development presentation storage area 223m (S4608), and the difference between the remaining variable time (T) and the presentation time of the development presentation selected in the processing of S4607 is identified as the presentation time of the transition presentation (S4609). Then, the timer value corresponding to the identified presentation time is set in the transition presentation time timer 223k (S4610), a display command indicating the start of the transition presentation is set (S4611), and this processing ends.

The display command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives a display command to notify the start of the transition performance, it starts the transition performance (see FIG. 8(a)) in the third pattern display device 81.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned process during failure notification mode (S4309) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 39. As described above, this process during failure notification mode (S4309) is a process for determining the end timing of the failure notification mode.

In the failure notification mode process (see FIG. 39), first, the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is decremented by 1 (S4701), and it is determined whether the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j after the decrement has become 0 (S4702). In the process of S4702, if it is determined that the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j has not become 0 (S4702: No), this means that it is not time to end the failure notification mode, and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4702 that the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j has reached 0 (S4702: Yes), this means that the timing to end the failure notification mode has arrived, so the difference between the remaining variable time (T) and the performance time of the development performance of the mode indicated by the data stored in the development performance storage area 223m is taken, and this difference time is identified as the performance time of the transition performance (S4703). Then, the identified performance time is set to the transition performance time timer 223k (S4704), a display command indicating the start of the transition performance is set (S4705), and this processing ends.

The display command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives a display command to notify the start of the transition performance, it starts the transition performance (see FIG. 8(a)) in the third pattern display device 81.

Next, the details of the transition performance processing (S4311) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 40. As described above, this transition performance processing (S4311) is a process for determining the end timing of the transition performance.

In the process during the transition performance (see FIG. 40), first, the value of the transition performance time timer 223k is decremented by 1 (S4801), and it is determined whether the timer value after the decrement has reached 0 (S4802). In the process of S4802, if it is determined that the value of the transition performance time timer 223k has not reached 0 (S4802: No), this means that it is not time for the transition performance to end, and the process is then terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4802 that the value of the transition performance timer 223k is 0 (i.e., it is the timing for the transition performance to end) (S4802: Yes), then the start of the development performance corresponding to the data stored in the development performance storage area 223m is set (S4803). Then, the transformation performance in progress flag 223h is set to OFF (S4804), the value of the transformation count counter 223g is reset to 0 (S4805), and this process ends. As described above, the failure notification mode and the display time of the transition performance are set so that the timing for the end of the development performance and the timing for the end of the change display are exactly the same. Therefore, the development performance set in the process of S4803 can be ended at the timing for the end of the change. Therefore, the performance mode can be executed preferably.

Next, the command determination process (S4013) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4013). The command determination process (S4013) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4901). If it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S4901: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4902), the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S4903), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referenced when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. It is then used to set a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control unit 114 of the start of the variation performance and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has not been received (S4901: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4904). If a stop type command has been received (S4904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d in the RAM 223 is set to on (S4905), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4906), and the process returns to the main process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referenced when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) described below is executed. It is then used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation performance.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S4904: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4907). If the reserved ball number command has been received (S4907: Yes), the value contained in the received reserved ball number command, i.e., the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110 (the number of reserved times N of the variable display of the special pattern), is extracted and stored in the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control unit 113 (S4908). In addition, in the process of S4908, a reserved ball number command for display is set to notify the display control unit 114 of the updated value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b. After the process of S4908 is completed, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning) or when a lottery for a special symbol is performed. Therefore, each time an initial winning is detected or a lottery for a special symbol is performed, the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 by the processing of S4908. Therefore, even if the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 when the initial winning is detected or when a lottery for a special symbol is performed. When the process of S4908 is executed, a display reserved ball number command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b. As a result, the display control device 114 displays a reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined in the processing of S4907 that the reserved ball count command has not been received (S4907: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4909). If it is determined that a winning information command has been received (S4909: Yes), the information of the received winning command is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S4910), and the process returns to the main processing.

If it is determined in the process of S4909 that the winning information command has not been received (S4909: No), then it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S4911). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (S4911: Yes), then a display opening command is set (S4912) and the process returns to the main process. The display opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, it starts an opening performance in the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S4911, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S4911: No), it is then determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4913). Then, if it is determined that a round number command has been received (S4913: Yes), the number of rounds of the jackpot is extracted from the received round number command (S4914). Then, a display round number command is set to instruct the display control device 114 to display the extracted round number on the third symbol display device 81 (S4915), and this process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, it starts the round performance on the third symbol display device 81.

If it is determined in the process of S4913 that the round number command has not been received (S4913: No), then it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4916). If an ending command has been received (S4916: Yes), an ending setting process is executed to set the display mode of the ending performance (S4917), and this process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, it starts the ending performance in the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, if an ending command has not been received in the processing of S4916 (S4916: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, processing corresponding to the received command is executed (S4918), and the process returns to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command to be used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is executed, and the processing result is stored in RAM 223, and if it is a command to be used by the display control device 114, the command is set to send that command to the display control device 114.

By executing this command determination process, appropriate processing can be performed according to the command output from the main control unit 110.

Next, referring to FIG. 42, the variable display setting process (S4014) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4014). This variable display setting process (S4014) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process that generates and sets a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81.

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether the variable start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on or not (S5001). Then, if it is determined that the variable start flag 223c is not on (i.e., it is off) (S5001: No), since no variable pattern command has been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S5008. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable start flag 223c is on (S5001: Yes), the variable start flag 223c is turned off (S5002), and then, in the process of S4903 of the command determination process (see FIG. 41), the variable display mode of the current variable display is determined from the variable pattern table 222a based on the variable pattern type in the variable performance extracted from the variable pattern command (S5003).

Then, it is determined whether the determined type of change pattern is a mode involving a successive transformation performance (S5004), and if it is determined that it is a mode involving a successive transformation performance (S5004: Yes), the mode of the successive transformation performance is determined based on the transformation performance selection table 222b (see FIG. 15(a)) and the value of the performance counter 223n (S5005), and the process proceeds to S5006. On the other hand, if it is determined that the type of change pattern determined in the process of S5004 is a mode not involving a successive transformation performance (S5004: No), the process of S5005 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5006.

In the process of S5006, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the mode of the variable display determined in the process of S5003 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S5006). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variable performance so that the third pattern display device 81 displays the variable display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S5007). In the process of S5007, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is shifted in order to the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S5008.

In the process of S5008, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on or not (S5008). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (i.e., it is off) (S5008: No), since a stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this variable display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S5009: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S5009), and then, in the process of S4906 of the command determination process (see FIG. 41), the stop type in the variable presentation extracted from the stop type command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S5010).

Then, the stop type indicated by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81 (S5011), and based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S5012), and this process ends. By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 controls the stop display of the variable performance so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Fig. 43 to Fig. 57. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing which is repeatedly executed after power-on, a command interrupt processing which is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt processing which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. The MPU 231 usually executes the main processing, and executes the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of a command or the detection of a V interrupt signal. Note that when the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be executed.

First, referring to FIG. 43, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute the initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the main process is started according to the following flow. When the power supply circuit 115 supplies power to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231, using its hardware configuration, sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. The MPU 231 then fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction, thereby starting the main process.

If all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, when the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 will consume a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This increases the time it takes to start up the MPU 231, resulting in a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, starting with the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. Since the NOR flash memory is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is started so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S6001) executed during the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are stored in the character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for a large capacity in a small area, so that not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored, while there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

However, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will deteriorate even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231. Therefore, in this boot process, a process is executed in which the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b provided in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM.

Specifically, first, based on the operation of the hardware of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program read from the first program memory area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c (S6101). The predetermined amount of the control program transferred here includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program memory area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the starting address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND type flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches instructions, and executes various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in accordance with the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a (S6103). Specifically, the control programs and some of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 43) to be executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 43) is completed (S6105), thereby completing the execution of the boot program and terminating this boot process.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all composed of DRAM. Then, when the boot process ends, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, and the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM composed of the DRAM, which has a fast read speed, and perform various controls, thereby maintaining high processing performance in the display control device 114. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR flash memory 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding the extremely small capacity NOR flash memory 234d to the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of the character ROM 234 associated with this shortening of the time can be suppressed.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 44, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 are configured to include all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 may be part of the boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. The boot program transferred here may transfer a predetermined amount of control programs including all remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further execute a process of setting the top address of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

The boot program transferred by the process of S6101 may further transfer a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. The boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process may further transfer a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the process of transferring a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a may be repeated multiple times, including the processes of S6101 and S6102, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot program not stored in the first program memory area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a all at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a and transfer it to the program storage area 233a in a predetermined amount at a time.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all of the boot program may be stored in the first program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without executing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and therefore reduces the number of times the program is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. This allows the MPU 231 to start controlling the auxiliary performance unit, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 43. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and for the I/O devices, etc. Also, processes such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 are performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. The initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute image drawing and display processing so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, during an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 can start up normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the power-on main image area 235a, which is the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235.

When the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction is complete, image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal to MPU 231 indicating the end of transfer. By receiving this transfer end signal, MPU 231 can know that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended. Note that when image controller 237 has completed the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction, it may write transfer end information indicating the end of transfer to a register or a partial area of built-in memory provided inside image controller 237. MPU 231 may then read information from this register or partial area of built-in memory at any time and detect the writing of transfer end information by image controller 237, thereby knowing that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended.

The image data transferred to the power-on main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes the top address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image is stored, the data size of the image data, information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the top address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image data transferred to the power-on variable image area 235b is then retained so that it is not overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a resident image transfer setting process is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process described below (see FIG. 55(a)) (see S7602 in FIG. 55(a)).

Furthermore, the simple image display flag 233c is maintained on until the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. As a result, during that time, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 45(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 45(b)) are executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in FIG. 17 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45(b)).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time for all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so that while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, while the display control device 114 is displaying the power-on main image on the third pattern display device 114, the display control device 114 can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, players can recognize that some kind of initialization process is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, and so can wait until the initialization is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped until the image data that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operation checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, making it possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on, and the use of a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234 prevents the efficiency of operation checks from deteriorating.

In addition, the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 transfers the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power is turned on. Therefore, if the player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), and an instruction to start the variable performance is given by the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when a display variable pattern command is received, the power-on variable image shown in Fig. 17(b) and (c) can be displayed immediately during the variable performance period, and a simple variable performance can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been drawn reliably by the simple variable performance, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, the power-on main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the transfer takes time, and the power-on main image continues to be displayed for a long time after power is turned on. However, in this pachinko machine 10, a simple variable performance can be performed using the power-on variable image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on, so that the player can play with peace of mind even while the power-on main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on, for example, immediately after recovery from a power outage.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after interrupt permission is set by the processing of S6006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

Next, referring to FIG. 45(a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 45(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored sequentially in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described below, and processing according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to FIG. 45(b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 45(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is identified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) of the image is created, and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute the drawing process and display process of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing process or display process of the image is completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

Here, we will first explain the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing, and then explain the details of each process with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 45(b), first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so in order to display a normal performance image on the third pattern display device 81 instead of the power-on image shown in FIG. 17, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. If a display demo command or a display variation pattern command is stored, a demo display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable performance, it is highly likely that a display variable pattern command and a display stop type command are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that state is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 46 to 51.

In the display setting process (S6303), the contents of one frame of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specifically identified based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. In addition, depending on the processing status, etc., the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined presentation mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 52 to 54.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task processing, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, which was specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simplified display setting process (S6309), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and even when a continuous preview command or a back image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data of the continuous preview image used in the continuous preview performance and image data of the changed back image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the forwarding setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 55 and 56.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the drawing list shown in FIG. 21 is generated from the types of various sprites constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each sprite, which were determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305), and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

Next, the display control device 114 executes an update process for various counters (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. An example of a counter updated by the process of S6307 is a stop pattern counter (not shown) for determining the stop pattern. The value of this stop pattern counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of a display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (jackpot A, jackpot B, front and rear miss reach, reach other than front and rear miss, complete miss) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed, so a simple command determination process (S6308) is executed to cause the power-on image shown in FIG. 17 to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and then a simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the processing proceeds to S6304.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to Figures 46 to 51. First, Figure 46 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

As shown in FIG. 46, in this command determination process, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), the command determination process ends and the process returns to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag is set to ON (S6402) to notify the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed in the ON state, and then the type of each command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and processing returns to S6401.

Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 47(a). FIG. 47(a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation presentation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, the main control unit 110 always judges the start of the fluctuation at least several seconds apart, so two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are never received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display fluctuation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a change presentation having a shorter change time than the set display data table is actually instructed by the main control device 110, the next display change pattern command will be received from the main control device 110 while a change presentation according to the set change display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a different change display will suddenly begin, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In contrast to this, as in this embodiment, by setting the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d, even if the main control unit 110 has actually instructed a change presentation with a longer change time than the set display data table, as described below, the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that a demo presentation is displayed after the change presentation according to the display data table buffer 233d has ended and until the next display pattern command is received from the main control unit 110, so that the player can continue to watch the change of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 without feeling any discomfort.

In the process of S6502, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to off (S6505), the fluctuation pattern command processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

When this variable pattern command processing is executed, in the display setting processing (see FIG. 52), while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6504, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, and the contents of one frame's worth of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are identified. At the same time, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of S6502, and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is controlled so that it is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the display setting process (see FIG. 52), the timing counter 233h, in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, is used to time the time of the variable performance specified in the variable display data table, and when it is determined that the variable performance in the variable display data table has ended, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control unit 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 46. If it is determined in the processing of S6404 that there is no variation pattern command for display (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a stop type command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6406), and if there is a variation type command for display (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 47(b). FIG. 47(b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command process (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front or rear miss reach, reach other than front or rear miss, or complete miss) is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop pattern counter, which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45(b)) is executed, to finally set the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (S6602).

Then, among the stop pattern discrimination flags provided for each stop pattern, the stop pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop pattern discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop patterns are set on (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variable display data table, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table, offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is described as type information for identifying the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In the above-mentioned task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is identified from the stop pattern discrimination flag set by the processing of S6603, and the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to this identified third pattern is stored is identified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third pattern is stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Note that the main control device 110 always judges the start of fluctuations at least a few seconds apart, so it will never receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display stop type commands to be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display stop type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be a complete miss, and the stop type table is determined. As a result, the stop pattern corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S6602.

If a stopping pattern corresponding to a "special pattern jackpot" were set, the third pattern display device 81 would display a stopping pattern corresponding to a "special pattern jackpot" even if the actual result was a "miss for the special pattern," which could lead the player to mistakenly believe that the pachinko machine 10 had a "special pattern jackpot," thereby reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, by setting a stopping pattern corresponding to a complete miss, as in this embodiment, if the actual result was a "special pattern jackpot," the pachinko machine 10 would be a "special pattern jackpot" even if the third pattern display device 81 displayed a stopping pattern that was a complete miss, which would delight the player.

Returning to FIG. 46, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command for display (S6408: Yes), the opening command processing is executed (S6409) and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 48(a). FIG. 48(a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command processing executes processing corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6701 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6701, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to off (S6705), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

When this opening command processing is executed, the display setting processing updates the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6704, extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6701, and specifies the contents of one frame's worth of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, it extracts the transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of S6702, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image data of the sprite required in the set opening display data table is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Returning to FIG. 46, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S6408 that there is no opening command for display (S6408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a round number command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for display (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the number of rounds command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 48(b). FIG. 48(b) is a flowchart showing the number of rounds command processing. This number of rounds command processing executes processing corresponding to the number of rounds command for display received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6802).

Then, based on the number of rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6804). Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to off (S6805), the number of rounds command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 46. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no round number command for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and if there is an ending command for display (S6412: Yes), ending command processing is executed (S6413), and processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing executes processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending performance indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6904). Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to off (S6905), ending command processing is terminated, and processing returns to command determination processing.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 46. If it is determined in the processing of S6412 that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a background image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and if there is a background image change command (S6414: Yes), background image change command processing is executed (S6415), and processing returns to S6401.

Here, the rear image change command processing (S6415) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 50(a). FIG. 50(a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing executes processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command processing, first, a rear image change flag that notifies the normal image transfer setting processing (S7603) of the rear image change resulting from receiving a rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). Then, of the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type (rear image A, B), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and the rear image discrimination flags corresponding to the other rear image types are set to OFF (S7002), after which the rear image change command processing ends and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S7001 is on, the rear image type after the change is identified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S7002. Then, if the identified rear image type is rear B or rear C, as described above, since part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is not resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified in the display data table that either back surface A or B is to be displayed based on the back surface type of the back surface image specified in the display data table, the type of back surface image to be displayed at that time is identified from the back surface image discrimination flag set by the processing of S7002, and further, the range of the back surface image to be displayed is identified over time, and the type of RAM in which image data corresponding to that range of the back surface image is stored (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are identified.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously within 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, there should be no cases where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a rear image change command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received first may be turned on, or the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. In addition, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by that command may be turned on. This change in the rear image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, so it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 46. If it is determined in the processing of S6414 that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and if there is an error command (S6416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6417), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the error command processing (S6417) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 50(b). FIG. 50(b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing executes processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag that is in the ON state and indicates that an error has occurred is set to ON (S7101). Then, of the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag that corresponds to the error type indicated by the error command is set to ON, and the other error discrimination flags are set to OFF (S7102), the error command processing is terminated, and the process returns to command judgment processing.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7102, and a process is executed to display a warning image corresponding to that error type on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S7102 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, allowing players and hall staff to correctly understand the error occurrence status.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 46. If it is determined in the processing of S6416 that there is no error command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether there is a command related to the continuous transformation performance (S6418), and if there is a command related to the continuous transformation performance (S6418: Yes), transformation performance related command processing is executed (S6419), and the processing returns to S6401.

Note that commands related to successive transformation effects include, for example, a display command indicating the start of the effective operation period, a display command indicating the start of display of each notification mode (success notification mode, failure notification mode), a display command indicating the start of a transitional effect, and a display command indicating the start of a developmental effect. Display data tables for displaying these display modes are stored in the data table storage area 223b, similar to variable display data tables, etc. By executing the transformation effect related command process (S6419), the type of display mode instructed to start displaying and the display time, etc. are determined from the command related to successive transformation effects, and the corresponding display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Here, the details of the transformation performance related command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the transformation performance related command processing. This transformation performance related command processing executes processing corresponding to the continuous transformation performance related command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the transformation performance-related command processing, the display data table corresponding to the performance indicated by the command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7201), and the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7202). Next, time data corresponding to the performance time indicated by the command is set in the clock counter 233h (S7203), the pointer 233f is initialized (S7204), this processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing. Note that the continuous transformation performance is a type of performance mode that is set during the execution of the variable display, and the fact that the continuous transformation performance is executed means that it is executed before the variable pattern ends after the variable pattern command is set (the variable pattern command processing (see FIG. 47(a)) is executed). Therefore, since the demo display flag and the fixed display flag are already set to off in the variable pattern command processing (see FIG. 47(a)), there is no need to turn these flags off again in the transformation performance-related command processing (see FIG. 51).

Returning to FIG. 46 for further explanation, if it is determined in the processing of S6418 that there is no command related to the continuous transformation performance (S6418: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6420), and processing proceeds to S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the processing of each command has been executed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the processes of S6402 to S6420 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6420 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination process ends.

The simple command determination process (S6308), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45(b)), is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 17, i.e., the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 47(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 47(b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, while the other commands are discarded without executing the processes corresponding to those commands.

In the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501, and since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, in the processing of S6502, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and its contents are cleared.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to Figures 52 to 54. Figure 52 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

As shown in FIG. 52, in this display setting process, it is determined whether the new command flag is on (S7301), and if the new command flag is not on, i.e., it is off (S7301: No), it is determined that a new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the processes of S7302 to S7304 are skipped, and the process moves to S7305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7301: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7302), the process corresponding to the new command is executed by the processes of S7303 and S7304.

In the process of S7303, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7303: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7304).

Now, with reference to Figure 53, the warning image setting process will be described in detail. Figure 53 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is for expanding image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data for displaying warning images of errors corresponding to all error discrimination flags that are set to on on the third pattern display device 81 is expanded (S7401).

In the task processing (see S6304 in FIG. 45(b)), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is identified based on this expanded warning image data, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after processing S7401, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7402) and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 52. After the warning image setting process (S7304), or in the process of S7303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, i.e., is off (S7303: No), then the process proceeds to S7305.

In S7305, pointer update processing is executed (S7305). Details of the pointer update processing will now be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update processing is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address from which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7501). That is, in principle, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Also, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is written at address "0000H" and the actual data of each table is specified from address "0001H" onwards. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the actual data can be read from each data table in order starting from address "0001H".

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7501, it is then determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information (S7502). If the data is End information (S7502: Yes), this means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Then, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7503), and if it is a demo display data table (S7503: Yes), time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is set in the timing counter 233h (S7504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S7505), and this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the third pattern display device 81 can be made to repeatedly display demo performances.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (S7503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S7506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, the menu display data table, and the two-dimensional code display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents of the previous address in which the End information is written are always expanded, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7502: No), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to FIG. 52, the explanation will continue. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7306). In the task process, based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S7306 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Then, the value of the timing counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7307), and it is determined whether the value of the timing counter 233h after decrement is 0 or less (S7308). If the value of the timing counter 233h is 1 or more (S7308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the timing counter 233h is 0 or less (S7308: Yes), this means that the performance time for the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform a stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on (S7309).

If the result is that the final display flag is off (S7309: No), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7310), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7311). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the final display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S7312), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7313). Then, after the final display flag, which indicates that the final display is being performed in the on state, is set on (S7314), the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are copied directly to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S7315), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In this way, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents can be set so that the final display performance of the stopped patterns in the variable performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the end of the performance. Also, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting a separate program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not subjected to a large load, so a wide variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by the processing of S7315 is used to identify the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the next variable performance. That is, as described above, the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stop pattern of the previous variable performance, and in the variable display data table, pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is recorded until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change based on the data table. In the task processing (S6304), the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is identified from the previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by S7315 until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change, and the pattern offset information obtained by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop pattern in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7309, if the confirmation display flag is on (S7309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7316). If the demo display flag is off (S7316: No), this means that the value of the timing counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmation display performance, so the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7317), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7318). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S7319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7320), the demo display flag, which indicates that a demo performance is being performed in the on state, is set to on (S7321), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

This allows the drawing content to be set so that if a display variable pattern command indicating the start of the next variable performance or an opening command is not received after the final display performance has ended, a demo performance will automatically be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the processing of S7316, if the demo display flag is on (S7316: Yes), this means that the demo performance is performed after the final display performance has ended, and that the demo performance has ended, so the display setting processing is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demo performance will start again, as described above, by the pointer update processing executed in the next V interrupt processing, so that the demo performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 45(b)). However, in the simple display setting processing, a processing is performed to set in the display data table buffer 233d a display data table that specifies that one of the images (either FIG. 17(b) or (c)) of the power-on variable image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is to be displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined time after the performance time of the variable performance using the power-on variable image has ended.

Next, with reference to Figures 55 and 56, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, Figure 55 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S7601). Then, if the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process is executed (S7602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55(b).

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S7601 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, i.e., it is off (S7601: No), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfers of image data from the character ROM 234 are to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Next, referring to FIG. 55(b), we will explain the resident image transfer setting process (S7602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 55(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S7701), and if a transfer instruction has been sent (S7701: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7702). In this process of S7702, after an instruction to transfer image data has been sent to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has been completed. Then, if it is determined by the process of S7702 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7702: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, and therefore the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7702: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7703. Also, if the result of processing in S7701 indicates that a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been sent to the image controller 237 (S7701: No), the process proceeds to S7703.

In the processing of S7703, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7703: No), a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the untransferred resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7704), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information on the resident target image data that has not yet been transferred, and the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 where the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the transfer destination (an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers it to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

If, as a result of the processing of S7703, all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7705), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45(b)), instead of the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 45(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 45(b)), the command determination process (see FIG. 46 to FIG. 51) and the display setting process (see FIG. 52 to FIG. 54) are executed, so that the drawing of the normal image is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 thereafter is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) (see S7601: No in FIG. 55(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 can transfer all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and power-on variable image that have already been transferred during the main processing. The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process remains resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

Therefore, after all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing in the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as the back image, the third pattern, the character pattern, and error messages, as well as image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113, the display control unit 114, etc. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained from various operations performed by the player at any time to displaying some image on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, we will explain the normal image transfer setting process (S7603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the information written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7305) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is obtained from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7801). Then, it is determined whether the obtained information is transfer data information (S7802), and if it is transfer data information (S7802: Yes), the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (S7803), and further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233, which indicates that image data to be transferred is present in the ON state, is set to ON (S7804), and the process proceeds to S7805.

In addition, in the process of S7802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but is Null data (S7802: No), the processes of S7803 and S7804 are skipped and the process proceeds to S7805. In the process of S7805, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has ended (S7805), and if a transfer instruction has been set (S7805: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7806).

In the processing of S7806, after an instruction to transfer image data is set for the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. Then, if it is determined by the processing of S7806 that the transfer process has not ended (S7806: No), image transfer processing is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7806: Yes), the processing proceeds to S7807. Also, if the result of the processing of S7805 shows that an instruction to transfer image data has not been set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S7805: No), the processing proceeds to S7807.

In the processing of S7807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7807). If the transfer start flag is on (S7807: Yes), image data that should be transferred is present, so the transfer start flag is turned off (S7808), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the processing proceeds to S7813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7807: No), it is then determined whether or not the background image change flag is on (S7809). Then, if the background image change flag is not on but off (S7809: No), image data that should be transferred is not present, so the normal image transfer setting processing ends.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S7809: Yes), this means that the rear image has been changed, so the rear image change flag is set to off (S7810), and then, of the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag that is on is identified, and that image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7811). Furthermore, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the rear image data corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag that is on is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are obtained (S7812), and the process proceeds to S7813.

If the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is for rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so there is no image data to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, in the process of S7812, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is for rear A, the normal image transfer process ends as is.

In the process of S7813, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813). This determination in the process of S7813 is made by referencing the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage status corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage status is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the storage status is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the result of the processing of S7813 is that the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being transferred unnecessarily from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S7813 is that the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7814). As a result, the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 where the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of the image to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Then, when the transfer is complete, it transmits a transfer end signal to the MPU 231.

After processing of S7814, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7815), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on," and by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, a process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, if it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, image data used in the opening performance can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236. Also, if the rear image is changed based on receipt of a rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, image data used for that rear image that is not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this embodiment, in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for the image controller 237 for the image data to be transferred according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

In this case, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be ensured to be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed and controlled for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, a drawing list as shown in FIG. 21 is generated (S7901) from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, filter specification information), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305). That is, in the process of S7901, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of that sprite is stored are identified for each sprite, and the parameters required for that sprite determined in the task process are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites that should be placed furthest behind the sprites that should be placed in the foreground in one frame of image, and a drawing list is generated by describing, in the rearranged sprite order, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprites are stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprites as detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. Also, if a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (start address of the storage source) and the end address (end address of the storage source) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added as transfer data information to the end of the drawing list.

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, so the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are sent to the image controller (S7902). Here, if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the first frame buffer 236b to expand the image drawn. Also, if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the second frame buffer 236c to expand the image drawn.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images starting from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands them by overwriting them in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. This allows the first sprite drawn to be placed at the backmost position, and the last sprite drawn to be placed at the foremost position, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information, and the image data stored from the source start address to the source end address are read out of character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in buffer RAM 237a, and then, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in buffer RAM 237a is transferred sequentially to the area of normal video RAM 236 indicated by the destination start address. The image data stored in this normal video RAM 236 is then used based on the drawing list sent by MPU 231, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads image information of the previously displayed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image displayed in the frame buffer. Also, while an image drawn in one frame buffer is being displayed, an image displayed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, allowing the drawing process and the display process to be processed simultaneously in parallel.

After the processing of S7902, the drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (S7903). Then, the drawing process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of the image are completed. As a result, when the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of the image at a certain timing, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of one frame is read, and the image drawing process and display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame of the image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of the image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of one frame is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. Thus, the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, each time every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be able to execute a continuous transformation performance as one of the performance modes for enhancing the interest of the player. This continuous transformation performance is a performance in which the character 811 transforms 1 to 5 times in the third pattern display device 81, and is a performance that basically suggests that the more transformations there are, the higher the expectation of a big win. During the execution of this continuous transformation performance, a plurality of operation effective periods are set in which pressing (operation) the frame button 22 is effective. If pressing the frame button 22 is detected during this operation effective period, or if the operation effective period (5 seconds) has elapsed, a performance (success notification mode) in which the character 811 succeeds in transforming may be executed. More specifically, if either of the above two types of conditions is met, the upper limit number of transformations predetermined for each performance type of the continuous transformation performance has not been reached, and the remaining change time is equal to or greater than the lower limit value predetermined for each performance type, the character 811 succeeds in transforming (the success notification mode is displayed). On the other hand, if the upper limit of transformations has been reached or the remaining transformation time is below the lower limit, a performance in which the transformation fails (failure notification mode) is executed and the continuous transformation performance ends.

The length of the operation valid period varies depending on the gameplay method of the player. That is, if a press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the operation valid period is terminated at that point and a notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is displayed. In addition, each operation valid period is set so that, when all success notification modes are displayed as a result of the lapse of the operation valid period, the performance period of the continuous transformation performance elapses before the success notification mode for the upper limit number of times is displayed. In other words, the performance time (the minimum remaining change time set for each performance type) is set so that, when all transformations are executed as a result of the lapse of the operation valid period, the performance period elapses before the upper limit number of transformations (success notification mode) is executed. As a result, when the operation valid period starts, unless the frame button 22 is actively pressed to end the operation valid period at an early stage, it is not possible to transform up to the upper limit number of times. This allows players who want to see the maximum number of transformations in the continuous transformation performance to actively press frame button 22, thereby increasing the player's motivation to participate in the continuous transformation performance.

In addition, the subsequent presentation mode (the timing of displaying the success notification mode and the number of times it is displayed) can be changed depending on the player's playing method during the continuous transformation performance (whether or not the frame button 22 is actively pressed during the effective operation period), so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation performance (does not press frame button 22) plays this pachinko machine 10, the performance period of the continuous transformation performance will pass with a relatively small number of transformations, even in the case of a continuous transformation performance that would normally have a high expectation (high upper limit of the number of transformations). In other words, it is difficult to distinguish between a performance type with low expectation (low upper limit of the number of transformations) and a performance type with high expectation (high upper limit of the number of transformations), and the continuous transformation performance can be executed in a mode that corresponds to a relatively low expectation. Therefore, even in a mode that appears to correspond to a low expectation, it is possible to increase the number of cases that lead to a jackpot, so that the expectation of a jackpot can be increased even if the continuous transformation performance ends with a small number of transformations.

In addition, in the first embodiment, after the continuous transformation performance is finished, a development performance for notifying the result of the lottery for the special pattern is executed. This development performance is provided with a plurality of types with different performance times. Here, the performance time of the continuous transformation performance is variable according to the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22 during each operation effective period. For this reason, the timing at which the continuous transformation performance ends is not constant, and the remaining variable time at the time when the continuous transformation performance ends is variable. Therefore, in this embodiment, at the timing at which the last operation effective period of the continuous transformation performance ends, the remaining variable time is determined, and a development performance of a performance period that can be executed in the remaining variable time is selected. Then, a failure notification mode and a transition performance are executed using the difference between the remaining variable time and the performance period of the selected development performance. This makes it possible to reduce the variation in the performance time of the development performance, so that the capacity of various data for displaying the development performance can be reduced. In addition, by dynamically varying the display period of the failure notification mode and the transition performance according to the remaining variable time, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a discrepancy between the remaining variable time at the start of the development performance and the performance time of the development performance. In other words, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the remaining time for the change is longer, causing the change of the third symbol to continue even though the development performance has ended, or, conversely, the performance period of the development performance is longer, causing the development performance to not end when the change of the third symbol has ended. Therefore, it is possible to match the end timing of the development performance with the end timing of the display of the change of the third symbol, so that a display performance that does not feel unnatural can be provided.

In the first embodiment, when pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the valid operation period, the valid operation period is terminated and a success notification mode or a failure notification mode is displayed. However, the conditions for terminating (shortening) the valid operation period are not limited to this. For example, when a new ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64, the valid operation period may be terminated and a success notification mode or a failure notification mode may be displayed.

In the first embodiment, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the operation valid period is always terminated (shortened) and a success notification mode or a failure notification mode is displayed, but this is not limited to this. For example, the operation valid period may be terminated based on the detection of pressing of the frame button 22 a predetermined number of times during the operation valid period. In this case, the number of presses required to terminate the operation valid period may be set to the same number each time, or the number of presses may be randomly determined by lottery each time the operation valid period starts. By configuring in this way, a player who wants to accurately determine the maximum number of transformations can be more proactively pressed down on the frame button 22. Therefore, the player's motivation to participate in the continuous transformation performance can be further improved. Furthermore, when determining the number of presses required to terminate the operation valid period, the number of presses that is likely to be selected may be varied depending on the situation when setting the operation valid period, such as the type of performance of the continuous transformation performance being performed, whether the upper limit number of transformations has been reached, the result of the lottery for the special pattern, etc. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be made such that a smaller number of presses is more likely to be selected for a variable display that results in a big win than for a variable display that results in a miss. Also, for example, a configuration may be made such that a smaller number of presses is more likely to be selected for a continuous transformation performance that has a large upper limit of the number of transformations, or a configuration may be made such that a smaller number of presses is more likely to be selected when the upper limit of the number of transformations has not been reached than when the upper limit of the number of transformations has been reached. By configuring in this way, the frame button 22 can be pressed while paying attention to the number of presses until the effective operation period ends, which can further increase the player's interest in the game during the execution of the continuous transformation performance.

In the first embodiment, when the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 is detected during the effective operation period, the effective operation period is always terminated and a notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, whether or not to terminate the effective operation period may be determined by lottery. Also, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a plurality of frame buttons 22 are provided, and for each effective operation period, the effective operation period is terminated and a notification mode is displayed (or a lottery is held as to whether or not to display the notification mode) when the pressing is detected, and the effective operation period is not terminated even when the pressing is detected (or the effective operation period is terminated only with a low probability). With this configuration, the player can play during the continuous transformation performance while thinking about which frame button 22 to press to terminate the effective operation period, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In the first embodiment, when the operation valid period is set, the notification mode is not displayed until the operation valid period ends unless pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, but this is not limited to the configuration, and the operation valid period may be terminated even if pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected. Specifically, for example, each time the operation valid period is set, whether or not to terminate the period midway may be determined by lottery. Also, for example, in correspondence with the types of continuous transformation performances, a type in which the operation valid period is not terminated midway unless pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, and a type in which the operation valid period is terminated midway even if pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected may be provided.

In the first embodiment, the upper limit number of transformations in the continuous transformation performance can be set to a value in the range of 1 to 5 times, but the upper limit number can be set arbitrarily. By narrowing the range of the upper limit number that can be set (for example, 1 to 3 times), the difference in the expectation of a big win for each number of transformations can be reduced, so that the player can have expectations of a big win even if the continuous transformation performance ends with a small number of transformations. Conversely, by widening the range of the upper limit number that can be set (for example, 1 to 10 times), the player can be given more opportunities to press (operate) the frame button 22. Therefore, the player's motivation to participate in the continuous transformation performance can be further improved. In addition, in the first embodiment, the continuous transformation performance is configured to succeed at least once (a success notification mode is displayed), but the upper limit number of transformations can be set to 0 times (no successful transformation at all) for at least some performance types. In addition to the maximum number of transformations, the length of the effective operation period, the success notification mode, failure notification mode, and the display period for the transition effect may also be determined as desired.

In the first embodiment, in all types of consecutive transformation effects, if the frame button 22 is not operated even once (i.e., there is no operation valid period that is terminated midway), the operation valid period is set to a length that ends the consecutive transformation effect before the success notification mode corresponding to the type is displayed the maximum number of times (the character 811 succeeds in transforming), but this is not limited to this. Some types of consecutive transformation effects may be configured to be able to display the success notification mode up to the maximum number of times corresponding to the type even if the frame button 22 is not pressed at all. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a case where the success notification mode is displayed up to the maximum number of times even when a player who does not want to press the frame button 22 is playing. Therefore, even players who play the pachinko machine 10 without wanting to press the frame button 22 can enjoy the consecutive transformation effects.

In the first embodiment, regardless of the end condition of the valid operation period, if the number of times the success notification mode is displayed (the number of transformations) has not reached the upper limit, and the remaining change time at the end of the valid operation period is equal to or greater than the lower limit, the transformation is successful (the success notification mode is displayed), but this is not limited to this. The rate at which the success notification mode is displayed may be varied depending on the end condition of the valid operation period (whether the time set as the valid operation period has elapsed or whether pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected).

In the first embodiment, when the display time of the first to fourth success notification modes in one successive transformation performance has elapsed, a new 5-second operation valid period is set, but this is not limited to this. At the start of the successive transformation performance, one operation valid period may be set, and when a press on the frame button 22 is detected, the operation valid period may be interrupted (the countdown of the valid period timer 223f is stopped). Then, when the number of times the success notification mode is displayed does not reach the upper limit, the operation valid period that was interrupted may be resumed (the countdown of the valid period timer 223f is resumed) after the display time has elapsed. In addition, the length of the operation valid period may be varied according to the maximum number of times the success notification mode is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is no longer necessary to reset the value of the valid period timer 223f every time a press on the frame button 22 is detected, so that the processing load can be reduced. In this case, even if a period in which a press on the frame button 22 is not detected continues for a predetermined period, the success notification mode may be displayed within the range that does not reach the upper limit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize the same operation as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above. Note that, instead of interrupting the countdown of the valid period timer 223f, the countdown of the valid period timer 223f may be continued even during the display time of the success notification mode. Furthermore, even if a press on the frame button 22 is detected during the display time of the success notification mode, the configuration may be such that the press is treated as invalid. Even with this configuration, it is possible to realize the same operation as the first embodiment described above.

In the first embodiment, the display time of the transition performance is varied to match the end timing of the subsequent development performance with the end timing of the variable time, but this is not limited to this. For example, the display time of the transition performance may be fixed at one second, and after the development performance ends (or as part of the development performance), a performance may be executed to make up for the difference between the set performance time of the development performance and the remaining variable time. In this way, by configuring the time to be adjusted at the end of the performance, it is possible to match the end timing of the performance with the end timing of the variable display with simpler control than simply setting the remaining variable time to the performance time.

In the first embodiment, when a press (operation) on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is displayed immediately (before the operation valid period has elapsed), but this is not limited to the above. For example, when a press on the frame button 22 is detected, the notification mode may be displayed after a predetermined period (e.g., one second). In this case, a configuration may be configured to execute a performance that notifies the player that the press of the frame button 22 has been accepted during the predetermined period (e.g., one second). By setting a predetermined period from the detection of the press on the frame button 22 to the display of the notification mode, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to imagine which notification mode will be displayed during the predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In this case, the predetermined period (the period from the press of the frame button 22 to the display of the notification mode) may be fixed, or the predetermined period may be variable depending on the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22. As a specific example of a case where the predetermined period is variable, for example, one second may be set when there is one second or more until the end of the valid operation period, and if pressing of the frame button 22 is detected with less than one second until the end of the valid operation period, the notification mode may be displayed at the end of the valid operation period. This makes it possible to prevent the period from when the valid operation period is set until the notification mode is displayed from being longer than when the frame button 22 is not pressed. Also, for example, the notification mode may be displayed at the end of the valid operation period regardless of when the frame button 22 is pressed.

In the first embodiment, the timing of displaying the notification mode is earlier when the frame button 22 is pressed to terminate the operation valid period than when the operation valid period is allowed to elapse without pressing the frame button 22 before the operation valid period elapses, but this is not limited to this. In some or all of the types of continuous transformation effects, the timing of displaying the notification mode may be delayed when the frame button 22 is pressed. That is, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, a predetermined pressing effect indicating that the pressing has been detected may be set for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). In other words, the performance period of the pressing effect may be set so that the pressing effect ends after the timing when the originally set operation valid period ends. By configuring in this way, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the notification mode is not necessarily displayed immediately, and rather, a case can be provided in which the timing of displaying the notification mode is delayed, so that the player can predict each time whether it is better to press the frame button 22. This can improve the player's interest in the game.

<Modification of the First Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, a transition performance of a length according to the remaining variable time at the time when the failure notification mode is executed is configured to be executed. In addition, as a mode of the transition performance, a predetermined still image (or a video in which the mode does not change significantly) is displayed until the start timing of the development performance, and regardless of the end timing of the transition performance (the length of the execution period), it is configured to prevent the display mode from becoming unnatural when switching to the development performance.

In contrast to this, in this modified example, the transition performance is composed of a performance mode with a relatively large change in performance and a performance mode with little (or no) change in performance. The transition performance is configured so that its end timing is within the period in which the performance mode with relatively little change in performance is displayed. This increases the degree of freedom in the display mode while the transition performance is being executed. Furthermore, by increasing the degree of freedom in the transition performance, the performance time of the transition performance alone covers the difference between the performance time of the development performance and the remaining change time. In other words, in this modified example, the display period of the failure notification mode is fixed to one second.

The transition performance in this modified example will be described with reference to Figure 83. Note that in this modified example, similar to the advanced performance in the first embodiment described above, base performance data is prepared as the basis for executing the transition performance. The base performance has a display period of 4 seconds, and is configured to be able to execute a transition performance for the corresponding performance period by executing a performance from the beginning or midway through the base performance.

As shown in FIG. 83, the data for the base effect for executing the transition effect of this modified example includes data for four different display modes in one data. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 83, the data for the first second (first section) of the base effect is made up of data corresponding to an effect in which the character 811 searches around for an object (monster 812) to be fought in the development effect. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the point from 1 second to 2 seconds (second section) of the base effect is made up of data corresponding to an effect in which the silhouette of the enemy monster 812 appears in front of the character 811. In other words, it is made up of data corresponding to an effect in which it is unclear to the player what type of monster 812 the character 811 will be fighting this time. This effect allows the player to imagine what type of monster 812 they will be fighting.

The data corresponding to the period from 2 seconds to 3 seconds (third section) of the base presentation is made up of data corresponding to a presentation in which the type of monster 812 fighting the character 811 in this advanced presentation is revealed. In other words, the data corresponds to a presentation in which the silhouette of the monster 812 that was displayed as a silhouette is removed, and the appearance of the monster 812 fighting the character 811 is displayed. This presentation makes it possible to suggest to the player the expectation of the advanced presentation that will be executed thereafter, based on the type of monster 812.

In this way, the effects corresponding to the beginning to 1 second elapsed (first section), the effects corresponding to 1 second elapsed to 2 seconds elapsed (second section), and the effects corresponding to 2 seconds elapsed to 3 seconds elapsed (third section) are composed of effects in which the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 changes relatively greatly. That is, effects are executed in which part of the display content is changed to completely different content, such as the character 811 moving to various locations, the silhouette of the monster 812 suddenly appearing in front of the character 811, or the silhouette of the monster 812 that was displayed as a silhouette disappearing.

In contrast to this, the data corresponding to the period from 3 seconds to 4 seconds (fourth section) of the base presentation is composed of data corresponding to a presentation in which a still image (see FIG. 8(a)) of a character 811 facing off against a monster 812 of the type announced in the second section presentation is displayed. In other words, it is composed of data corresponding to a presentation in which there is no (relatively small) change in the display mode even over time. By executing the transition presentation so that the timing of the switch to the advanced presentation falls within the range of this third section, it is possible to prevent the switch to the advanced presentation from looking unnatural.

Also, as shown in FIG. 83, in this modified example, three types of start timings (start positions of the first to third sections) are set in the base effect. Depending on the performance period of the transition effect, one of the three start timings is selected to be set as the start timing. Since all of these start timings are set at points where the performances are well separated, the player can confirm the transition effect without feeling uncomfortable no matter which start timing the transition effect starts from. Here, in this modified example, as in the first embodiment, the performance time (performance type) of the development performance is determined so that the difference between the remaining variable time at the display start timing of the failure notification mode and the performance time of the development performance is within the range of 2 to 5 seconds. In this modified example, as described above, since the display period of the failure notification mode is fixed to 1 second, the performance period of the transition performance is within the range of 1 to 4 seconds. In this modified example, the start timing of the base performance of the transition performance is determined based on the performance period of the transition performance.

More specifically, if the duration of the transition effect is 1 second or more but less than 2 seconds, the data from the third start timing (beginning of the third section) onwards among the data of the base effect is set as the data for executing the current transition effect. This allows the end timing of the transition effect (the timing when the value of the transition effect time timer 223k becomes 0) to be within the fourth section. In other words, within a duration of 1 second or more but less than 2 seconds, first the 1 second performance of the third section is executed, and then the performance (still image) of the fourth section is displayed until the end timing of the transition effect. This allows the timing of switching to the development effect (the end timing of the transition effect) to be within the range of the fourth section, making the switching of effects look natural to the player.

In addition, if the transition effect duration is 2 seconds or more but less than 3 seconds, the data from the second start timing (beginning of the second section) onward among the data of the base effect is set as the data for executing the current transition effect. This allows the end timing of the transition effect (the timing when the value of the transition effect time timer 223k becomes 0) to be within the range of the fourth section, just as in the case where the duration is 1 second or more but less than 2 seconds. In other words, within the duration of the performance of 2 seconds or more but less than 3 seconds, the 1 second performance of the second section and the 1 second performance of the third section are executed, and then the performance of the fourth section (still image) is displayed until the end timing of the transition effect. This allows the timing of switching to the development effect (the end timing of the transition effect) to be within the range of the fourth section, so that the switching of effects can be made in a natural way to the player.

Furthermore, if the duration of the transition effect is 3 seconds or more but less than 4 seconds, the data from the first start timing (beginning of the first section) onwards among the data of the base effect is set as the data for executing the current transition effect. As a result, as in the other cases, the end timing of the transition effect (the timing when the value of the transition effect time timer 223k becomes 0) can be set within the range of the fourth section. In other words, within the duration of the effect of 3 seconds or more but less than 4 seconds, the effects of the first to third sections are each executed for 1 second, and then the effect of the fourth section (still image) is displayed until the end timing of the transition effect. As a result, the timing of switching to the development effect (the end timing of the transition effect) can be set within the range of the fourth section, so that the effect can be switched in a way that looks natural to the player.

As explained above, in this modified example, when executing a transition effect, which is an effect that connects a continuous transformation effect with a development effect, the transition effect is executed using data for a base effect that includes effect data (effect data for the first to third sections) corresponding to an effect in which the display state changes relatively greatly, and effect data corresponding to an effect in which the display state does not change (changes relatively little). In addition, the start of the transition effect is set from one of multiple start timings that are preset for the base effect, depending on the performance time of the transition effect. In other words, the range of data used to execute the transition effect is selected depending on the performance time of the transition effect. In this way, by configuring transition effects with different performance times to be executable using one base effect, the display data for executing the transition effect can be reduced, and the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition, in this modified example, the start timing is selected so that the end timing of the transition effect occurs during the display of an effect based on effect data corresponding to an effect in which the display mode does not change (changes relatively little), regardless of the duration of the transition effect. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it look natural to the player when the transition effect ends and the development effect is switched to.

In this modified example, three start timings are set for the base performance, but this is not limited to this and may be set arbitrarily.

In this modified example, the difference between the remaining variable time and the performance time of the development performance is filled by adjusting the performance time of the transition performance, but this is not limited to this. As in the first embodiment, the remaining performance time may be adjusted between the failure notification mode and the transition performance. In this case, a base performance may be provided for the failure notification mode as well, similar to the transition performance. Then, the failure notification mode may be displayed using performance data of the base performance within a range corresponding to the display period of the failure notification mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the variations between the failure notification mode and the transition performance.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 58 to Fig. 64. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the configuration was such that, assuming that the frame button 22 was not pressed even once during the operation valid period in one continuous transformation performance, the operation valid period was set to a length such that the continuous transformation performance would end before the success notification mode of the upper limit number of times was displayed. In other words, the configuration was such that, when all transformations are executed triggered by the lapse of the operation valid period, the performance period was set to a length such that the performance period would elapse before the transformation (success notification mode) of the upper limit number of times was executed. In addition, by configuring the operation valid period to be terminated when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation valid period, the configuration was such that the success notification mode of the upper limit number of times could be displayed only when the game method in which the frame button 22 is actively pressed to terminate the operation valid period was performed.

In contrast to this, in the second embodiment, regardless of whether the frame button 22 is pressed during the valid operation period, the success notification mode or failure notification mode is not displayed until the period set at the start of the valid operation period has elapsed. In other words, it is configured so that it is impossible to shorten the period from when the valid operation period is set until the success notification mode or failure notification mode is displayed. In addition, it is configured so that it is determined whether the player presses the frame button 22 during each valid operation period, and the longer the valid operation period that is set, the longer the valid operation period that is set. By configuring it in this way, as in the first embodiment, it is possible to allow the number of transformations to reach the upper limit number set for each type of performance only when the player actively presses the frame button 22.

The pachinko machine 10 in this second embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The other configurations, the various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 58, we will explain how the presentation mode changes over time during the execution of the continuous transformation presentation of this second embodiment. FIG. 58(a) is a diagram showing how the presentation mode changes over time when the maximum number of transformations is four and the player does not press the frame button 22 during each valid operation period. FIG. 58(b) is a diagram showing how the presentation mode changes over time when the maximum number of transformations is four and the player actively presses the frame button 22 during each valid operation period.

In this second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when a super reach variation in which a continuous transformation effect is set is executed, the first valid operation period is set 11 seconds after the variation starts. Note that in this second embodiment, the valid operation period is not terminated midway, so at the start of the valid operation period, the mode including the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) to be displayed after the valid operation period is determined in advance. In other words, at the start of the valid operation period, the display start of a series of presentation modes that combine the presentation mode during the valid operation period and the notification mode is set. Hereinafter, a presentation mode consisting of one valid operation period and one notification mode set after the valid period is referred to as a transformation presentation mode.

Which of the transformation performance modes (successful or unsuccessful) is to be displayed is determined by determining the remaining change time at the end of the transformation performance mode (the end of the notification mode) at the start of the transformation performance mode (the start of the effective operation period). Specifically, the display period of the transformation performance mode is determined using the period selection table 222d (see FIG. 60) described later. Next, the remaining change time (T) at the end of the transformation performance mode, predicted from the determined display period, is compared with the lower limit of the remaining change time specified for each type of performance of the continuous transformation performance. If the predicted value of the remaining change time (T) at the end of the transformation performance mode is 5 seconds or more larger than the lower limit, the transformation performance mode in which the success notification mode is displayed is selected as the notification mode to be displayed after the effective operation period has elapsed. On the other hand, in other cases, the failure notification mode is set. Note that 5 seconds is the shortest time from the start of the effective operation period to the end of the notification mode (the minimum value of the display period of the transformation performance mode). That is, if it is determined that there is at least 5 seconds of leeway after the end of the notification mode, the success notification mode is displayed because the display time for at least one new display of a new transformation performance mode accompanied by a failure notification mode can be secured. On the other hand, if it is predicted that there is less than 5 seconds of leeway from the lower limit after the end of the transformation performance mode, the display period for a new transformation performance mode cannot be secured, so the successive transformation performance is ended by setting a transformation performance mode accompanied by a failure notification mode. This allows the type of transformation performance mode to be changed flexibly according to the remaining change time.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), a transformation performance mode with a display period of 5 seconds (operation valid period of 4 seconds) is set as the first transformation performance mode. As a result, the predicted value of the remaining change time at the time when the display period of the first transformation performance mode has elapsed is 44 seconds. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, but in this successive transformation performance (successive transformation performance D2 with a maximum number of transformations of 4), the lower limit of the remaining change time is set to 24 seconds, and the predicted remaining change time is more than 5 seconds greater than the lower limit. Therefore, a transformation performance mode accompanied by a success notification mode is set as the first transformation performance mode.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), the first success notification mode is displayed after the 4 seconds set as the valid operation period has elapsed. Note that, as will be described in detail later, in one consecutive transformation performance, the number of consecutive valid operation periods during which the frame button 22 is not pressed even once is counted by a non-press count counter 223r, which will be described later. The length of the valid operation period (the length of the display period of the transformation performance mode) that is set varies according to the counter value of this non-press count counter 223r (the higher the counter value, the longer the period that is set; see FIG. 60(c)). This time, since it is the first valid operation period, 1 is set for the non-press count counter 223r.

When the display period of the first success notification mode (display period of the transformation performance mode) has elapsed (16 seconds have elapsed since the start of the change), the second transformation performance mode is set. The display period of this second transformation performance mode is set to 7 seconds (of which the valid operation period is 6 seconds), which corresponds to the value of the non-press count counter 223r of 1. The remaining change time at the end of the second transformation performance mode is 37 seconds, which is more than 5 seconds below the lower limit, so the second transformation performance mode is also set to a mode accompanied by a success notification mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58(a), after the valid operation period of 6 seconds has elapsed, a 1-second success notification mode is displayed.

When the second transformation performance mode ends (23 seconds after the start of the change), the third transformation performance mode is set. The display period of this third transformation performance mode is selected to be 9 seconds (of which the operation valid period is 8 seconds), which corresponds to the value of the non-press count counter 223r of 2. The remaining change time at the end of the third transformation performance mode is 28 seconds, and since there is less than 5 seconds left for the lower limit of 24 seconds, the third transformation performance mode is set to a mode with a failure notification mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58(a), an 8-second operation valid period and a 1-second failure notification mode are displayed, and then the transition performance is executed. That is, the continuous transformation performance is ended after only two transformations without performing the upper limit of four transformations (display of the success notification mode). In this second embodiment, the performance time of the development performance is predetermined for each performance type of the continuous transformation performance. The transition performance is set to the difference between the remaining change time and the performance time of the development performance. In the example of FIG. 58(a), a transition effect with a duration of 5 seconds is set, and then a development effect (winning development effect D2) lasting 23 seconds is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 58(b), in the continuous transformation performance, if the player presses the frame button 22 during each valid operation period, the performance period for each of the first to fifth transformation performance modes is set to the shortest possible time of five seconds. This makes it possible to fit the maximum number of four transformations within the performance period of the continuous transformation performance.

In this way, by the player actively pressing the frame button 22 during the operation valid period, a shorter operation valid period can be set, and more success notification modes can be displayed. That is, in the continuous transformation performance, it becomes easier to perform transformations up to the set upper limit number of transformations, so the expectation of the performance can be more accurately predicted from the number of transformations. Therefore, since the player can be made to actively press the frame button 22, it is possible to improve the desire to participate in the continuous transformation performance. In addition, if a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation performance (does not press the frame button 22) plays this pachinko machine 10, even in the case of a continuous transformation performance that is originally highly anticipated (has a high upper limit number of transformations), the performance period of the continuous transformation performance will pass with a relatively small number of transformations. As a result, it is possible to generate a case where the number of transformations is small, and even if the continuous transformation performance has a high upper limit number of transformations (i.e., a high expectation of a jackpot), the performance period will end with a small number of transformations due to the passage of the performance period. As a result, even if the continuous transformation performance ends with a small number of transformations, the expectation of a jackpot can be increased.

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 59 and Fig. 60. First, Fig. 59(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), the ROM 222 in this second embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14(a)) in that a period selection table 222d has been newly added. In addition, the contents of the transformation performance selection table 222b and the development performance mode selection table 222c have been partially changed.

The period selection table 222d is a data table that is referenced when setting a new transformation performance mode, and is a data table that specifies the length of the display period of the transformation performance mode and the length of the operation valid period for each value of the non-press count counter 223r.

As shown in FIG. 60(c), the value "0" of the non-press count counter 223r is associated with a display period of "5 seconds" for the transformation performance mode and a valid operation period of "4 seconds". Therefore, when a new transformation performance mode is set with the value of the non-press count counter 223r at 0, a 5-second transformation performance mode including a 4-second valid operation period is selected. Note that the non-press count counter 223r becomes 0 at the start of the first valid operation period in a successive transformation performance, or when a press on the frame button 22 is detected during the previous valid operation period.

The value "1" of the non-press count counter 223r is also associated with a display period of "7 seconds" and a valid operation period of "6 seconds" for the transformation performance mode. Therefore, when a new transformation performance mode is set with the value of the non-press count counter 223r at 1, a 7-second transformation performance mode including a 6-second valid operation period is selected. The value of the non-press count counter 223r becomes 1 when, in one consecutive transformation performance, a press of the frame button 22 is detected in the valid operation period two times before, and a press of the frame button 22 is not detected in the valid operation period one time before, or when a press of the frame button 22 is not detected in the first valid operation period of the consecutive transformation performance.

In addition, for the value of the non-press count counter 223r of "2 or more", "9 seconds" is associated with the display period of the transformation performance mode, and "8 seconds" is associated with the effective operation period. As a result, in one continuous transformation performance, if there are two or more consecutive effective operation periods during which the frame button 22 is not pressed, and the value of the non-press count counter 223r is 2 or more, a transformation performance mode with a display period of 9 seconds, including an effective operation period of 8 seconds, is set. When setting the transformation performance mode, the remaining change time at the time the transformation performance mode to be set ends is determined (predicted). Then, if it is determined that the remaining change time will be less than the lower limit value set for each performance type, the shortest effective operation period is set regardless of the specified contents of the period selection table 222d. This makes it possible to ensure the performance period of the development performance.

In this way, in the second embodiment, when setting the display period (operation valid period) of the transformation performance mode, the length of the display period (operation valid period) of the transformation performance mode is determined by taking into account the operation status of the frame button 22 in the operation valid period set before the operation valid period to be set in one consecutive transformation performance. If there is an operation valid period in the past in which pressing of the frame button 22 was not detected, the operation valid period to be set is likely to be long. More specifically, the more consecutive operation valid periods in which pressing of the frame button 22 was not detected, the longer the display period (operation valid period) is set. As a result, unless the player actively presses the frame button 22, the display period of the transformation performance mode will become longer, and there will be fewer opportunities to display the success notification mode. Therefore, for players who want to display the success notification mode more often, the frame button 22 can be actively pressed during the execution of the consecutive transformation performance.

In the second embodiment, when an operation on the frame button 22 is detected, the value of the non-press count counter 223r is reset to 0, but this is not limited to the above. For example, when an operation on the frame button 22 is detected, the value of the non-press count counter 223r may be subtracted by 1. With this configuration, the higher the value of the non-press count counter 223r, the more difficult it becomes to shorten the effective operation period thereafter, so that the player can be motivated to press the frame button 22 during each effective operation period. This can increase the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation performance.

In the second embodiment, when the value of the non-press count counter 223r is 2 or more, the transformation performance mode is displayed for the same length (9 seconds), but this is not limited to the above. Even if the value of the non-press count counter 223r is in a range greater than 2, the display period of the transformation performance mode may be lengthened as the counter value increases.

Next, referring to FIG. 60(a), the details of the transformation performance selection table 222b in the second embodiment will be described. This transformation performance selection table 222b, like the transformation performance selection table 222b in the first embodiment, is a data table that is referenced to determine the performance mode of a successive transformation performance when a change pattern involving the successive transformation performance is selected from the change pattern table 222a.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), the transformation performance selection table 222b in the second embodiment specifies five types of performance types, successive transformation performances A2 to E2. The successive transformation performance A2 is a performance type corresponding to the successive transformation performance A in the first embodiment, and the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations and the value of the associated performance counter 223n are the same as those of the successive transformation performance A. Similarly, the successive transformation performance B2 corresponds to the successive transformation performance B in the first embodiment, the successive transformation performance C2 corresponds to the successive transformation performance C in the first embodiment, the successive transformation performance D2 corresponds to the successive transformation performance D in the first embodiment, and the successive transformation performance E2 corresponds to the successive transformation performance E in the first embodiment, and the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations and the value of the associated performance counter 223n are the same.

Also, as shown in FIG. 60(a), the lower limit of the remaining change time for the continuous transformation performance A2 is set to 39 seconds. In other words, each transformation performance mode (operation effective period, notification mode) is set so that the remaining change time at the timing when the final notification mode of the continuous transformation performance A2 ends is 39 seconds or more. Similarly, the lower limit of the remaining change time for the continuous transformation performance B2 is set to 34 seconds, the lower limit of the remaining change time for the continuous transformation performance C2 is set to 29 seconds, the lower limit of the remaining change time for the continuous transformation performance D2 is set to 24 seconds, and the lower limit of the remaining change time for the continuous transformation performance E2 is set to 19 seconds. The lower limit value of these remaining change times is set to a value obtained by adding 1 second to the performance time of the development performance corresponding to each performance type. In other words, the time during which the corresponding development performance can be executed after the end of the continuous transformation performance is set after a transition performance of at least 1 second. If the frame button 22 is pressed during the entire valid operation period of one continuous transformation performance, not only can the success notification state be displayed the maximum number of times, but the continuous transformation performance is configured to end when the remaining change time matches the lower limit value specified in the transformation performance selection table 222b.

Next, referring to FIG. 60(b), the details of the advanced performance mode selection table 222c in the second embodiment will be described. This advanced performance mode selection table 222c, like the advanced performance mode selection table 222c in the first embodiment, is a data table that is referenced when selecting the performance mode of the advanced performance that is executed after the continuous transformation performance has ended.

As shown in FIG. 60(b), in the development performance mode selection table 222c in this second embodiment, the type of continuous transformation performance, the lottery result of the special pattern, and the performance mode (performance time) of the development performance correspond one-to-one. Specifically, when continuous transformation performance A2 is executed as the performance type, a development performance with a performance time of 38 seconds is selected. In other words, if the current variable display is a winning super reach, a winning development performance A2 with a performance time of 38 seconds is selected, and if it is a losing super reach, a losing development performance A2 with a performance time of 38 seconds is selected.

Similarly, when the continuous transformation performance B2 is executed as the performance type, a winning development performance B2 with a performance time of 33 seconds or a losing development performance B2 is selected, and when the continuous transformation performance C2 is executed, a winning development performance C2 with a performance time of 28 seconds or a losing development performance C2 is selected. Also, when the continuous transformation performance D2 is executed as the performance type, a winning development performance D2 with a performance time of 23 seconds or a losing development performance B2 is selected, and when the continuous transformation performance E2 is executed, a winning development performance E2 with a performance time of 18 seconds or a losing development performance E2 is selected. In this way, by specifying the performance type of the continuous transformation performance in correspondence with the performance mode of the development performance, the processing load when selecting the performance type of the development performance can be reduced.

Next, the RAM 223 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59(b). FIG. 59(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 59(b), the RAM 223 in the second embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14(b)) in that a display period timer 223p, a non-press count counter 223r, a pressed flag 223s, and a transition performance flag 223t have been added. It also differs in that the success notification mode timer 223i and the failure notification mode timer 223j have been deleted.

The display period timer 223p is a timer that measures the period from when one transformation performance mode is started to when the display period of that transformation performance mode ends. The value of this display period timer 223p is updated by 1 during the effective period process 2, which is executed every millisecond during the main process (see FIG. 33) (see S4511 in FIG. 63).

The non-press count counter 223r is a counter for counting the number of consecutive valid operation periods during which no pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during one consecutive transformation performance. This non-press count counter 223r is incremented by 1 if the frame button 22 is not pressed even once during the valid operation period (see S4514 in FIG. 63). The length of the display period (and the valid operation period) of the transformation performance mode is determined based on the value of this non-press count counter 223r and the specified contents of the period selection table 222d.

The pressed flag 223s is a flag that indicates whether or not a press of the frame button 22 has been detected during one valid operation period. If it is on, it means that a press of the frame button 22 has been detected. On the other hand, if it is off, it means that the frame button 22 has not been pressed even once during that valid operation period. This pressed flag 223s is set on when the frame button input monitoring/performance process 2 detects a press of the frame button 22 for the first time during the valid operation period (see S4112 in FIG. 61). In addition, it is set off after updating the value of the non-press count counter 223r at the end of the valid operation period (see S4515 in FIG. 63).

The transition performance flag 223t is a flag that indicates whether or not a transition performance should be set when the display period of the currently executing transformation performance mode is about to end. If this transition performance flag 223t is on, it means that the start of the transition performance should be set when the display period of the transformation performance mode ends, and if it is off, it means that a new transformation performance mode should be set. When setting a new transformation performance mode, this transition performance flag 223t is set on if it is determined that the transformation performance mode is the last transformation performance mode in the current series of successive transformation performances. In other words, it is set on when it is determined that the end timing of the display period of the transformation performance mode will be within 5 seconds of the lower limit of the remaining change time specified for each performance type (see S5116 in FIG. 64).

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 61 to Fig. 64. First, details of the frame button input monitoring and performance process 2 (S4021) will be described with reference to Fig. 61. This frame button input monitoring and performance process 2 (S4021) is a process executed in place of the frame button input monitoring and performance process (see Fig. 34) in the first embodiment, and is a process for monitoring the pressing of the frame button 22 and performing control according to the pressing situation.

In the frame button input monitoring and rendering process 2 in this second embodiment (see FIG. 61), the processes S4101 and S4102 are the same as the processes S4101 and S4102 in the frame button input monitoring and rendering process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 34).

In addition, in the frame button input monitoring/performance process 2 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 61), if it is determined in the process of S4102 that a press of the frame button 22 has been detected (S4102: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the pressed flag 223s is on (S4111). If it is determined in the process of S4111 that the pressed flag 223s is on (S4111: Yes), this means that the press detected this time is not the first press during the valid operation period, and so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4111 that the pressed flag 223s is off (S4111: No), this means that the first press in the valid operation period has been detected, so first the pressed flag 223s is set to on (S4112). Then the value of the non-press count counter 223r is reset to 0 (S4113), a press effect corresponding to the press is set (S4114), and this process ends. Note that the press effect is an effect for notifying the player that the frame button 22 has been pressed, and is, for example, an effect in which an image imitating the frame button 22 is displayed as if it is pressed, or a predetermined sound effect is generated.

Next, referring to FIG. 62, the second performance update process (S4022) will be described. This second performance update process (S4022) is a process executed in place of the first embodiment's second performance update process (see FIG. 36), and like the second performance update process (see FIG. 36), is a process for varying the performance mode during execution of the variable display in accordance with the remaining variable time, the values of various timers, etc.

In the second embodiment of the performance update process 2 (see FIG. 62), steps S4301 to S4304, S4310, and S4311 are identical to steps S4301 to S4304, S4310, and S4311 in the first embodiment of the performance update process (see FIG. 36).

In addition, in the performance update process 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4304 that the valid period flag 223e is on (S4304: Yes), valid period process 2 is executed (S4321) instead of the valid period process (see FIG. 37(b)) in the first embodiment, and this process is terminated. This valid period process 2 (S4321) is a process for determining the end timing of the valid period of operation, similar to the valid period process (see FIG. 37(b)) in the first embodiment. Details of this valid period process 2 (S4321) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

In addition, in the performance update process 2 (see FIG. 62), if it is determined in the process of S4304 that the validity period flag 223e is off (S4304: No), it is then determined whether the value of the display period timer 223p is greater than 0 (S4322), and if it is determined that it is 0 (S4322: No), the process proceeds to S4310. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4322 that the value of the display period timer 223p is greater than 0 (S4322: Yes), display period process is executed (S4323), and this process ends. This display period process (S4323) is a process for determining the timing at which the display period of the transformation performance mode ends, and its details will be described later with reference to FIG. 64.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned valid period process 2 (S4321) will be described with reference to FIG. 63. As described above, this valid period process 2 (S4321) is a process for determining the end timing of the valid operation period.

In the valid period process 2 (see FIG. 63), first, the value of the valid period timer 223f and the value of the display period timer 223p are both updated by subtracting 1 each (S4511). Next, it is determined whether the value of the valid period timer 223f after subtraction has become 0 (whether the timing for the end of the operation valid period has arrived) (S4512), and if it has not become 0 (S4512: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4512 that the value of the valid period timer 223f has reached 0 (S4512: Yes), it is determined whether or not the pressed flag 223s is on (S4513). If it is determined in the process of S4513 that the pressed flag 223s is off (S4513: No), this means that no pressing of the frame button 22 was detected during the current valid operation period, so the value of the non-press count counter 223r is updated by adding 1 (S4514), and the process proceeds to S4515.

In contrast, if it is determined in the processing of S4513 that the pressed flag 223s is on (S4513: Yes), since at least one press of the frame button 22 has been detected during the valid operation period, the processing of S4514 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S4515. In the processing of S4515, the valid period flag 223e is set to off to indicate the end of the valid operation period, and the pressed flag 223s is set to off (S4515), and this processing ends.

By executing this valid period process 2 (see FIG. 63), the value of the non-press count counter 223r, which indicates the number of consecutive valid operation periods during which no press of the frame button 22 is detected, can be appropriately updated. Therefore, the subsequent valid operation periods can be set to an appropriate length.

Next, the above-mentioned display period processing (S4323) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this display period processing (S4323).

In the display period process (see FIG. 64), first, the value of the display period timer 223p is decremented by 1 (S5101), and then it is determined whether the value of the display period timer 223p after the decrement is 0 (S5102). In the process of S5102, if it is determined that the value of the display period timer 223p after the decrement is not 0 (S5102: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5102 that the value of the display period timer 223p after subtraction has become 0 (S5102: Yes), this means that the display period of the transformation presentation mode is about to end, so processing is executed to set either a new transformation presentation mode or a transition presentation.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether the transition performance flag 223t is on (S5103), and if it is determined to be on (S5103: Yes), this means that a transition performance should be set, so first, the mode of the development performance corresponding to the current performance type is selected from the development performance mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 60(b)), and the data corresponding to the read-out development performance mode is stored in the development performance storage area 223m (S5104). Next, the difference between the remaining change time and the performance time of the development performance selected from the development performance mode selection table 222c in the processing of S5104 is set as the performance time of the transition performance to be set this time (S5105), and this processing ends. By executing the processing of S5105, the difference between the performance time of the development performance and the remaining change time can be covered by the performance time of the transition performance, so the end timing of the change display and the end timing of the development performance can be matched.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5103 that the transition performance flag 223t is off (S5103: No), this means that a new transformation performance mode should be set, so first the display period of the transformation performance mode corresponding to the value of the non-press count counter 223r and the operation valid period are read from the period selection table 222d (S5106). Next, it is determined whether the read display period is within the range of the performance period of the continuous transformation performance currently set (S5107). More specifically, it is determined whether the time obtained by subtracting the read display period from the current remaining change time is equal to or greater than the lower limit value predetermined for each performance type.

In the process of S5107, if it is determined that the display period of the transformation performance mode exceeds the range of the performance period of the continuous transformation performance (S5107: No), the shortest display period of 5 seconds is set to fit the display period of the transformation performance mode within the performance period of the continuous transformation performance. That is, a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the display period timer 223p, and a timer value corresponding to 4 seconds is set for the valid period timer 223f (S5108). Next, a transformation performance mode of a type in which a failure notification mode is displayed during the set display period is set (S5109), and both the transition performance flag 223t and the valid period flag 223e are set to ON (S5110), and this process is terminated. That is, if a long operation valid period is selected and it is determined that the end timing of the transformation performance mode will exceed the performance period of the continuous transformation performance, it is switched to the shortest display period and the continuous transformation performance is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S5107 that the end timing of the transformation performance mode falls within the performance period of the continuous transformation performance (S5107: Yes), the timer value corresponding to the display period read in the process of S5106 is set to the display period timer 223p, and the timer value corresponding to the read operation valid period is set to the valid period timer 223f (S5111). Next, the operation valid period is started by setting the valid period flag 223e to on (S5112).

When the processing of S5112 is completed, it is next determined whether the timing at which the display period read out in the processing of S5106 elapses (the timing at which the transformation performance mode ends) is 5 seconds or more before the performance time of the continuous transformation performance ends (within 5 seconds of the lower limit of the remaining change time) (S5113), and if it is determined that there is 5 seconds or more remaining in the performance period at the time when the display period elapses (S5113: No), the value of the transformation count counter 223g is updated by adding 1 (S5114), and the execution of the transformation performance mode accompanied by a success notification mode that ends with the display period set in the processing of S5111 is set (S5115), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5113, if it is determined that the end timing of the display period is 5 seconds or more before the end of the performance period (S5113: Yes), the transition performance flag 223t is set to ON (S5116) in order to end the continuous transformation performance with the currently set effective operation period. Then, it is determined whether the value of the transformation count counter 223g is 4 (S5117), and if it is determined that the value is 4 (S5117: Yes), the process proceeds to S5114 and the execution of the fifth success notification mode is set. In this second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the maximum number of success notification modes is 5, and after the fifth success notification mode is set, the transition performance is executed directly.

In contrast, if it is determined in the process of S5117 that the value of the transformation count counter 223g is not 4 (is 3 or less) (S5117: No), the process sets the execution of a transformation performance mode accompanied by a failure notification mode that ends when the display period set in the process of S5111 has elapsed (S5118), and ends this process.

By executing this display period process, the length of the valid operation period can be varied depending on the number of consecutive valid operation periods during which no press of the frame button 22 is detected.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is configured to determine whether or not the player has pressed the frame button 22 during each effective operation period of the successive transformation performance, and the longer the effective operation period that is set, the longer the consecutive effective operation periods during which the frame button 22 is not pressed. By configuring it in this way, as in the first embodiment, it is possible to make the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) reach the upper limit number set for each performance type only when the player actively presses the frame button 22. Therefore, players who wish to transform up to the upper limit number of times can be made to actively press the frame button 22, which can increase the player's motivation to participate in the successive transformation performance.

In the second embodiment, the display period of one transformation performance mode is associated with each value of the non-press count counter 223r, but this is not limited to this. It is sufficient to be able to change the tendency of the selected display period depending on the number of consecutive operation effective periods during which the frame button 22 is not pressed. For example, a configuration may be used in which a plurality of candidates for the display period to be selected are associated with each value of the non-press count counter 223r and specified. Then, one display period may be selected by lottery from among the candidates. In addition, in the lottery for the display period, the larger the value of the non-press count counter 223r, the higher the rate at which a longer display period is selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to impart randomness to the length of the display period to be set. Furthermore, in this case, it is also possible to configure the display period that is likely to be selected to be different depending on the lottery result of the special pattern. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while paying attention not only to the number of times the success notification mode is displayed, but also to the length of the display period of the transformation performance mode, so that the player's interest in the game during the execution of the continuous transformation performance can be further improved.

In the second embodiment, the length of the operation effective period to be set is varied according to the number of consecutive operation effective periods in which the pressing of the frame button 22 was not detected, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient to set the number of times that the number of times that the player presses the frame button 22 is more likely to result in the display of a larger number of successful notification modes. For example, the number of consecutive operation effective periods in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected may be counted. The longer the number of consecutive times counted, the shorter the length of the operation effective period to be set may be. The frame button 22 may be actively pressed to increase the count value of the consecutive number, and if a shorter operation effective period is not set, the continuous transformation performance may end before reaching the upper limit of the number of transformations set for each performance type. By configuring in this way, as in the second embodiment described above, players who want to display more successful notification modes can be made to actively press the frame button 22. In other words, the desire to participate in the continuous transformation performance can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the number of consecutive times when the press of the frame button 22 was not detected was counted within one consecutive transformation performance, but this is not limited to this, and the number of consecutive times in the past consecutive transformation performances may be counted by taking over. That is, the counter value of the non-press count counter 223r at the end of the previous consecutive transformation performance may be held, and in the next consecutive transformation performance, the count may be started from the held value of the non-press count counter 223r. In this case, the non-press count counter 223r itself may be held in the state at the end of the previous consecutive transformation performance, or the value of the non-press count counter 223r may be saved in a predetermined memory area of the RAM 223 at the end of the consecutive transformation performance, and the saved counter value may be set again to the non-press count counter 223r at the start of the consecutive transformation performance. By configuring in this way, the operation status of the player in one consecutive transformation performance can be taken over to the next time onwards, so that the impact of not performing an operation can be made greater. This allows the player to press the frame button 22 more aggressively.

Third Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 65 to Fig. 67. In the first embodiment described above, the upper limit number of transformations is set for each type of performance of the continuous transformation performance, and if the number of transformations is less than the upper limit number and the remaining change time is equal to or greater than the lower limit, the transformation is always successful (the success notification mode is displayed).

In contrast to this, in the third embodiment, when the number of transformations is less than the upper limit, whether or not to display the success notification mode is determined by lottery. Also, the rate at which the success notification mode is displayed is configured to be higher for variable displays that result in a big win than for variable displays that result in a miss. This further increases the expectation of a big win when the number of times the success notification mode is displayed increases compared to the first embodiment. Furthermore, the lottery executed by pressing the frame button 22 is configured to display the success notification mode more frequently than the lottery executed when the valid operation period has elapsed.

The pachinko machine 10 in this third embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The other configurations, the various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
First, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 65. Fig. 65(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the third embodiment. As shown in Fig. 65(a), the ROM 222 in the third embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see Fig. 14(a)) in that a transformation possibility determination table 222e is added.

The transformation feasibility determination table 222e is a data table that is referenced to determine whether to display the success notification mode or the failure notification mode when the display conditions for the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) are met. Details of this transformation feasibility determination table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 65(b).

Figure 65 (b) shows the contents of this transformation possibility determination table 222e. As shown in Figure 65 (b), the transformation possibility determination table 222e specifies the range of the counter value (random number value) of the effect counter 223n that determines the display of the success notification mode, in association with the type of change of the variable display for which the continuous transformation effect is set (whether it is a winning super reach or a losing super reach) and the end condition of the effective operation period.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(b), when the variation type is a winning super reach and the operation valid period ends due to the detection of pressing of the frame button 22, a range of "0 to 79" is associated and specified as the value of the performance counter 223n. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the performance counter 223n, 80 counter values (random number values) are determined to display the success notification mode, so that the rate at which the success notification mode is displayed when the operation valid period ends during the execution of a winning super reach is 80% (80/100).

On the other hand, when the variation type is a Miss Super Reach and the valid operation period ends due to the detection of pressing of the frame button 22, a range of "50 to 99" is associated and specified as the value of the performance counter 223n. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the performance counter 223n, 50 counter values (random number values) are determined to display the success notification mode, so that during the execution of a Miss Super Reach, the probability that the success notification mode will be displayed when the valid operation period ends is 50% (50/100).

In this way, if the effective operation period ends while a winning Super Reach is being executed, there is an 80% chance that the success notification mode will be displayed, whereas if the effective operation period ends while a losing Super Reach is being executed, there is only a 50% chance that the success notification mode will be displayed. Therefore, the more times the success notification mode is displayed, the higher the chance that a winning Super Reach is being executed. Therefore, a player can play during the continuous transformation performance in the hope that the success notification mode will continue for as many times as possible.

Also, as shown in FIG. 65(b), when the variation type is a winning super reach and the operation valid period ends without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22, the range of "0 to 49" is specified as the value of the performance counter 223n. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the performance counter 223n, 50 counter values (random number values) are determined to display the success notification mode, so that the rate at which the success notification mode is displayed when the operation valid period ends during the execution of a winning super reach is 50% (50/100).

On the other hand, when the variation type is a Miss Super Reach and the effective operation period ends without detecting the pressing of the button 22, a range of "60 to 99" is associated with the value of the performance counter 223n and specified. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the performance counter 223n, there are 40 counter values (random number values) that are determined to display the success notification mode, so the probability that the success notification mode will be displayed when the effective operation period ends during the execution of a Miss Super Reach is 40% (40/100).

In this way, when the valid operation period ends while a winning Super Reach is being executed, there is a 50% chance that the success notification mode will be displayed, whereas even if the valid operation period ends while a losing Super Reach is being executed, there is a 40% chance that the success notification mode will be displayed. In other words, compared to when the valid operation period ends due to detection of pressing of the frame button 22, there is a smaller difference in the chance that the success notification mode will be displayed between the winning Super Reach and the losing Super Reach. Therefore, if the valid operation period passes without pressing the frame button 22, the chance of a big win will not be that high even if the success notification mode is displayed. For this reason, players who wish to more accurately estimate the chance of a big win while a continuous transformation performance is being executed can be encouraged to actively press the frame button 22.

In addition, if the effective operation period has elapsed without pressing the frame button 22, the success notification mode is displayed only 50% of the time, even during the execution of a winning super reach. In other words, the success notification mode is less likely to be displayed than when the effective operation period has ended by detecting the pressing of the frame button 22. In other words, if a player who does not press the frame button 22 very often plays the game, even in the event of a jackpot, the continuous transformation performance is more likely to end with a relatively small number of success notification mode displays. This makes it possible to increase the number of cases in which a jackpot is achieved with a small number of success notification mode displays, so that a sense of anticipation for a jackpot can be created even if the continuous transformation performance ends with a small number of success notification mode displays.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 66 and Fig. 67. First, Fig. 66 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and performance process 3 (S4031).

Frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (see FIG. 66) is a process executed in the main processing in place of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, and is a process for setting a corresponding effect when a press on the frame button 22 is detected during the valid operation period.

In this frame button input monitoring and performance process 3 (see FIG. 66), the processes of S4101 and S4102 are the same as the processes of S4101 and S4102 in the frame button input monitoring and performance process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. In addition, in the frame button input monitoring and performance process 3 (see FIG. 66) in this third embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4102 that pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S4102: Yes), instead of the transformation setting process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, the transformation setting process 3 is executed (S4121), and this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 33). Details of this transformation setting process 3 (S4121) will be described with reference to FIG. 67.

Figure 67 is a flowchart showing transformation setting process 3 (S4121). This transformation setting process 3 (S4121) is a process for setting the display of the corresponding notification mode according to the remaining change time, the number of transformations, etc., similar to the transformation setting process in the first embodiment (see Figure 35).

In this transformation setting process 3 (see FIG. 67), steps S4201 to S4208 and steps S4210 to S4212 are the same as steps S4201 to S4208 and steps S4210 to S4212 in the transformation setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35).

In addition, in the transformation setting process 3 (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4203 that the value of the transformation count counter 223g is less than the upper limit of the number of transformations corresponding to the performance type of the current consecutive transformation performance (S4203: No), it is determined whether or not the remaining transformation time is within the period in which the success notification mode can be displayed (transformation is possible) (S4221). In other words, it is determined whether or not the remaining transformation time is equal to or greater than the lower limit value specified for each performance type.

If it is determined in the processing of S4221 that the period during which the display of the success notification mode (transformation) is not possible (S4221: No), the processing proceeds to S4204 to set the failure notification mode and select the type of advanced presentation. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4221 that the current period during which the display of the success notification mode can be set (S4221: Yes), first, the transformation possibility determination table 222e (see FIG. 66(b)) and the value of the presentation counter 223n are read (S4222). Next, it is determined whether the value of the presentation counter 223n matches the counter value corresponding to the decision to display the success notification mode (successful transformation) specified in the transformation possibility determination table 222e (S4223).

If it is determined in the process of S4223 that the counter value corresponds to the decision to display the success notification mode (S4223: Yes), the process proceeds to S4210 to display the success notification mode. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4223 that the counter value does not correspond to the decision to display the success notification mode (S4223: No), the process proceeds to S4204 to display the failure notification mode.

This transformation setting process 3 allows the player to select whether or not to display the success notification mode based on the type of variable display and the lottery probability according to the end condition of the valid operation period, so that the player can predict whether the current variable display will result in a win based on the number of times the success notification mode has been displayed. This allows the player to play the game by paying more attention to the type of notification mode that will be displayed after the valid operation period has ended.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the rate at which the success notification mode is displayed varies depending on the type of change in the change display in which the continuous transformation performance is set, and the success notification mode is displayed at a higher rate in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. This configuration allows players to play the game while paying attention to whether or not the success notification mode is displayed. Furthermore, players who wish to check whether or not the success notification mode is displayed as many times as possible in order to more accurately determine the likelihood of a jackpot can be encouraged to actively press the frame button 22. This can increase players' motivation to participate in the continuous transformation performance.

In addition, in the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the configuration is such that the success notification mode can be displayed up to the upper limit number of times set for each type of effect by pressing the frame button 22 to terminate the effective operation period. That is, in the third embodiment, if the player actively presses the frame button 22 to terminate the effective operation period midway and continues to win the lottery for whether or not to display the success notification mode, the success notification mode can be displayed up to the upper limit number of times. Therefore, compared to the first embodiment, the number of times the success notification mode is displayed tends to be smaller. In other words, whether it is a hit or a miss, the number of times the success notification mode is displayed tends to be relatively small, so even if the continuous transformation performance ends in a small number of times, it is possible to create a sense of expectation for a hit. Therefore, the player's interest in the continuous transformation performance can be further increased.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the lottery probability for whether or not to display the success notification mode is different between when the operation valid period ends based on detecting the pressing of the frame button 22 and when the operation valid period ends without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22. When the operation valid period ends without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22, the difference in the lottery probability for determining the display of the success notification mode is reduced between the case of a winning super reach and the case of a losing super reach. By configuring in this way, when the operation valid period has passed without pressing the frame button 22, even if the success notification mode is displayed, the probability of a big win is not so high, so that a player who wishes to more accurately estimate the probability of a big win during the execution of the continuous transformation performance can be encouraged to actively press the frame button 22.

In the third embodiment, if the player misses the lottery of whether or not to display the success notification mode, the failure notification mode is displayed and the continuous transformation performance is terminated. However, it is not necessary to terminate the continuous transformation performance. For example, instead of the number of times the success notification mode is displayed, an upper limit value for the number of times the operation valid period is set may be set, and the continuous transformation performance may be continued even if the failure notification mode is displayed until the upper limit value is reached (a new operation valid period is set after the failure notification mode ends). By configuring in this way, the display lottery of the success notification mode can be performed more times. In addition, by actively pressing the frame button 22 to terminate the operation valid period, the display lottery of the success notification mode can be performed even more times. Therefore, the player can more accurately predict whether the game will be a hit or a miss from the rate at which the success notification mode is displayed. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be pressed more actively in the continuous transformation performance.

In the third embodiment, the probability of winning the lottery for whether or not to display the success notification mode is higher when the frame button 22 is pressed than when the operation valid period has elapsed without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22, regardless of the result of the lottery for the special pattern, but this is not limited to this. For example, if the lottery for the special pattern is a jackpot, pressing the frame button 22 may increase the probability of winning the lottery for displaying the success notification mode, while if the lottery for the special pattern is a miss, the probability of winning may be the same whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed. By configuring in this way, the expectation of a jackpot can be increased when the frame button 22 is pressed to display the success notification mode, so that the player can be made to press the frame button 22 more aggressively. Also, for example, the probability of winning the lottery for displaying the success notification mode is higher when the frame button 22 is pressed, while if the lottery for the special pattern is a miss, the probability of winning may be lower when the frame button 22 is pressed. By configuring it in this way, when the frame button 22 is pressed and the success notification mode is displayed, the expectation of a big win can be increased. Also, the configuration may be such that the lottery probability of whether or not to display the success notification mode depends only on the lottery result of the special pattern. In other words, the configuration may be such that the lottery for whether or not to display the success notification mode is performed with the same probability whether or not to display the success notification mode is performed when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the valid operation period and when the valid operation period has elapsed without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 68 to Fig. 72. In the third embodiment described above, whether or not to display the success notification mode is determined by lottery, and the success notification mode is displayed if the lottery is won. Also, the lottery probability for determining the display of the success notification mode during the execution of a winning super reach is set higher than that during the execution of a losing super reach. This allows the player's expectation of a big win to be further increased as the number of times the success notification mode is displayed increases.

In contrast to this, in the fourth embodiment, the pressing status (the player's operation status) of the frame button 22 is judged during a predetermined period in one consecutive transformation performance (the first two valid operation periods), and the rate at which the success notification mode is set is varied depending on the judgment result. In other words, in the consecutive transformation performance, when the valid operation period is set, it is judged whether or not the player is a player who actively presses the frame button 22, and the method of suggesting the expectation of whether or not there is a win (selection rate when selecting the notification mode) is varied depending on the judgment result.

The pachinko machine 10 in this fourth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The other configurations, the various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
First, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 68 and Fig. 69. First, the details of the ROM 222 will be described with reference to Fig. 68. First, Fig. 68(a) is a block diagram showing the development performance mode selection table 222c in the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 68(a), the advanced performance mode selection table 222c of the fourth embodiment specifies the advanced performance mode to be selected in correspondence with the value of the transformation count counter 223g and each type of change in the change display.

The reason why the performance mode of the development performance can be determined according to the value of the transformation count counter 223g is that, like the second embodiment described above, the fourth embodiment is configured so that the operation effective period is not terminated midway. Furthermore, like the first and third embodiments, the fourth embodiment is configured so that the operation effective period is always set to 5 seconds. Therefore, there is a one-to-one relationship between the value of the transformation count counter 223g at the time when the display of the failure notification mode is set and the remaining change time. For example, if the value of the transformation count counter 223g is 2, it means that the 5-second operation effective period has been displayed three times and the 1-second success notification mode has been displayed twice, so the elapsed time at the time when the display of the failure notification mode is set is always 28 seconds (11 seconds until the continuous transformation performance starts + 5 seconds x 3 + 1 second x 2). In other words, the remaining change time is 32 seconds. Therefore, taking into account the 1 second display period of the failure notification mode and the 1 second display period of the transition performance, if a 30-second performance is executed as the development performance, the end timing of the change display and the end timing of the development performance can be matched.

Similarly, if the value of the transformation count counter 223g is 4, this means that 5 5-second effective operation periods and 4 1-second success notification modes have been displayed, so the elapsed time at the time the failure notification mode display is set will always be 40 seconds (11 seconds + 5 seconds x 5 + 1 second x 4). In other words, the remaining change time will be 20 seconds. Therefore, by executing an 18-second development performance that subtracts the performance time of the failure notification mode and the transition performance, the end timing of the development performance can be aligned with the end timing of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 68(a), in the development performance mode selection table 222c, a development performance with a performance time of 30 seconds is associated with the value "2" of the transformation count counter 223g. That is, a winning super reach is associated with a winning development performance A4 with a performance time of 30 seconds, and a losing super reach is associated with a losing development performance A4 with a performance time of 30 seconds.

Similarly, a development performance with a performance time of 24 seconds is defined in association with the value "3" of the transformation count counter 223g. That is, a winning development performance B4 with a performance time of 24 seconds is defined in association with a winning super reach, and a losing development performance B4 with a performance time of 24 seconds is defined in association with a losing super reach. Also, a development performance with a performance time of 18 seconds is defined in association with the value "4,5" of the transformation count counter 223g. That is, a winning development performance C4 with a performance time of 18 seconds is defined in association with a winning super reach, and a losing development performance C4 with a performance time of 18 seconds is defined in association with a losing super reach.

In this way, by referring to the development performance mode selection table 222c, the type of development performance that matches the remaining change time can be determined according to the value of the transformation count counter 223g, so that the end timing of the development performance can be matched with the end timing of the change display.

Next, the details of the transformation possibility determination table 222e in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 68(b) to (d). First, Fig. 68(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the transformation possibility determination table 222e in the fourth embodiment. As shown in Fig. 68(b), the transformation possibility determination table 222e in the fourth embodiment is composed of at least a pressing tendency table 222e1 used to determine whether or not to display the success notification mode when it is determined that a player who tends to press the frame button 22 in the continuous transformation performance is playing, and a non-pressing tendency table 222e2 used to determine whether or not to display the success notification mode when it is determined that a player who tends not to press the frame button 22 is playing.

In the fourth embodiment, after the start of the continuous transformation performance, the player's tendency is determined over two valid operation periods. That is, if the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected both times during the first two valid operation periods, it is determined that the player is playing a game that tends to actively press the frame button 22. On the other hand, in other cases, it is determined that the player is playing a game that tends not to press the frame button 22. In order to determine the player's tendency, the first two valid operation periods are always configured to set a success notification mode as the notification mode after the end. That is, it is configured to prevent the failure notification mode from being displayed before the player's tendency is determined, thereby ending the continuous transformation performance.

Figure 68 (c) is a diagram showing the contents of the press tendency table 222e1. As shown in Figure 68 (c), the press tendency table 222e1 specifies the set number of times for the effective operation period in one continuous transformation performance, and the value of the performance counter 223n that is determined to display the success notification mode for each transformation type.

Specifically, when the variation type is a super reach hit, the range of values of the effect counter 223n is set to "0 to 79" in correspondence with the effective period of the third to fifth operations in the consecutive transformation effects. As a result, when the effective period of the third to fifth operations in the consecutive transformation effects has ended, there is an 80% chance that the success notification mode will be displayed.

On the other hand, if the change type is a miss and a super reach, the range of the value of the effect counter 223n is specified to correspond to "0 to 59" for the third valid operation period in the consecutive transformation effect, the range of the value of the effect counter 223n is specified to correspond to "0 to 39" for the fourth valid operation period, and the range of the value of the effect counter 223n is specified to correspond to "0 to 19" for the fifth valid operation period.

For this reason, when a miss super reach is being executed, it becomes more difficult to determine the display of the success notification mode compared to a win super reach. Furthermore, the longer the operation valid period, the more difficult it becomes to determine the display of the success notification mode. For this reason, the more times the success notification mode is displayed, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. Therefore, players who tend to press the frame button 22 can play in the hope that the success notification mode will be displayed more times.

Figure 68 (d) shows the contents of the non-pressing tendency table 222e2. This non-pressing tendency table 222e2 has the same structure as the pressing tendency table 222e1 (see Figure 68 (c)). That is, as shown in Figure 68 (d), the set number of times for the effective operation period in one continuous transformation effect and the value of the effect counter 223n that is determined to display the success notification mode are associated and specified for each change type.

Specifically, when the variation type is a winning super reach, the range of the value of the performance counter 223n is specified to correspond to "0 to 39" for the third operation valid period in the continuous transformation performance, the range of the value of the performance counter 223n is specified to correspond to "0 to 79" for the fourth operation valid period, and the range of the value of the performance counter 223n is specified to correspond to "0 to 39" for the fifth operation valid period. In other words, while a winning super reach is being executed, it becomes difficult for the success notification mode to be set at the end of the operation valid period for odd-numbered times (third and fifth times), while it becomes easier for the success notification mode to be set at the end of the operation valid period for even-numbered times (fourth time).

On the other hand, when the variation type is a Miss Super Reach, the range of the value of the performance counter 223n is specified to correspond to "0 to 69" for the third operation valid period in the continuous transformation performance, the range of the value of the performance counter 223n is specified to correspond to "0 to 49" for the fourth operation valid period, and the range of the value of the performance counter 223n is specified to correspond to "0 to 69" for the fifth operation valid period. In other words, during the execution of a Miss Super Reach, in contrast to the case of a Win Super Reach, it is easier for the success notification mode to be set at the end of the odd-numbered operation valid period (the third and fifth operation), but it is harder for the success notification mode to be set at the end of the even-numbered operation valid period (the fourth operation).

Therefore, after an odd-numbered valid operation period ends, the expectation of a jackpot increases when a failure notification mode is displayed, whereas after an even-numbered valid operation period ends, the expectation of a jackpot increases when a success notification mode is displayed. Therefore, during odd-numbered valid operation periods, a player can play in the hope that a failure notification mode will be displayed after the period ends, whereas during even-numbered valid operation periods, a player can play in the hope that a success notification mode will be displayed after the period ends.

In this way, the lottery method (table used for the lottery) for determining whether or not to display the success notification mode is different for players who tend to press the frame button 22 and players who tend not to press it. This makes it possible to provide gameplay in which, when a player who tends to press the frame button 22 is playing, the more times the success notification mode is displayed, the higher the chance of winning. On the other hand, when a player who tends not to press the frame button 22 is playing, it is possible to provide gameplay in which the chance of winning decreases when the success notification mode is displayed an odd number of times, and increases when the success notification mode is displayed an even number of times.

In addition, during the first two effective operation periods in one continuous transformation performance, the table used to determine whether or not to display the success notification mode can be switched depending on whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed. In other words, the method of suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot (gameplay) can be switched, allowing the player to select the suggestion method that he or she prefers. This makes it possible to realize a suggestion method that suits the tastes of each player. Also, even if a player becomes bored with one suggestion method, the player can switch to the other suggestion method, preventing (suppressing) the game from becoming monotonous.

In the fourth embodiment, in order to more accurately determine the likelihood of a jackpot from the timing of the display of the success notification mode, only the continuous transformation mode with a maximum number of transformations of five is set as the type of continuous transformation mode. By configuring it in this way, the cases in which the failure notification mode is displayed can be limited to cases in which the display lottery of the success notification mode based on the transformation possibility determination table 222e is missed. This allows the player to more accurately predict the likelihood of a jackpot.

Next, referring to FIG. 69, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 69, the RAM 223 in this fourth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14(b)) in that a pressed flag 223s and a pressed count counter 223u are provided.

As in the second embodiment, the pressed flag 223s is a flag indicating whether or not a press of the frame button 22 has been detected during one valid operation period. The press count counter 223u is a counter for counting the number of valid operation periods during which a press of the frame button 22 has been detected during the first two valid operation periods in the continuous transformation performance. Based on the counter value of this press count counter 223u, the tendency of the player (whether or not a player who tends to press the frame button 22 is playing) is determined.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 70 to Fig. 72. First, frame button input monitoring and performance process 4 (S4041) will be described with reference to Fig. 70. This frame button input monitoring and performance process 4 (S4041) is executed in place of the frame button input monitoring and performance process 3 (see Fig. 66) in the third embodiment, and is a process for monitoring pressing of the frame button 22 and displaying a corresponding performance when pressing is detected.

In the frame button input monitoring and performance process 4 (see FIG. 70) in this fourth embodiment, the processes S4101 and S4102 are the same as the processes S4101 and S4102 in the frame button input monitoring and performance process 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment.

In addition, in the frame button input monitoring/performance process 4 in the fourth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4102 that a press on a frame button 22 has been detected (S4102: Yes), it is determined whether or not the pressed flag 223s is on (S4131), and if the pressed flag 223s is on (S4131: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4131 that the pressed flag 223s is off (S4131: No), the pressed flag 223s is set to on (S4132), and then the value of the press count counter 223u is updated by adding 1 (S4133). Then, a press effect is set to notify the player that a press has been detected (S4134), and this process ends. In the frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 in this fourth embodiment (see FIG. 70), the press count counter 223u can be updated in response to presses on the frame buttons 22, so that the player's tendency to press the frame buttons 22 can be determined in accordance with the value of the press count counter 223u.

Next, the valid period process 4 (S4331) will be described with reference to FIG. 71. This valid period process 4 (S4331) is a process executed in place of the valid period process (see FIG. 37(b)) in the third embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process for performing corresponding control at the end timing of the valid operation period.

In the valid period process 4 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 71), the processes of S4501 and S4502 are the same as those in the valid period process in the third embodiment (see FIG. 37(b)). In the valid period process 4 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 71), if it is determined in the process of S4502 that the value of the valid period timer 223f after subtraction is 0 (S4502: Yes), the pressed flag 223s is set to OFF (S4531), and the transformation setting process 4 is executed (S4532). This transformation setting process 4 is a process for selecting the notification mode in the continuous transformation performance, similar to the transformation setting process 3 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 67). Details of this transformation setting process 4 (S4532) will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

When the processing of S4532 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the transformation count counter 223g is 2 (S4533). That is, as described above, in this fourth embodiment, after the first and second valid operation periods have ended, the success notification mode is always displayed (the transformation is successful). Then, during the two valid operation periods, the number of times the player presses the frame button 22 is used to determine the player's tendency. In this processing of S4533, it is determined whether or not it is time to determine the player's pressing tendency (whether or not the timing has come to the end of the first two valid operation periods).

If it is determined in the process of S4533 that the value of the transformation count counter 223g is not 2 (S4533: No), it is not time to determine the player's pressing tendency, so this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4533 that the value of the transformation count counter 223g is 2 (S4533: Yes), the process executes the processes of S4534 to S4536 to determine the player's pressing tendency and set a table to be used in the lottery to determine whether or not to display the success notification mode.

Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the press count counter 223u is 2 (S4534), and if it is determined that the value of the press count counter 223u is 2 (S4534: Yes), the press tendency table 222e1 (see FIG. 68(c)) is set as the table to be used for the lottery to determine whether or not to display the success notification mode (determining whether or not transformation is possible) (S4535), and this process ends. The fact that the value of the press count counter 223u is 2 means that the player pressed the frame button 22 both times during the first two effective operation periods in the continuous transformation performance, and therefore there is a high possibility that the player is actively pressing the frame button 22.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4534 that the value of the press count counter 223u is 1 or less (S4534: No), it is determined that there is a high possibility that the player playing is someone who has difficulty pressing the frame button 22, and the non-press tendency table 222e2 (see FIG. 68(d)) is set as the table to be used in the lottery to determine whether or not to display the success notification mode (S4536), and this process is terminated.

Next, the above-mentioned transformation setting process 4 (S4532) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this transformation setting process 4 (S4532). In this transformation setting process 4 (S4532), the processes of S4201, S4202, S4206, and S4210 to S4212 are the same as the processes of S4201, S4202, S4206, and S4210 to S4212 of the transformation setting process 3 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 67).

In addition, in the transformation setting process 4 (see FIG. 72) in this fourth embodiment, when the process of S4202 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the transformation count counter 223g read in the process of S4202 is 2 or greater (S4231). If it is determined in the process of S4231 that the value of the transformation count counter 223g is less than 2 (S4231: No), this means that the current transformation setting process 4 was executed at the timing when one of the first two effective operation periods of the consecutive transformation performance ended. As described above, after the first two effective operation periods end, the success notification mode is always displayed, so in this case, the processes of S4210 to S4212 for setting the success notification mode are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4231, if it is determined that the value of the transformation count counter 223g is 2 or more (S4231: Yes), the transformation possibility determination table 222e is read out from the table (either the pressing tendency table 222e1 or the non-pressing tendency table 222e2) set in the valid period process 4 (see FIG. 71) and the value of the performance counter 223n (S4222). As described above, by referring to the pressing tendency table 222e1 to determine whether or not the success notification mode can be displayed, it is possible to realize a gameplay (a method of suggesting the degree of expectation) in which the greater the number of times the success notification mode is displayed, the higher the expectation of the jackpot. On the other hand, by referring to the non-pressing tendency table 222e2 to determine whether or not the success notification mode can be displayed, it is possible to realize a gameplay (a method of suggesting the degree of expectation) in which the expectation of the jackpot decreases when the success notification mode is displayed after an odd-numbered operation valid period, and the expectation of the jackpot increases when the success notification mode is displayed after an even-numbered operation valid period.

When the processing of S4222 is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the effect counter 223n that was read out is a counter value that corresponds to the display of the success notification mode (successful transformation) defined in the table (S4223), and if it is a counter value that corresponds to the display of the success notification mode (successful transformation) (S4223: Yes), the processing of S4210 to S4212 is executed to display the success notification mode, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4223 that the value of the performance counter 223n is outside the range of counter values corresponding to the display of the success notification mode specified in the table (S4223: No), the value of the transformation count counter 223g and the advanced performance mode corresponding to the change type of the current change display are read from the advanced performance mode selection table 222c (S4232). Next, data corresponding to the selected advanced performance is stored in the advanced performance storage area 223m (S4206), and a failure notification mode is set (S4233). Next, a timer value corresponding to 1 second is set for the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j (S4234), and this processing ends.

By executing this transformation setting process 4 (see FIG. 72), the method of suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot can be varied according to the player's tendency to press the frame button 22, thereby preventing (suppressing) the game from becoming monotonous.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is configured to be able to determine (identify) whether or not the player currently playing is a player who tends to press the frame button 22 during a predetermined period in the continuous transformation performance. The method of suggesting the expectation level in the continuous preview performance (game characteristics) is different for players who tend to actively press the frame button 22 during the operation valid period and players who do not. In other words, if it is determined that a player who tends to actively press the frame button 22 is playing, the suggestion method is set so that the expectation level of a jackpot increases as the number of times the successful notification mode is displayed (the number of times transformations are successful) increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that a player who tends not to press the frame button 22 is playing, the suggestion method is set so that the expectation level of a jackpot decreases when the successful notification mode is displayed after an odd-numbered operation valid period, and the expectation level increases when the successful notification mode is displayed after an even-numbered operation valid period.

By configuring it in this way, a variety of suggestion methods can be realized, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, during the first two effective operation periods in one continuous transformation performance, the table used to determine whether or not to display the success notification mode can be switched depending on whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed. In other words, since the method of suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot (game playability) can be switched, the player can select the suggestion method he or she prefers. Thus, suggestion methods that suit the tastes of each player can be realized. Furthermore, even if a player becomes bored with one suggestion method, the player can switch to the other suggestion method, thereby preventing (suppressing) the game from becoming monotonous.

In the fourth embodiment, the player's tendency is determined in the first two effective operation periods in the continuous transformation performance, but the method of determining the player's tendency is not limited to this. The player's tendency may be determined based on the pressing status in the first effective operation period. This allows the continuous transformation performance to execute a suggestion method tailored to the tendency of each player for a larger number of times. Conversely, the player's tendency may be determined according to the pressing status over three or more effective operation periods. This configuration allows the player's tendency to be determined more accurately. In addition, a period for determining the player's tendency may be set separately from the effective operation period set in the continuous transformation performance. Specifically, for example, before the start of the continuous transformation performance, a performance (pressing performance) that prompts the player to press the frame button 22 may be displayed one or more times, and the player's tendency may be determined based on the pressing status in the one or more pressing performances. This configuration allows all notification modes of the continuous transformation performance to be set to a suggestion method according to the player's tendency.

In the fourth embodiment, the upper limit of the number of transformations in the continuous transformation performance is always set to 5 times. In other words, the failure notification mode is displayed only when the lottery for whether or not to display the success notification mode, which is executed based on the transformation possibility determination table 222e, is missed, but this is not limited to this. As in each of the above embodiments, a configuration may be provided in which multiple types of upper limit of the number of transformations are different. By configuring in this way, when the failure notification mode is displayed, it is possible to make the player think that the failure notification mode was not selected by the lottery based on the transformation possibility determination table 222e, but that the failure notification mode may have been displayed because the upper limit of the number of transformations in the current continuous transformation performance has been reached. Therefore, even if the failure notification mode is displayed at a time when the expectation of the jackpot is low, assuming that the failure notification mode was determined by the lottery based on the transformation possibility determination table 222e, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation of the jackpot from decreasing.

In the fourth embodiment, for a player who actively presses the frame button 22, the more the number of times the success notification mode is displayed, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, while for a player who does not tend to press the frame button 22 very often, the expectation of a jackpot increases when the continuous transformation performance ends an odd number of times, but this is not limited to this. It is sufficient that the method of suggesting the expectation level differs depending on whether the player actively presses the frame button 22 or does not press it very often. For example, for a player who actively presses the frame button 22, the expectation of a jackpot increases when the continuous transformation performance ends an even number of times, while for a player who does not press the frame button 22, the expectation of a jackpot increases the fewer the number of times the continuous transformation performance ends. Also, for example, instead of or in addition to changing the tendency of the number of transformations, the rule of the display mode that increases the expectation of a jackpot when the transformation is successful (the success notification mode is displayed) may be changed according to the tendency of the player. Specifically, for example, in the case of a player who tends to press the frame button 22, the degree of expectation may be suggested by the type of rear image displayed on the rear of the character 811. That is, the degree of expectation may increase in the order of the rear images: wilderness → mountain → sea. On the other hand, in the case of a player who tends not to press the frame button 22, the degree of expectation may be suggested by the facial expression of the character 811 instead of setting the rear image randomly. That is, the degree of expectation may increase in the order of the facial expressions of the character 811: expressionless → smiling → angry. Also, for example, instead of or in addition to changing the suggestion method during the execution of the continuous transformation performance according to the player's tendency, the content of the development performance may be changed according to the tendency. Specifically, for example, in the case of a player who actively presses the frame button 22, the more the character 811 attacks the monster 812 in the development presentation, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. On the other hand, in the case of a player who does not press the frame button 22, the more the character 811 is attacked by the monster 812, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 73 to Fig. 82. In the fourth embodiment described above, in one continuous transformation performance, the tendency of the player to press the frame button 22 is determined, and the method of notifying the probability of a big win is changed according to the determination result.

In contrast to this, in the fifth embodiment, the mode of the continuous transformation performance is changed depending on the state of pressing the frame button 22 by the player in the past continuous transformation performance. Specifically, for a player who actively presses the frame button 22, a performance mode in which the number of times the operation effective period is set is executed is executed. On the other hand, for a player who tends to have difficulty pressing the frame button 22, the number of times the operation effective period is set is reduced, and a long development performance is set. In this way, players who actively press the frame button 22 are given more opportunities to press the frame button 22, while players who do not want to press the button are given fewer opportunities to press it, but can enjoy the development performance for a longer period of time. Therefore, it is possible to execute a performance that matches the tastes of each player.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, even if a failure notification mode is displayed during the consecutive transformation performance, if the set number of times (2 or 5 times) of the effective operation period remains, the effective operation period is set again without ending the consecutive transformation performance. In other words, this prevents (suppresses) the effective operation period from ending with a small number of times, even when a player who tends to aggressively press the frame button 22 is playing.

The pachinko machine 10 in this fifth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The other configurations, the various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fourth embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 73, the development performance in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, as described above, it is determined whether or not a player has a tendency to press the frame button 22, and for players who have a tendency to actively press the frame button 22 (tendency to participate frequently) according to the determination result, more effective operation periods are set. In addition, for players who have a tendency not to press the frame button 22 very often (tendency to participate frequently), the number of times the effective operation period is set is reduced, while the performance time of the development performance is extended. Note that, although details will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, in the first half of the development performance (development performance for low participation frequency) with the extended performance time, a performance is executed in which the character 811 explores a cave and collects items. The discovered items give the character 811 an advantage in the subsequent battle with the monster 812. This cave exploration effect (search effect) is configured to suggest the likelihood of a jackpot depending on the number of items discovered by the character 811 (the more items there are, the easier it is to defeat the monster 812). In other words, if a small number of effective operation periods is set for a player who participates infrequently, the number of times the effect suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is executed based on whether or not the character 811 transforms is reduced, but instead the number of items the character 811 discovers in the search effect can suggest the likelihood of a jackpot. This makes it possible to provide the same opportunity for a likelihood suggestion to players when a small number of effective operation periods is set as when a large number of effective operation periods are set.

Figure 73 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content in the above-mentioned exploration presentation. As shown in Figure 73 (a), when the exploration presentation starts, an presentation is displayed in which the character 811 progresses toward the depths of a cave. In addition, the words "Exploration Mode" and the words "The more items you get, the higher your expectations!" are displayed in the display area HR1 displayed above the main display area Dm. Furthermore, the words "0 Items" are displayed in the display area HR4 displayed at the bottom right of the main display area Dm. The words displayed in this display area HR4 are updated according to the number of items that the character 811 discovers. Note that the character 811 can discover a maximum of three items in one exploration presentation.

73(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the character 811 finds an item during the execution of a search effect. In this case, an effect is executed in which the character 811 opens a treasure chest displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and an item appears from the treasure chest. In addition, a display area HR5 for notifying the type of item acquired is displayed to the right of the treasure chest. In the example of FIG. 73(b), the text "GET POWER UP DRINK!!" is displayed in the display area HR5. In addition, the text displayed in the display area HR4 is updated to "Item x 1". The number displayed in this display area HR4 can suggest to the player the expectation of a jackpot. Note that in the search effect, there is a possibility that an effect is executed in which the character 811 finds a treasure chest but no item appears. In other words, in the search effect, the treasure chest is basically discovered three times, and the expectation is suggested depending on how many times an item is discovered out of the three times.

In this way, in the fifth embodiment, when the player's participation in the successive transformation effects is low, the number of times the effective operation period in the successive transformation effects is set is reduced, and instead a search effect is executed. In this search effect, the number of items discovered by the character 811 can suggest the likelihood of a jackpot. This makes it possible to provide the player with the same opportunity to suggest the likelihood of a jackpot, even when the effective operation period is set only a small number of times, as when the number of times is set many times.

Next, referring to FIG. 74, we will explain the change in the presentation mode over time when it is determined that the participation frequency in the continuous transformation presentation is low, and when it is determined that the participation frequency is high. First, referring to FIG. 74(a), we will explain the change in the presentation mode over time when the player's participation frequency is low.

As shown in FIG. 74(a), when it is determined that the participation frequency is low, the operation valid period is set only twice. That is, a four-second operation valid period and a one-second notification mode are set twice. In the example of FIG. 74(a), a failure notification mode is set as the first notification mode, and a success notification mode is set as the second notification mode. Note that, as shown in FIG. 74(a), in this fifth embodiment, even if a failure notification mode is displayed, the continuous transformation performance is not ended until a specified number of operation valid periods have been set. This allows the probability of a jackpot to be more accurately estimated according to the number of times the success notification mode is displayed.

When the display period of the second notification mode ends, a one-second transition effect is then set. When the transition effect ends, the development effect begins. In this development effect when the participation frequency is low, a 15-second search effect (see FIG. 73(b)) is first executed. In this search effect, as described above, an effect is executed that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot depending on the number of items discovered by the character 811. Then, when the 15-second performance period has elapsed, a performance in which the character battles the monster 812 is executed. In the example of FIG. 74(a), a winning development effect A5 in which the character defeats the monster 812 is executed during the 23-second performance period.

In this way, when the participation frequency is low, two opportunities are given to suggest the likelihood of a jackpot due to the two effective operation periods set in the continuous transformation performance. In addition, three opportunities are given to suggest the likelihood of a jackpot due to the search performance. Therefore, a total of five opportunities are given to suggest the likelihood of a jackpot.

Next, referring to FIG. 74(b), the change over time of the presentation mode when it is determined that the player's participation frequency is high will be described. As shown in FIG. 74(b), when the player's participation frequency is high, a four-second operation valid period and a one-second notification mode are displayed five times. That is, as shown in FIG. 74(b), a failure notification mode is displayed as the first notification mode, a success notification mode is displayed as the second notification mode, a failure notification mode is displayed as the third notification mode, and a success notification mode is displayed as the fourth and fifth notification modes. Note that, as shown in FIG. 74(b), in this fifth embodiment, even if a press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the operation valid period is not terminated. This makes it possible to fix the presentation time of the continuous transformation presentation, and therefore the presentation time of the development presentation executed thereafter can also be fixed. Therefore, since there is no need to prepare various modes for each presentation time of the development presentation, the memory capacity for displaying the development presentation can be reduced.

When the display period of the fifth notification mode ends, a transition effect is displayed, followed by a winning development effect A5 with a presentation time of 23 seconds. In this way, when the player's participation frequency is high, the continuous transformation effect is always set to a five-time effective operation period, so five opportunities to suggest the likelihood of a big win are given, just as in the case of a low participation frequency.

<Electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 75 and Fig. 76. First, Fig. 75(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in Fig. 75(a), the ROM 222 in the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fourth embodiment in that a valid period count table 222f is added.

The effective period count table 222f is a data table that specifies the number of effective operation periods to be set in the successive transformation performance for each state of the pressing tendency flag 223y. The pressing tendency flag 223y is a flag that indicates the degree of the player's participation in the successive transformation performance (whether or not the player actively presses the frame button 22 during the effective operation period). If this pressing tendency flag 223y is on, it means that the player is an active participant in the successive transformation performance, and if it is off, it means that the player does not participate in the successive transformation performance frequently.

Details of the valid period count table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 75(b). FIG. 75(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the valid period count table 222f. As shown in FIG. 75(b), the state of the pressing tendency flag 223y is set to "on" and "five times" is set as the set number of times for the valid operation period. Therefore, when a player who actively participates in the continuous transformation performance (actively pressing the frame button 22) is playing, the effective operation period is set to five times in the continuous transformation performance. The number of times (proportion) that the successful notification mode is displayed among the notification modes displayed after the five set effective operation periods have ended can suggest to the player the expectation of a jackpot.

In this embodiment, as in the third embodiment described above, the transformation possibility determination table 222e is set so that in the case of a jackpot, the success notification mode is displayed 80% of the time after the end of each operation valid period, whereas in the case of a miss, the success notification mode is displayed 50% of the time. Therefore, the more times the success notification mode is displayed, the higher the player's expectations of a jackpot can be.

As shown in FIG. 75(b), the "OFF" state of the pressing tendency flag 223y is associated with a setting of "2 times" as the number of times the effective operation period can be set. For this reason, when a player who participates in the successive transformation performance infrequently (infrequently presses the frame button 22), the effective operation period is set to two times in the successive transformation performance. Of the notification modes that are displayed after the two set effective operation periods have ended, the number of times (proportion) that the successful notification mode is displayed can suggest to the player the degree of expectation of a jackpot.

When a player is playing with a low participation frequency in the continuous transformation performance, the number of times the operation valid period is set is three times less than in the case of a player with a high participation frequency. In other words, the number of times that the probability of a jackpot is suggested in the continuous transformation performance is reduced. In order to compensate for this reduction in the number of times that it is suggested, in the fifth embodiment, a performance that suggests the probability of a jackpot (a search performance) is executed in the development performance. This makes it possible to guarantee that the number of times that the probability of a jackpot is suggested for players with a low participation frequency is the same as for players with a high participation frequency. In addition, by reducing the number of times that the operation valid period is set and instead lengthening the performance time of the development performance, it is possible to provide a performance style that suits the preferences of players who do not want to press the frame button 22.

Next, referring to FIG. 76, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 76, the RAM 223 in the fifth embodiment has at least a valid period count counter 223w, an alarm mode timer 223x, a pressing tendency flag 223y, a total pressing count counter 223aa, and a total valid period count counter 223ab added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 69). In addition, the successful alarm mode timer 223i and the failed alarm mode timer 223j have been deleted.

The effective period count counter 223w is a counter for counting the number of times the operation effective period is set in one consecutive transformation performance. The value of this effective period count counter 223w is set to 1 when the first operation effective period in the consecutive transformation performance is set (see S4412 in FIG. 78). In addition, the value is incremented by 1 each time a new operation effective period is set (see S5209 in FIG. 80). The value of this effective period count counter 223w is used to determine whether to set a new operation effective period or to set a transition performance each time the display period of the notification mode has elapsed. In other words, if the value of the effective period count counter 223w is less than the set number of operation effective periods specified in the effective period count table 222f, a new operation effective period is set. On the other hand, if the value of the effective period count counter 223w matches the set number specified in the effective period count table 222f, the start of the transition performance is set.

The notification mode timer 223x is a counter for counting the display period of the notification mode that is set after the operation valid period has ended. This notification mode timer 223x is set to a timer value corresponding to 1 second each time the display of the success notification mode or failure notification mode is set (see S4241 in FIG. 79). When the value of this notification mode timer 223x becomes 0, it is determined that the success notification mode or failure notification mode has ended, and it is determined whether to set a new operation valid period or to set a transition performance.

The pressing tendency flag 223y is a flag that indicates whether or not the player tends to actively participate in the continuous transformation performance. If the pressing tendency flag 223y is on, it means that the player tends to actively participate in the continuous transformation performance (actively pressing the frame button 22), and if it is off, it means that the player's participation frequency in the continuous transformation performance is low. The participation frequency is determined by the ratio of the number of times the player pressed (participated in) the frame button 22 to the set number of times of the total effective operation period. Specifically, if the effective operation period in which the player pressed the frame button 22 exceeds 80% of the total, it is determined that the player is playing a game that tends to actively participate in the continuous transformation performance. The pressing tendency flag 223y is updated according to the player's participation status in the continuous transformation performance (the number of times the frame button 22 was pressed) each time one continuous transformation performance ends (see S5305, S5306 in FIG. 82).

The total press count counter 223aa is a counter for counting the total number of times during the effective operation period in which the press of the frame button 22 was detected. That is, the total press count counter 223aa counts the number of times during the effective operation period in which all of the frame buttons 22 were pressed after the power was turned on for the pachinko machine 10. The rate at which the frame button 22 is pressed (the player's tendency) is determined based on the counter value of the total press count counter 223aa and the number of times during all of the effective operation periods set after the power was turned on (the counter value of the total effective period counter 223ab, which will be described later). The total press count counter 223aa is updated each time one continuous transformation performance ends according to the player's participation status in that continuous transformation performance (the number of times the frame button 22 was pressed) (see S5302 in FIG. 82).

The total valid period counter 223ab is a counter for counting the total number of valid operation periods. That is, the total valid period counter 223ab counts the number of all valid operation periods since the power to the pachinko machine 10 was turned on. Based on the value of the total valid period counter 223ab and the value of the total press count counter 223aa, the rate at which the frame button 22 is pressed (the player's tendency) is determined. Like the total press count counter 223aa, the total valid period counter 223ab is updated each time one consecutive transformation performance ends according to the player's participation status in that consecutive transformation performance (the number of times the frame button 22 was pressed) (see S5301 in FIG. 82).

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 77 to Fig. 82. First, the performance update process 5 (S4051) in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 77. This performance update process 5 (S4051) is a process for varying the performance mode according to the remaining variable time and the values of various timers during the execution of the variable display, similar to the performance update process (see Fig. 36) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

In the fifth embodiment of the performance update process 5 (see FIG. 77), steps S4301, S4302, S4304, and S4310 are identical to steps S4301, S4302, S4304, and S4310 of the fourth embodiment of the performance update process (see FIG. 36).

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, in the performance update process 5 (see FIG. 77), if it is determined in the process of S4302 that the transformation performance in progress flag 223h is on (S4302: Yes), the transformation performance start determination process 5 is executed (S4341) to determine the start timing of the successive transformation performance, and this process is terminated. Details of this transformation performance start determination process 5 (S4341) will be described later with reference to FIG. 78(a).

In addition, in the performance update process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4304 that the valid period flag 223e is on (S4304: Yes), valid period process 5 is executed to determine the end timing of the valid period (S4342), and this process is terminated. Details of this valid period process 5 (S4342) will be described later with reference to FIG. 78(b).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4304 that the validity period flag 223e is off (S4304: No), it is then determined whether the value of the notification mode timer 223x is greater than 0 (S4343). If the value is greater than 0 (S4343: Yes), this means that the notification mode is currently being displayed, so notification mode in-process processing is executed to determine the end timing of the notification mode (S4344), and this processing is terminated. Details of this notification mode in-process processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 80.

If it is determined in the process of S4343 that the value of the notification mode timer 223x is 0 (S4343: No), it is determined whether the value of the transition performance time timer 223k is greater than 0 (whether the transition performance is in progress) (S4310), and if the value of the transition performance time timer 223k is 0 (S4310: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the transition performance time timer 223x is greater than 0 (S4310: Yes) in the process of S4310, transition performance in progress process 5 is executed to determine the timing of the end of the transition performance (S4345), and this process ends. Details of this transition performance in progress process 5 (S4345) will be described later with reference to FIG. 81.

Next, the details of transformation performance start determination process 5 (S4341) will be described with reference to FIG. 78(a). This transformation performance start determination process 5 (S4341) is a process for determining the start timing of the successive transformation performance, similar to the transformation performance start determination process (see FIG. 37(a)) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

In the transformation performance start determination process 5 in this fifth embodiment (see FIG. 78(a)), steps S4401, S4402, and S4404 are the same as steps S4401, S4402, and S4404 in the transformation performance start determination process in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 37(a)).

In addition, in transformation performance start determination process 5 in this fifth embodiment (see FIG. 78(a)), when the process of S4402 ends, the timer value corresponding to 4 seconds is set for the valid period timer 223f, and the valid period flag 223e is set to ON (S4411). Next, the value of the valid period count counter 223w is set to 1 (S4412), and the process proceeds to S4404.

By executing transformation performance start determination process 5 in this fifth embodiment (see FIG. 78(a)), it is possible to set the start of the continuous transformation performance at the same timing every time (11 seconds after the start of the transformation) and also to start counting the effective period count counter 223w.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned valid period process 5 (S4342) will be described with reference to FIG. 78(b). This valid period process 5 (S4342) is a process for determining the end timing of the valid operation period, and displaying the corresponding notification mode when the valid operation period has ended, similar to the valid period process 4 (see FIG. 71) in the fourth embodiment.

In the valid period process 5 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 78(b)), the same processes as S4501, S4502, and S4531 of the valid period process 4 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 71) are executed in the steps S4501, S4502, and S4531, respectively. In the valid period process 5 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 78(b)), when the process of S4502 ends, in order to set the display of either the success notification mode or the failure notification mode, the transformation setting process 5 is executed (S4541) instead of the transformation setting process 4 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 72), and this process ends. Details of this transformation setting process 5 (S4541) will be described with reference to FIG. 79.

Figure 79 is a flowchart showing this transformation setting process 5 (S4541). In this transformation setting process 5 (S4541), the processes of S4201, S4202, S4210, S4211, S4222, S4223, and S4233 are the same as the processes of S4201, S4202, S4210, S4211, S4222, S4223, and S4233 in the transformation setting process 4 (see Figure 72) in the fourth embodiment.

In addition, in the transformation setting process 5 in this fifth embodiment (see FIG. 79), when the process of S4233 or S4211 ends, the value of the notification mode timer 223x is set to a timer value corresponding to 1 second (S4241), and this process ends.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned in-notification mode process (S4344) will be described with reference to FIG. 80. As described above, this in-notification mode process (S4344) is a process for determining the end timing of the display time of the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode).

In this notification mode process (see FIG. 80), first, the value of the notification mode timer 223x is decremented by 1 (S5201), and it is determined whether the timer value after decrement is 0 (S5202). In the process of S5202, if it is determined that the value of the notification mode timer 223x is not 0 (S5202: No), this means that the display time (1 second) of the notification mode has not elapsed, and therefore this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5202 that the value of the notification mode timer 223x after subtraction has become 0 (S5202: Yes), a process is executed to set either a new operation valid period or a transition performance. Specifically, the pressing tendency flag 223y and the value of the valid period number counter 223w are read (S5203), and these are compared with the specified contents of the valid period number table 222f (S5204).

As a result of the comparison made in the process of S5204, it is determined whether the value of the valid period count counter 223w matches the upper limit value corresponding to the state of the pressing tendency flag 223y (S5205), and if it is determined that it matches the upper limit value (S5205: Yes), a transition performance is set. More specifically, a timer value corresponding to one second is set to the transition performance time timer 223k (S5206), a display command indicating the start of the transition performance is set (S5207), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5205 that the value of the valid period count counter 223w does not match the upper limit value corresponding to the state of the pressing tendency flag 223y (S5205: No), a new operation valid period is set. Specifically, a timer value corresponding to 4 seconds is set for the value of the valid period timer 223f, and the valid period flag 223e is set to ON (S5208). Next, 1 is added to the value of the valid period count counter 223w (S5209), and this process ends.

By executing this notification mode process (see FIG. 80), it is possible to accurately determine the end timing of the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) and perform corresponding control (setting the start of a transition performance or setting a new effective operation period).

Next, the details of the above-mentioned transition performance process 5 (S4345) will be described with reference to FIG. 81. This transition performance process 5 (S4345) is executed in place of the transition performance process (see FIG. 40) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

Of this transition performance processing 5 (see FIG. 81), the processing of S4801 and S4802 is the same as the processing of S4801 and S4802 of the transition performance processing in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 40).

In the fifth embodiment, in the transition performance process 5 (see FIG. 81), if it is determined in the process of S4802 that the value of the transition performance time timer 223k after subtraction has become 0 (S4802: Yes), it is then determined whether the press tendency flag 223y is on (S4811). If it is determined in the process of S4811 that the press tendency flag 223y is on (S4811: Yes), the development performance corresponding to the current lottery result is set to start from the performance time after the search performance (search mode) ends (S4812), and the process proceeds to S4814.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4811 that the pressing tendency flag 223y is off (S4811: No), the development effect corresponding to the current lottery result is set to start from the search effect (search mode) (S4813), and the processing proceeds to S4814.

In this way, in this embodiment, depending on the state of the pressing tendency flag 223y (the tendency of the player), it is possible to switch between starting the development effect from the search effect or starting after the search effect has ended. This makes it possible to execute a development effect that matches the remaining variable time.

After processing S4812 or S4813, a press tendency update process is executed (S4814) to update the player's tendency (the state of the press tendency flag 223y) according to the player's participation frequency in the current successive transformation performance. Details of this press tendency update process (S4814) will be described later with reference to FIG. 82. After processing S4814, the transformation performance in progress flag 223h is set to OFF (S4815), the value of the transformation count counter 223g and the value of the valid period count counter 223w are both reset to 0 (S4816), and this process ends.

Next, the above-mentioned pressing tendency update process (S4814) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this pressing tendency update process (S4814). In the pressing tendency update process (S4814), first, the value of the effective period number counter 223w is added to the value of the total effective period number counter 223ab, thereby reflecting the number of times of the operation effective period set in this consecutive transformation performance in the set number of times of the total operation effective period (S5301). Next, the value of the pressing number counter 223u is added to the value of the total pressing number counter 223aa, thereby reflecting the number of times of the operation effective period in which pressing of the frame button 22 was detected in this consecutive transformation performance in the total number of times of the operation effective period in which pressing of the frame button 22 was detected (S5302).

When the process of S5302 is completed, the updated value of the total press count counter 223aa is divided by the updated value of the total valid period count counter 223ab to calculate a value (S5303), and it is determined whether the calculated value is greater than 0.8 (S5304: Yes). If it is determined in the process of S5304 that the calculated value is greater than 0.8 (S5304), this means that when the valid operation period is set, the frame button 22 is pressed 80% or more of the time (i.e., the player is playing by actively participating in the continuous transformation performance), so the press tendency flag 223y is set to ON (S5305), and this process is terminated.

In contrast, if it is determined in the process of S5304 that the calculated value is 0.8 or less (S5304: No), this means that the player is playing the game with a relatively low frequency of pressing the frame button 22 during the valid operation period, so the pressing tendency flag 223y is set to OFF (S5306) and this process is terminated.

By executing this pressing tendency update process (see FIG. 82), the player's tendency can be updated each time a continuous transformation performance ends, taking into account the player's participation in that continuous transformation performance.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, the presentation mode in the continuous transformation presentation is different based on the player's participation status in the continuous transformation presentation (the ratio of the effective operation period during which the frame button 22 is pressed to the total number of times of the effective operation period). That is, when a player who actively participates in the continuous transformation presentation (actively presses the frame button 22 during the effective operation period) is playing, the effective operation period is set to a relatively large number of times (5 times) in the continuous transformation presentation, and the presentation time of the development presentation is shortened. On the other hand, when a player who does not participate much in the continuous transformation presentation (does not press the frame button 22 much during the effective operation period) is playing, the effective operation period is set to a relatively small number of times (2 times) in the continuous transformation presentation, and the presentation time of the development presentation is lengthened. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide more opportunities for players who tend to actively participate in the continuous transformation presentation to participate in the continuous transformation presentation. On the other hand, for players who tend not to participate much in the continuous transformation performance, the opportunities to participate in the continuous transformation performance can be reduced, allowing them to enjoy the development performance for a longer period of time. Therefore, the performance can be set appropriately according to the player's tendencies.

In the fifth embodiment, the tendency of the player is determined based on the ratio of the effective operation period in which the frame button 22 is pressed to the number of times of all the effective operation periods set since the power was turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a function for identifying the player who is playing, and the tendency of the player may be determined anew each time a player different from the previous player is determined (authenticated) to have started playing. That is, when it is detected that a different player has started playing, the value of the total press count counter 223aa and the value of the total effective period count counter 223ab may be reset to 0. This makes it possible to more accurately determine the tendency of each player, so that a performance that is more in line with the tendency of the player can be realized. In addition, examples of the function for identifying the player who is playing include a known face authentication function, a fingerprint authentication function, and a voiceprint authentication function. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to be able to acquire information on the player currently playing from a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10. That is, the card unit is configured to be able to output information indicating the type of card inserted into the card unit (e.g., the card's serial number or membership number) to the pachinko machine 10, while the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to identify the type of card from the information output from the card unit. Then, based on the information output from the card unit, it may be configured to determine that the same player is playing as long as the same card is inserted.

Furthermore, it may be applied to a known gaming system that is composed of a mobile terminal (mobile phone, smartphone, tablet, etc.) owned by a player, a server that can communicate with the mobile terminal, and a pachinko machine 10 that can communicate with the server. That is, the server stores individual information for each player (game history, type and number of effects generated, etc.), and the information stored in the server can be viewed via a corresponding mobile terminal (a mobile terminal that accesses the server with a login ID and password assigned to each player), and the settings of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed based on the stored information. More specifically, the game history information stored on the server side includes the value of the total press count counter 223aa and the value of the total valid period count counter 223ab. When starting a game on the pachinko machine 10, the value of the total press count counter 223aa and the value of the total valid period count counter 223ab stored in the server are reflected in the pachinko machine 10 on which the game is started, thereby making it possible to reflect the proportion of players who participated in the continuous transformation performance on different days or different machines. Therefore, even if the date and time of the game or the machine (hall) on which the game is played is changed, the tendency of each player can be accurately determined and a performance mode that suits the player's tendency can be set.

In addition, in the gaming system, a method of reflecting server information in the pachinko machine 10 includes, for example, setting a password generated based on an encoding rule common to the server and the pachinko machine 10 in the pachinko machine 10 or the server. That is, when starting a game, a mobile terminal connected to the server requests a password for starting the game from the server. The server converts the game history corresponding to the connected mobile terminal into a password based on the above-mentioned encoding rule. When the player inputs the password into the pachinko machine 10, the password is converted into the value of the total press count counter 223aa or the value of the total valid period count counter 223ab based on the above-mentioned encoding rule, and set in the RAM 223, etc. This allows the operator of the mobile terminal to start playing from the state of the game history immediately after finishing the previous game. Also, when finishing a game, a predetermined operation (for example, selecting an option corresponding to finishing the game on the menu screen of the pachinko machine 10, etc.) is performed to generate a password corresponding to finishing the game for the pachinko machine 10. Based on a predetermined operation, the game history including the current value of the total press count counter 223aa and the value of the total valid period count counter 223ab is converted into a password based on the encoding rules described above and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The displayed password is output to the server by a mobile terminal connected to the server. On the server side, the password is converted into information corresponding to the game history, and the information corresponding to the operator of the connected mobile terminal is updated. This allows the pachinko machine 10 and the server to share and update individual information for each player.

In the fifth embodiment, the presentation mode (the set number of times of the effective operation period and the mode of the development presentation) in the variable display in which the continuous transformation presentation is set is changed depending on whether the number of times of the effective operation period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected exceeds 80% of the total number of times of the effective operation period, but the threshold for changing the presentation mode is not limited to 80% and may be set arbitrarily. Also, in the fifth embodiment, the presentation mode is switched between the one set (easily set) when the ratio of the effective operation period in which the pressing of the continuous transformation presentation frame button 22 is detected exceeds 80% and the one set (easily set) when it is 80% or less, but the presentation mode may be further subdivided by determining the player's tendency more precisely. Specifically, for example, when the ratio of the operation effective period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected is 20% or less, the set number of times of the operation effective period is set to 1 continuous transformation effect, when the ratio of the operation effective period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected is more than 20% and is 40% or less, the set number of times of the operation effective period is set to 2 continuous transformation effects, when the ratio of the operation effective period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected is more than 40% and is 60% or less, the set number of times of the operation effective period is set to 3 continuous transformation effects, when the ratio of the operation effective period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected is more than 60% and is 80% or less, the set number of times of the operation effective period is set to 4 continuous transformation effects, and when the ratio of the operation effective period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected is more than 80%, the set number of times of the operation effective period is set to 5 continuous transformation effects. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which one type is set from five types of presentation modes having different presentation times for the number of operation effective periods and the development presentation, depending on the tendency of the player (frequency of participation in continuous transformation presentations). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a presentation style that better matches the tendencies of each player.

In the fifth embodiment, the player's tendency is determined based on the proportion of the operation valid period during which pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 is detected, but the method of determining the player's tendency is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 that is equipped with other effects that encourage pressing of the frame button 22 in addition to the continuous transformation effect, the proportion of times the player pressed the frame button 22 in the other effects may also be taken into account to determine whether or not the player has a tendency to press the frame button 22 (a tendency to participate in the continuous transformation effect).

Sixth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 84 to Fig. 89. In the first to fifth embodiments described above, a single specific winning hole 65a is provided directly below the first ball entry hole 64 as a specific winning hole (large opening hole) that is opened during the execution of a big win game (special offer game). The specific winning hole 65a is provided in a horizontally long rectangular shape at the lower center of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, so that both a game ball shot (hit to the left) toward a flow path provided on the left side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front and a game ball shot (hit to the right) toward a flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front can enter the specific winning hole 65a.

In contrast, in the sixth embodiment, two types of specific winning holes are provided, each of which has a different bonus (number of prize balls) when a game ball enters the hole. Specifically, the left specific winning hole 650La, which is awarded seven prize balls each time a game ball enters the hole, is provided on the left side of the area below the first ball entry hole 64, and the right specific winning hole 650Ra, which is awarded ten prize balls, is provided on the right side of the area below the first ball entry hole 64. In other words, the left specific winning hole 650La and the right specific winning hole 650Ra are provided in a symmetrical arrangement at the lower center of the front view of the game board 13. These two specific winning holes (the left specific winning hole 650La and the right specific winning hole 650Ra) are normally set in a state where it is difficult for game balls to enter the hole, and when a big win round starts, one of the specific winning holes becomes eligible for ball entry. In addition, although details will be described later, when each specific winning hole (left specific winning hole 650La, right specific winning hole 650Ra) is set in a state where balls can enter, both game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right can enter. This allows the player to freely select the launch direction of their choice during a jackpot, which can increase the player's interest in the jackpot game.

The pachinko machine 10 in this sixth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the game board 13 has a partially changed board configuration, that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 have a partially changed configuration, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a partially changed configuration. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 84, the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a front view of the game board 13 in this sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 84, in this sixth embodiment, the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment has been eliminated. In addition, a left variable winning device 650L is provided on the lower left side of the first ball entrance 64 when viewed from the front, and a right variable winning device 650R is provided on the lower right side of the first ball entrance 64 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 84, the left variable winning device 650L is provided with a left specific winning port 650La on the left side as viewed from the front, through which the game ball can enter. When the game ball enters the left variable winning device 650L through this left specific winning port 650La, seven prize balls are paid out to the player. The left specific winning port 650La is always open, so that the game ball that reaches the left variable winning device 650L from the right direction as viewed from the front can always enter. However, the left variable winning device has multiple nails arranged to form a slope downward to the right as viewed from the front, and most of the game balls hit from the left reach the area below the first ball entry port 64 via the slope, so the game ball flows downward to the right in the area below the first ball entry port 64. That is, the ball flows down in a direction away from the left specific winning hole 650La, so that the ball cannot enter the left specific winning hole 650La under normal circumstances. The arrangement of the nails on the game board 13 is symmetrical, and a slope downward to the left is formed above the right variable winning device 650R, but the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R are sufficiently far apart, so that the ball that is hit from the right and flows down the slope formed by the nails above the right variable winning device 650R cannot enter the left specific winning hole 650La directly. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 84, the right side surface (the surface on which the opening is provided) of the left variable winning device 650L is configured so that the upper side protrudes more to the right when viewed from the front than the lower side. As a result, even if the ball flows down almost vertically from above, it can be more reliably prevented (suppressed) from entering the left specific winning hole 650La by being obstructed by the protruding part. The right variable prize-winning device 650R is identical to the left variable prize-winning device 650L except that its layout is symmetrical to that of the left variable prize-winning device 650L and that 10 prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters it, so a detailed explanation of it will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 84, between the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R, two variable members 650Lb, 650Rb that can move in and out (variable movement) are provided at the front and back sides when viewed from the front. These variable members 650Lb, 650Rb are normally buried at the back side when viewed from the front (i.e. buried at the back side of the base plate 60), so that the progress of the game ball that flows down to the area below the first ball entrance 64 is not impeded by the variable members 650Lb, 650Rb.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 85, but the variable member 650Lb forms a slope that slopes downward to the lower left when viewed from the front by protruding toward the front side when viewed from the front. This slope continues to the vicinity of the bottom end on the right side of the left variable winning device 650L, so that the game ball that flows down the slope created by the variable member 650Lb is guided to the left specific winning port 650La. Also, the variable member 650Rb forms a slope that slopes downward to the lower right when viewed from the front by protruding toward the front side when viewed from the front. This slope continues to the vicinity of the bottom end on the left side of the right variable winning device 650R, so that the game ball that flows down the slope created by the variable member 650Rb is guided to the right specific winning port 650Ra.

In each round of the jackpot, the variable member corresponding to the type of jackpot protrudes toward the front when viewed from the front, making it easier for the game ball to enter the variable winning hole that differs depending on the type of jackpot. More specifically, in each round of the jackpot A6 (16-round variable jackpot), the variable member 650Rb protrudes, making it easier for the game ball to enter the right specific winning hole 650Ra, which has a relatively large number of prize balls (i.e., 10 balls). In contrast, in each round of the jackpot B6 (7-round variable jackpot) and the jackpot C6 (7-round time-saving jackpot), the variable member 650Lb protrudes, making it easier for the game ball to enter the left specific winning hole 650La, which has a relatively small number of prize balls (i.e., 7 balls).

84, both movable members 650Lb, 650Rb are configured to be able to receive, when in a protruding state (when placed in the protruding position), almost all game balls that reach below the first ball entrance 64 from above. As a result, when either movable member 650Lb, 650Rb is placed in the protruding position, both game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right are received by the protruding movable members 650Lb, 650Rb, and are guided by the inclination of the movable members to the corresponding specific winning opening (either the left specific winning opening 650La corresponding to movable member 650Lb, or the right specific winning opening 650Ra corresponding to movable member 650Rb). Therefore, whether the jackpot type is one in which the left movable member 650Lb makes a disappearance motion (variable motion) or one in which the right movable member 650Rb makes a disappearance motion (variable motion), the game ball can be made to enter the corresponding specific winning hole (either the left specific winning hole 650La or the right specific winning hole 650Ra) simply by continuing to shoot the game ball in a preferred shooting direction regardless of the shooting direction of the game ball. Therefore, each time a jackpot is hit, the player can choose a preferred shooting direction to play during the jackpot.

In this way, in the sixth embodiment, the specific winning port into which the game ball can enter during the jackpot game is changed according to the type of jackpot. Regardless of the type of specific winning port into which the game ball can enter, both the game balls hit from the left and the game balls hit from the right are guided to the specific winning port into which the game ball can enter. In other words, two specific winning ports (left specific winning port 650La, right specific winning port 650Ra) are provided in the area (area below the first ball entry port 64) that both the game balls hit from the left and the game balls hit from the right can reach. Each movable member for guiding the game ball to each specific winning port is configured to operate variably so that almost all game balls that reach the area (specific area) below the first ball entry port 64 can be guided to the corresponding specific winning port. This allows the game ball to enter the specific winning port regardless of the direction in which the game ball is launched during the execution of the jackpot game. In other words, while any of the movable members is positioned in the protruding position, the majority of game balls (game balls that reach the specific area without entering the first ball entrance 64 or the general winning entrance 63) that are shot with a shooting strength that can reach the game area (a shooting strength that can at least fly the game ball past the return ball prevention member 68) can be made to enter the specific winning entrance. Therefore, during the execution of a jackpot game, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that cannot enter (enter) the specific winning entrance and flow down to the outlet 66, thereby improving the game efficiency during the execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the jackpot game.

In addition, the two specific winning ports are configured to have different privileges (number of prize balls paid out) that are granted when a game ball enters each port. The type of specific winning port into which the game ball can enter during the execution of the jackpot game is different depending on the jackpot type. By configuring in this way, the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type can be made larger. That is, in addition to the number of rounds of the jackpot and the type of game state to which the game ball can enter after the execution of the jackpot game is completed, the privilege (number of prize balls paid out) granted each time a ball enters a specific winning port can also be made different depending on the jackpot type, so that the game can be played with more attention paid to the jackpot type. In particular, the number of rounds of the jackpot cannot be set to any value without limit, but must be set within a range of an upper limit value (for example, 16 rounds). For this reason, there is a limit to how much the number of rounds alone can differentiate the surface of the prize balls paid out. Furthermore, if you try to increase the difference in the degree of advantage for each type of jackpot within the upper limit (16 rounds), you have no choice but to reduce the number of rounds for relatively unfavorable types of jackpots, so the greater the difference in the degree of advantage, the shorter the period of the unfavorable type of jackpot. Therefore, particularly when a specific display effect (such as the display of a specific character exclusive to jackpot games) or sound effect (such as the playback of a specific song) is executed during the execution of a jackpot game, if an unfavorable type of jackpot occurs, the execution of the jackpot game may end before the player can fully enjoy the effects executed during the jackpot game (display effects and sound effects).

In contrast, by providing multiple specific winning ports with different bonuses (number of prize balls paid out) and configuring the specific winning port that can receive balls to be different depending on the type of jackpot, it is possible to differentiate the degree of advantage for each type of jackpot without reducing the number of rounds too much (i.e., while ensuring sufficient execution time for various effects executed during jackpot play). In detail, in a favorable type of jackpot, a specific winning port (i.e., the right specific winning port 650Ra) that receives a large number of bonuses (number of prize balls) in each round of the jackpot is set to be able to receive balls, while in an unfavorable type of jackpot, a specific winning port (i.e., the left specific winning port 650La) that receives a small number of bonuses (number of prize balls) in each round of the jackpot is set to be able to receive balls. This makes it possible to differentiate the degree of advantage for each type of jackpot without reducing the number of rounds for the unfavorable type of jackpot too much. Therefore, it is possible to provide a clear distinction between each type of jackpot while ensuring sufficient execution time for various effects executed during jackpot play. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to Figure 85, the configuration of the two variable winning devices (left variable winning device 650L, right variable winning device 650R) in this sixth embodiment will be described in more detail. Figure 85 (a) is a front perspective view of the left specific winning port 650La of the left variable winning device 650L when it is in a state where a ball can enter (win), and Figure 85 (b) is a front perspective view of the right specific winning port 650Ra of the right variable winning device 650R when it is in a state where a ball can enter.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), when the left specific winning hole 650La is in a state where a ball can enter, the movable member 650Lb protrudes to the front side as viewed from the front. As a result, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the part of the movable member 650Lb that protrudes further to the front side as viewed from the front than the base plate 60 forms a slope that slopes downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction, so that the game ball that has reached the area (specific area) below the first ball entry hole 64 can be guided to the lower left direction as viewed from the front where the left specific winning hole 650La is located, and can be entered into the left specific winning hole 650La. In addition, since the upper left side of the right specific winning hole 650Ra is blocked by the movable member 650Lb, it becomes impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the right specific winning hole 650Ra. Therefore, when the left specific winning opening 650La is in a state where a ball can enter, a game ball that reaches the specific area (the area below the first ball entry opening 64) can be reliably allowed to enter only the left specific winning opening 650La.

In contrast, when the right specific winning hole 650Ra is in a state where a ball can enter, as shown in FIG. 85(b), the movable member 650Rb protrudes toward the front side as viewed from the front. As a result, as shown in FIG. 85(b), the part of the movable member 650Rb that protrudes toward the front side from the base plate 60 forms a downward inclination from the upper left direction to the lower right direction, so that the game ball that has reached the area (specific area) below the first ball entry hole 64 can be guided toward the lower right direction as viewed from the front where the right specific winning hole 650Ra is located, and can be entered into the right specific winning hole 650Ra. In addition, since the upper right side of the left specific winning hole 650La is blocked by the movable member 650Rb, it becomes impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the left specific winning hole 650La. Therefore, when the right specific winning opening 650Ra is in a state where a ball can enter, a game ball that reaches the specific area (the area below the first ball entry opening 64) can be reliably allowed to enter only the right specific winning opening 650Ra.

Next, the detailed configuration of the above-mentioned movable members 650Lb and 650Rb will be described with reference to FIG. 86. In the description of FIG. 86, the lower side of the figure indicates the front side of the game board 13, and the upper side indicates the back side of the game board 13. First, FIG. 86(a) is a top view of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb. As shown on the left side of FIG. 86(a), the movable member 650Lb is provided with a base member 650Lb1 having a horizontally elongated rectangular shape, and protruding portions 650Lb3 and 650Lb4 protruding from the left and right ends of the base member 650Lb1 toward the back side of the game board 13. Although not shown in the figure, the ends of these protruding portions 650Lb3 and 650Lb4 on the opposite side to the base member 650Lb1 are connected to a left variable winning device solenoid (not shown). By driving the solenoid for the left variable winning device (setting the solenoid on), the base member 650Lb1 is moved toward the front when viewed from the front via the protrusions 650Lb3 and 650Lb4, and is changed from a state where it is buried in the back of the base plate 60 to a state where it protrudes toward the front of the base plate 60. On the other hand, when the solenoid for the left variable winning device is turned off, the base member 650Lb1 is moved toward the back when viewed from the front, and is then buried in the back of the base plate 60.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), a notch 650Lb5 is provided in the center of the base member 650Lb1, which extends from the front side toward the back side when viewed from the front, and the left and right sides of the base member 650Lb1 are connected without separation only by the connection part 650Lb2 provided on the back side when viewed from the front. The width of the notch 650Lb5 is configured to be at least wider than the thickness of the movable member 650Rb. Details will be described later, but by engaging the movable member 650Rb with this notch 650Lb2, the movable members 650Lb, 650Rb can be made to appear and disappear independently without interfering with each other.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), the movable member 650Rb is configured in the same shape as the movable member 650Lb, except that the orientation (position) of the notch portion 650Rb5 is opposite to that of the movable member 650Lb. The notch portion 650Rb5 of the movable member 650Rb is provided in the base member 650Rb1 from the back side toward the front side when viewed from the front, and the left and right sides of the base member 650Lb1 are connected without separation only by the connection portion 650Rb2 provided on the front side when viewed from the front. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 85, the movable member 650Lb and the movable member Rb are stored on the back side of the base plate 60 in a state where they cross each other. At this time, the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb are in a state where the notch portion 650Lb5 and the notch portion 650 are engaged with each other. That is, the connection part 650Lb5 of the movable member 650Lb and the connection part 650R5 of the movable member 650Rb are stored facing each other. By storing them in this manner, the two movable members 650Lb, 650Rb can be stored in a relatively small space, making it possible to effectively utilize the limited space in the pachinko machine 10.

Figure 86(b) is a top view of each of the movable members 650Lb, 650Rb when the movable member 650Rb performs a protruding operation. As shown in Figure 86(b), when the movable member 650Rb performs a protruding operation, almost the entire base member 650Rb1 of the movable member 650Rb is exposed in front of the base plate 60. As a result, the base member 650Rb1 forms a downward slope toward the right specific winning opening 650Ra, so that a game ball that reaches the area (specific area) below the first ball entrance 64 is guided along the slope toward the right specific winning opening 650Ra.

Figure 86(c) is a top view of each of the movable members 650Lb, 650Rb when the movable member 650Lb performs a protruding operation. As shown in Figure 86(c), when the movable member 650Lb performs a protruding operation, the connection part 650Lb2 of the movable member 650Lb approaches the connection part 650Rb2 of the movable member 650Rb as the operation proceeds. This protruding operation continues as the connection part 650Lb contacts the connection part 650Rb2, and the protruding operation of the movable member 650Lb is hindered and the operation stops as the connection parts contact each other. Therefore, as shown in Figure 86(c), at least the connection part 650Lb2 of the movable member 650Lb is stored behind the base plate 60 in the protruding position. Even if a portion of the back side of the base (at least the area including the connection portion 650Lb2) is stored, the area that protrudes forward from the base plate 60 is exposed to a sufficient width for the game ball to pass through. Therefore, when the movable member 650Lb is positioned in the protruding position, the game ball that reaches the specific area (the area below the first ball entrance 64) can be reliably guided to the left specific winning opening 650La by the inclination of the base member 650Lb1.

<Electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 87. First, the first winning type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 87. Fig. 87(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b. As shown in Fig. 87(a), three types of big win types, A6, B6, and C6, are specified in the first winning type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 87, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", and "jackpot A6" is defined in correspondence with this. "Jackpot A6" is a type of jackpot with 16 rounds and a special symbol probability state after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, when "jackpot A6" occurs, the right specific winning port 650Ra becomes capable of receiving a ball in each round of the jackpot (i.e., the movable member 650Rb is variable to the protruding position). For this reason, "jackpot A6" has the most rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is favorable (i.e., a high probability state of a special symbol that is more favorable than the time-saving state of a normal symbol is set), and the bonus (number of prize balls paid out) given for each ball entering during the jackpot is also large (10). Therefore, "jackpot A6" is the type of jackpot that is most favorable to the player. Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of "0-99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the five random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot A6" are "0-4", so the probability that "jackpot A6" will be determined when a jackpot is won is 5% (5/100).

In addition, for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 49", "jackpot B6" is specified in correspondence with it. "Jackpot B6" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 7 and a special symbol probability state is given after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, when it becomes "jackpot B6", the left specific winning port 650La becomes a state in which a ball can enter in each round of the jackpot (i.e., the movable member 650Lb is changed to a protruding position). For this reason, "jackpot B6" has a relatively small number of rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is favorable (i.e., a high probability state of a special symbol that is more favorable than the time-saving state of a normal symbol is set), and the bonus (number of prize balls paid out) given for each ball entering during the jackpot is relatively small (7). Therefore, "jackpot B6" is one of the most favorable jackpot types in terms of the game state after the jackpot, but in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot, it is at least more disadvantageous to the player than "jackpot A6". Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of "0-99" for the first winning type counter C2, the random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot B6" are 45, or "5-49," so the probability that "jackpot B6" will be determined when a jackpot is won is 45% (45/100).

In addition, for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99", "jackpot C6" is specified in correspondence with it. "Jackpot C6" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 7, and the time-saving state of the normal pattern is granted only until the end of the 100 times of variable display of the special pattern after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, when "jackpot C6" occurs, the left specific winning port 650La becomes a state in which a ball can be entered in each round of the jackpot (i.e., the movable member 650Lb is changed to a protruding position). For this reason, "jackpot C6" has a relatively small number of rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is unfavorable, and the bonus (number of prize balls paid out) granted for each ball entering during the jackpot is relatively small (7). Therefore, "jackpot C6" is the most unfavorable in terms of both the game state after the jackpot and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot. Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of "0-99" for the first winning type counter C2, the 50 random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot C6" are "50-99", so the probability that "jackpot C6" will be determined when a jackpot is won is 50% (50/100).

Note that the configuration of the ROM 202 in this sixth embodiment has not been changed except for the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b, so a description of the other configuration of the ROM 202 will be omitted.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 87(b). FIG. 87(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 87, the configuration of the RAM 203 in this sixth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 10) in that a movable type storage area 203aa has been added.

The movable type storage area 203aa is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of movable member to be moved (protruded) in each round of the jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, data indicating the movable member corresponding to the jackpot type is stored for this movable type. More specifically, when a jackpot is won and jackpot A6 is determined, "01H" indicating the movable member 650Rb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, while when either jackpot B6 or C6 is determined, "02H" indicating the movable member 650Lb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa (see S322, S323 in FIG. 88). During the execution of a jackpot game, the data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa is identified each time a new round starts, and the protruding operation of the movable member corresponding to the data is set (see S1021 in FIG. 89). The data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa is initially set to "00H" and is also reset to the initial value when the jackpot ends (see S1024 in FIG. 89). The initial value "00H" means that the jackpot game is not in progress (i.e., the type of movable member has not been specified).

<Regarding control process of main control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88 and FIG. 89. First, the special symbol change start process 6 (S221) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88. This special symbol change start process 6 (S221) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 23) instead of the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, and like the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 24), a lottery (win/lose judgment) of "special symbol big win" or "special symbol miss" is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and is a process for determining the presentation pattern (variation presentation pattern) of the variation presentation performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process 6 (see FIG. 88) in the sixth embodiment, each of the processes S301 to S311 is the same as each of the processes S301 to S311 in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. In the special symbol variation start process 6 (see FIG. 88) in the sixth embodiment, after the display mode according to the jackpot type is set in the process of S306 (S306), it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot A6 (S321), and if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not jackpot A6 (S321: No), "02H" indicating the movable member 650Lb is stored in the movable member type storage area 203aa (S322), and the process proceeds to S307.

On the other hand, if the process of S321 determines that the current jackpot type is jackpot A6 (S321: Yes), "01H" indicating the movable member 650Rb is stored in the movable member type storage area 203aa (S323), and the process proceeds to S307. The data stored in the movable member type storage area 203aa in the processes of S322 and S323 is referenced when a new round is started in the jackpot, and the movable member corresponding to the stored data is moved to the protruding position.

Next, referring to FIG. 89, the details of the jackpot control process 6 (S921) in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process 6 (S921). This jackpot control process 6 (S921) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and like the jackpot control process (see FIG. 31), it is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and setting the state of a specific winning port when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol.

In the jackpot control process 6 in this sixth embodiment (see FIG. 89), steps S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, and S1013 to S1016 are identical to steps S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, and S1013 to S1016 in the jackpot control process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 31).

In the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1004 that the timing for starting a new round has arrived (S1004: Yes), the protruding operation of the movable member corresponding to the data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa is set (S1021). More specifically, when "01H" is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, the protruding operation of the movable member 650Rb is set so that the ball can enter the right specific winning hole 650Ra. On the other hand, when "02H" is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, the protruding operation of the movable member 650Lb is set so that the ball can enter the left specific winning hole 650La. When the process of S1021 is completed, the process proceeds to S1006.

In the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1007 that the closing condition of the large opening (specific winning opening) is met (S1007: Yes), the sinking action of the movable member corresponding to the data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa is set (S1022), and the process ends. That is, if "01H" is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, the sinking action of the movable member 650Rb is set so that the right specific winning opening 650Ra cannot be entered. On the other hand, if "02H" is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, the sinking action of the movable member 650Lb is set so that the left specific winning opening 650La cannot be entered.

In the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S1015 is completed, the data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa is reset to "00H" (S1024) and the process proceeds to S1016. This jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) makes it possible to appropriately control the variable movement of each movable member so that the specific winning hole corresponding to the jackpot type, between the left specific winning hole 650La and the right specific winning hole 650Ra, is capable of receiving a ball.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is configured to have two specific winning holes (left specific winning hole 650La and right specific winning hole 650Ra) with different benefits given to the specific area, and the specific winning hole into which the ball can enter is variable depending on the type of jackpot. More specifically, a movable member 650Lb that forms a slope to guide the game ball that has flowed down to the specific area to the left specific winning hole 650La by performing a protruding operation, and a movable member 650Rb that forms a slope to guide the game ball that has flowed down to the specific area to the right specific winning hole 650Ra are provided between the left specific winning hole 650La and the right specific winning hole 650Ra. In the jackpot types (jackpots B6 and C6) in which the left specific winning hole 650La can enter, the movable member 650Lb is controlled to perform a protruding operation in each round of the jackpot. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot type (jackpot A6) in which the right specific winning port 650Ra can receive a ball, the movable member 650Rb is controlled to protrude during each round of the jackpot.

Both the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb are configured with a width capable of receiving almost all game balls that flow down to the specific area when placed in the protruding position. Therefore, when either of the movable members is placed in the protruding position, game balls that flow down to the specific area can be almost certainly made to enter the corresponding specific winning hole. Here, the specific area (the area below the first ball entry hole 64) is configured so that almost all game balls that do not enter the general winning hole 63 or the first ball entry hole 64 can reach it, regardless of the shooting direction. In other words, the configuration is such that most (more than 90%) of game balls hit from the left and most (more than 90%) of game balls hit from the right reach the specific area. Therefore, whether the jackpot type is one in which the left movable member 650Lb is positioned in the protruding position or one in which the right movable member 650Rb is positioned in the protruding position, the game ball can be made to enter the corresponding specific winning hole (either the left specific winning hole 650La or the right specific winning hole 650Ra) regardless of the shooting direction of the game ball. Therefore, each time a jackpot is hit, the player can choose the shooting direction of their choice to play during the jackpot.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and the surfaces into which the game balls can enter (the left specific winning port 650La and the right specific winning port 650Ra) are arranged facing each other. Then, by forming a downward inclination toward each specific winning port by each movable member, a state in which the game balls can enter each specific winning port is configured. In other words, each specific winning port is provided in a direction in which the game ball does not normally proceed, and the moving direction of the game ball is changed to a direction different from the normal direction by each movable member, so that the game balls can enter each specific winning port. As a result, each specific winning port can be made compact compared to the configuration of the specific winning port 65a of the first embodiment and the like described above (a structure in which the specific winning port 65a is provided in the middle of the flow path through which the game balls proceed even under normal circumstances and is opened to allow most of the game balls that flow down the flow path to flow in). That is, each specific winning port can be configured with an area of at least one game ball but less than two, so that the specific winning port can be made smaller in area. Therefore, each variable winning device can be made compact, so that the area shown by the two variable winning devices on the board can be made smaller, so that the degree of freedom of the board configuration can be increased. Here, in a gaming machine in which a plurality of large winning ports (specific winning ports) that are opened and closed during a jackpot game are provided on the board, each large winning port is generally configured to be openable with approximately the same width as the flow path in which the large winning port is provided. Also, the plurality of large winning ports are generally arranged in a line in the vertical direction as viewed from the front in one flow path, and are generally configured so that game balls can enter any of the large winning ports simply by continuing to shoot game balls into the same flow path during a jackpot. However, in this configuration, the installation area increases as the number of large winning ports increases, so that the degree of freedom of the board configuration is reduced. In contrast, in the sixth embodiment, as described above, each variable winning device can be configured compactly, which allows for greater freedom in the board configuration.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the two specific winning ports (left specific winning port 650La, right specific winning port 650Ra) are configured to have different bonuses (number of prize balls paid out) that are given when a game ball enters each port. The type of specific winning port into which the game ball can enter during the execution of the jackpot game is different depending on the jackpot type. By configuring in this way, the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type can be made larger. That is, in addition to the number of jackpot rounds and the type of game state to which the game ball is transferred after the execution of the jackpot game is completed, the bonus (number of prize balls paid out) given each time a ball enters the specific winning port can also be made different depending on the jackpot type, so that the game can be played with more attention paid to the jackpot type. In particular, the number of jackpot rounds cannot be set to any value without limit, but must be set within a range of an upper limit value (for example, 16 rounds). For this reason, there is a limit to how much the number of rounds alone can make a difference in the surface of the prize balls paid out. Furthermore, if you try to increase the difference in the degree of advantage for each type of jackpot within the upper limit (16 rounds), you have no choice but to reduce the number of rounds for relatively unfavorable types of jackpots, so the greater the difference in the degree of advantage, the shorter the period of the unfavorable type of jackpot. Therefore, particularly when a specific display effect (such as the display of a specific character exclusive to jackpot games) or sound effect (such as the playback of a specific song) is executed during the execution of a jackpot game, if an unfavorable type of jackpot occurs, the execution of the jackpot game may end before the player can fully enjoy the effects executed during the jackpot game (display effects and sound effects).

In contrast, by providing multiple specific winning ports with different bonuses (number of prize balls paid out) and configuring the specific winning port that can receive balls to be different depending on the type of jackpot, it is possible to differentiate the degree of advantage for each type of jackpot without reducing the number of rounds too much (i.e., while ensuring sufficient execution time for various effects executed during jackpot play). In detail, in a favorable type of jackpot, a specific winning port (i.e., the right specific winning port 650Ra) that receives a large number of bonuses (number of prize balls) in each round of the jackpot is set to be able to receive balls, while in an unfavorable type of jackpot, a specific winning port (i.e., the left specific winning port 650La) that receives a small number of bonuses (number of prize balls) in each round of the jackpot is set to be able to receive balls. This makes it possible to differentiate the degree of advantage for each type of jackpot without reducing the number of rounds for the unfavorable type of jackpot too much. Therefore, it is possible to provide a clear distinction between each type of jackpot while ensuring sufficient execution time for various effects executed during jackpot play. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In the sixth embodiment, an independent driving source is provided for each movable member, but two movable members 650Lb, 650Rb may be controlled by one driving source. More specifically, for example, a configuration may be provided in which only one motor is provided as a driving source, and when each movable member 650Lb is disposed in a retracted position (buried position), the motor is driven in a positive direction (first direction) to move only the movable member 650Lb toward the protruding position, while the motor is driven in a negative direction (second direction) to move only the movable member 650Rb toward the protruding position. That is, two types of gears are provided on the rotation shaft of one motor: a left tilt gear for transmitting a driving force to the movable member 650Lb and a right tilt gear for transmitting a driving force to the movable member 650Rb, and the left tilt gear has teeth arranged so that the movable member 650Lb can be driven only when the motor rotates in the positive direction at the retracted position of each movable member. In other words, the gear on the movable member 650Lb side and the left tilt gear are arranged with teeth in a range that engages only when the motor rotates in the positive direction. The right tilt gear is arranged with teeth such that the movable member 650Rb can be driven only when the motor rotates in the negative direction when each movable member is in the retracted position. In other words, the gear on the movable member 650Rb side and the right tilt gear are arranged with teeth in a range that engages only when the motor rotates in the negative direction. With this configuration, the two movable members 650Lb, 650Rb can be moved separately with one drive source, thereby reducing the number of parts. This allows the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 to be reduced.

In the sixth embodiment, each variable winning device is arranged below the first ball entrance 64, but this is not limited to the above. For example, each variable winning device may be arranged in the middle of the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80, and almost all game balls hit from the right side with any movable member in the protruding position may be guided to a specific winning port. Conversely, each variable winning device may be arranged in the middle of the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display unit 80, and almost all game balls hit from the left side with any movable member in the protruding position may be guided to a specific winning port. The flow paths on the right side and the left side of the variable display unit 80 are narrower in space than the area below the first ball entrance 64, so the area occupied by each variable winning device and each movable member on the board can be made smaller. In this case, the width and inclination angle of each movable member can be adjusted according to the width of the flow path.

<Modification of the Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 in a modified example of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 90 to 92. In the sixth embodiment described above, two specific winning holes (left specific winning hole 650La and right specific winning hole 650Ra) are provided, and the movable members corresponding to each specific winning hole are protruded to form an incline toward the specific winning hole, so that a game ball that has reached a specific area (the area below the first ball entrance 64) is guided to the specific winning hole.

In contrast, in this modified example, instead of the two movable members, a single moving member 650b capable of moving in parallel in the left-right direction as viewed from the front is provided between the two specific winning holes in the specific area. The details of this moving member 650b will be described later, but its left side forms a slope toward the lower left direction as viewed from the front, while its right side forms a slope toward the lower right direction as viewed from the front. When the left specific winning hole 650La is to be in a state where a ball can be entered, the moving member 650b is moved in parallel to the left direction as viewed from the front to be adjacent to the left specific winning hole 650La, so that the left side of the moving member 650b can be tilted to guide the game ball to the left specific winning hole 650La. Conversely, when the right specific winning hole 650Ra is to be in a state where a ball can be entered, the moving member 650b is moved in parallel to the right direction as viewed from the front, so that the right side of the moving member 650b can be tilted to move the game ball to the right specific winning hole 650Ra. In this way, by moving the single moving member 650b in parallel left and right, the number of solenoids required to drive the various movable members can be reduced, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 10.

The surface configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing the surface configuration of the game board 13 in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 90, the game board 13 in this modified example differs from the surface configuration of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 84) in that a moving member 650b is provided instead of the movable members 650Lb, 650Rb.

As shown in FIG. 90, the moving member 650b is configured in a roughly triangular shape, and during normal times (when a jackpot game is not being played), it is stationary in the middle position between each specific winning port. In this state (see FIG. 90), a space of at least one game ball is created between the moving member 650b and each specific winning port. Therefore, during normal times, a game ball that reaches the specific area (the area below the first ball entry port 64) flows down the flow path between the moving member 650b and the left specific winning port 650La, or the flow path between the moving member 650b and the right specific winning port 650Ra, and is guided to the outlet 66.

Next, the detailed structure of the moving member 650b will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91(a) is a top view of the moving member 650b, FIG. 91(b) is a front view of the moving member 650b, and FIG. 91(c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XCI-XCI shown in FIG. 91(b). As shown in FIG. 91(a) to FIG. 91(c), the moving member 650b is configured with a flat protrusion 650bb having a horizontally elongated, substantially rectangular shape protruding from the rear side of a substantially triangular prism-shaped member. Although not shown in the figure, the protrusion 650bb is connected to a moving member motor (not shown), and when the moving member motor is driven in the forward direction, a driving force in the left direction as viewed from the front is transmitted to the protrusion 650bb, causing the moving member 650b to move in parallel to the left direction as viewed from the front. Furthermore, when the moving member motor is driven in the negative direction, a driving force is transmitted to the protrusion 650bb in the right direction as viewed from the front, causing the moving member 650b to move in parallel to the right as viewed from the front.

As shown in Figures 91(a) to (c), the right and left sides of the moving member 650b when viewed from the front are provided with a right slope 650b1 and a left slope 650b2, each of which is at least the width of one game ball. A game ball that reaches the moving member 650b from above flows downward along either the right slope 650b1 or the left slope 650b2.

Figure 91 (d) is a front perspective view of the moving member 650b. As shown in Figure 91 (d), the protrusion 650bb of the moving member 650b is contained on the back side of the base plate 60 through the left-right movement hole 650ba opened in the base plate 60. The end of the protrusion 650bb on the back side as viewed from the front is connected to the moving member motor as described above. When a driving force in the left-right direction acts on the moving member 650b by the moving member motor, the protrusion 650bb moves left-right along the left-right movement hole 650ba, and as a result, the moving member 650b moves in parallel in the left-right direction.

Next, referring to FIG. 92, the flow direction of the game ball for each arrangement of the moving member 650b will be described. FIG. 92(a) is a diagram showing the flow direction of the game ball when the moving member 650b moves in parallel to the left as viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 92(a), when the moving member 650b moves in parallel to the left as viewed from the front and is adjacent to the left specific winning hole 650La, the game ball that has reached the specific area from the left direction (i.e., the game ball hit from the left) falls onto the slope on the left side of the moving member 650b as viewed from the front, and enters the left specific winning hole 650La by flowing down along the slope. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the specific area from the right direction (i.e., the game ball hit from the right) passes through the space between the moving member 650b and the right variable winning device 650R and flows down in the direction of the out hole 66. As a result, when the moving member 650b moves parallel to the left, the game ball can only enter the left specific winning hole 650La.

92(b) is a diagram showing the flow direction of the game ball when the moving member 650b moves in parallel to the right as viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 92(b), when the moving member 650b moves in parallel to the right as viewed from the front and is adjacent to the right specific winning hole 650Ra, the game ball that reaches the specific area from the right (i.e., the game ball hit to the right) falls onto the slope on the right side of the moving member 650b as viewed from the front, and flows down along the slope to enter the right specific winning hole 650Ra. On the other hand, the game ball that reaches the specific area from the left (i.e., the game ball hit to the left) passes through the space between the moving member 650b and the left variable winning device 650L and flows down in the direction of the outlet 66. As a result, when the moving member 650b moves in parallel to the right, the game ball can be entered only into the right specific winning hole 650Ra.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified sixth embodiment, instead of the movable members 650Lb, 650Rb, a single moving member 650b is moved in parallel in the left-right direction to create a state in which a game ball can enter a specific winning port (either the left specific winning port 650La or the right specific winning port 650Ra) corresponding to the moving direction. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to switch the state of the two specific winning ports (switch between a state in which a ball can enter and a state in which a ball cannot enter) with one driving source (a motor for the moving member). Therefore, compared to the sixth embodiment described above, the number of driving sources can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

During the big win game, the inclinations on both the left and right sides of the moving member 650b guide the game ball to the specific winning hole on the side closest to the moving member 650b, so that the player can easily understand the launch direction that makes it easier to get the game ball there, simply by visually checking the left-right arrangement of the moving member 650b. That is, when the moving member 650b is moved to the right side as viewed from the front and is in a state close to the right specific winning hole 650Ra, the game ball can be easily made to enter the right specific winning hole 650Ra by hitting it from the right. On the other hand, when the moving member 650b is moved to the left side as viewed from the front and is in a state close to the left specific winning hole 650La, the game ball can be easily made to enter the left specific winning hole 650La by hitting it from the left.

In addition, in this modified example, as in the sixth embodiment described above, the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and the surfaces through which the game balls can enter (left specific winning port 650La, right specific winning port 650Ra) are arranged facing each other. As a result, as in the sixth embodiment, the area of each specific winning port only needs to be large enough to accommodate one game ball, making it possible to reduce the area of the specific winning ports. In other words, since each variable winning device can be made compact, the area that the two variable winning devices occupy on the board can be reduced. This increases the degree of freedom in board configuration.

In the modified example of the sixth embodiment, the specific winning openings are arranged in the left-right direction, and the moving member 650b is configured to be movable in the left-right direction between the specific winning openings, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the specific winning openings may be arranged in the up-down direction, and the moving member 650b may be configured to be movable in the up-down direction from a position close to one specific winning opening to a position close to the other specific winning opening. In this case, the inclination of the side of the moving member 650b opposite to the side on which the specific winning openings are arranged may be eliminated. By configuring in this way, the area occupied by the variable winning devices and the moving member 650b on the board surface can be reduced, thereby further increasing the degree of freedom of the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Second Modification of Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a second modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment described above will be described with reference to Fig. 137 and Fig. 138. In the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment described above, a drive source (solenoid) for driving (appearing and disappearing) the two movable members 650Lb, 650Rb is provided separately (independently) for each movable member, and when the movable condition of each movable member is satisfied, the corresponding drive source is driven to cause the movable member to perform a variable operation (appearing and disappearing operation).

In contrast, in the second modified example, a single drive source is used to control multiple (two) movable members 650Lb, 650Rb. More specifically, a single motor (drive motor 6500) is provided as a drive source for variably moving (appearing and retracting) the movable members 650Lb, 650Rb. When both the movable members 650Lb, 650Rb are in the recessed position, the drive motor 6500 is driven in the positive direction to variably move the movable member 650Lb to the protruding position, while the drive motor 6500 is driven in the negative direction to variably move the movable member 650Rb to the protruding position. This allows multiple movable members to be variably moved with fewer drive sources, thereby reducing the number of parts and thereby reducing the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10.

The pachinko machine 10 in this second modified example of the sixth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment in that the configuration of the movable members 650Lb, 650Rb has been changed. The rest of the configuration is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the sixth embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

Figure 137 is a perspective view showing each movable member 650Lb, 650Rb in the second modified example of the sixth embodiment. Figure 137 shows the state in which each movable member 650Lb, 650Rb is disposed in the buried position. As shown in Figure 137, in each movable member 650Lb in this second modified example, the protrusions 650Lb3, 650Lb4 provided on the movable member 650Lb in the sixth embodiment are deleted, and instead, a substantially cylindrical protrusion 650Lb6 protruding toward the rear side when viewed from the front relative to the movable member 650Lb, and a gear member 650Lb7 connected to the end of the protrusion 650Lb6 on the opposite side to the movable member 650Lb are provided. Similarly, the protrusions 650Rb3 and 650Rb4 have been removed from the movable member 650Rb, and instead, a generally cylindrical protrusion 650Rb6 is provided that protrudes toward the rear side of the movable member 650Rb when viewed from the front, and a gear member 650Rb7 is provided that is connected to the end of the protrusion 650Rb6 on the opposite side to the movable member 650Rb.

In addition, in this second modified example, as shown in FIG. 137, a circular gear 6500a is provided between the gear member 650Lb7 provided on the movable member 650Lb and the gear member 650Rb7 provided on the movable member 650Rb. The circular gear 6500a is connected to the drive shaft of the drive motor 6500 disposed below, and when the drive motor 6500 is driven, the circular gear 6500a rotates in the same direction as the drive shaft in the same cycle in conjunction with the rotation of the drive shaft. The circular gear 6500a is initially disposed in such a manner that the side on which the gear teeth are provided is disposed on the rear side as viewed from the front, and is not engaged with the gear teeth of the gear member 650Lb7 or the gear teeth of the gear member 650Rb7 (see FIG. 137). In this initial position of the circular gear 6500a, the movable members 650Lb, 650Rb are in a retracted position. When the driving motor 6500 is driven in the positive direction, the circular gear 6500a rotates in a direction in which the gear teeth of the gear member 650Lb7 of the movable member 650Lb mesh with the gear teeth of the circular gear 6500a, while when the driving motor 6500 is driven in the negative direction, the circular gear 6500a rotates in a direction in which the gear teeth of the gear member 650Rb7 of the movable member 650Rb mesh with the gear teeth of the circular gear 6500a.

Next, referring to FIG. 138, the operation of each movable member 650Lb, 650Rb when the circular gear 6500a rotates in the positive and negative directions will be described. First, referring to FIG. 138(a), the operation of each movable member 650Lb, 650Rb when the drive motor 6500 is driven in the positive direction will be described. FIG. 138(a) is a top view of each movable member 650Lb, 650Rb and the circular gear 6500a when the drive motor 6500 is driven in the positive direction.

As shown in FIG. 138(a), when the driving motor 6500 is driven in the forward direction and the circular gear 6500a connected to the driving shaft of the driving motor 6500 rotates counterclockwise, the gear teeth of the gear member 650Lb7 arranged on the left side of the circular gear 6500a as viewed from the front mesh with the gear teeth provided in a partial range of the side of the circular gear 6500a. Therefore, the rotational force of the circular gear 6500a rotating in the counterclockwise direction is transmitted to the gear member 650Lb7 meshed with the rotating member 6500a, and a driving force toward the front side as viewed from the front acts on the gear member 650Lb7. As a result, a driving force toward the front side as viewed from the front also acts on the movable member 650Lb connected to the gear member 650Lb7, and the movable member 650Lb performs a protruding operation toward the front side as viewed from the front. As a result, the movable member 650Lb is disposed in the protruding position. On the other hand, while the movable member 650Lb is being changed from the recessed position to the protruding position (i.e., while the circular gear 6500a is rotating counterclockwise by about 180 degrees), the range of the circular gear 6500a where the gear teeth are provided is not disposed in a position where it meshes with the gear teeth of the gear member 650Rb, so the gear member 650Rb7 is not moved. Therefore, while the movable member 650Lb is moving from the recessed position (recessed position) to the protruding position, the movable member 650Rb does not perform a variable operation. Note that, when the movable member 650Lb is moved from the protruding position to the recessed position (recessed position), the driving motor 6500 is driven in the negative direction to the origin position, so that the circular gear 6500a rotates clockwise to the origin position and the gear member 650Lb7 returns to the recessed position. During this time, the gear teeth of the gear member 650Rb7 of the movable member 650Rb do not mesh with the gear teeth of the circular gear 6500a, so the movable member 650Rb7 does not move.

As shown in FIG. 138(b), when the driving motor 6500 is driven in the negative direction and the circular gear 6500a rotates clockwise, the gear teeth of the gear member 650Rb7 arranged on the right side of the circular gear 6500a as viewed from the front mesh with the gear teeth provided in a partial range of the side of the circular gear 6500a. Therefore, the rotational force of the circular gear 6500a rotating in the clockwise direction is transmitted to the gear member 650Rb7 meshed with the rotating member 6500a, and a driving force toward the front side as viewed from the front acts on the gear member 650Rb7. As a result, a driving force toward the front side as viewed from the front also acts on the movable member 650Rb joined to the gear member 650Rb7, and the movable member 650Rb performs a protruding operation toward the front side as viewed from the front. As a result, the movable member 650Rb is placed in the protruding position. On the other hand, while the movable member 650Rb is moving from the recessed position to the protruding position (i.e., while the circular gear 6500a is rotating about 180 degrees clockwise), the gear member 650Lb7 of the movable member 650Lb is not moved because the range of the circular gear 6500a where the gear teeth are provided is not located at a position where it meshes with the gear teeth of the gear member 650Lb. Therefore, while the movable member 650Rb is moving from the recessed position (recessed position) to the protruding position, the movable member 650Lb does not perform a variable operation. Note that, when the movable member 650Rb is moved from the protruding position to the recessed position (recessed position), the driving motor 6500 is driven in the forward direction to the origin position, so that the circular gear 6500a rotates counterclockwise to the origin position and the gear member 650Rb7 returns to the recessed position. During this time, the gear teeth of the gear member 650Lb7 of the movable member 650Lb do not mesh with the gear teeth of the circular gear 6500a, so the movable member 650Lb7 does not move.

As described above, in the second modified example of the sixth embodiment, the multiple movable members can be variably operated separately depending on the driving direction of one driving motor 6500. More specifically, by rotating the driving motor 6500 about 180 degrees in the positive direction from the origin position of the rotational operation, the movable member 650Lb can be variably operated from the recessed position (buried position) to the protruding position while the movable member 650Rb is placed in the recessed position (buried position), while by rotating the driving motor 6500 about 180 degrees in the negative direction from the origin position of the rotational operation, the movable member 650Rb can be variably operated from the recessed position (buried position) to the protruding position while the movable member 650Lb is placed in the recessed position (buried position). By configuring in this way, the multiple movable members can be variably operated with fewer driving sources, so the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the second modified example of the sixth embodiment, the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are moved by only one driving source (the driving motor 6500), but the present invention is not limited to this, and other driving sources may be added. More specifically, for example, a second driving source may be provided separately from the driving motor 6500 for one of the movable members, and the second driving source may be driven to move the movable member on the side where the second driving source is provided, at least in part when the condition for moving the movable member is satisfied. With only the driving motor 6500, while one movable member is moving (while the movable member is positioned at a position other than the recessed position), the other movable member cannot be moved (the gear teeth of the corresponding gear member and the gear teeth of the circular gear 6500a cannot mesh), so it is impossible to simultaneously move multiple movable members to positions other than the recessed position. In contrast, by providing a second drive source, if the movable condition of one movable member is satisfied while the other movable member is moving, both movable members can be moved normally. This modification is particularly effective when either the left variable winning device 650L or the right variable winning device 650R is configured as a second ball entry port having the same performance as the first ball entry port 64 (i.e., the game ball entering the second ball entry port triggers the drawing of a special pattern), and the corresponding movable member is configured as an electric device that moves to a protruding position when the normal pattern is drawn. This is because, even during the execution of a jackpot game, the game ball may pass through the through gate 67 and become a normal pattern, so that the jackpot round period and the opening period of the electric device based on the normal pattern being a hit may overlap.

In the second modified example of the sixth embodiment, two movable members 650Lb, 650Rb can be moved by one drive source (drive motor 6500), but the technology for moving multiple members with one drive source is not limited to application to controlling the opening and closing of specific winning openings. For example, the drive motor 6500 configured in this modified example may be used when moving multiple props for performances.

In the sixth embodiment and its modified example, the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are always open, and each specific winning opening is arranged perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball (up and down when viewed from the front), thereby preventing (suppressing) the game ball from entering each specific winning opening during normal times (states other than when a jackpot game is being played), but this is not limited to the above. For example, a configuration may be used in which an opening and closing door for opening and closing each specific winning opening is provided separately from the movable member. Then, in the jackpot game state, a configuration may be used in which only the opening and closing plate corresponding to the jackpot type (the opening and closing plate associated with the specific winning opening to which the game ball that has reached the specific area is easily guided by the movable member) is opened. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game ball from entering the specific winning opening during normal times and the prize ball being paid out even when the jackpot game state is not in progress. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hall from being given an unexpected disadvantage. In this case, the movable member may be moved periodically or randomly regardless of the type of big win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the game ball is launched at a timing when the movable member is likely to guide the game ball to a specific winning port when the opening and closing door is open, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. In addition, when realizing this game feature, it is more effective to use the moving member 650b in the modified example of the sixth embodiment, because it is easier for the player to understand which specific winning port the game ball is likely to be guided to. In addition, the period during which the movable member is moved periodically or randomly may be only during the execution of the big win game, or it may be configured to be moved continuously while the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10. In addition, when a modification is made to provide an opening and closing door for each specific winning hole in the modified example of the sixth embodiment described above, the arrangement of the moving member 650b may be fixed at a midpoint between the left specific winning hole 650La and the right specific winning hole 650Ra, and each opening and closing door may be tilted toward the moving member 650b, so that the side of the moving member 650b and the tilted opening and closing door form a flow path toward the specific winning hole, making each specific winning hole available for ball entry. By configuring in this way, when each specific winning hole is available for ball entry, the width in which the game ball can be guided to the corresponding specific winning hole is widened, thereby reducing the possibility of wasting balls. This can increase the player's profits.

In the sixth embodiment and its modified example, ten prize balls are paid out when the game ball enters the right specific winning port 650Ra, while seven prize balls are paid out when the game ball enters the left specific winning port 650La. However, the amount of the bonus awarded when the game ball enters each specific winning port can be determined arbitrarily. In this case, it is not necessary to make the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the right specific winning port 650Ra greater than the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the left specific winning port 650La. For example, the number of prize balls awarded may be the same, or the number of prize balls awarded when the ball enters the left specific winning port 650La may be greater than the number of prize balls awarded when the ball enters the right specific winning port 650Ra. In addition, the bonus awarded when the ball enters each specific winning port is not limited to prize balls. For example, if a game ball enters one of the specific winning slots during a jackpot game, only prize balls will be paid out, while if a game ball enters the other specific winning slot, instead of or in addition to the prize balls being paid out, a special symbol probability state may be awarded as a bonus after the jackpot ends.

In the sixth embodiment and its modified example, the specific area is provided with two specific winning ports, and the specific winning port that is in a state where a ball can enter is switched depending on the type of big win, but this is not limited to the above. For example, one or both of the two specific winning ports provided in the specific area may be a ball entry port (second ball entry port) that triggers the drawing of a special pattern. In other words, at least one of the two specific winning ports may be configured as a second ball entry port having the same function as the first ball entry port 64. In this case, the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb (moving member 650b) may be configured to move in a predetermined moving pattern when a winning lottery for a normal pattern is drawn. In addition, when the combination of the specific winning port and the second ball entry port is modified, the conditions for allowing balls to enter each winning port (specific winning port and second winning port) may be met simultaneously, so it is preferable that the movable member for forming the state in which balls can enter each winning port can be operated independently, as in the movable member in the sixth embodiment. The through gate 67 is in a state in which game balls can always pass through, and the lottery for normal symbols is performed in the same manner as in normal times during the execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, during the round play of each round of the jackpot (while the movable member corresponding to the specific winning port is placed in the protruding position), the lottery for normal symbols may be won, and the condition for the movable member corresponding to the second ball entry port to move to the protruding position may be met. For this reason, if a movable member that can only form a state in which balls can enter only one of the winning ports, such as the moving member 650b in the modified sixth embodiment, is adopted, a problem may occur in which it is not possible to create a state in which balls can enter at least one of the winning ports, even though the condition for allowing balls to enter at least one of the winning ports is met. Therefore, as exemplified in the sixth embodiment, by adopting a configuration that allows separate movable members corresponding to each winning slot to be independently controlled, the movable members corresponding to each winning slot can be simultaneously moved even if the conditions for allowing a ball to enter each winning slot are met at the same time. This makes it possible to prevent a problem in which it is not possible to enter a winning slot even when the conditions for allowing a ball to enter at least one of the winning slots are met.

In the sixth embodiment and its modified example, two specific winning ports are arranged opposite each other in a specific area (the area below the first ball entry port 64), and a slope is formed toward each specific winning port to guide game balls that reach the specific area to the corresponding specific winning port. However, the arrangement of the specific winning ports and the configuration for allowing game balls to enter the specific winning ports are not limited to this. For example, two variable winning devices that award different numbers of prize balls in a configuration similar to that of the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment may be arranged vertically in a specific area. The specific winning port that is opened may be different depending on the type of jackpot.

In the sixth embodiment and its modified examples, the specific winning hole through which the ball can enter is different depending on the type of jackpot, but this is not limited to the above. For example, instead of or in addition to the type of jackpot, the specific winning hole through which the ball can enter may be different depending on the number of rounds in the jackpot. This allows for greater freedom of control.

In the sixth embodiment and its modified example, the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are configured to face each other. In other words, the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening La are arranged side by side, with the left specific winning opening 650La facing right when viewed from the front and the right specific winning opening 650Ra facing left when viewed from the front, but it is not necessary to have the specific winning openings facing each other. Any structure may be used as long as the left specific winning hole 650La is provided at a position where the ball can be entered (easily entered) while the movable member 650Lb is disposed at the protruding position, and the ball cannot be entered (difficult to enter) while the movable member 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position and while each movable member is disposed at the buried position (recessed position), and the right specific winning hole 650Ra is provided at a position where the ball can be entered (easily entered) while the movable member 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position, and the ball cannot be entered (difficult to enter) while the movable member 650Lb is disposed at the protruding position and while each movable member is disposed at the buried position (recessed position). As a specific example, for example, as shown in FIG. 136, the ball entry surface of the left specific winning hole 650La and the ball entry surface of the right specific winning hole 650Ra may be arranged so as to be parallel. That is, as shown in FIG. 136, a left specific winning opening 650La formed by a through hole penetrating the base plate 60 may be provided on the lower left side of the movable member 650Lb, and a right specific winning opening 650Ra formed by a through hole penetrating the base plate 60 may be provided on the lower right side of the movable member 650Rb. Also, a configuration may be provided in which, around each specific winning opening, an outer edge portion 650La1, 650Ra1 is provided to prevent (suppress) a game ball flowing down the movable member when the corresponding movable member is disposed in a recessed position (submerged position) from reaching the specific winning opening, together with a person who guides the game ball that has flowed down the movable member to the specific winning opening when the corresponding movable member is disposed in a protruding position. That is, as shown in FIG. 136, a configuration is provided in which a peripheral portion 650La1 having a substantially inverted U shape is provided around the left specific winning opening 650La. The upper and left sides of the periphery 650La1 prevent the game balls flowing down during normal times from reaching the left specific winning hole 650La. In addition, when the movable member 650Lb is disposed in the protruding position, the game balls flowing down to the lower left direction via the movable member 650Lb are guided to the left specific winning hole 650La by the inclination of the lower side of the periphery 650La1 from the upper right side to the lower left side as viewed from the front. In addition, as shown in FIG. 136, a substantially U-shaped periphery 650Ra1 is provided around the right specific winning hole 650Ra. The upper and right sides of the periphery 650Ra1 prevent the game balls flowing down during normal times from reaching the right specific winning hole 650Ra. Furthermore, when the movable member 650Rb is in the protruding position, the game ball flowing down to the lower right via the movable member 650Rb is guided to the right specific winning hole 650Ra by the inclination of the lower edge of the peripheral portion 650Ra1, which slopes from the upper left side to the lower right side when viewed from the front. In this way, even if the left specific winning hole 650La and the right specific winning hole 650Ra are not configured to face each other, it is possible to achieve the same playability as in the sixth embodiment described above.

In the sixth embodiment and its modified example described above, in each round of a jackpot, the corresponding movable member is moved to a protruding position to create a state in which the ball can enter the left specific winning opening 650La and a state in which the ball can enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the state in which the ball can enter the left specific winning opening 650La and the state in which the ball can enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra may be switched depending on the passage of the game ball. In this case, the configuration may employ a movable member whose state (position) is structurally switched each time the game ball passes, or a configuration may be implemented in a controlled manner by providing a sensor to detect the passage of the game ball.

Seventh Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 93 to Fig. 108. In the above-mentioned sixth embodiment, the specific area (the area below the first ball entrance 64) is provided with two specific winning holes (the left specific winning hole 650La and the right specific winning hole 650Ra) which have different numbers of winning balls paid out when a game ball enters the specific area, and the type of the specific winning hole into which the ball can enter in each round of the jackpot is changed according to the type of the jackpot.

In contrast, in the seventh embodiment, instead of the left specific winning port 650La and right specific winning port 650Ra in the sixth embodiment, two special winning ports (left special winning port 655La, right special winning port 655Ra) are provided, which will trigger a special winning state (special symbol special winning state and normal symbol time-saving state) after the jackpot ends when a game ball enters during the execution of the jackpot game. In the first round of the jackpot, one of the two special winning ports is set to a state in which a ball can enter for a predetermined period (e.g., one second). In other words, one movable member is moved to the protruding position to form a downward slope toward one of the special winning ports. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 95, but the predetermined period (1 second) during which one of the probability winning slots can be entered during this first round is made up of a period during which one of the game balls that is hit to the right and reaches a specific area and the game balls that are hit to the left and reaches a specific area can enter the probability winning slot, and the other ball has difficulty entering. Therefore, during the first round of a jackpot, a novel gameplay is realized in which the player is prompted to predict the launch direction that will allow the ball to enter the probability winning slot and launch the game ball accordingly.

The pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment in that the game board 13 has a partially changed board configuration, that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 have a partially changed configuration, that the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 has a partially changed configuration, that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 has a partially changed configuration, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 has a partially changed configuration. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the sixth embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 93, the surface configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a front view of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93, the surface configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment differs from the surface configuration of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 84) only in that a left variable winning device 655L is provided instead of the left variable winning device 650L, a right variable winning device 655R is provided instead of the right variable winning device 650R, and a variable winning device 65 is provided below the area where the two movable members 650Lb, 650Rb are provided.

The left special prize winning device 655L and the right special prize winning device 655R are provided with a left special prize winning port 655La and a right special prize winning port 655Ra, which are the same shapes as the left special prize winning port 650La and the right special prize winning port 650Ra in the sixth embodiment, respectively. Therefore, a game ball that reaches a specific area during normal times (a state other than when a jackpot game is being played) flows down toward the out hole 66 without entering either the left special prize winning port 655La or the right special prize winning port 655Ra. In addition, when the movable member 650Lb is in a protruding state, the movable member 650Lb forms a slope toward the left special prize winning port 655La (a slope that slopes downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front), so that the game ball that reaches the specific area is guided to the left special prize winning port 655La. On the other hand, when the movable member 650Rb is in the protruding state, the movable member 650Rb forms a slope (a slope from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front) toward the right special prize winning port 655Ra, so that the game ball that reaches the specific area is guided to the right special prize winning port 655Ra. As described above, the movable member 650Lb or the movable member 650Rb is placed in the protruding position only for one second (a specified period) in one round, so even if the game ball reaches the specific area while either of the movable members is placed in the protruding position, if it does not reach the corresponding special prize winning port within one second after being placed in the protruding position, the movable member sinks and the game ball flows down toward the outlet 66.

The variable winning device 65 has the same configuration as the variable winning device 65 provided on the game board 13 of the first embodiment. That is, it is composed of a specific winning hole 65a through which the game ball can enter, a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing plate that covers the specific winning hole 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening and closing to the front side with the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis. The specific winning hole 65a in this seventh embodiment is set to an open state in which the game ball can enter in each round from the second round of the jackpot onwards. More specifically, in the first round of the jackpot, either the movable member 650Lb or the movable member 650Rb is changed to a protruding position for only one second depending on the type of jackpot. On the other hand, in each round from the second round of the big win onwards, the movable members 650Lb, 650Rb are maintained in the recessed state, and the opening and closing plate of the specific winning hole 65a is opened forward to form an open state in which game balls can enter the specific winning hole 65a. This open state continues until 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round or until 10 or more game balls have entered the specific winning hole 65a. If a game ball enters one of the probability winning holes (left probability winning hole 655La or right probability winning hole 655Ra) in the first round of a jackpot, a probability winning state (probability winning state for special symbols and time-saving state for normal symbols) is granted after the jackpot ends, while if no game ball enters a probability winning hole even once during the execution of the jackpot game, a time-saving state of 100 times (low probability state for special symbols and time-saving state for normal symbols) is granted after the jackpot ends. Therefore, since the degree of advantage after the jackpot ends varies depending on whether or not a game ball enters a probability winning hole, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not a game ball enters a probability winning hole in the first round. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, the left variable probability winning device 655L and the right variable probability winning device 655R will be described in detail with reference to Figure 94. Figure 94(a) is an enlarged front view of a specific area portion of the game board 13 of the seventh embodiment, and Figure 94(b) is an XCIV-XCIV cross-sectional view shown in Figure 94(a). As shown in Figure 94(b), the left variable probability winning device 655L and the right variable probability winning device 655R are connected at the back side of the base plate 60. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 94(b), a left variable probability flow path 655Ld is provided inside the left variable probability winning device 655L, and is for guiding and discharging the game ball that entered the left variable probability winning port 655La to the back side of the base plate 60, and a right variable probability flow path 655Rd is for guiding and discharging the game ball that entered the right variable probability winning port 655Ra to the back side of the base plate 60, and they merge on the back side of the base plate 60. In addition, at the position where the left variable probability flow path 655Ld and the right variable probability flow path 655Rd merge, an outlet 656 is provided for discharging the entered game ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Although not shown in the figure, the outlet 656 is provided with a ball passage switch (variable probability switch) that can detect the passage of the game ball. By detecting the passage of the probability change switch, it is determined that the game ball has entered one of the probability change winning holes, and the game state after the big win is set to the probability change game state.

In this way, the number of special chance winning switches can be minimized by merging each special chance winning device internally, discharging a game ball that has entered any of the special chance winning ports through one outlet 656, and determining whether or not a game ball has entered any of the special chance winning ports by monitoring the passage of the one outlet. In other words, if a special chance winning switch is provided for each special chance winning device, at least two special chance winning switches must be provided, but by using the configuration of the seventh embodiment, it is possible to accurately determine whether a game ball has entered either of the two special chance winning ports with only one special chance winning switch. Thus, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of special chance winning switches. In addition, by merging each special chance winning device internally, they can be treated as one winning device. Here, in the game rules, an upper limit (for example, two) is set for the number of winning devices that can receive a ball during the execution of a jackpot game. Therefore, by configuring two winning devices as one winning device, as in the seventh embodiment, the number of winning devices under the game rules can be reduced, providing a pachinko machine 10 that is easier to comply with the game rules.

Next, referring to FIG. 95, the flow direction of the game ball in the first round when the jackpot type in the seventh embodiment is such that the movable member 650Rb is positioned in the protruding position in the first round of the jackpot will be described. For the sake of simplicity, in the following description, the movable pattern (opening pattern) in which the movable member 650Lb is positioned in the protruding position will be referred to as the "left V opening pattern" since it is an opening pattern that is likely to result in a win in the left special prize slot 655La. On the other hand, the movable pattern (opening pattern) in which the movable member 650Rb is positioned in the protruding position will be referred to as the "right V opening pattern" since it is an opening pattern that is likely to result in a win in the right special prize slot 655Ra.

Figure 95(a) is a diagram showing the direction in which the game ball flows down when the right V opening pattern (the movable pattern in which the movable member 650Rb is placed in the protruding position) is determined and the player hits the ball from the left. As shown in Figure 95(a), a game ball hit from the left falls onto the movable member 650Rb from the left direction when viewed from the front in relation to the specific area. Since the movable member 650Rb forms a slope that slopes downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front, the momentum of the game ball flowing down (momentum in the lower left direction) is not reduced. Therefore, during the one second that the movable member 650Rb is placed in the protruding position, it is relatively easy to insert the ball into the right special prize opening 655Ra.

Figures 95(b) and (c) show the direction of the ball flow when the right V opening pattern is determined and the player hits the ball to the right. As shown in Figure 95(b), the ball hit to the right falls from the right direction as seen from the front onto the movable member 650Rb in the specific area. In this case, as shown in Figure 95(b), the ball has momentum (momentum) toward the left direction as seen from the front, so it rolls on the movable member 650Rb in the upper left direction as seen from the front until the momentum is lost (momentum becomes zero). Then, when the momentum of the ball rolling to the upper left is lost (momentum becomes zero) due to the inclination of the movable member 650Rb, the ball starts rolling to the lower right direction as seen from the front along the inclination of the movable member 650Rb. However, since it takes a relatively long time (for example, 0.5 seconds) for the momentum of the game ball to reach 0, there is no time left for the momentum to gradually accelerate from 0 to reach the right variable prize opening 655Ra. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 95(c), one second passes while the game ball is rolling on the movable member 650Rb toward the lower right when viewed from the front, and the movable member 650Rb is immersed. In other words, since there is no inclination toward the right variable prize opening 655Ra, the game ball that was rolling on the movable member 650Rb falls downward and is discharged through the outlet 66. Therefore, if the right V opening pattern is determined and the player hits the right, it becomes extremely difficult to reach the right variable prize opening 655Ra within one second while the movable member 650Rb is positioned in the protruding position.

In addition, when the left V opening pattern is determined, the left and right movements are reversed from the right V opening pattern, but it is essentially the same as the right V opening pattern. Therefore, illustrations will be omitted and a brief explanation will be given. When the left V opening pattern is determined and a right shot is performed, the game ball advances with momentum from the right direction as seen from the front to the left with respect to the specific area, so that the ball enters (wins) the left special winning hole 655La along the inclination of the movable member 650Lb while maintaining the momentum. On the other hand, when the left V opening pattern is determined and a left shot is performed, the game ball advances with momentum from the left direction as seen from the front to the right with respect to the specific area. Therefore, the game ball that falls on the movable member 650Lb rolls in the upper right direction on the inclination of the movable member 650Lb for about 0.5 seconds, and then flows down along the inclination to the lower left direction as seen from the front. Therefore, just as in the case where the right V opening pattern is determined and the ball is hit to the right (see Figures 95 (b) and (c)), the movable member 650Lb sinks before the ball reaches the left special winning hole 655La, and the ball flows down to the outlet 66.

Here, in the game board 13 of the seventh embodiment, whether the player hits from the left or the right, it takes about one second for the launched game ball to reach the specific area. Therefore, in the method of launching the game ball after confirming the type of movable member placed in the protruding position in the first round of the jackpot, one second passes before the game ball reaches the specific area, or immediately after it reaches the specific area, and the movable member is returned to the recessed position. In other words, even if the game ball is launched after confirming the type of movable member, it is configured so that it is impossible to make the game ball enter the probability winning hole. Therefore, for a player who wants to have the game ball enter the probability winning hole, the type of movable member that will be moved to the protruding position can be predicted before any movable member moves to the protruding position in the first round of the jackpot, and the game ball can be launched in the predicted launch direction. As a result, if the movable member that the player predicted would be placed in the protruding position matches the movable member that was actually placed in the protruding position, it is possible to make the game ball enter the probability winning hole, but if the movable member opposite to the prediction is placed in the protruding position, it becomes difficult to make the game ball enter the probability winning hole. Therefore, in the first round of each big win, a novel gameplay can be provided in which the type of movable member to be placed in the protruding position (the launch direction that makes it easier for the ball to enter the probability winning hole) is more seriously predicted and the game ball is launched, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 (b), in the seventh embodiment, the rate at which the left V opening pattern (the opening pattern in which the movable member 650Lb is moved to the protruding position) is determined in the first round is higher than the rate at which the right V opening pattern (the opening pattern in which the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruding position) is determined. On the other hand, the average number of rounds for each jackpot type in which the left V opening pattern is set is configured to be less than the average number of rounds for each jackpot type in which the right V opening pattern is set. Therefore, by hitting the right side every time in the first round of a jackpot, a high percentage (70%) of the probability of a game state being granted after the jackpot ends, but if a jackpot type with a relatively large number of rounds (10 rounds or more) is determined, the probability of the game state ending will be high. On the other hand, if the player predicts the release pattern each time and changes the launch direction, it is possible that a transition to a high probability game state will be confirmed and a jackpot game with even more rounds (10 or 16 rounds) will be played, creating a very advantageous situation for the player. However, depending on the accuracy of the player's prediction, there is a risk that the rate of transition to the high probability game state will be significantly lower (for example, below 50%).

By configuring it in this way, the game method in the first round of a jackpot can be switched depending on which element of the jackpot the player prioritizes. More specifically, for a player who places the greatest importance (priority) on the rate at which a high probability game state is set, a game method in which the high probability game state is granted at a high rate of about 70% by hitting the right side every time in the first round of a jackpot can be selected. On the other hand, for a player who wants to make a jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds, such as 16 rounds or 10 rounds, more advantageous (a jackpot with a large number of rounds and also an advantageous game state after the jackpot ends), a game method in which whether the current jackpot is a jackpot with a large number of rounds or not is predicted, and the launch direction of the game ball is changed depending on the prediction result can be selected. In addition, for example, for a jackpot won in a normal state (so-called a first win), a right shot is performed with emphasis on the set ratio of the high probability game state, while for a jackpot won during a high probability game state (so-called a consecutive win), a game method in which the type of jackpot is predicted and the launch direction is switched, or a game method in which the type of jackpot is predicted and the launch direction is switched for a first win, while for a consecutive win, a right shot is performed with emphasis on the set ratio of the high probability game state (i.e., the rate of consecutive wins). Thus, since each player can select the gameplay that they prefer and play, a wide range of gameplay that matches the different tastes of each player can be realized. Therefore, a pachinko machine 10 that appeals to everyone can be realized, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 96, the display mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during the first round of a jackpot in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 during the first round of a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 96, when a jackpot occurs, display areas HR8 and HR9, which are horizontally elongated and roughly rectangular in shape, are formed in the upper left and upper right parts of the main display area Dm, respectively. Inside the display area HR9, the word "jackpot" is displayed, indicating that a jackpot game is currently being played. This allows the player to understand that a jackpot game is being played.

Inside the display area HR8, various information showing the progress of the jackpot (displays showing the current round number, the maximum round number, and the cumulative number of prize balls acquired in one jackpot and the maximum number of prize balls that can be acquired) are displayed. During the first round, the maximum number of rounds and the maximum number of prize balls that can be acquired are concealed from the player. That is, as shown in FIG. 96, the display showing the number of rounds is "ROUND: 01/???", and the display showing the number of prize balls is "GET: 0000/???". This is because if the maximum number of rounds and the maximum number of prize balls are displayed first, the player who sees the display contents may recognize the type of jackpot, and the type of the movable member that can be moved (the direction of launch that allows the ball to enter the probability winning hole) may also be identified. Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, the configuration is such that information that can identify the type of jackpot, such as the number of rounds and the maximum number of prize balls, is concealed until at least one round is completed. This eliminates the clues that would allow the player to identify the type of movable member that would be moved to the protruding position, and allows the player to select the type of movable member that would be moved to the protruding position (the firing direction that would allow the ball to enter the probability bonus winning hole) more seriously. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, below the display areas HR8 and HR9, a display mode (selection effect) is displayed to prompt the player to select whether to hit left or right. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, a display area HR10 is formed in the approximate center of the main display area Dm, and the word "Choose!!" is displayed inside it. In addition, below the display area HR8 in the main display area Dm (the left half of the main display area Dm), a horizontally elongated, approximately elliptical display area HR11 displaying the words "Expectation Low", a horizontally elongated, approximately elliptical display area 12 displaying the words "Number of rounds High", and a leftward arrow image YG1 displaying the words "Hit Left" and simulating a leftward arrow are displayed. Meanwhile, below display area HR9 in main display area Dm (the right half of main display area Dm), there is a horizontally elongated, roughly oval display area HR13 displaying the words "Expectation High", a horizontally elongated, roughly oval display area HR14 displaying the words "Number of Rounds Low", and a right-facing arrow image YG2 that resembles a right-facing arrow and displays the words "Right Hit".

These display contents allow the player to understand that if the player hits from the left, the expectation that the game ball will enter the special prize slot is low, but if the game ball does enter, it is likely to be a jackpot with a large number of rounds. Also, if the player hits from the right, the expectation that the game ball will enter the special prize slot is high, but if the game ball does enter, it is likely to be a jackpot with a small number of rounds. Therefore, after understanding the meaning of each firing direction, the player can predict the firing direction that will allow the game ball to enter the special prize slot and fire the game ball, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to Figure 97, we will explain the opening patterns that can be set for each movable member in the first round of a jackpot. Figure 97(a) is a diagram showing the change over time in the movable position of each movable member when a right V opening pattern is set, and Figure 97(b) is a diagram showing the change over time in the movable position of each movable member when a left V opening pattern is set.

As shown in FIG. 97(a), when the right V opening pattern is set, the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruding position one second after the start of one round. This protruding state of the movable member 650Rb continues for one second, and when one second has elapsed since it was moved to the protruding position, the movable member 650Rb is buried inside the base plate 60. Thereafter, the movable member 650Rb is maintained in a buried state until the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, the movable member 650Lb is maintained in a buried state throughout the jackpot, as shown in FIG. 97(a). Note that, as shown in FIG. 97(a), when one round starts, the selection performance (see FIG. 96) starts. More specifically, when it is time to start one round and a round number command indicating the start of the first round is output from the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113, the main control unit 113 instructs the display control unit 114 to start executing the selection performance. When a player who sees this selection effect hits the ball with his left hand, the ball can enter the right special chance winning hole 655Ra via the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb that has been moved to the protruding position. On the other hand, when a player who sees the selection effect hits the ball with his right hand, the movable member 650Rb sinks before the ball is guided to the right special chance winning hole 655Ra, so the ball cannot enter the right special chance winning hole 655Ra.

As shown in FIG. 97(b), when the left V opening pattern is set, the movable member 650Lb is moved to the protruding position one second after the start of one round. This protruding state of the movable member 650Lb continues for one second, and when one second has elapsed since it was moved to the protruding position, the movable member 650Lb is buried inside the base plate 60. Thereafter, the movable member 650Lb is maintained in a buried state until the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, the movable member 650Rb is maintained in a buried state throughout the jackpot as shown in FIG. 97(b). When a player who has visually recognized the selection performance displayed from the start of one round hits the right, the game ball can enter the left special prize winning hole 655La through the inclination formed by the movable member 650Lb moved to the protruding position. On the other hand, if a player who sees the selection effect hits the ball to the left, the movable member 650Lb sinks before the game ball is guided to the left special chance winning hole 655La, so the game ball cannot enter the left special chance winning hole 655La.

<Electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 98(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 98(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 98(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 11(a)) in that an opening pattern table 202aa is added. It is also different in that the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b are changed. The other configurations are the same as the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The opening pattern table 202aa is a data table that specifies the variable actions to be set for the movable members in each opening pattern (right V opening pattern and left V opening pattern). At the start of the first round of the jackpot, data for the opening pattern corresponding to the current jackpot type is read from this opening pattern table 202aa and set as the variable action of the movable members (see S1103 and S1104 in FIG. 101).

Next, referring to FIG. 98(b), the first winning type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 98(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 98(b), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4" is associated with "jackpot A7" (see 202b1 in FIG. 98(b)). This "jackpot A7" is a jackpot type with the most rounds at 16 rounds, and a right V opening pattern is set in the first round of the jackpot. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the first winning type counter C2 can take, five random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot A7", so the rate at which "jackpot A7" is determined as the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs is 5% (5/100).

In addition, for the value range of the first win type counter C2 from "5 to 29", "jackpot B7" is specified in association with it (see 202b2 in FIG. 98(b)). This "jackpot B7" has the second highest number of rounds after "jackpot A7" with 10 rounds, and is a jackpot type in which a right V opening pattern is set in the first round of the jackpot. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the value of the first win type counter C2 can take, 25 random number values (counter values) are specified in association with "jackpot B7", so the probability that "jackpot B7" will be determined as the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs is 25% (25/100).

In addition, for the value range of the first win type counter C2 from "30 to 69", "jackpot C7" is specified in correspondence with it (see 202b3 in FIG. 98(b)). This "jackpot C7" has 7 rounds, which is fewer than "jackpot A7" and "jackpot B7", and is a jackpot type in which a left V opening pattern is set in the first round of the jackpot. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the value of the first win type counter C2 can take, 40 random number values (counter values) are specified in correspondence with "jackpot C7", so the probability that "jackpot C7" will be determined as the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs is 40% (40/100).

In addition, for the value range of the first winning type counter C2 from 70 to 89, a "jackpot D7" is associated with it (see 202b4 in FIG. 98(b)). This "jackpot D7" has 5 rounds, and is the jackpot type with the second fewest number of rounds among all the jackpot types. In addition, the "jackpot D7" is a jackpot type in which a left V opening pattern is set in the first round. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the value of the first winning type counter C2 can take, 20 random number values (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot D7", so the probability that the "jackpot D7" will be determined as the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs is 20% (20/100).

In addition, when the value of the first win type counter C2 is in the range of "90 to 99", "jackpot E7" is associated with it (see 202b5 in FIG. 98(b)). This "jackpot E7" is the jackpot type with the fewest number of rounds, 2, and a left V opening pattern is set in the first round. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the value of the first win type counter C2 can take, 10 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot E7", so the probability that "jackpot E7" will be determined as the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs is 10% (10/100).

In this way, in the seventh embodiment, the right V opening pattern is set when a "jackpot A7" or a "jackpot B7" is obtained, while the left V opening pattern is set when a "jackpot C7" to a "jackpot E7" are obtained. Since the probability that either a "jackpot A7" (allocation 5%) or a "jackpot B7" (allocation 25%) is determined is 30%, the probability that a right V opening pattern is set (30%) is lower than the probability that a left V opening pattern is set (70%). Therefore, for players who place the greatest importance (priority) on the probability that a high probability game state is set, a game method in which a high probability game state is given at a rate of about 70% can be selected by hitting the right side every time in the first round of a jackpot. On the other hand, for players who want to make a jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds, such as 16 rounds or 10 rounds, more advantageous (a jackpot with a large number of rounds and an advantageous gaming state after the jackpot), a game method can be selected in which the current jackpot is a jackpot with a large number of rounds or not, and the launch direction of the game ball is changed according to the prediction result. Also, for example, for a jackpot won in a normal state (so-called a first win), a right shot is performed with an emphasis on the set ratio of the probability variable gaming state, while for a jackpot won during the probability variable gaming state (so-called a consecutive win), a game method in which the launch direction is predicted and the launch direction is changed, or a game method in which the launch direction is predicted and the launch direction is changed and the set ratio of the probability variable gaming state (i.e., the rate of consecutive wins) is emphasized for consecutive wins, and a game method in which the right shot is performed with an emphasis on the set ratio of the probability variable gaming state (i.e., the rate of consecutive wins) for consecutive wins, and a variety of game methods can be selected by the player. Therefore, since each player can select the game characteristics that they prefer, a wide range of game characteristics that can be tailored to the different tastes of each player can be realized. This allows for a pachinko machine 10 that is popular with everyone, improving the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, referring to FIG. 98(c), the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in this seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 98(c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 98(c), the RAM 203 in this seventh embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 87(b)) in that a special chance setting flag 203ba, a special chance passing counter 203bb, a winning number counter 203bc, a remaining ball timer flag 203bd, a remaining ball timer 203be, and a discharge number counter 203bf have been added.

The probability change setting flag 203ba is a flag that indicates whether or not the game state is to be changed to the probability change state after a jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is to be set to the probability change state is determined by whether or not a game ball enters the probability change winning port during a jackpot game. More specifically, when a game ball passes through the probability change switch provided in the outlet 656, the probability change setting flag 203ba is set to ON (see S1305 in FIG. 103). On the other hand, the probability change setting flag 203ba is set to OFF when the jackpot ends (see S1205 in FIG. 102). Note that the probability change setting flag 203ba is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

If the special probability setting flag 203ba is set to on when the power is turned on, it may be configured to determine whether the game ball passed the special probability switch before the power was cut off, and to formally set the special probability setting flag 203ba to on and restore the game only if it is determined that the game ball passed through the special probability switch before the power was cut off. In this case, whether the game ball passed through the special probability switch before the power was cut off can be determined by whether the special probability passing counter 203bb, which will be described later, is greater than 0. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine fraud such as rewriting only the special probability setting flag 203ba to on and turning the power back on while the power is cut off, thereby reducing damage to the hall.

The probability change passing counter 203bb is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability change switch after the end of one round during a jackpot game (in this embodiment, one round of the jackpot). The sum of this probability change passing counter 203bb and the discharge number counter 203bf described later can be used to determine whether all game balls that entered the probability change winning port in the first round have been discharged. This probability change passing counter 203bb is updated by adding one to its value each time the passage of the probability change switch is detected during a predetermined period (the so-called ball discharge period) after the end of one round. In addition, after executing a process to determine whether the number of game balls that entered the probability change winning port and the number of discharged balls match, it is reset to the initial value "0" (S1415 in FIG. 104). This probability change passing counter 203bb is backed up when the power is turned off. In addition, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203bc is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won the special winning port 655La, 655Ra, or the specific winning port 65a in each round of the big win game. Specifically, it is updated by adding one to the winning number counter 203bc based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the variable winning device 65, or the special winning switch provided in the special winning device (S1303 in FIG. 103). On the other hand, when one round is completed, it is determined whether the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 and the special winning device (the total value of the winning number counter 203bc and the special winning passage counter 203bb) and the number of balls discharged (the value of the discharge number counter 203bf) match, and then it is reset to the initial value "0" (see S1415 in FIG. 104). The value of this winning number counter 203bc is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, when initialized, it is set to 0.

The remaining ball timer flag 203bd is a flag that indicates whether or not it is a ball draining period for discharging remaining game balls when game balls remain inside the variable winning device 65 or the guaranteed winning device at the end of a round. When this remaining ball timer flag 203bd is set to on, it means that it is a ball draining period. While this remaining ball timer flag 203bd is set to on, the remaining ball timer 203be, which will be described later, is updated by incrementing by one (see S1405 in FIG. 104).

The remaining ball timer 203be is a counter for determining whether the time required for the remaining game balls to be discharged has elapsed when game balls remain inside the variable winning device 65 or the special winning device (left special winning device 655L, right special winning device 655R) at the time when the specific winning port 65a or the special winning port 655La, 655Ra are changed to a state where balls cannot be entered after one round has ended. The time required for the game balls to be discharged is 0.5 seconds, and in this seventh embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203be. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203be (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), a determination is made as to whether the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 or the special winning device matches the number of balls discharged (S1411 in FIG. 104). If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification is issued to that effect. This allows for early notification that game balls are jammed in the variable winning device 65 or the special winning device. It also prevents fraudulent behavior in which game balls are left in the special winning device and then flow down to the special winning switch at the right time when the first round of a jackpot occurs.

If the number of winning balls and the number of balls dispensed do not match, a dedicated flag may be set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the special probability setting flag 203ba may not be set to ON even if the game ball passes through the special probability switch. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the special probability state from being improperly granted.

The discharged ball counter 203bf is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning device 65 or the special winning device in each round of a jackpot. This discharged ball counter 203bf is updated by adding 1 each time a game ball passes through a ball discharge port for discharging game balls from each variable winning device (variable winning device 65 or special winning device) (the ball discharge port switch provided at the ball discharge port is turned on by the game ball passing through) (see S1403 in FIG. 104). This discharged ball counter 203bf is reset to its initial value of 0 after it is determined that the number of game balls that won the variable winning device 65 or the special winning device matches the number of balls discharged (S1415 in FIG. 104).

Next, referring to FIG. 99, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 99, the configuration of the RAM 223 in this seventh embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-mentioned sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14(b)) in that a V winning flag 223aa has been added.

The V winning flag 223aa is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball has already passed through the probability change switch in the first round of the jackpot. If the V winning flag 223aa is on, it means that the passing of the probability change switch has already been detected, and if it is off, it means that the passing of the probability change switch has not been detected. This V winning flag 223aa is set on based on the first reception of the probability change winning command output from the main control device 110 each time the passing of the probability change switch is detected in the first round of the jackpot (see S5503 in FIG. 108). In addition, this V winning flag 223aa is set off when it is determined that the V winning flag 223aa is on at the end timing of the first round (see S5404 in FIG. 107). At the timing when this V winning flag 223aa is set on, a V winning success performance is executed to notify the player that the ball has won the probability change winning port. By executing this successful V winning effect, the player is made aware that their choice (firing direction) was correct and that they will transition to a guaranteed bonus game state after the big win, giving the player a greater sense of satisfaction.

<Regarding control processing of the main control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 100 to Fig. 104. First, the big win control process 7 (S931) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 100. This big win control process 7 (S931) is a process executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see Fig. 30) instead of the big win control process 6 in the sixth embodiment (see Fig. 89).

In the jackpot control process 7 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 100), steps S1001 to S1004 and steps S1009 to S1011 are the same as steps S1001 to S1004 and steps S1009 to S1011 in the jackpot control process 6 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 89). In the jackpot control process 7 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 100), if it is determined in the process of S1004 that it is time to start a new round (S1004: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1031) to set the opening operation according to the round and jackpot type, and this process is terminated. Details of this jackpot operation setting process (S1031) will be described later with reference to FIG. 101.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 100) in the seventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is the timing to end the ending presentation (S1011: Yes), a jackpot end process is executed (S1032) to set the game state after the jackpot ends, and this process ends. Details of this jackpot end process (S1032) will be described later with reference to FIG. 102.

In the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 100) in the seventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is not the time to end the ending presentation (S1011: No), a winning process is executed (S1033) to perform processing according to winning into the specific winning port 65a and the high probability winning port. Details of this winning process (S1033) will be described later with reference to FIG. 103. After the winning process (S1033) is completed, an abnormality process is executed (S1034) to determine whether the game balls that entered the specific winning port 65a and the high probability winning port were discharged normally, and this process is terminated. Details of the winning process (S1033) and the abnormality process (S1034) will be described later with reference to FIG. 103 and FIG. 104, respectively.

Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1031) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S1031). As described above, this jackpot operation setting process (S1031) is a process for setting the opening operation according to the round and jackpot type.

In the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 101), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the first round (S1101). If it is determined that it is not the start timing of the first round of the jackpot (S1101: No), the opening of the specific winning port 65a is set (S1102), and the process proceeds to S1105.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that it is the start timing of the first round (S1101: Yes), the opening pattern corresponding to the current jackpot type is read from the opening pattern table 202aa (S1103). In the process of S1103, if the current jackpot type is jackpot A7 or jackpot B7, data for performing variable operation with a right V opening pattern (see FIG. 97(a)) is read, while if the current jackpot type is any of jackpots C7 to E7, data for performing variable operation with a left V opening pattern (see FIG. 97(b)) is read.

When the processing of S1103 is completed, the start of the opening pattern read in the processing of S1103 is then set (S1104), and processing proceeds to S1105. In the processing of S1105, which is executed after the processing of S1102 or S1104, a round number command indicating the number of new rounds to start is set (S1105), and this processing ends. By executing this jackpot operation setting processing (see FIG. 101), it is possible to variably control the movable members 650Lb, 650Rb with an appropriate opening pattern depending on the type of jackpot.

Next, referring to FIG. 102, the details of the jackpot end process (S1032) will be described. As described above, this jackpot end process (S1032) is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends. In this jackpot end process (S1032), first, it is determined whether the special probability setting flag 203ba is on or not (S1201). If it is determined that the special probability setting flag 203ba is off (S1202: No), this means that no game ball entered (won) the special probability winning hole (left special probability winning hole 655La and right special probability winning hole 655Ra) during this jackpot, so the value of the time-saving counter 203f is set to 100 to set the game state after the jackpot ends to a time-saving game state (low probability state for special symbols and time-saving state for normal symbols) (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1204.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1201 that the special chance setting flag 203ba is on (S1201: Yes), this means that a game ball entered the special chance winning slot during the current jackpot, so the special chance flag 203e is set to on to set the game state after the jackpot ends to a special chance game state (special symbol special chance state and normal symbol time-saving state) (S1203), and the processing proceeds to S1204.

In the process of S1204, which is executed after the process of S1202 or S1203, a state command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the state after the jackpot set by the process of S1202 or S1203 (S1204), the special probability setting flag 203ba is set to OFF (S1205), and this process ends. By executing this jackpot end process (see FIG. 102), it is possible to set an appropriate game state according to the state of the special probability setting flag 203ba.

Next, the details of the winning process (S1033) will be described with reference to FIG. 103. As described above, this winning process (S1033) is a process for carrying out processing in response to winning at the specific winning port 65a and the special winning port. In this winning process (S1033), it is first determined whether the current time is the round valid period (S1301). Here, the round valid period is the period during which a round of play is set, that is, the period from when the specific winning port 65a or the special winning port becomes available for ball entry until the end of the interval period. In the process of S1301, if it is not the round valid period (S1301: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if it is determined that the current round valid period is in progress (S1301: Yes), it is then determined whether a win has been detected in any of the specific winning slots (specific winning slot 65a or special winning slot) (S1302), and if it is determined that a win in a specific winning slot (specific winning slot 65a or special winning slot) has not been detected (S1302: No), the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, if it is determined that a win in a specific winning slot has been detected (S1302: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203bc is updated by adding 1 (S1303), and the process proceeds to S1304.

In the process of S1304, it is determined whether the game ball has passed the special probability switch (S1304), and if it is determined that the game ball has passed the special probability switch (S1304: Yes), the special probability setting flag 203ba is set to ON (S1305), a special probability winning command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 113 that the game ball has passed the special probability switch (S1306), and the process proceeds to S1307. In contrast, if it is determined in the process of S1304 that the game ball has not passed the special probability switch (S1304: No), the processes of S1305 and S1306 are skipped and the process proceeds to S1307.

In the process of S1307, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203bc is 10 or more (S1307), and if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203bc is 10 or more (S1307: Yes), the process proceeds to S1309 and sets the end of the current round. On the other hand, in the process of S1307, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203bc is less than 10 (S1307: Yes), it is next determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1308), and if the round time has elapsed (S1308: Yes), the process proceeds to S1309 and sets the end of the current round. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round period has not elapsed (S1308: No), there is no need to end the round, so the process is terminated as it is. In the process of S1308, if the current round is the first round, it is determined that the round time has elapsed if the end timing of the set release pattern has arrived, whereas if it is the second round or later, it is determined that the round time has elapsed if 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round.

In the process of S1309, the specific winning port (specific winning port 65a or special winning port) is set to be closed (S1309), and a closing command indicating that the specific winning port has been closed is set (S1310). Next, the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is set to ON to set the ball clearing period (S1311), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 104, the details of the abnormality processing (S1034) will be described. As described above, this abnormality processing (S1034) is a process for determining whether the game balls that entered the specific winning port 65a and the guaranteed winning port were discharged normally. In this abnormality processing (S1034), it is first determined whether the current time is the valid round period (S1401), and if the current time is not the valid round period (S1401: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is the valid round period (S1401: Yes), it is then determined whether the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch (whether the game ball has been discharged from the discharge port for discharging the game ball from each variable winning device) (S1402).

If it is determined in the process of S1402 that the gaming ball has passed through the ball outlet switch (S1402: Yes), the value of the discharged ball counter 203bf is incremented by 1 (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1402 that the gaming ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch (S1402: No), the process skips S1403 and proceeds to S1404.

In the process of S1404, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is on (S1404), and if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is off (S1404: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1404, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is on (S1404: Yes), this means that the ball removal period is currently in progress, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is updated by adding 1 (S1405). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is the upper limit value (i.e., whether the ball discharge period ends (0.8 seconds after the end of the round)) (S1406). If it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is not the upper limit value (not the end of the ball discharge period) (S1406: No), it is determined whether the current time is the ball discharge period after the end of the first round (S1407). If it is determined that the current time is the ball discharge period after the end of one round (S1407: Yes), it is then determined whether the game ball has passed through the special rate switch (S1408). If it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the special rate switch (S1408: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1408 that the game ball has passed the special chance switch (S1408: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the special chance passing counter 203bb (S1409), the special chance setting flag 203ba is set to ON (S1410), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1407 that the current ball discharge period is the ball discharge period after the end of the second or subsequent rounds (S1407: No), each process of S1408 to S1410 is skipped and this process ends as is.

In addition, in the process of S1406, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is the upper limit (the end timing of the ball discharge period) (S1406: Yes), it is then determined whether the number of dispensed balls (the value of the dispensed ball number counter 203bf) matches the number of winning balls (the sum of the value of the winning ball number counter 203bc and the value of the special chance passing counter 203bb) (S1411).

If it is determined in the process of S1411 that the number of dispensed balls does not match the number of winning balls (S1411: No), an error command is set (S1412) and the process proceeds to S1413. When the error command is received by the sound and lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, the text "Winning balls mismatch error" is displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent behavior in which a game ball is passed through the special chance switch while the special chance winning port is in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1411 that the number of dispensed balls matches the number of winning balls (S1411: Yes), the process of S1412 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1413. In the process of S1413, the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is set to OFF (S1413), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is reset (S1414). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203bc, the dispensed number counter 203bf, and the special chance passing counter 203bb are each reset (S1415), and this process ends.

By executing this abnormality processing (see Figure 104), it is possible to detect and notify early on of malfunctions that may cause game balls that have entered each specific winning port (specific winning port 65a and each specific winning port) to be unable to be discharged normally due to ball clogging inside each variable winning device (variable winning device 65 and specific winning device).

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 105 to Fig. 108. First, command determination process 7 (S4061) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 105. This command determination process 7 (S4061) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see Fig. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process for analyzing unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area and performing control according to the type of the unprocessed command, similar to the command determination process (see Fig. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

In command determination process 7 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 105), steps S4901-S4910 and S4918 are the same as steps S4901-S4910 and S4918 in the command determination process in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 41). In command determination process 7 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 105), if it is determined in S4909 that the unprocessed commands do not include a winning information command (S4909: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning command has been received (S4921). Here, winning commands are specifically an opening command, a round number command, a closing command, a winning chance command, an ending command, etc.

If it is determined in the processing of S4921 that any command related to a win has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4921: Yes), the type of unprocessed command related to a win is analyzed, and a win-related command process is executed to execute control according to the command type (S4922), and this processing ends. Details of this win-related command process (S4922) will be described later with reference to FIG. 106. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4921 that a command related to a win is not included among the unprocessed commands received from the main control unit 110 (S4921: No), processing proceeds to S4918.

Next, the details of the hit-related command processing (S4922) described above will be explained with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this hit-related command processing (S4922). Of this hit-related command processing (S4922), the processes of S4911 to S4917 are simply transplants of the processes of S4911 to S4917 executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), so a detailed explanation of these processes will be omitted here.

In the win-related command processing in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 106), if it is determined in the processing of S4913 that the unprocessed commands received from the main control unit 110 do not include a round number command (S4913: No), it is then determined whether or not a close command is included in the unprocessed commands (S4951). If it is determined in the processing of S4951 that the unprocessed commands received from the main control unit 110 include a close command (S4951: Yes), this means that it is the end timing of one round of a big win, so a close command processing is executed to set the presentation mode at the end of the round (S4952), and this processing is terminated. Details of this close command processing (S4952) will be described later with reference to FIG. 107.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4951 that a close command has not been received (S4951: No), then it is determined whether or not a special chance winning command is included in the unprocessed commands received from the main control device 110 (S4953). If it is determined that a special chance winning command is included (S4953: Yes), this means that the timing has come when it was detected that the game ball has passed through the special chance winning switch, so special chance winning command processing is executed (S4954) to perform control according to the number of times the special chance winning switch has been passed, and this process ends. Details of this special chance winning command processing (S4954) will be described later with reference to FIG. 108. Also, if it is determined in the process of S4953 that a special chance winning command is not included in the unprocessed commands (S4953: No), the process proceeds to S4916.

Next, the above-mentioned close command process (S4952) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 107. As described above, this close command process (S4952) is a process for setting the presentation mode at the end of a round. In this close command process (S4952), first, it is determined whether or not what has ended this time is the first round of a jackpot (S5401), and if it is determined that it is not the first round of a jackpot (S5401: No), the execution of an interval presentation mode according to the number of rounds is set (S5402), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5401 that the round that has ended this time is the first round (S5401: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the V winning flag 223aa is on (S5403).

In the process of S5403, if it is determined that the V winning flag 223aa is on (S5403: No), this means that a winning entry into the special winning port (either the left special winning port 655La or the right special winning port 655Ra) has been detected during one round, so the V winning flag 223aa is set to off (S5404) and the process proceeds to S5402. On the other hand, in the process of S5403, if it is determined that the V winning flag 223aa is off (S5403: No), this means that one round of the jackpot has ended without the game ball being able to enter the special winning port during one round, so a V winning failure presentation is set to inform the player that the game ball could not be entered into the special winning port (S5405), and this process ends. By executing this V-winning failure presentation, the player can easily understand that the game ball did not enter the probability winning port (the launch direction selected by the player did not match the launch direction that actually makes it easier for the game ball to enter the probability winning port). This makes the player more likely to try to predict the launch direction more seriously so that the game ball will enter (enter) the probability winning port on the next big win. This therefore increases the player's motivation for the next big win, and therefore increases the player's interest in the game.

Next, the details of the special chance winning command processing (S4954) described above will be explained with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the special chance winning command processing (S4954). As described above, this special chance winning command processing (S4954) is a process for performing control according to the number of times the special chance winning switch is passed.

In this special chance winning command process (S4954), first, it is determined whether the V winning flag 223aa is on or not (S5501). If it is determined that the V winning flag 223aa is off (S5501: No), this means that the special chance winning command is a command output based on the first passing of the special chance switch in the first round of the jackpot, so the execution of a V winning success performance to notify that the game ball has entered the special chance winning port is set (S5502), the V winning flag 223aa is set to on (S5503), and this process is terminated. By executing this V winning success performance, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the game ball has entered the special chance winning port (the launch direction selected by the player matches the launch direction that actually makes it easier for the game ball to enter the special chance winning port). Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a greater sense of satisfaction, and therefore to increase the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5501 that the V winning flag 223aa is on (S5501: Yes), this means that the V winning success presentation has already been executed, so in order to prevent the V winning success presentation from being executed twice, the processing of S5502 and S5503 is skipped and this processing ends.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment is configured to have two probability variable winning holes (left probability variable winning hole 655La, right probability variable winning hole 655Ra) that trigger the granting of a probability variable game state (probability variable state of special symbols and time-saving state of normal symbols) after the end of the jackpot game when a game ball enters during the execution of the jackpot game. In the first round of the jackpot, one of the two probability variable winning holes is set to a state in which a ball can enter. That is, by moving one movable member to a protruding position, a downward slope is formed toward one of the probability variable winning holes. Since the period during which the movable member is positioned in the protruding position in the first round of the jackpot is as short as one second, if the time during which the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the movable member is not made as short as possible, the movable member will be buried before the game ball enters the probability variable winning hole along the slope formed by the movable member, and the game ball will not be able to enter the probability variable winning hole. In the seventh embodiment, when the movable member 650Lb is located at the protruding position, if the movable member 650Lb is hit from the left, the time it takes to roll on the upper surface of the movable member 650Lb is longer than when the movable member 650Lb is hit from the right, so it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the left special prize winning hole 655La when the movable member 650Lb is hit from the left, while it is easy to get the game ball to enter the left special prize winning hole 655La when the movable member 650Rb is hit from the right. On the other hand, when the movable member 650Rb is located at the protruding position, if the movable member 650Rb is hit from the right, the time it takes to roll on the upper surface of the movable member 650Rb is longer than when the movable member 650Rb is hit from the left, so it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the right special prize winning hole 655Ra when the movable member 650Rb is hit from the right, while it is easy to get the game ball to enter the left special prize winning hole 655Ra when the movable member 650Rb is hit from the right. Here, since the device is configured to make it difficult for the player to guess in advance the type of movable member that will be placed in the protruding position from the presentation mode, etc., during the first round of the jackpot, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay that allows the player to predict the launch direction (type of movable member that will be placed in the protruding position) in which the game ball can enter the game. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In the seventh embodiment, the first round of a jackpot is set to allow ball entry into one of the special prize winning ports (i.e., one of the movable members is moved to a protruding position), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the round in which the special prize winning port is set to allow ball entry may be determined arbitrarily. The number of rounds in which the special prize winning port is set to allow ball entry is not limited to one, and may be set two or more times in one jackpot. In this case, if the game ball is able to enter the special prize winning port in the first round in which the special prize winning port is set to allow ball entry, the player may be notified (navigated) of the launch direction in which the game ball can enter in the next or subsequent round in which the special prize winning port is set to allow ball entry.

In the seventh embodiment, in the first round of a jackpot, the time required for the game ball to reach the special prize winning hole is varied depending on the direction of launch of the game ball. That is, when the movable member 650Lb is arranged in the protruding position, the game ball that reaches the specific area by hitting it to the right is more likely to reach the left special prize winning hole 655La in a shorter period of time than the game ball that reaches the specific area by hitting it to the left. Also, when the movable member 650Rb is arranged in the protruding position, the game ball that reaches the specific area by hitting it to the left is more likely to reach the right special prize winning hole 655Ra in a shorter period of time than the game ball that reaches the specific area by hitting it to the right, but this is not limited to this. In the round in which the special prize winning hole is in a state where a ball can be entered, the launch direction in which the time required to reach the special prize winning hole is shorter may be fixed. That is, for all types of jackpots, the time required to reach the jackpot opening may be shorter when hitting from the right than when hitting from the left, and conversely, the time required to reach the jackpot opening may be shorter when hitting from the left.

In the seventh embodiment, the period until the ball reaches the corresponding one of the probability winning holes is different for right-handed and left-handed hits depending on the type of movable member placed in the protruding position, but this is not limited to this. For example, the left probability winning hole 655La may be placed in a position where the game ball can enter only when a left-handed hit is made, and the right probability winning hole 655Ra may be placed in a position where the game ball can enter only when a right-handed hit is made, and the period until the ball reaches each probability winning hole may be different depending on the type of jackpot. More specifically, for example, in one jackpot type, the period until the game ball shot by the left hit reaches the left probability winning port 655La is shorter than the period until the game ball shot by the right hit reaches the right probability winning port 655Ra, while in other jackpot types, the period until the game ball shot by the right hit reaches the right probability winning port 655Ra is shorter than the period until the game ball shot by the left hit reaches the left probability winning port 655La. In this case, the winning port into which the ball can enter by the right hit and the winning port into which the ball can enter by the left hit do not necessarily have to both be probability winning ports, and one or both may be replaced with a specific winning port into which the prize ball is simply paid out when the game ball enters. Also, instead of making the time it takes to reach the winning hole when hitting from the right side different from the time it takes to reach the winning hole when hitting from the left side depending on the type of jackpot, the time it takes to reach the winning hole may be constant regardless of the type of jackpot. In other words, the arrangement of nails, windmills, etc. may be such that the time it takes to reach the winning hole is shorter when hitting from the right side or the left side than when hitting from the other side.

<Modification of the Seventh Embodiment>
Next, referring to Figures 133 to 135, a pachinko machine 10 in a modified example of the seventh embodiment described above will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment described above, two winning devices (left winning device 655L, right winning device 655R) and one variable winning device 65 are provided as winning devices that can receive balls during the execution of a jackpot game, and the type of winning device that can receive balls is variable depending on the round of the jackpot. That is, in the first round of the jackpot, one of the winning holes (left winning hole 655La, right winning hole 655Ra) is set to a state where a ball can be received, while in the second round of the jackpot and after, the specific winning hole 65a is set to a state where a ball can be received.

In contrast, in this modified example, only two probability variable winning devices (left probability variable winning device 655L, right probability variable winning device 655R) are provided, and multiple flow paths (a flow path with a probability variable switch and a flow path without a probability variable switch) are provided inside the probability variable winning device, and the flow path to which the game ball that entered into either of the probability variable winning ports (left probability variable winning port 655La, right probability variable winning port 655Ra) is allocated is changed depending on the number of rounds of the jackpot. More specifically, the game ball that entered the probability variable winning port in the first round of the jackpot is allocated to the flow path with the probability variable switch among the multiple flow paths provided inside the probability variable winning device, while the game ball that entered the probability variable winning port after the second round of the jackpot is controlled to be allocated to the flow path without the probability variable switch. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a round (first round) in which a special probability game state is granted after the big win ends by having the ball enter the special probability game opening using only two special probability game winning devices, and a round (second round and onwards) in which a large number of prize balls can be won by continuously firing game balls into a specific area.

The pachinko machine 10 in this modified seventh embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment described above in that the variable winning device 65 has been removed, the internal structure of the left variable winning device 655L and the right variable winning device 655R has been changed, and the operation of each movable member 650Lb, 650Rb has been changed. The rest of the configuration, the various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment.

First, referring to FIG. 133, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 133 is a front view of the game board 13 in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 133, the game board 13 in this modified example differs from the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment in that the variable winning device 65 has been removed. In addition, the internal structure of each probability winning device (left probability winning device 655L and right probability winning device 655R) has also been partially changed from the seventh embodiment described above, as will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 134. The rest of the board configuration is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 134, the internal structure of each probability variable winning device in this modified example will be described. FIG. 134 is an enlarged front view of the specific area of the game board 13 of this modified example. As shown in FIG. 134, in this modified example, inside the left probability variable winning device 655L and the right probability variable winning device 655R, and on the back side of the base plate 60, a plurality of flow paths are provided through which game balls that have entered the left probability variable winning port 655La and the right probability variable winning port 655Ra flow down. More specifically, the downstream side of the left probability variable winning device 655L branches into two flow paths (probability variable induction flow path 655Ld1 and normal induction flow path 655Ld2), and downstream of the probability variable induction flow path 655Ld1, a probability variable ball entry port 656a in which a probability variable switch is provided is provided. If the game ball is guided to the special chance ball entrance 656a by flowing down the special chance ball induction flow path 655Ld1 during the execution of the jackpot game, the game ball will always pass through the special chance ball switch, so the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the special chance game state. In addition, the game ball that enters the special chance ball entrance 656a and passes through the special chance ball switch is discharged to the outside as it is.

On the other hand, downstream of the normal guide flow path 655Ld2, a ball outlet 656b1 is provided for discharging the game ball to the outside. Since no special probability switch is provided in this ball outlet 656b1, even if the game ball passes through the ball outlet 656b1, it has no effect on the game state after the end of the jackpot. In other words, regardless of the number of times the game ball passes through the ball outlet 656b1 during the execution of the jackpot game, if the game ball passes through the special probability switch even once, a special probability game state is set as the game state after the execution of the jackpot game is completed, and if the game ball does not pass through the special probability switch even once, a time-saving game state is set as the game state after the execution of the jackpot game is completed.

As shown in FIG. 134, at the position where the probability variable induction flow path 655Ld1 and the normal induction flow path 655Ld2 branch off, a flow path distribution valve 655Lc is provided to distribute the game ball to one of the flow paths (either the probability variable induction flow path 655Ld1 or the normal induction flow path 655Ld2). This flow path distribution valve 655Lc is inclined to the left when viewed from the front (a state in which a slope is formed from the upper left side to the lower right side when viewed from the front) in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 134). That is, the upstream side of the normal induction flow path 655Ld2 is closed by the flow path distribution valve 655Lc, and the upstream side of the probability variable induction flow path 655Ld1 is opened. In this state, the game ball that enters the left probability variable winning port 655La is distributed to the probability variable induction flow path 655Ld1, the upstream side of which is open, and is guided to the probability variable ball entry port 656a. Therefore, if the game ball can be made to enter the left special probability winning port 655La in the first round of the jackpot, in addition to being awarded a prize ball for entering the left special probability winning port 655La, the game ball can be made to pass through the special probability switch, and a special probability playing state is awarded as the playing state after the jackpot ends.

In contrast, when the first round of the jackpot ends and the ball discharge period has elapsed, the flow path distribution valve 655Lc tilts to the right when viewed from the front. As a result, the upstream side of the special chance induction flow path 655Ld1 is closed by the flow path distribution valve 655Lc, and the upstream side of the normal induction flow path 655Ld2 is opened. In this state, a game ball that enters the left special chance winning port 655La is distributed to the normal induction flow path 655Ld2, the upstream side of which is open, and is guided to the ball discharge port 656b1 downstream of the normal induction flow path 655Ld2. For this reason, even if a game ball enters the left special chance winning port 655La in the second round or later of the jackpot, the game ball that entered cannot pass through the special chance switch, so only the prize ball for the ball that entered the left special chance winning port 655La is awarded.

As shown in FIG. 134, the internal structure of the right-hand variable prize winning device 655R is merely a symmetrical internal structure of the left-hand variable prize winning device 655L, so it will be explained briefly. In the first round of the jackpot, the flow path distribution valve 655Rc provided inside the right-hand variable prize winning device 655R tilts to the right when viewed from the front, opening the upstream side of the variable prize induction flow path 655Rd1 (the upstream side of the normal induction flow path 655Rd2 is closed). As a result, the game ball that entered the right-hand variable prize winning port 655Ra in the first round of the jackpot is distributed to the variable prize induction flow path 655Rd1 and enters the variable prize ball entry port 656a. On the other hand, in the second round and after the jackpot, the flow path distribution valve 655Rc tilts to the left when viewed from the front, opening the upstream side of the normal induction flow path 655Rd2 (the upstream side of the variable prize induction flow path 655Rd1 is closed). As a result, any game ball that enters the right special prize opening 655Ra after the second round of a jackpot is diverted to the normal guide path 655Rd2 and enters the ball outlet 656b2.

Next, referring to Figure 135, the operation patterns (flow path switching patterns) of the flow path distribution valves 655Lc, 655Rc in the high probability winning device will be described. Figure 135 is a diagram showing the time-dependent change in the variable operation of the movable member 650Rb when the left V opening pattern is set for the movable members 650Lb, 655Rb, in comparison with the time-dependent change in the switching of the flow paths in the high probability winning device.

As shown in Figure 135, in the first round of a jackpot, until one second has elapsed when the movable member 650Rb is projected to the protruding position, each flow path distribution valve 655Lc, 655Rc is held in an arrangement in which it distributes game balls to each normal induction flow path (normal induction flow path 655Ld2, normal induction flow path 655Rd2). Then, when one second has elapsed since the start of the first round of a jackpot and the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruding position, each flow path distribution valve 655Lc, 655Rc moves to an arrangement (see Figure 134) in which it distributes game balls to each special probability induction flow path (special probability induction flow path 655Ld1, special probability induction flow path 655Rd1). The arrangement for distributing the game balls to the special chance induction flow paths continues even after the first round ends and the movable member 650Rb is moved from the protruding position to the retracted position, and when 0.5 seconds have passed since the end of the first round, the flow path distribution valves 655Lc, 655Rc are returned to the arrangement for distributing the game balls to the normal induction flow paths (normal induction flow path 655Ld2, normal induction flow path 655Rd2). This 0.5 seconds after the end of the first round is the so-called ball discharge period. In other words, a period sufficient for the game ball that entered the special chance winning hole just before the end of the first round to reach the special chance winning ball hole 656a is set. By setting the ball discharge period to 0.5 seconds, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the special chance state is not granted after the end of the jackpot despite the ball entering the special chance winning hole just before the end of the first round, and therefore it is possible to prevent the player from having a distrust for the pachinko machine 10 and the hall.

After the first round ends, the arrangement of each flow path distribution valve 655Lc, 655Rc does not change until the jackpot ends. Therefore, the game ball that enters the special prize winning port (either the left special prize winning port 655La or the right special prize winning port 655Ra) after the second round of the jackpot is guided to either the ball discharge port 656b1, 656b2. Meanwhile, the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruding position after the second round. That is, the movable member that was moved to the protruding position in the first round is moved to the protruding position after the second round. That is, the launch direction that makes it easier for the ball to enter the special prize winning port (the period from launching the game ball to entering the special prize winning port is shortened) is fixed in one jackpot. This allows the player to easily recognize the launch direction that will make it easier for the ball to enter the probability winning port in each round of the jackpot simply by checking the type of movable member that was moved to the protruding position in the first round, so that for a player who wants to complete the jackpot game quickly, the game ball can be launched in a launch direction that is more likely to shorten the time it takes for the ball to enter the probability winning port. On the other hand, for a player who wants to take a longer time to complete the jackpot game (enjoy it slowly), the game ball can be launched in a launch direction that is more likely to lengthen the time it takes for the ball to enter the probability winning port. This allows the player to select a game method that suits their own preferences.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot where a left V opening pattern is set, the operation is exactly the same except that the movable member 650Lb is moved to the protruding position in each round of the jackpot. In other words, the flow path switching pattern inside the probability variable winning device (the operation pattern of each flow path distribution valve 655Lc, 655Rc) is exactly the same as in the case of a jackpot where a right V opening pattern is set.

In this way, in this modified example, only two high probability winning devices are provided on the board, and inside the high probability winning device, the high probability winning switch is switched between allowing and preventing passage for each jackpot round (the arrangement of the flow path distribution valves 655Lc, 655Rc is changed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to eliminate the variable winning device 65 in the seventh embodiment, thereby reducing the number of parts in the pachinko machine 10. This allows the cost of the pachinko machine 10 to be reduced.

In the seventh embodiment and its modified examples, the selection effect is always executed from the start of one round of a jackpot until one of the movable members 650Lb, 650Rb is moved to the protruding position, but this is not limited to the configuration. For example, a notification effect may be executed at a predetermined rate (e.g., 1% of the time when a jackpot is reached) instead of the selection effect, to notify the player of the launch direction that will allow the ball to enter the special prize slot. By configuring in this way, the player can be pleased when the notification effect is executed.

In the seventh embodiment and its modified example, the two winning holes for the special chance are arranged opposite each other in the left-right direction, but this is not limited to this. At least one of them may be replaced with a ball entrance (second ball entrance) that has the same function as the first ball entrance 64 (i.e., the lottery for the special pattern is executed when the game ball enters), and the electric device 64a provided in association with the first ball entrance 64 may be deleted. In addition, the movable member on the side that allows the ball to enter the second ball entrance when the lottery for the normal pattern is a hit may be moved to a protruding position. By configuring in this way, in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, the game ball that has reached the specific area can be efficiently entered into the second ball entrance, so that the game efficiency during the time-saving state can be further improved. In this case, during the probability game state in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set, and during the time-saving game state, the player may be notified of the direction in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance (the direction in which the time from when the game ball is released to when the ball enters the second ball entrance is more likely to be short). By configuring in this way, the game ball can be more reliably made to enter the second ball entrance during the period when the movable member is positioned in the protruding position after the normal pattern is hit.

Eighth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 109 to 113. The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment described above is configured to have two specific winning holes (left specific winning hole 650La and right specific winning hole 650Ra), and a movable member corresponding to each specific winning hole is protruded to form an incline toward the specific winning hole, so that a game ball that reaches a specific area (the area below the first ball entrance 64) is guided to the specific winning hole.

In contrast, in the eighth embodiment, one movable member 657b is provided that is a combination of the two movable members in the sixth embodiment, and the type of winning hole into which the game ball that reaches the specific area (the area below the first ball entry hole 64) can enter (i.e., is guided by the movable member 657b) is changed depending on the movable position (protruding amount) of the movable member 657b. In addition, in the eighth embodiment, instead of the two specific winning holes in the sixth embodiment, one specific winning hole 657a and one general winning hole 630 are provided. The movable member 657b is positioned in a completely protruding position to form an inclination that can guide the game ball to the specific winning hole 657a, while the movable member 657b is configured to guide the game ball to the general winning hole 630 at an intermediate position on the way from the buried position (retracted position) to the protruding position.

The pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment in that the general winning port 630 is provided instead of the left specific winning port 650La, the specific winning port 657a is provided instead of the right specific winning port 650Ra, the movable member 657b is provided instead of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the sixth embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 109, the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 109(a) is a front perspective view of the movable member 657b, FIG. 109(b) is a front view of the movable member 657b, and FIG. 109(c) is a side view of the movable member 657b when viewed from the left side in a front view. As shown in FIG. 109(a) to (c), the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment is provided with a front inclined member 657bf on the near side as viewed from the front, which forms a downward inclination from the upper right direction to the lower left direction, and a rear inclined member 657bb on the far side as viewed from the front, which forms a downward inclination from the upper left direction to the lower right direction. As shown in FIG. 109(a) to (c), these front inclined member 657bf and rear inclined member 657bb are joined at approximately the center of each side surface to form one member.

As shown in Fig. 109(a) and (c), two parts of the rear inclined member 657bb protrude in a rod-like shape on the side of the rear side. Although not shown, a solenoid for the movable member is connected to the tip of this protruding part (the end opposite to the rear inclined member 657bb) for moving the movable member 657b in and out (variable movement). In each round of the jackpot, the solenoid for the movable member is driven to move the movable member 657b to the protruding position. Note that, although details will be described later with reference to Fig. 111, in the eighth embodiment, the movement of the movable member 657b in each round is made different depending on the jackpot type, and a jackpot type in which a movement that is likely to increase the chance of winning the general winning hole 630 during the execution of the jackpot game and a movement that is likely to decrease the chance of winning are provided. During the jackpot game, the more game balls that enter the general winning port 630, the more prize balls that can be won during the jackpot, so the player can play in the hope that a jackpot type with a disappearance action that is likely to increase the chances of winning the general winning port 630 will be determined. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, the operation of the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110(a) is a diagram showing a case where the movable member 657b is temporarily positioned at an intermediate position between the time when the movable member 657b performs a protruding operation and the time when the movable member 657b is positioned at the protruding position. As shown in FIG. 110, when the movable member 657b performs a protruding operation and only the front inclined member 657bf is in a state where it protrudes forward from the base plate 60 (only the rear inclined member 657bb is buried), the front inclined member 657bf forms a slope that descends from the upper right side to the lower left side, temporarily forming a state in which the game ball that has reached the specific area is guided to the general winning hole 630. Each round of the big win ends when a specified number (10 balls) or more of game balls have entered the specific winning hole 657a, or when a specified time (30 seconds) has elapsed before the specified number of balls enter the general winning hole 630, so no matter how many game balls enter the general winning hole 630, it does not affect the end condition of the round. In other words, the more game balls that enter the general winning opening 630, the more jackpot balls there will be, so the more game balls that enter the general winning opening 630, the happier the player will be. Therefore, while the ball is in the intermediate position (see FIG. 110(a)) that can be located while the projecting action is being performed, the player can be made to actively shoot the game ball toward a specific area, which can increase the player's motivation to participate in the jackpot game.

Figure 110(b) is a diagram showing the state in which the movable member 657b is arranged in the protruding position. As shown in Figure 110(b), when the movable member 657b is arranged in the protruding position, in addition to the front inclined member 657bf, the rear inclined member 657bb also protrudes forward from the base plate 60. As a result, the game ball that has reached the specific area falls onto the rear inclined member 657bb, and is guided to the specific winning hole 657a by the inclination formed by the rear inclined member 657bb that slopes downward from the upper left to the lower right when viewed from the front. In other words, by placing the movable member 657b in the protruding position (see Figure 110(b)), a state is created in which it is easy for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 657a.

In this way, in the eighth embodiment, the winning hole to which the game ball that has reached the specific area is guided is different depending on the position (protruding amount) of the movable member 657b. In the intermediate position where the movable member 657b can be placed before reaching the protruding position, a state (first guide state) in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning hole 630 is formed, and by placing the movable member 657b at the protruding position, a state (second guide state) in which the game ball is easily guided to the specific winning hole 657a is formed. As a result, the more the game ball is guided to the general winning hole 630 during the first guide state, the more the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game state increases, so that the player can be made to actively launch the game ball toward the specific area during the first guide state. Therefore, the player's motivation to participate in the jackpot game can be improved, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, even if the position of the movable member 657b does not completely coincide with the intermediate position shown in FIG. 110(a), as long as the movable member 657b is positioned within a predetermined movable range including the intermediate position, the game ball will be guided by the front inclined member 657bf to the general winning opening 630. More specifically, for example, the game ball will be guided to the general winning opening 630 from the position where the front inclined member 657bf of the movable member 657b protrudes about 70% of its total length from the base plate 60 to the position where the rear inclined member 657bb protrudes about 30% of its total length from the base plate 60.

Next, referring to FIG. 111, the movable pattern of the protruding member 657b in this eighth embodiment will be described. In this eighth embodiment, two types of movable patterns (movable patterns A and B) are provided as the movable patterns set for the movable member 657b in each round of a jackpot. Movable pattern A is a movable pattern that provides more opportunities for the game ball to enter the general winning opening 630 than movable pattern B (i.e., the number of times the first induction state is reached is greater). First, referring to FIG. 111(a), the change over time in the movable position of the movable member 657b when movable pattern A is set will be described.

As shown in FIG. 111, when the movable pattern A is set, the movable member 657b starts moving to the protruding position at the same time as the start of the jackpot round. As shown in FIG. 111, it takes 2 seconds for the movable member 657b, which was buried inside the base plate 60, to protrude to the protruding position. Of the 2 seconds it takes to move to this protruding position, the game ball is guided to the general winning hole 630 for about 0.7 seconds (first guide state, see FIG. 110(a)). Therefore, by continuing to launch the game ball toward a specific area immediately after the start of the round, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the general winning hole 630 during the first guide state. In each round of the jackpot, although an upper limit (10 balls) is set for the number of balls that enter the specific winning hole 657a, there is no limit on the number of balls that enter the general winning hole 630, so the more game balls enter the general winning hole 630, the more prize balls are paid out. This allows players to proactively launch game balls.

As shown in FIG. 111(a), the state in which the ball is placed in the protruding position (the second guided state in which the game ball is guided to the specific winning hole 657a) continues for 2.5 seconds. During these 2.5 seconds, the game ball is guided to the specific winning hole 657a every time it reaches the specific area, so that a prize ball can be won every time the ball enters the specific winning hole 657a. Note that the game balls are configured to be launched at intervals of as little as 0.6 seconds, so that by continuing to launch game balls from the start of the round, about four to five game balls can be made to enter the specific winning hole 657a within 2.5 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 111(a), when 2.5 seconds have elapsed since the movable member 657b was placed in the protruding position (i.e., when 4.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round), the movable member 657b starts moving to the buried position (retracted position). This movement to the buried position takes 2 seconds, just like the movement to the protruding position. That is, since the movement is completely opposite to the movement to the protruding position, the first induction state is maintained for about 0.7 seconds during the movement to the buried position. Therefore, even during the movement to the buried position, it is possible to enter about one or two game balls into the general winning hole 630 by continuing to launch game balls into a specific area. After this, as shown in FIG. 111(a), the movement from the buried position to the protruding position takes 2 seconds, the state of being placed in the protruding position is maintained for 2.5 seconds, and the movement from the protruding position to the buried position takes 2 seconds is repeated twice at 0.5 second intervals. Therefore, when the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern A, the first induction state is set up to six times. The movable pattern A is forcibly terminated when 10 game balls enter the specific winning port 657a, even if all the variable operations shown in FIG. 111(a) are not completed. The period during which the movable member 657b is placed in the protruding position is 7.5 seconds in total (2.5 seconds x 3 times), so that it is possible to reach about 12 to 13 game balls by continuing to launch game balls at 0.6 second intervals. Therefore, by simply continuing to launch game balls, it is possible to reliably make the specified number (10 balls) of game balls enter the specific winning port 657a, and it is also possible to set the first induction state up to six times. Therefore, in addition to the prize balls for the specified number of balls entering the specific winning port 657a, it is possible to obtain prize balls based on the winning of the general winning port 630 by setting the first induction state up to six times. Therefore, players can easily win more than the specified number of prize balls in each round, which can increase the player's satisfaction. This can increase the player's interest in the jackpot game.

Figure 111(b) is a diagram showing the change over time in the movable position of movable member 657b when movable member 657b is moved in movable pattern B. As shown in Figure 111(b), when movable pattern B is set, movable member 657b moves to the protruding position over two seconds immediately after the start of a round, remains in the protruding position for a maximum of 26 seconds (until 28 seconds have passed since the start of the round), and at the point where 26 seconds have passed, it is moved to the buried position (retracted position) over two seconds. Therefore, when movable pattern B is set, the first induction state in which the ball can enter the general winning hole 630 is reached only twice: immediately after the start of the round and at the end of the round.

In this way, in the eighth embodiment, the number of times the movable member 657b enters the first guiding state (a state in which game balls are likely to be guided to the general winning opening 630) is configured to differ depending on the movement pattern set for the movable member 657b. The more times the first guiding state is entered, the more prize balls can be won during the execution of the jackpot game, so by setting the movable pattern A in which the first guiding state is likely to be set frequently, the player can be made to feel even greater joy. Therefore, the player can be made to pay more attention to the set movement pattern while playing the game, which can further increase the player's interest in the jackpot game.

<Electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 112, the first winning type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 112 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first winning type selection table 202b in the eighth embodiment. The configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment is the same as that of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment except that the prescribed contents of the first winning type selection table 202b have been changed, so the description of the first winning type selection table 202b will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 112, five types of big win types, ie, big wins A8 to E8, are prescribed in the first winning type selection table 202b in the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 112, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", and "jackpot A8" is defined in correspondence with it (see 202b1 in FIG. 112). "Jackpot A8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 16, and a certain probability game state (a certain probability game state of a special symbol and a time-saving game state of a normal symbol) is given after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, when it becomes "jackpot A8", the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern A (a movable pattern that is likely to increase the number of times the first induction state occurs) in each round of the jackpot. For this reason, "jackpot A8" has the most rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is favorable (i.e., a certain probability game state that is more favorable than a time-saving game state is set), and there are more opportunities for the ball to enter the general winning hole 630 during the jackpot (the number of prize balls paid out in each round of the jackpot is greater). Therefore, "jackpot A8" is the jackpot type that is most favorable to the player. Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of "0-99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the five random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot A8" are "0-4", so the probability that "jackpot A8" will be determined when a jackpot is won is 5% (5/100).

In addition, for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 29", "jackpot B8" is specified in correspondence with it (see 202b2 in FIG. 112). "Jackpot B8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and a certain probability game state is given after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, when it becomes "jackpot B8", the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern A (a movable pattern that is likely to increase the number of times the first induction state occurs) in each round of the jackpot. For this reason, "jackpot B8" has the second largest number of rounds after "jackpot A8", and the game state after the jackpot ends is favorable (i.e., a certain probability game state that is more favorable than the time-saving game state is set), and there are more opportunities for the ball to enter the general winning hole 630 during the jackpot (the number of prize balls paid out in each round of the jackpot increases). Therefore, "jackpot B8" is the jackpot type that is second most favorable to the player after "jackpot A8". Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of "0-99" for the first winning type counter C2, the 25 random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot B8" are "5-29", so the probability that "jackpot B8" will be determined when a jackpot is won is 25% (25/100).

In addition, for the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "30 to 54", "jackpot C8" is specified in correspondence with it (see 202b3 in FIG. 112). "Jackpot C8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and a certain variable game state is given after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, when it becomes "jackpot C8", the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern B (the movable pattern in which the number of times the first induction state occurs is small) in each round of the jackpot. Therefore, "jackpot C8" has the second largest number of rounds after "jackpot A8", and the game state after the jackpot ends is advantageous, but there are fewer opportunities for the ball to enter the general winning hole 630 during the jackpot (the number of prize balls paid out in each round of the jackpot is relatively small). Therefore, "jackpot C8" is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player in terms of prize balls compared to "jackpot A8" and "jackpot B8". Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of "0-99" for the first winning type counter C2, the 25 random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot C8" are "30-54", so the probability that "jackpot C8" will be determined when a jackpot is won is 25% (25/100).

In addition, for the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "55 to 69", "jackpot D8" is specified in correspondence with it (see 202b4 in FIG. 112). "Jackpot D8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 7 and a certain variable game state is given after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, when it becomes a "jackpot D8", the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern B (the movable pattern in which the number of times the first induction state occurs is small) in each round of the jackpot. For this reason, the "jackpot D8" has an advantageous game state after the jackpot ends, but has the fewest number of rounds and also has fewer opportunities for the ball to enter the general winning hole 630 during the jackpot (the number of prize balls paid out in each round of the jackpot is relatively small). Therefore, although "jackpot D8" is advantageous in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends, it is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player in terms of prize balls. Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of "0-99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the 15 random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot D8" are "55-69", so the probability that "jackpot D8" will be determined when a jackpot is won is 15% (15/100).

In addition, for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 99", "jackpot E8" is specified in correspondence with it (see 202b5 in FIG. 112). "Jackpot E8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 7 and 100 time-saving game states are granted after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, when "jackpot E8" occurs, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern B (the movable pattern in which the number of times the first induction state occurs is small) in each round of the jackpot. For this reason, in the "jackpot E8", the game state after the jackpot ends is disadvantageous, the number of rounds is the smallest, and there are also fewer opportunities for the ball to enter the general winning port 630 during the jackpot (the number of prize balls paid out in each round of the jackpot is relatively small). Therefore, "jackpot E8" is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player in terms of both the game state after the jackpot ends and the prize ball surface. Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of "0-99" for the first winning type counter C2, the random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot E8" are 30, from "70-99," so the probability that "jackpot E8" will be determined when a jackpot is won is 30% (30/100).

In this way, in the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern set on the movable member 657b in each round of the jackpot game is different depending on the jackpot type. This allows the player to play in the hope of hitting the jackpot type (either jackpot A or B) for which movable pattern A, which provides more opportunities for the ball to enter the general winning port 630, is set. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

<Regarding control process of main control device in eighth embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 113, the jackpot control process 8 (S941) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 8 (S941) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process 6 (see Fig. 89) in the sixth embodiment, and like the jackpot control process 6 (see Fig. 89) in the sixth embodiment, it is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and setting the state of a specific winning port when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol.

In the jackpot control process 8 in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 113), steps S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, S1013 to S1016, and S1022 are identical to steps S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, S1013 to S1016, and S1022 in the jackpot control process 6 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 89).

In addition, in the jackpot control process 8 in this eighth embodiment (see FIG. 113), if it is determined in the process of S1004 that it is time to start a new round (S1004: Yes), the start of the moving pattern (either moving pattern A or B) corresponding to the type of jackpot is set (S1041), and the process proceeds to S1006. More specifically, if the current jackpot is either jackpot A8 or B8, moving pattern A is set as the moving pattern of the movable member 657b, whereas if it is any of jackpots C8 to E8, moving pattern B is set as the moving pattern of the movable member 657b.

In the jackpot control process 8 in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 113), if it is determined in the process of S1011 that the timing for the ending presentation has come to end (S1011: Yes), it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot E8 (S1042), and if it is determined that it is jackpot E8 (S1042: Yes), the process proceeds to S1013 to set the game state after the jackpot ends to a time-saving game state and end the jackpot. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1042 that the current jackpot type is not jackpot E8 (it is any of jackpots A8 to D8) (S1042: No), the process proceeds to S1014 to set the game state after the jackpot ends to a guaranteed variable game state and end the jackpot.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment is configured to have one movable member 657b that is a combination in the front-to-rear direction of a front inclined member 657bf that forms a slope that slopes downward from the upper right to the lower left when viewed from the front, and a rear inclined member 657bb that forms a slope that slopes downward from the upper left to the lower right when viewed from the front, and is configured to vary the type of winning hole into which a game ball that has reached a specific area (the area below the first ball entry hole 64) can enter (i.e., is guided by the movable member 657b) depending on the movable position (amount of protrusion) of the movable member 657b. More specifically, in an arrangement in which only the front inclined member 657bf protrudes forward from the base plate 60 and the rear inclined member 657bb is stored inside the base plate 60, the front inclined member 657bf forms a slope downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction as seen from the front, which creates a state in which a game ball that has reached a specific area is likely to be guided to the general winning port 630 located on the left side of the movable member 657b as seen from the front. In contrast, in a state in which the movable member 657b is fully protruded (placed in the protruding position), the rear inclined member 657bb forms a slope downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction as seen from the front, which creates a state in which a game ball that has reached a specific area is likely to be guided to the specific winning port 657a located on the right side of the movable member 657b as seen from the front. No matter how many game balls enter the general winning opening 630 during the execution of the jackpot game, it does not affect the end conditions of the round, so the more game balls enter the general winning opening 630 during the execution of the jackpot game, the more prize balls can be won. Therefore, in the intermediate position before the movable member 657b reaches the protruding position (the first guided state in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 by the front inclined member 657bf), the game ball can be actively launched into a specific area, which can increase the player's motivation to participate in the jackpot game. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern set for the movable member 657b in each round of a jackpot is one of two movable patterns: movable pattern A, which tends to increase the number of times the first guiding state occurs during one round, and movable pattern B, which tends to decrease the number of times the first guiding state occurs during one round. More specifically, when either jackpot A8 or B8 occurs, the movable member 657b is moved in movable pattern A in each round of the jackpot, whereas when either jackpot C8 to E8 occurs, the movable member 657b is moved in movable pattern B. This allows the player to play with a stronger expectation of either jackpot A8 or B8, which tends to increase the number of times the first guiding state occurs, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the eighth embodiment, two types of movable patterns, movable pattern A and movable pattern B, are provided, but the number of movable patterns is not limited to two, and may be more or less than two. By reducing the number of types of movable patterns to one, it becomes unnecessary to perform a control process for selecting a movable pattern according to the type of jackpot at the start of a new round, and the processing load during the execution of the jackpot game can be reduced. In addition, by increasing the number of types of movable patterns beyond two (for example, five types) and diversifying the number of times the first induction state occurs, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the set movable pattern while playing the game. This can increase the player's interest in the jackpot game.

In the eighth embodiment, the moving pattern set for the movable member 657b is varied in each round of the jackpot depending on the type of jackpot, but this is not limited to the configuration. For example, instead of or in addition to the type of jackpot, the moving pattern may be switched depending on the number of rounds. This allows the movement of the movable member 657b to be further diversified, so that each time a new round starts, the player can play the game while paying attention to the moving pattern set for the movable member 657b.

In the eighth embodiment, movable pattern A is set when either jackpot A8 or B8 occurs, and movable pattern B is set when any of jackpots C8 to E8 occurs, but this is not limited to the above, and the correspondence between the types of movable patterns and jackpot types can be determined arbitrarily. For example, contrary to the eighth embodiment, movable pattern A may be set when a jackpot type with a small number of rounds occurs (e.g., a jackpot with 7 rounds). By configuring in this way, when a jackpot type with a small number of rounds occurs, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round of the jackpot tends to be large, so it is possible to prevent the player from becoming disappointed when a jackpot with a small number of rounds is determined.

<Modification of the Eighth Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the above-mentioned eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 114. The modified example of the eighth embodiment is different in that a rotating member 658 is provided instead of the movable member 657b in the above-mentioned eighth embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 114(a) to (c), the rotating member 658 is configured to be able to rotate clockwise in front view with the rotation axis 658a as the rotation axis. By rotating the upper end of the rotating member 658 until it approaches the lower end of the specific winning hole 657a again (see FIG. 114(c)), a state in which the ball can easily enter the specific winning hole 657a is created. That is, the inclination of the rotating member 658 from the upper left side to the lower right side in front view creates a state in which the game ball that has reached the specific area is guided to the specific winning hole 657a. In each round of the big win, the rotating member 658 is controlled to rotate in a predetermined rotation pattern, so that the game ball can enter the specific winning hole 657a. Although the details will be described later, the winning hole into which the ball can enter can be changed depending on the rotation position (rotation angle) until the rotating member 658 is positioned so that the ball can enter the specific winning hole 657a (see FIG. 114(c)). In other words, the same operation as in the eighth embodiment can be realized.

Under normal circumstances, the rotating member 658 stands upright in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 114(a). In this state, a game ball that reaches the specific area passes through the space between the rotating member 658 and the general winning hole 630 (the left side of the rotating member 658 when viewed from the front), or the space between the rotating member 658 and the specific winning hole 657a (the right side of the rotating member 658 when viewed from the front), and flows down to the outlet 66.

Figure 114 (b) is a diagram showing an intermediate position in which the rotating member 658 is temporarily placed before rotating to a state in which the game ball can be guided to the specific winning hole 657a. As shown in Figure 114 (b), in the intermediate position, the rotating member 658 forms an inclination from the upper right side to the lower left side when viewed from the front, so that a game ball that has reached the specific area is easily guided to the general winning hole 630. When the rotating member 658 is further rotated in this state, it becomes a state in which the game ball is easily inserted into the specific winning hole 657a shown in Figure 114 (c). To release the state in which the game ball is easily inserted into the specific winning hole 657a, the rotating member 658 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front about the rotation axis 658a, so that the state shown in Figure 114 (a) is returned to.

In this way, in the modified example of the eighth embodiment, a rotating member 658 that rotates is provided between the general winning opening 630 and the specific winning opening 657a. This rotating member 658 can take at least one of two positions, depending on the rotation position (rotation angle), in which a slope that can guide the game ball to the general winning opening 630 is formed (see FIG. 114(b)), and in which a slope that can guide the game ball to the specific winning opening 657a is formed (see FIG. 114(c)). More specifically, in each round of the jackpot, the rotating member 658 is temporarily placed in a state in which the game ball can enter the general winning opening 630 at an intermediate position during the rotation of the rotating member 658 to a state in which the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 657a. As a result, as in the eighth embodiment, it is possible to realize a game property in which the more game balls enter the general winning opening 630 during the jackpot game, the more prize balls that can be acquired in the jackpot increase. This can improve the player's interest in the jackpot game.

The rotating member 658 in the modified eighth embodiment can also be used in the sixth and seventh embodiments described above. More specifically, the rotating member 658 is provided instead of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb. When the left specific winning hole 650La in the sixth embodiment and the left special winning hole 655La in the seventh embodiment are allowed to receive balls, the rotating member 658 is rotated counterclockwise to form a slope that slopes downward from the upper right side to the lower left side when viewed from the front. When the right specific winning hole 650Ra in the sixth embodiment and the right special winning hole 655Ra in the seventh embodiment are allowed to receive balls, the rotating member 658 is rotated clockwise to form a slope that slopes downward from the upper left side to the lower right side when viewed from the front.

In the eighth embodiment, the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 when the winning opening 630 is located in the middle position, but the state in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 is not limited to the middle position, and the game ball may be easily guided to the general winning opening 630 in a movable range including the open position or the closed position. In addition, the game ball is not easily guided to the general winning opening 630. For example, it may be a winning opening that triggers the drawing of a special pattern, a special winning opening that triggers the special winning state after the end of a jackpot, or a winning opening that triggers the start of a jackpot (a so-called two-type V winning opening). In addition, it is not necessary for a special prize to be given to the player (for example, an out opening).

Ninth embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 115 to Fig. 123. In the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment described above, the winning hole in which a prize can be won is changed according to the movable position (projection amount) of the movable member 657b that is moved in a predetermined movable pattern (either movable pattern A or B) during the execution of the jackpot game. This allows the winning hole into which the game ball is guided to be changed according to the timing at which the game ball reaches a specific area, and makes it possible to change the number of prize balls that can be won during the execution of the jackpot game.

In contrast to this, in the ninth embodiment, the type of ball entry hole through which the ball is likely to enter is changed according to the movable position of the electric device 640a, which is moved when a winning regular symbol is drawn. This allows the player to play in a time-saving game state where the probability of winning a regular symbol is high, by focusing on the type of ball entry hole through which the game ball enters.

The pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment in that the game board 13 has a partially changed board configuration, that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 have a partially changed configuration, that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 has a partially changed configuration, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound and lamp control device 113 has a partially changed configuration. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound and lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 are the same as those in the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eighth embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 115, the configuration of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment. Note that in the above description of the eighth embodiment, the description of the game board 13's configuration was omitted, and only the configuration replaced from the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment (general winning port 630, specific winning port 657a, movable member 657b) was described. Therefore, in the description of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment, the differences from the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 84) will be described for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIG. 115, the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment differs from the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 84) in that the electric device 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 is deleted, the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R are deleted and a variable winning device 65 is provided, and a second ball entrance 640 through which the game ball can enter, an electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, and a general winning port 63 through which the game ball can enter, which is provided on the left side of the second ball entrance 640 when viewed from the front, are provided for a flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front. The second ball entrance 640 is an entrance that triggers the drawing of a special pattern when a game ball enters. In other words, it has the same performance as the first ball entrance 64. In addition, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 while the first pattern display device 37 is displaying a variable number of times, the number of times the ball enters is reserved up to a maximum of four times, separately from the number of times the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. In addition, if there are reserved balls for entering the first ball entrance 64 and reserved balls for entering the second ball entrance 640 at the same time, the lottery for the special pattern based on the reserved ball for entering the second ball entrance 640 is executed first.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 116, but in this ninth embodiment, the moving direction of the game ball that reaches the electric role 640a is variable depending on the movable position of the electric role 640a, which is provided in association with the second ball entrance 640 and moves to an open state that allows the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 when a winning normal symbol is selected. The moving direction of the game ball for each movable position of the electric role 640a will be described with reference to FIG. 116.

Figure 116 shows the flow path of a game ball that is shot into a flow path provided to the right of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front, and reaches the electric device 640a, for each movable position of the electric device 640a. Figure 116(a) shows the state in which the electric device 640a closes the second ball entrance 640 (the state in which the electric device 640a is located in the closed position), Figure 116(b) shows the state in which the electric device 640a is located in an intermediate position on the way to the open position that opens the second ball entrance 640, and Figure 116(c) shows the state in which the electric device 640a is located in the open position.

As shown in FIG. 116(a), when the electric device 640a is in the closed position, a game ball shot toward the right side of the variable display unit 80 by hitting with the right hand flows down the space between the closed second ball entrance 640 and the general winning entrance 63. As shown in FIG. 116(a), the multiple nails arranged above the general winning entrance 63 and sloping downward from the upper left to the lower right as viewed from the front protrude to the right more than the multiple nails arranged above the general winning entrance 63 and sloping downward from the upper right to the lower left as viewed from the front. Therefore, when the electric device 640a is in the closed position, the possibility of a game ball shot with the right hand flowing down toward the general winning entrance 63 is extremely low.

As shown in FIG. 116(b), when the electric device 640a is in an intermediate position on its way to the open position, a game ball hit to the right is more likely to collide with the tip of the electric device 640a. When the game ball collides with the tip of the electric device 640a, the colliding game ball is reflected to the left as viewed from the front, and is more likely to be guided in the direction of the general winning opening 63. This makes it easier to win a specified number of prize balls (e.g., 10 balls) based on the ball entering the general winning opening 63.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, even if the arrangement does not completely match the arrangement shown in FIG. 116(b), as long as it is within a predetermined movable range including an intermediate position (for example, a movable range of about 10% before and after the arrangement shown in FIG. 116(b)), the game ball can be guided to the general winning opening 63. This makes it possible to further increase the possibility of the game ball being guided to the general winning opening 63.

As shown in FIG. 116(c), when the electric role 640a is in the open position (when the second ball entrance 640 is open), the game ball hit to the right is basically guided to the second ball entrance 640 by the electric role 640a. In addition, when the electric role 640a is fully open, the height of the uppermost nail of the multiple nails that form a slope from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front, which are located to the upper right of the general winning opening 63, is higher than the height of the tip part of the electric role 640a. Therefore, even if the game ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640 along the path formed by the electric role 640a, but collides with the electric role 640a and is reflected to the left when viewed from the front, it is difficult for the game ball to pass above the multiple nails and reach the general winning opening 63. Therefore, the game ball that hits the electric device 640a and is reflected to the left flows downward through the space to the left of the tip of the electric device 640a, as shown in FIG. 116(c).

In this way, in the ninth embodiment, depending on the movable position of the electric role 640a, a state is created in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 63, a state is created in which the game ball is easily guided to the second ball entrance 640, or a state is created in which the game ball is difficult to enter either ball entrance. Therefore, when a normal pattern is selected as a winning combination, the player can play the game while paying attention to the movable position of the electric role 640a when the game ball reaches the electric role 640a. In addition, in the ninth embodiment, the game is configured so that more prize balls are awarded when the game ball enters the general winning opening 63 than when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, the more the game ball reaches the electric role 640a at the intermediate position on the way to the open position, the more advantageous it is for the player. Therefore, since the movable position of the electric role 640a can be used to realize a game that draws attention, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 117(a). Fig. 117(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in Fig. 117(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see Fig. 11(a)) in that a second winning type selection table 202ba is added.

The second winning type selection table 202ba is a data table that is referenced to determine the opening pattern of the electric role device 640a when a winning normal symbol is selected. Details of the second winning type selection table 202ba are described with reference to FIG. 117(b).

Figure 117 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the second winning type selection table 202ba. As shown in Figure 117 (b), the second winning type selection table 202ba specifies the type of opening pattern set in the electric role 640a for each normal pattern state and the value of the second winning type counter that determines each opening pattern in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in Figure 117 (b), in the low probability state of the normal pattern, the value of the second winning type counter is in the range of "0 to 94" and the opening pattern in which the electric role 640a is opened "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is specified in association with each other (see 202c1 in Figure 117 (b)). Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) between "0 and 99" that the second winning type counter can take, the random numbers (counter values) associated with the opening pattern in which the electric role 640a is opened "5 times for 0.1 seconds" are 95 between "0 and 94", so in the low probability state of the normal pattern, the rate at which the opening pattern in which the electric role 640a is opened "5 times for 0.1 seconds" is determined is 95% (95/100). It is extremely difficult to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the 0.1 seconds that the electric role 640a is opened, so even if it is opened 5 times, it is almost impossible to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 while the opening pattern of "5 times for 0.1 seconds" is set.

In addition, in the low probability state of the normal pattern, the value of the second winning type counter is in the range of "95 to 99", and an opening pattern in which the electric role 640a is opened "once for 2 seconds" is specified in association with this (see 202c2 in FIG. 117(b)). Of the 100 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the second winning type counter can take, the random number values (counter values) associated with the opening pattern in which the electric role 640a is opened "once for 2 seconds" are five, "95 to 99", so in the low probability state of the normal pattern, the rate at which the opening pattern in which the electric role 640a is opened "once for 2 seconds" is determined is 5% (5/100). Since it is easy to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 within 2 seconds, the opening pattern of "once for 2 seconds" is an opening pattern in which the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In this way, in the low probability state of the normal pattern, the probability of winning the normal pattern is low, and even if the normal pattern wins, the majority of the winnings are in the "0.1 second x 5 times" opening pattern, so it is extremely difficult to make the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640 even if a right hit is performed in the low probability state of the normal pattern. On the other hand, when the electric role 640a is operated in an opening pattern in which it is opened "0.1 seconds x 5 times", the electric role 640a is continuously positioned in the intermediate position between the closed position and the open position (see FIG. 116 (b)) for a short period of time. Therefore, while the electric role 640a is opening in the "0.1 second x 5 times" opening pattern, the ball enters the general winning port 63, which has a relatively large number of prize balls paid out by hitting the right, at a high rate. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to hit the right while the opening operation is being performed in the "0.1 second x 5 times" opening pattern.

In addition, although not shown in the figures, in the ninth embodiment, when a lottery for a special symbol is executed based on a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 in a low probability state of a normal symbol, an extremely long variation time (e.g., 300 seconds) is set as the variation time of the special symbol. In other words, when a lottery for a second special symbol is executed in a low probability state of a special symbol, a disadvantageous state occurs in which a lottery for a special symbol is not executed for the next 5 minutes. Therefore, in a low probability state of a normal symbol, it is disadvantageous for the player to hit to the right while the opening pattern of "2 seconds x 1 time" (an opening pattern that makes it easy for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640) is being performed. For this reason, in the ninth embodiment, when an opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is determined, which makes it almost impossible to enter the second ball entrance 640 in a low probability state of a normal pattern, a notification (right-hit navigation effect) is performed to encourage the player to hit to the right, while when an opening pattern of "2 seconds x 1 time" is determined, which makes it easy to enter the second ball entrance 640, the right-hit navigation effect is not performed. This gives the player the maximum opportunity to enter the general winning port 63, while preventing the player from being excessively disadvantaged in a low probability state of a normal pattern (a disadvantageous state in which the lottery for special patterns is not held for more than 5 minutes).

In the following explanation, for the sake of simplicity, the drawing of the special pattern and the variable display executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 will be referred to as the "drawing of the first special pattern" and the "variable display of the first special pattern", and the drawing of the special pattern and the variable display executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 will be referred to as the "drawing of the second special pattern" and the "variable display of the second special pattern".

As shown in FIG. 117(b), in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, the value of the second winning type counter is in the range of "0-29" and an opening pattern in which the electric device 640a opens "5 times for 0.1 seconds" is associated with the range (see 202c3 in FIG. 117(b)). Of the 100 random number values (counter values) of "0-99" that the second winning type counter can take, the random number values (counter values) associated with the opening pattern in which the electric device 640a opens "5 times for 0.1 seconds" are 30, from "0-29". Therefore, in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, the probability that the opening pattern in which the electric device 640a opens "5 times for 0.1 seconds" is determined is 30% (30/100).

In addition, for the value range of the second winning type counter "30 to 99", an opening pattern in which the electric role 640a opens "once for 2 seconds" is associated and specified (see 202c4 in Fig. 117(b)). Of the 100 random number values (counter values) "0 to 99" that the second winning type counter can take, the random number values (counter values) associated with the opening pattern in which the electric role 640a opens "once for 2 seconds" are 70, from "30 to 99". Therefore, in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, the probability that the opening pattern in which the electric role 640a opens "once for 2 seconds" is determined is 70% (70/100).

In this way, in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, the probability of winning the normal pattern is high, and when the normal pattern wins, the opening pattern becomes "2 seconds x 1 time" at a rate of 70%, so by continuing to hit the right in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, the game balls can be constantly inserted into the second ball entrance 640. Also, when the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is selected, the game balls are more likely to enter the general winning entrance 63, so more prize balls can be obtained. Furthermore, in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, the change time of the variable display of the second special pattern becomes shorter (it becomes equal to the change time of the first special pattern), so the second special pattern can be drawn many times at short intervals. As a result, while the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the right, so while the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set, the right-hit navigation performance continues to be executed.

By continuing to hit the right hand during the time-saving game state, the "2 seconds x 1" opening pattern is executed continuously, so that the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed continuously without reducing the number of balls held. Also, if the "0.1 seconds x 5" opening pattern is selected frequently during the time-saving game state, the player can win a prize ball by entering the general winning hole 63 without reducing the number of time-saving times. This realizes a novel gameplay in which the player can play the game in the hope that an opening pattern in which the ball is placed in the open position for a short period of time during the time-saving game state (i.e., an opening pattern in which the opportunity to enter the second ball hole 640 is relatively small) will be determined. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 117(c), the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 117(c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 117(c), the configuration of the RAM 203 in the ninth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eighth embodiment (and the sixth embodiment) (see FIG. 87(b)) in that a first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a1 and a second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a2 are provided instead of the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, and a first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c1 and a second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c2 are provided instead of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c. It also differs in that the movable type storage area 203aa has been deleted.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired at the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired at the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 each have the same configuration as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). That is, it has four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4), and each of these areas stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3. When a special symbol is drawn, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a determination such as a drawing of a special symbol is made based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area. On the other hand, when no counter values are stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 (when the reserved balls of the second special symbol are 0), the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a determination such as a drawing of a special symbol is made based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area. That is, in this ninth embodiment, the drawing of the second special symbol is performed with priority over the drawing of the first special symbol.

The first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), up to a maximum of four times, and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203c2 is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning), up to a maximum of four times. The first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 is initially set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see S424 in FIG. 119). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S228 in FIG. 118). The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is initially set to zero, and is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 each time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases (see S430 in FIG. 119). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S223 in FIG. 118).

<Regarding control process of main control device in ninth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 118 to Fig. 122. First, the special symbol variation process 9 (S141) in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 118. This special symbol variation process 9 (S141) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see Fig. 23) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) in the timer interrupt process (see Fig. 22), and is a process for setting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, as in the special symbol variation process (see Fig. 23).

In the special symbol change process 9 (see FIG. 118) in the ninth embodiment, the same processes as those in S201, S202, and S208 to S217 in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 23) in the eighth embodiment (first embodiment) are executed in the special symbol change process 9 (see FIG. 118). In addition, in the special symbol change process 9 (see FIG. 118) in the ninth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S202 that the special symbol is not changing (S202: No), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203c2 is acquired (S221), and it is determined whether or not the acquired value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203c2 is greater than 0 (S222).

In the process of S222, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S222: Yes), then the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is updated by subtracting 1 from it (S223), and a special symbol 2 reserved ball number command indicating the updated value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is set (S224). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223.

After the special symbol 2 reserved ball count command is set by the process of S224, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted (S225). In the process of S225, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, the process proceeds to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S222, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c2 is not greater than 0 (a value equal to or greater than 1) (i.e., it is 0) (S222: No), then the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c1 is obtained (S226), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c1 is greater than 0 (S227).

In the process of S227, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c1 is not greater than 0 (a value equal to or greater than 1) (i.e., it is 0) (S227: No), this means that there are no reserved balls of the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and it is not possible to start a new display of the changing special patterns, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S227 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c1 is greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S227: Yes), then the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c1 is updated by subtracting 1 from it (S228), and a special symbol 1 reserved ball count command indicating the updated value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c1 is set (S229). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, just like the special symbol 1 reserved ball count command, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201.

After the special symbol 1 reserved ball count command is set by the processing of S229, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 is shifted in the same manner as the processing of S225 (S230), and the processing proceeds to S208.

Next, referring to FIG. 119, details of the start winning process 9 (S142) in the ninth embodiment will be described. This start winning process 9 (S142) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) instead of the start winning process (see FIG. 25) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process for executing corresponding control when a ball is detected entering the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640.

In this start winning process 9 (S142), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S421). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, in the process of S421, if it is determined that the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S421: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 (the number of reserved variable display times N1 corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol) is obtained (S422). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S423).

If it is determined in the process of S421 that no ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S421: No), or if a game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 but the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 is not less than 4 (i.e., it is 4) in the process of S423 (S423: No), the process proceeds to S427. On the other hand, if a ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S421: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 is less than 4 (S423: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 is incremented by 1 (S424). Then, a special symbol 1 reserved ball count command is set to indicate the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 changed by the calculation (S425).

The special symbol 1 reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c1 from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b in the RAM 223.

After the special symbol 1 reserved ball count command is set by the process of S425, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated by the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) described above are stored in the first area of the free reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 of RAM 203 (S426), and the process proceeds to S427. Note that in the process of S426, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c1 is referenced, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved area 2 is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved area 3 is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved area 4 is set as the first area.

In the process of S427, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (initial entry) (S427). In this process, as in the process of S421, the entry of the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, in the process of S427, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (S427: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 (the number of reserved variable displays corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol N2) is obtained (S428), and it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S429).

If there is no winning ball in the second ball entrance 640 (S427: No), or if there is a winning ball in the second ball entrance 640 but the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203c2 is not less than 4 (i.e., it is 4) (S429: No), the process proceeds to S433. On the other hand, if there is a winning ball in the second ball entrance 640 (S427: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203c2 is less than 4 (S429: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203c2 (S430). Then, a special symbol 2 reserved ball count command is set (S431) indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203c2 changed by the calculation.

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special pattern 2 reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c2 from the special pattern 2 reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b in the RAM 223.

After the special symbol 2 reserved ball count command is set by the process of S431, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variable type selection counter C3 updated by the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above (see FIG. 22) are stored in the first area of the free reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 in RAM 203 (S432), and the process proceeds to S433. Note that in the process of S432, as in the process of S426, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c2 is referenced, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved area 2, if the value is 2, the reserved area 3, and if the value is 3, the reserved area 4 are set as the first area.

In the process of S433, a look-ahead process is executed to look ahead as to whether the player has won or lost from the various counter values obtained based on the initial winning (S433), and then the process ends. Details of this look-ahead process are described with reference to FIG. 120.

Figure 120 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead process (S433). In this look-ahead process (S433), it is first determined whether or not a new ball has been detected at the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 during this start winning process 9 (see Figure 119) (S1501), and if it is determined that a new ball has not been detected (S1501: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1501 that a new ball has been detected (S1501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected ball is at the upper limit (i.e., 4) (S1502), and if it is determined that it is at the upper limit (S1502: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1502 that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit (S1502: No), the system predicts whether the lottery for the special symbol is a win (whether it is a jackpot or not), its stop type (if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type), and its fluctuation pattern (S1503) based on the various counter values acquired at the time the ball was detected (the various counter values stored in S426 or S432 of the start winning process 9 (see FIG. 119)).

After the process of S1503 predicts the winning or losing outcome of the special symbol lottery, the stop type (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot), and the fluctuation pattern, a winning information command including the predicted winning or losing outcome of the lottery, the predicted stop type, and the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S1504), and this process ends.

The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice and lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by MPU 201. When the voice and lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it extracts the winning or losing status, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores this information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, normal symbol change process 9 (S143) in this ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 121. This normal symbol change process 9 (S143) is a process executed in place of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 26) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process for controlling the display of normal symbol changes performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the opening operation of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640.

In the normal symbol variation process 9 (see FIG. 121) in this ninth embodiment, each process from S501 to S519 is the same as each process from S501 to S519 in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). In addition, in the normal symbol variation process 9 (see FIG. 121) in this ninth embodiment, if the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is a win in the process of S519 (S519: Yes), the second win type selection table 202ba is referenced to determine the opening pattern to be set for the electric role 640a, and an electric role operation start process is executed to start the opening operation based on the determined opening pattern (S531), and this process is terminated. Details of this electric role operation start process (S531) will be described with reference to FIG. 122.

Figure 122 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned electric role start processing (S531). In this electric role start processing (S531), first, the second winning type selection table 202ba (see Figure 117 (b)) is read (S1601), and from the read table, the opening pattern corresponding to the current state of the normal pattern and the value of the second winning type counter is read (S1602). Here, the current state of the normal pattern is determined to be a normal pattern time-saving state if the probability variable flag 203e is on or the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 1 or more, while it is determined to be a normal pattern low probability state if the probability variable flag 203e is off and the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0. As described above, in the low probability state of the normal pattern, if the value of the second winning type selection counter is in the range of "0 to 94", "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is selected as the opening pattern, while if the value of the second winning type selection counter is in the range of "95 to 99", "2 seconds x 1 time" is selected as the opening pattern. Also, in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, if the value of the second winning type selection counter is in the range of "0 to 29", "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is selected as the opening pattern, while if the value of the second winning type selection counter is in the range of "30 to 99", "2 seconds x 1 time" is selected as the opening pattern.

When the process of S1602 is completed, the start of the opening and closing control of the electric role 640a is set according to the opening pattern read in the process of S1602 (S1603). Then, it is determined whether or not the current state is a low probability state of normal symbols (the probability change flag 203e is off and the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0) (S1604), and if it is a low probability state of normal symbols (S1604: Yes), it is determined whether or not the opening pattern set to start in the process of S1603 is an opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" (S1605). In the process of S1605, if it is determined that the opening pattern set to start this time is an opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" (S1605: Yes), an opening start command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" has started (S1606), and this process is terminated. Upon receiving the opening start command, the audio lamp control device 113 executes a right-hit navigation effect that encourages the player to hit to the right. This ensures that the player has a good chance of getting the ball into the general winning hole 63 when the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is set, which provides many opportunities to get the ball into the general winning hole 63. This makes it possible to maintain the player's motivation to play in the most unfavorable normal game state (low probability state for special symbols and low probability state for normal symbols).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1604 that the current state is the time-saving state for the normal pattern (S1604: No), and if it is determined in the process of S1605 that the opening pattern of "2 seconds x 1 time" is set (S1605: No), the process of S1606 is skipped and the process ends.

<Control process of the voice lamp control device in the ninth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 123. Fig. 123 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 9 (S4071) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment. This command determination process 9 (S4071) is executed instead of the command determination process (see Fig. 41) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process for analyzing unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area and performing control according to the type of the unprocessed command, similar to the command determination process (see Fig. 41) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

In the command determination process 9 in the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 123), each of the processes S4901 to S4918 is executed in the same manner as each of the processes S4901 to S4918 in the command determination process in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 41). In the command determination process 9 in the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 123), if it is determined in the process of S4909 that the unprocessed commands received from the main control device 110 do not include a winning information command (S4909: No), it is then determined whether or not the unprocessed commands include a release start command (S4931), and if it is determined that the unprocessed commands include a release start command (S4931: Yes), a right-hit navigation effect is set that encourages the player to hit the right (S4932), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4931 that the unprocessed commands do not include a start opening command (S4931: No), the processing proceeds to S4911.

By setting the right-hit navigation effect by processing S4932, when the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is set, which provides many opportunities to get the ball into the general winning hole 63, the player can be reliably given a chance to get the ball into the general winning hole 63. Therefore, even in the most unfavorable normal game state (low probability state of special symbols and low probability state of normal symbols), the player's motivation to play can be maintained.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment, when a game ball reaches the electric role device 640a at an intermediate position where the electric role device 640a, which is moved to the open position when a winning regular symbol is drawn, can be temporarily placed before the electric role device 640a is moved to the open position, the board is configured so that the game ball is easily guided to the general winning port 63 located to the left of the second ball entrance 640. This allows the player to play while paying attention to the type of ball entrance into which the game ball enters in a time-saving game state where the probability of winning a regular symbol is high. In the ninth embodiment, at least an opening pattern of the electric role 640a is provided, which is easy to be placed in the middle position (it is placed in the middle position many times) but difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640 (the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 is short) and an opening pattern which is difficult to be placed in the middle position (it is placed in the middle position few times) but easy to enter the second ball entrance 640 (the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 is long). By setting an opening pattern which is easy to be placed in the middle position (it is placed in the middle position many times), an opportunity to enter the game ball into the general winning port 63 and win a large number of prize balls is obtained, so that a novel playability can be realized in which the player plays during the time-saving game state in the hope of an opening pattern which is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640 (i.e., an opening pattern which is disadvantageous in a general gaming machine) rather than an opening pattern which is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640. Furthermore, in the ninth embodiment, in the normal game state (low probability state of special symbols and low probability state of normal symbols), when it is determined to execute an opening pattern in which the electric role 640a is likely to be placed in the middle position (the number of times it is placed in the middle position) a right-hit navigation effect (an effect suggesting that the game ball is launched toward the second ball entrance 640) is executed. By configuring in this way, in the most unfavorable game state for the player, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to enter the ball into the general winning entrance 63 and win a prize ball every time a normal symbol hits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in an unfavorable game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game in the normal game state.

In the ninth embodiment, the right-hit navigation is executed only when an opening pattern in which the electric device 640a is likely to be placed in the middle position (the number of times it is placed in the middle position) is determined to be executed in the normal game state, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the right-hit navigation effect may be executed regardless of the opening pattern when a normal pattern is hit, or the right-hit navigation effect may be executed only when an opening pattern in which the electric device 640a is unlikely to be placed in the middle position (the number of times it is placed in the middle position is small) but the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 (the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 is long) is started. By configuring in this way, the chances of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 in the normal game state can be increased, so that the game in the normal game state can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

In the ninth embodiment, the game ball is easily guided (reflected) to the general winning opening 63 when the ball is located in the intermediate position, but the state in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 63 is not limited to the intermediate position, and the game ball may be easily guided to the general winning opening 63 in a movable range including the open position or the closed position. In addition, the game ball is not easily guided to the general winning opening 63. For example, the winning opening may be a winning opening that triggers the drawing of a special pattern, or a winning opening that triggers the start of a jackpot (a so-called two-type V winning opening). In addition, it is not necessary for a special prize to be awarded to the player (for example, an out opening).

In the ninth embodiment, the right-hit navigation effect is executed only when the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, and when the normal symbol is in a low probability state and the normal symbol wins and the "0.1 seconds x 5 times" opening pattern is determined, but the timing of the right-hit navigation effect execution is not limited to this. For example, if a normal symbol wins during the time-saving state, and the normal symbol stops changing after the time-saving state ends and the "0.1 seconds x 5 times" opening pattern starts, the right-hit navigation effect executed during the time-saving state may be extended until the "0.1 seconds x 5 times" opening pattern ends. This prevents the right-hit navigation effect from being executed immediately after the player switches back to left hitting, confusing the player.

In the ninth embodiment, the state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the general winning port 63, the state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter either of the winning ports are switched depending on the movable position of the electric device 640a that opens and closes the second ball entrance 640, but this configuration is not limited to the second ball entrance 640. For example, the specific winning port may be configured similarly to the second ball entrance 640 and the electric device 640a in the ninth embodiment, and the arrangement of the general winning port 63 may also be similar to that of the ninth embodiment. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an opportunity to enter the general winning port 63 during a jackpot game, so that the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game can be increased. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Tenth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 124 to 126. In the first to ninth embodiments described above, the board configuration (arrangement of nails, arrangement of windmills, etc.) of the game board 13 is almost symmetrical, and the game ball shot toward the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 on the game board 13 (game ball shot to the right) and the game ball shot toward the flow path provided on the left side (game ball shot to the left) are configured so that the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the specific area (area below the first ball entrance 64) is almost the same for the game ball shot toward the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 on the game board 13 (game ball shot to the right).

In contrast to this, in the tenth embodiment, the game board 13 is configured so that a game ball shot toward a flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (a game ball shot from the right) takes longer to reach the specific area than a game ball shot toward a flow path provided on the left side (a game ball shot from the left). In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is open, the game balls that flow down the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display unit 80 are more likely to enter the specific winning opening 65a than the game balls that flow down the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80.

The pachinko machine 10 in this tenth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the surface configuration of the game board 13 has been partially changed. The other configurations, the various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

Figure 124 is a diagram showing the surface configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in Figure 124, the surface configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment is different from the surface configuration of the game board 13 in the first embodiment described above (see Figure 2) in that a detouring device 700 that allows the game ball to enter inside is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 on the game board 13. Details will be described later with reference to Figure 125, but this detouring device 700 is provided to extend the time it takes for a game ball hit to the right (shot to the right side of the game board 13) to reach the specific winning hole 65a. In other words, the detouring device 700 can extend the flow time of a game ball hit to the right so that the time it takes for a game ball shot by a right hit to reach the specific winning hole 65a is longer than the time it takes for a game ball shot by a left hit to reach the specific winning hole 65a. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, it takes 1 to 2 seconds for a game ball hit from the left to reach the specific winning hole 65a, while it takes 7 to 8 seconds for a game ball hit from the right to reach the specific winning hole 65a.

Here, the details of the detour role 700 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a schematic diagram showing the detour role 700. As shown in FIG. 125, the detour role 700 has an opening 710 at its upper part. A game ball launched by hitting from the right can enter the inside of the detour role 700 through this opening 710. In addition, an opening 720 is provided at the bottom of the detour role 700 for discharging the game ball that has flowed down inside the detour role 700 to the outside of the detour role 700. Furthermore, the detour role 700 is surrounded by a peripheral portion 730 on four sides, the front side, the back side, and the left and right directions, in order to prevent the ball that has progressed inside from being discharged to the outside without passing through the opening 720. This peripheral portion 730 is made of a translucent material (e.g., PS material), so the player can easily see the balls flowing down.

The flat surface of the peripheral portion 730 at the rear side as viewed from the front can be assembled so as to be substantially flush with the base plate 60, so that a gap is generated between the peripheral portion 730 and the base plate 60, which can prevent the ball from being caught in the gap. Furthermore, the flat surface of the peripheral portion 730 at the front side as viewed from the front and the glass unit 16 are configured to be in contact with each other without any gaps when the front frame 14 is closed, so that a gap is generated between the peripheral portion 730 and the glass unit 16, which can prevent the ball from being caught in the gap.

As shown in FIG. 125, inside the detouring device 700, there are multiple flow paths (guide flow paths 740-790) that are inclined downward from the detouring device 700. In each of the guide flow paths 740-790, the surface with which the ball comes into contact is substantially flat, and its width is configured to be substantially the same as the width of the inner part of the peripheral portion 730 (the distance between the inner wall on the far side as viewed from the front and the inner wall on the near side as viewed from the front). In other words, a gap is generated between the inner part of the peripheral portion 730 and each of the guide flow paths 740-790, preventing the ball from passing through the gap.

As shown in FIG. 125, the guide channels 740, 760, and 780 are inclined downward from the upper right to the lower left when viewed from the front. The guide channels 750, 770, and 790 are inclined downward from the upper left to the lower right when viewed from the front. The guide channels 740, 750, 760, 770, 780, and 790 are arranged in order from the top of the detour device 700. In other words, channels inclined downward from the upper right to the lower left when viewed from the front and channels inclined downward from the upper left to the lower right when viewed from the front are alternately provided.

The game ball that enters the opening 710 first falls into the guide flow path 740 and flows downward to the left when viewed from the front, along the slope of the guide flow path 740. When the game ball reaches the bottom end of the guide flow path 740, it falls from the guide flow path 740 toward the guide flow path 750. The fallen game ball then flows downward to the right when viewed from the front, along the guide flow path 750. When the flowing game ball reaches the bottom end of the guide flow path 750, it falls into the guide flow path 760 and flows downward to the left when viewed from the front, along the slope of the guide flow path 760.

The game ball continues to alternate between flowing down along the flow path and dropping into the lower flow path. Finally, the game ball reaches the lower end of the guide flow path 790 and drops from the lower end of the guide flow path 790 toward the opening 720. As a result, the ball that entered the detour device 700 is discharged to the outside of the detour device 700 through the opening 720. Since the direction in which the game ball flows down changes every time the flow path through which the game ball flows down (i.e., it changes from the lower right direction to the lower left direction, or from the lower left direction to the lower right direction), the momentum (flow speed) of the game ball flowing down can be reduced every time the flow path changes. Therefore, the time until the game ball that entered the detour device 700 through the opening 710 is discharged to the outside through the opening 720 can be extended. This allows the time it takes for the ball to reach the bottom of the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are located) to be longer (7 seconds or more) when the ball is shot to the right side of the game board 13 compared to when the ball is shot to the left side of the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 125, each of the guide channels 740-790 is supported by a channel support shaft 741-791, and is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise around each channel support shaft as a rotation axis. The rotation is stopped when the bottom surface of each of the guide channels 740-790 comes into contact with a rotation stop member 742a-792a or a rotation stop member 742b-792b provided on the bottom side of each of the guide channels 740-790. This rotation will be explained using the guide channel 740 as an example.

As described above, the guide flow channel 740 is configured to be rotatable around the flow channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. This rotation action is performed based on the weight of the game ball flowing down the guide flow channel 740. Specifically, when the game ball flows down the upper half of the guide flow channel 740, the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the upper half of the guide flow channel 740, and a force is generated in a direction that rotates the upper half of the guide flow channel 740 downward. In other words, since a force acts in a direction that rotates the guide flow channel 740 clockwise when viewed from the front, the guide flow channel 740 rotates clockwise around the flow channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. The rotation action is stopped when the lower surface of the guide flow channel 740 comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742b. This rotation stop member 742b can prevent the guide flow channel 740 from rotating too much in the clockwise direction and causing the guide flow channel 740 to tilt in the opposite direction.

Here, rotation stop member 742b is a roughly cylindrical member, and is joined to the inner wall on the front side and the inner wall on the back side of peripheral portion 730, respectively. In other words, it is configured so that its position will not shift due to the impact when it comes into contact with the underside of induction flow channel 740. The other rotation stop members 742a to 792a and rotation stop members 752b to 792b have the same structure as rotation stop member 742b.

On the other hand, when the ball flows down the lower half of the guide flow path 740, the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the lower half of the guide flow path 740, so a force is generated in the direction of rotating the lower half of the guide flow path 740 downward. In other words, a force acts in the direction of rotating the guide flow path 740 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, so the guide flow path 740 rotates counterclockwise around the flow path support shaft 741 as the rotation axis. The rotation motion is stopped when the lower surface of the guide flow path 740 comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742a. This rotation stop member 742a can prevent the guide flow path 740 from rotating too counterclockwise. In other words, it can prevent the inclination of the guide flow path 740 from becoming too large, which makes it impossible to reduce the momentum of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball launched by hitting from the right can be reliably flowed down the lower part of the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64 and the specific winning entrance 65a are arranged) over 7 seconds or more. The path length and maximum inclination angle of each guide channel 740-790 are set so that when a game ball flows down with the inclination of each guide channel 740-790 at its maximum, it takes 7 seconds for the game ball to reach the second ball inlet 640. Since it is rare for a game ball to flow down with all of the guide channels 740-790 maintaining their maximum inclination angles, it is possible to ensure that the time it takes for the game ball to reach the second ball inlet 640 is 7 seconds or more.

In this way, by configuring each of the guide channels 740-790 so that its inclination changes based on the load caused by the weight of the game ball, the speed at which the game ball flows down each of the guide channels 740-790 can be varied. This makes it possible to vary the time it takes for the game ball to finish passing through the detour device 700. In addition, the above explanation was given for the case in which one ball travels along the guide channel 740, but in actual play, it is possible for multiple balls to travel along the same guide channel. In this case, the rotational movement of each of the guide channels 740-790 can be made even more irregular, making it possible to vary the time it takes for the game ball to finish passing through the detour device 700.

As shown in FIG. 125, the left and right corners of each guide channel 740-790 are processed so that they are rounded compared to the left and right corners of the upper surface. This configuration makes it difficult for the corners of the lower surface to come into contact with the inner wall of the peripheral portion 730 when each guide channel 740-790 rotates. Therefore, each guide channel 740-790 can be positioned closer to the peripheral portion 730, so that a gap is formed between each guide channel 740-790 and the peripheral portion 730, and it is possible to prevent a game ball from being caught in the gap or passing through the gap. Note that each guide channel 740-790 is configured to return to the position with the largest inclination due to its own weight when no game ball is flowing down. For example, when no ball is flowing down the guide channel 740, the guide channel 740 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front with the channel support shaft 741 as the rotation axis due to its own weight. This rotational motion continues until the bottom surface of the guide channel comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742a, and stops when it comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742a. Similarly, the guide channels 750-790 are configured to rotate until they come into contact with each of the rotation stop members 752a-792a due to their own weight when no game balls are flowing down. This makes it possible to vary the flow speed of the balls depending on whether the game balls flow down while each of the guide channels 750-790 is rotating, or whether the game balls flow down after the rotation of each of the guide channels 750-790 has ended.

In addition, each of the guide channels 740 to 790 may be configured not to rotate under its own weight, but to rotate only when a game ball passes through it. Also, for example, each of the guide channels 740 to 790 may be configured to rotate regularly or irregularly using a motor or the like.

Returning to FIG. 124, the explanation continues. As shown in FIG. 124, a number of nails are arranged below the detour device 700 so as to restrict the flow direction of game balls that flow out of the detour device 700 through the opening 720 on the lower end side of the detour device 700. These nails allow all game balls that flow out of the detour device 700 to fall onto the curved member 800 provided on the left side of the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front (the game balls can be prevented from flowing down in the direction of the first ball entry port 64). The game balls that fall onto this curved member 800 roll on the upper surface of the curved member 800 and are guided in the direction of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 124, the gap between the variable winning device 65 and the curved member 800 is very narrow (less than the width of one game ball), so when the specific winning opening 65a is open, almost all game balls guided to the left end of the curved member 800 can be won (entered) into the specific winning opening 65a. In contrast, a relatively wide space (flow path) (wider than one game ball) is provided on the left side of the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front, for guiding game balls to the outlet 66 below the variable winning device 65. For this reason, when the specific winning opening 65a is open and a game ball is shot by hitting it from the left, although many game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, some game balls (for example, 1 in 10 balls) do not enter the specific winning opening 65a and are guided from the left side of the variable winning device 65 to the outlet 66.

In this way, in the tenth embodiment, a bypass device 700 and a curved member 800 are provided for the flow path on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. This allows the time it takes for a game ball hit to the right to reach the specific winning hole 65a to be longer than the time it takes for a game ball hit to the left to reach the specific winning hole 65a. Note that while a game ball hit to the right will generally take longer to reach the specific winning hole 65a, depending on the direction of reflection and the shooting conditions of the game ball, there is a possibility that a game ball hit to the left will take longer to reach the specific winning hole 65a (for example, when a game ball shot to the left temporarily stops, or when a ball becomes clogged in the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80). For this reason, it can be said that a game ball that flows down (passes through) the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 tends to take a longer time to reach the specific winning opening 65a than a game ball that flows down (passes through) the flow path on the left side (a game ball that flows down the flow path on the left side tends to take a shorter time to reach the specific winning opening 65a).

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning hole 65a is open, the rate at which the game balls hit to the right enter the specific winning hole 65a can be made higher than the rate at which the game balls hit to the left enter the specific winning hole 65a. This allows players who want to progress through the jackpot game quickly (end the jackpot game early) to play by hitting the left to the specific winning hole 65a, while accepting some losses (one wasted ball in every 10 balls) during the jackpot game. On the other hand, players who do not want to waste balls (losses) as much as possible can play by hitting the right to the specific winning hole 65a, while accepting that the jackpot game will last longer. Therefore, each player can select their preferred gameplay during the jackpot game, so that gameplay tailored to each player's taste can be realized. Each round of the jackpot ends when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round, or when 10 or more game balls have entered the specific winning hole 65a before 30 seconds have elapsed. Even if the game balls start to be released by hitting with the right hand after each round of the jackpot has started, 10 game balls can pass through the detouring device 700 and enter the specific winning hole 65a before 30 seconds have elapsed (10 game balls can enter in about 13 to 14 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage in terms of winning balls when hitting with the right hand (the round ends before the specified number of game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a).

Next, referring to FIG. 126, the display mode during the execution of the jackpot game in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 126, in the tenth embodiment, when a jackpot occurs, roughly rectangular display areas HR15 and HR16 are formed on the upper left and upper right sides of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, and a roughly rectangular display area HR17 larger in area than the display areas HR15 and HR16 is formed below the display area HR15 and HR16. In the display area HR15, an image resembling a left-pointing arrow is displayed, along with the words "High-speed mode with left-handed hit" and "You can consume the jackpot quickly." These display contents allow the player to easily understand that if a left-handed hit is performed during a jackpot, the jackpot can be consumed in a relatively short period of time (the jackpot progresses at a relatively high speed).

As shown in FIG. 126, an image resembling an arrow pointing to the right is displayed in the display area HR16, along with the words "Hit right for slow mode" and "You can enjoy the jackpot at your leisure." These display contents allow the player to easily understand that if he or she hits right during a jackpot, the jackpot can be enjoyed over a relatively long period of time (the jackpot will progress at a relatively slow speed).

As shown in FIG. 126, various images and information indicating that a jackpot is being won are displayed in the display area HR17. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 126, an image TB that resembles a treasure chest containing a large amount of gold coins is displayed in the center of the display area HR17, and a display area HR19 with the word "jackpot" is formed in the upper right corner of the display area HR17. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that a jackpot game is being played. In addition, a display area HR18 for displaying characters indicating the progress of the jackpot (number of rounds and number of prize balls paid out) is formed in the upper left corner of the display area HR17. In the example of FIG. 126, the characters "ROUND: 01/16" (information indicating the comparison between the current number of rounds and the maximum number of rounds) and the characters "GET: 0000/1600" (information indicating the comparison between the number of prize balls paid out to date and the maximum number of prize balls paid out) are displayed. The display content shown in these display areas HR18 allows the player to easily understand the progress of the jackpot.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the time it takes for a game ball hit to the right to reach the specific winning port 65a is longer than the time it takes for a game ball hit to the left to reach the specific winning port 65a. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning port 65a is open, the rate at which a game ball hit to the right enters the specific winning port 65a is higher than the rate at which a game ball hit to the left enters the specific winning port 65a. With these configurations, a player who wants to progress through the jackpot game quickly (want to win a large number of prize balls in a short time) can play by hitting the ball from the left, aiming for the specific winning port 65a, while accepting some losses (about 1 wasted ball in 10 balls) during the jackpot game. On the other hand, for players who want to avoid wasting balls (losses) as much as possible, they can play by hitting the ball from the right and aiming for the specific winning hole 65a, with the understanding that the jackpot game period will be longer. Therefore, each player can select the gameplay they prefer during the jackpot game, so that gameplay that suits each player's tastes can be realized.

In the tenth embodiment, the detouring device 700 is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80, so that the time it takes for the game ball launched by right hitting to reach the variable winning device 65 is longer than the time it takes for the game ball launched by left hitting to reach the variable winning device 65. In other words, the path length of the game ball launched by right hitting to flow down is made longer than the path length of the game ball launched by left hitting to flow down, so that the flow time is longer when the game ball is hit from the right than when the game ball is hit from the left, but this is not limited to this. For example, a known crane means may be provided in place of the detouring device 700 in the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front. By configuring in this way, the period from when the game ball reaches the crane means to when it passes through the crane means can be extended, so that the flow time of the game ball launched by right hitting can be extended. Also, for example, instead of the detouring device 700, a device that stops the flow of the game ball for a predetermined period of time may be provided in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80, or the right side of the base plate 60 of the game board 13 may be made of a material with a higher friction coefficient (e.g., an elastic body such as rubber) than the left side, so that the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the right side of the game board 13 is easily slowed down by friction with the base plate 60. Also, instead of the detouring device 700, the arrangement of the nails may be different between the flow path on the left side and the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80, so that the time it takes for the game ball to flow down the right flow path to reach the lower area of the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are located) is longer than the time it takes for the game ball to flow down the left flow path.

In the tenth embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the gameplay when a left hit is made and the gameplay when a right hit is made in the display area HR15 and the display area HR16 during a jackpot, respectively, but this is not limited to this. For example, during a jackpot, only an image encouraging a left hit may be displayed, or only an image encouraging a right hit may be displayed. By displaying only an image encouraging a left hit, the jackpot can be ended in a short time, and a large number of prize balls can be acquired in a short time. This can increase the interest of the player. In addition, by displaying only an image encouraging a right hit, the number of wasted balls (game balls that do not enter the specific winning hole 65a and enter the out hole 66) can be reduced, and the player's profit in one jackpot can be increased.

In addition, when the launch direction is notified to the player during a jackpot, the notified launch direction may be different depending on the type of jackpot or the type of presentation executed during the jackpot. More specifically, for example, in the case of a probability jackpot, a lottery is used to determine whether a variable display presentation in which odd-numbered main symbols (probability jackpots) line up (presentation mode executed only when a probability jackpot is reached) or a variable display presentation in which even-numbered main symbols (normal symbols) line up (presentation mode executed without fail when a normal jackpot is reached) is executed. Then, in the case of a normal jackpot or a probability jackpot, and a presentation in which normal symbols line up is determined by lottery, a presentation is executed to notify the player of whether or not the jackpot is a probability jackpot. In this case, the player may be allowed to select a presentation mode for informing the player of whether or not the jackpot is a probability variable jackpot (for example, a presentation mode in which it is not known whether or not the jackpot is a probability variable jackpot until the final round of the jackpot, a presentation mode in which it is immediately notified at the end of the first round, or a presentation mode in which it is not known where in each round of the jackpot it is not notified) (i.e., an operating means such as a button or lever that the player can operate is provided, and the presentation mode corresponding to the operation content is determined), and the selection of the presentation mode may be executed in the first round. In order to secure a longer time for selecting the presentation mode, a configuration may be provided in which a right hit is suggested in the first round of a jackpot notified by a variable display presentation in which normal symbols are aligned (a jackpot notifying normal symbols). By configuring in this way, a longer period for the player to select the presentation mode can be secured, so that the player can more reliably select the presentation mode he or she prefers. On the other hand, if the player is not prompted to make any selection in the first round (for example, if a jackpot is announced by a variable display effect in which a certain probability symbol is aligned), the player may be informed to hit left during the jackpot. By configuring it in this way, the time until the jackpot ends can be shortened, and a large number of prize balls can be paid out in a relatively short period of time.

In addition, for example, when a normal jackpot or a special jackpot is obtained and a display in which normal symbols are aligned is determined by lottery, a display may be executed in the first round of the jackpot to notify the player whether or not the jackpot is a special jackpot, and within that display, a display (operation display) may be executed to prompt the player to operate the operation means. More specifically, for example, a push button that the player can press may be provided as the operation means, and a display may be executed to prompt the player to press the push button continuously within a predetermined period of time. Then, the display mode may be changed (for example, the indicator gauge fills up) depending on the number of times the push button is pressed, and the display mode may be changed to a specific display mode in conjunction with the pressing (for example, the gauge fills up to the maximum of the indicator), thereby notifying the player that the jackpot is a special jackpot. In this case, if a normal jackpot or a special jackpot occurs and the lottery determines that the normal symbols will line up (when the operation effect is executed), the round period of one round can be relatively long by configuring the notification to hit right in the first round of the jackpot, and the period for performing the operation effect can be secured longer. Therefore, the performance effect of the operation effect can be further improved. On the other hand, if a special jackpot occurs and the lottery determines that the special symbols will line up (when the operation effect is not executed), the period until the jackpot ends can be shortened by configuring the notification to hit left in the first round. Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in a relatively short time.

In addition, instead of allowing the player to select the presentation mode when informing the player of whether or not the game is a guaranteed jackpot, for example, in the first round, the type of music (audio presentation) to be played during the execution of the jackpot game may be selected, and at least a right hit may be notified during the period for selecting the music (music selection period). More specifically, in the first round of the jackpot, a music selection menu screen for selecting the type of music (audio presentation) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On this music selection menu screen, images corresponding to each of the multiple (e.g., 10) songs set in the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. Also, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be provided with an operating means such as a button that can be operated by the player instead of or in addition to the frame button 22, and one image displayed on the music selection menu screen is selectable according to the operation content of the operating means. For example, on the music selection menu screen, images corresponding to each song are arranged in a vertical row, and one image (e.g., the image displayed in the center) appears lit, and the other images appear unlit. In addition, the operation means is configured to have three types of buttons: a button corresponding to an upward movement (up button), a button corresponding to a downward movement (down button), and a button corresponding to a decision operation (decision button). Then, by detecting a press of the up button during the music selection period, the image that was lit up just before the press is switched to an unlit appearance, and the image arranged one position above is switched to a lit appearance (the image with the lit appearance moves up by one position). Similarly, when the down button is pressed, the image with the lit appearance moves down by one position. Furthermore, by detecting a press of the decision button during the music selection period, the music corresponding to the image that is lit up at the time of the press is determined as the music to be played during the current jackpot. In other words, it is set as the music to be played from the end of the first round to the end of the final round of the jackpot. By configuring in this way, the music of the player's preference can be played during the jackpot, so that the player's interest in the game during the jackpot game can be further improved.

In such a situation, if the left hit is notified in the first round of the jackpot, the first round will end relatively early, and the song selection period will also be short. Therefore, there is a possibility that the song selection period will end before the player selects a favorite song by operating the up button and the down button and sets the playback by pressing the decision button. In contrast, by configuring the right hit to be notified during the first round (song selection period) of a jackpot in which a song selection period is set (a jackpot in which the execution of the performance to select a song is decided), the round period of the first round can be made relatively long, so that a longer period can be secured for the player to search for a favorite song from the song selection menu screen (by operating the up button or the down button so that the corresponding image appears to be lit) and decide (by pressing the decision button). This allows the player to select a favorite song reliably without rushing, thereby improving the convenience of the player when selecting a song. In addition, by configuring the system to notify the player of a left hit during the first round of a jackpot that does not have a music selection period (a jackpot that executes a normal jackpot performance), it is possible to prevent the game from dragging on and to complete the jackpot game quickly. Therefore, the player can be notified of the appropriate firing direction depending on the performance mode executed during the jackpot.

Furthermore, in the case where an effect (operation effect) that prompts the player to operate the operation means, such as setting a song selection period in the first round, is executed at a predetermined rate in the case of a jackpot, the launch direction notified in the first round may be varied according to the player's past operation status (operation history). More specifically, for example, information (operation history) on whether or not the player operated the operation means in the first round of a jackpot in which an operation effect is set may be stored. Then, when a jackpot in which an operation effect is set starts, if the player has not operated the operation means over a predetermined number of past jackpots (for example, five times) in which an operation effect is set, based on the stored past operation history, a configuration may be adopted in which a left hit is notified, whereas a right hit is notified if the player has operated within the predetermined number of jackpots. That is, for players who tend not to perform operations even when an operation presentation is being executed, a left hit is notified to end the first round of the jackpot earlier, realizing gameplay that allows a large number of prize balls to be obtained in a short period of time, while for players who tend to perform operations actively during the operation presentation, a right hit is notified to lengthen the execution period of the operation presentation, ensuring time for the player to perform sufficient operations on the operating means during the operation presentation. Thus, gameplay that suits the player's tendencies can be realized.

In the tenth embodiment, the right hand hit is slightly more advantageous in terms of the prize balls by configuring the board so that the balls will enter the specific winning hole 65a more frequently than the left hand hit, but the configuration for giving the right hand hit an advantage in terms of the prize balls is not limited to this. For example, instead of making the rate at which game balls shot by right hand hits and game balls shot by left hand hits enter the specific winning hole 65a the same, a general winning hole with a relatively large number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) may be provided to the right of the specific winning hole 65 (i.e., a position where game balls shot by left hand hits have difficulty entering and game balls shot by right hand hits can enter). That is, in a state where the specific winning hole 65a is open, a game ball hit from the left basically enters the specific winning hole 65a, and some game balls cannot enter the specific winning hole 65a and flow down to the out hole 66, while a game ball hit from the right basically enters the specific winning hole 65a and some game balls enter the general winning hole. By configuring in this way, when a right hit is performed, the prize balls obtained by entering the general winning hole are awarded in addition to the prize balls for the jackpot (i.e., the prize balls obtained by the game ball entering the specific winning hole 65a), so that a right hit during a jackpot can be advantageous in terms of prize balls. Therefore, a player who wants to win more prize balls can be made to hit from the right, knowing that the jackpot period will be longer. On the other hand, for players who want to win the jackpot in a shorter period of time, they can be made to hit left during the jackpot, provided they are prepared to be at a slight disadvantage in terms of the winning ball compared to hitting right.

In the tenth embodiment, in the case of a jackpot, the characteristics of a right hit and the characteristics of a left hit are simply displayed in the display areas HR15 and HR16 (see FIG. 126), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a detection means such as a sensor capable of detecting whether a ball is hit from the right or left may be provided at a predetermined location of the game board 13 (for example, in the middle of the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80 and the flow path on the right side), and the direction in which the player is shooting the game ball may be determined from the detection result by the detection means. Then, the performance during the jackpot may be changed according to the determined shooting direction. For example, when a right hit is detected, the display area HR15 may be turned off and the display area HR16 may be turned on, while when a left hit is detected, the display area HR15 may be turned on and the display area HR16 may be turned off. By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand what kind of gameplay will be achieved depending on the shooting direction selected by the player.

Eleventh Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 127 to Fig. 132. In the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment described above, the path length of each flow path and the flow direction of the game ball are configured so that the time required for the game ball to reach the lower area of the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entry port 64 and the variable winning device 65 are located) is longer when the game ball flows down the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 than when the game ball flows down the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display unit 80. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning port 65a is open (i.e., during the execution of a jackpot game), the game board 13 is adopted with a board configuration in which the game ball is more likely to win (enter) the specific winning port 65a when the game ball is shot by hitting from the right than when the game ball is shot by hitting from the left.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, in addition to the variable winning device 65, a right variable winning device 659 is provided as a variable winning device that is opened and closed during a jackpot. The right variable winning port 659a of this right variable winning device 659 is set to an open state in which a ball can enter during the first round of the jackpot, and similar to the left variable winning port 655La and the right variable winning port 655Ra in the seventh embodiment described above, when a game ball enters during a jackpot, a variable winning state with a special pattern is granted after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened from the second round onwards of the jackpot, and only a predetermined number of prize balls are granted when a game ball enters. In addition, the right probability winning hole 659a is located at a position where the game ball can reach whether the ball is hit from the left or the right, and although details will be described later, if the ball is hit from the left in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the probability winning device 659 while the right probability winning hole 659a is in a ball-entering state will increase, but the rate at which the game balls that reach the right probability winning hole 659a will be in the right probability winning hole 659a will be low. On the other hand, if the ball is hit from the right in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the probability winning device 659 while the right probability winning hole 659a is in a ball-entering state will decrease, but the rate at which the game balls that reach the right probability winning hole 659a will be in the right probability winning hole 659a will be high. This allows the gameplay characteristics in the first round of a jackpot to differ depending on the direction in which the game ball is launched, allowing each player to choose the gameplay characteristics they prefer (either a gameplay characteristic in which the rate at which the ball enters the right special prize slot 659a is low but the number of game balls that reach it is high, or a gameplay characteristic in which the number of balls that reach it is low but the rate at which the balls enter is high).

The pachinko machine 10 in this 11th embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the 10th embodiment in that the game board 13 has a partially changed board configuration, the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 have a partially changed configuration, and the control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 have been changed to be the same as the various control processes in the seventh embodiment. The other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those in the pachinko machine 10 in the 10th embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 10th embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 in this eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a front view of the game board 13 in this eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 127, the game board 13 in this eleventh embodiment differs from the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 124) in that a curved member 810 is provided instead of the curved member 800 provided on the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 124). As shown in FIG. 127, a special chance winning device 659 is located on part of the slope of this curved member 810.

The right special probability winning device 659 is provided with a horizontally long rectangular right special probability winning port 659a in the approximate center. This right special probability winning port 659a is normally closed by an opening and closing door 659f1 (i.e., it is set to a state where it is difficult for a ball to enter), and when the first round of the jackpot starts, the opening and closing door 659f1 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern for each type of jackpot. In other words, in the first round of the jackpot, a state where it is possible for a ball to enter the right special probability winning port 659a and a state where it is difficult for a ball to enter are switched in a specific switching pattern. Then, when a game ball enters the right special probability winning port 659a while the opening and closing door 659f1 is open (while it is possible for a ball to enter the right special probability winning port 659a), the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to a special pattern special probability winning state and a normal pattern time-saving state (the special probability winning flag 203e is set to ON when the jackpot ends). In contrast, if no ball enters the right variable probability winning hole 659a even once during one jackpot, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a low probability state for special symbols and a time-saving state for normal symbols (the value of the time-saving counter 203f is set to 100). In other words, it is more advantageous for the player if a ball enters the right variable probability winning hole 659a than if no ball enters the right variable probability winning hole 659a even once during a jackpot (the game state after the jackpot ends is more advantageous).

As shown in FIG. 127, the right variable probability winning port 659a is arranged along a curved path on the upper surface of the curved member 810, so that the game ball that passes through the detouring device 700 and falls into the curved member 810 can easily reach the right variable probability winning port 659a by rolling along the upper surface of the curved member 810. In addition, as shown in FIG. 127, the left end of the upper surface of the curved member 810 and the left end of the right variable probability winning port 659a are arranged on approximately the same horizontal plane. In addition, the curved member 820 provided below the left flow path of the game board 13 is configured so that the height of the right end on its upper surface is higher than the height of the left end under the conditions of the curved member 810. And, between the curved member 820 and the curved member 810, as shown in FIG. 127, a plurality of nails are arranged to form a downward slope from the curved member 820 to the curved member 810. With these configurations, when a game ball that is hit from the left and passes through the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80 reaches the upper surface of the curved member 820, it rolls on the upper surface of the curved member 820 and reaches the right end of the curved member 820. Then, the game ball that is shot from the right end of the curved member 820 to the right as viewed from the front flows down to the lower right as viewed from the front while interfering with the nails planted between the curved member 820 and the curved member 810, and reaches the left end of the curved member 810. A game ball that reaches the upper surface of the curved member 810 from the left side of the curved member 810 can easily reach the right special prize winning port 659a by rolling on the upper surface of the curved member 810 to the right as viewed from the front. Therefore, in the first round of a jackpot, the game ball can be made to reach the special prize winning device 659 whether it is hit from the right or left. Therefore, in the first round of a jackpot, the game ball can be launched in a desired direction.

Next, the structure of the special chance winning device 659 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128(a) is a front perspective view of the special chance winning device 659 in a state where the opening and closing door 659f1 of the special chance winning device 659 is closed (a state where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the right special chance winning port 659a), and FIG. 128(b) is a front perspective view of the special chance winning device 659 in a state where the opening and closing door 659f1 of the special chance winning device 659 is in the middle of switching from a closed state to an open state (a state where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the right special chance winning port 659a, switching to a state where it is possible).

As shown in FIG. 128(a), when the right special prize winning port 659a is closed, the left end of the opening and closing door 659f1 that closes the right special prize winning port 659a and the part of the upper surface of the curved member 810 to the left of the special prize winning device 659 (left floor surface 810b) are smoothly connected with almost no step. On the other hand, a protrusion 659g1 is provided on the right end of the opening and closing door 659f1 to prevent a game ball rolling from the left side when viewed from the front from passing through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 659f1 and rolling to the right. Since this protrusion 659g1 protrudes from the upper surface of the opening and closing door 659f1, the game ball rolling from the left side of the opening and closing door 659f1 on the opening and closing door 659f1 is prevented from rolling by the protrusion 659g1 and stops rolling. As shown in FIG. 128(a), the upper surface of the opening and closing door 659f1 is inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front, so the game ball prevented from rolling by the convex part 659g1 flows down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 659f1 toward the lower left direction when viewed from the front. Then, it rolls leftward on the left floor surface 810b when viewed from the front, and falls toward the outlet 66 from the left end of the curved member 810. Note that the game ball that flows down from the right side of the probability winning device 659 (rolling along the right floor surface 810a) has a stronger flowing force due to the inclination of the right floor surface 810, so when the opening and closing door 659f1 is closed, it can flow down to the outlet 66 by climbing over the convex part 659g1. In this way, by positioning the special prize winning device 659 at an angle, it is possible to prevent game balls from accumulating at the top of the opening and closing door 659f1 while the opening and closing door 659f1 is closed, and to allow them to flow down to the outlet 66.

128(b), when the right special prize winning port 659a is switched to a state in which a ball can enter during the first round of a jackpot, the door 659f1 that was blocking the top of the right special prize winning port 659a slides leftward as viewed from the front, opening the door 659f1. As shown in FIG. 128(b), while the door 659f1 is in the process of opening, a game ball rolling from the right side as viewed from the front can enter the right special prize winning port 659a, but a game ball rolling from the left side as viewed from the front is blocked by the protruding portion 659g1 and has difficulty entering the right specific prize winning port 659. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 129, but when the opening and closing door 659f1 is completely opened, the top end of the protruding portion 659g1 and the left floor surface 810b are at approximately the same height (they are connected almost smoothly), so that a game ball rolling from the left side relative to the special chance winning device 659 can also pass through the protruding portion 659g1 and enter the right special chance winning port 659a.

Next, referring to FIG. 129, the flow direction of the game ball that reaches the probability winning device 659 when the opening and closing door 659f1 of the probability winning device 659 is closed and when it is open will be described. First, FIG. 129(a) is a cross-sectional view of the probability winning device 659 and the curved member 810 when the opening and closing door 659f1 is fully open. As shown in FIG. 129(a), when the opening and closing door 659f1 is fully open, the height of the upper end of the convex part 659g1 provided at the right end of the opening and closing door 659f1 and the left floor surface 810b are approximately the same, so that the game ball that has rolled from the left direction when viewed from the front relative to the probability winning device 659 can easily pass through the convex part 659g1. In other words, the ball can easily enter (win) the right probability winning port 659a without being obstructed by the convex part 659g1. In addition, a game ball that rolls toward the right side of the probability bonus winning device 659 (flows down along the right floor surface 810a) when viewed from the front can easily enter (win) the right probability bonus winning port 659a because there is nothing to prevent the ball from entering (winning) the right probability bonus winning port 659a.

Figure 129 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the probability variable prize winning device 659 and the curved member 810 when the opening and closing door 659f1 is completely closed. As shown in Figure 129 (b), when the opening and closing door 659f1 is closed, the right probability variable prize winning port 659a is blocked by the opening and closing door 659f1, making it impossible for the game ball to enter. In this state, the game ball rolling from the left direction when viewed from the front toward the probability variable prize winning device 659 is weakened by the gravity acting in a downward direction to the left due to the inclination of the opening and closing door 659f1 that rises in the upper right direction. In addition, the right end of the door 659f1 has a protrusion 659g1 that protrudes higher than the other parts of the door 659f1, so even if the momentum of the rolling to the right is strong and the door 659f1 is able to climb almost all the way up, the protrusion 659g1 will prevent the door from reaching the right floor surface 810a. Therefore, the door 659f1 will flow down and to the left along the slope of the door 659f1 and fall from the left end of the curved member 810 toward the outlet 66.

On the other hand, the game ball rolling from the right direction as viewed from the front toward the special prize winning device 659 is given sufficient momentum to overcome the protruding portion 659g1 due to the inclination of the right floor surface 810a, so it can overcome the protruding portion 659g1 and pass through the opening and closing door 659f1. This allows the ball to fall from the left end of the curved member 810 toward the outlet 66.

Next, referring to FIG. 130 and FIG. 131, the opening pattern of the opening and closing door 659f1 (right probability winning hole 659a) in the first round of the jackpot will be described. Here, in this eleventh embodiment, in the first round of the jackpot, a jackpot type (jackpot A11) in which the right probability winning hole 659a is set to a state in which a ball can be entered for a relatively long period of time, and a jackpot type (jackpot B11) in which a ball can be entered for a relatively short period of time are provided. If the ball-entering state becomes longer, there are more opportunities to enter the game ball into the right probability winning hole 659a, so that the game state after the jackpot ends is more likely to be set to a favorable state (a probability winning state of a special pattern and a time-saving state of a normal pattern). Therefore, it can be said that the jackpot A11 is a jackpot type that is more favorable for the player (the game state after the jackpot ends is more likely to be favorable) than the jackpot B11. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the opening pattern of the right special bonus winning port 659a set in the first round of the jackpot A11 will be referred to as the opening pattern that allows for a V win, and the opening pattern of the right special bonus winning port 659a set in the first round of the jackpot B11 will be referred to as the opening pattern that makes it difficult to win a V win.

Figure 130 (a) is a diagram showing the change over time in the state of the right variable probability winning port 659a when a V-winning opening pattern (an opening pattern set in the first round of the big win A11) is set. When a V-winning opening pattern is set, the right variable probability winning port 659a is first kept closed for 1.5 seconds from the start of the first round. Then, at the point where 1.5 seconds have elapsed, the right variable probability winning port 659a is switched from the closed state to the open state. As shown in Figure 130 (a), it takes 0.3 seconds from the start of the opening operation of the right variable probability winning port 659a until the right variable probability winning port 659a is completely opened. Therefore, it is completely opened at the point where 1.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round. This completely open state continues for 0.2 seconds, and the closing operation of the right variable probability winning port 659a is started at the point where 0.2 seconds have elapsed (i.e., 2.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round). This closing operation, like the opening operation, is completed in 0.3 seconds (it is completely closed 2.3 seconds after the start of the first round). Then, when the right special prize winning port 659a is completely closed, the right special prize winning port 659a remains closed for 0.5 seconds. Then, when 0.5 seconds have passed (i.e., when 2.8 seconds have passed from the start of the first round), the right special prize winning port 659a is opened again. In this opening operation, the same operation as the first opening operation is repeated. That is, it is completely opened over 0.3 seconds, the open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds, and then closed over 0.3 seconds.

After that, a completely closed state for 0.5 seconds and an opening action for 0.8 seconds (a series of actions in which the right variable winning port 659a is completely opened for 0.3 seconds, the open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds, and then closed for 0.3 seconds) are repeated. With this repeated action, in the opening pattern in which a V winning is possible, the opening action for 0.8 seconds is repeated six times in the first round of the jackpot. Also, as shown in FIG. 130(a), the final opening and closing action is performed after 8.0 seconds have elapsed since the start of the first round. Here, in this eleventh embodiment, as in the tenth embodiment, a detouring device 700 for lengthening the flow time of the game ball is arranged in the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80. The time it takes for the game ball hit to the right to pass through the detouring device 700 and reach the area below the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the special winning device 659 are arranged) is 7 to 8 seconds, as in the fifth embodiment. Therefore, if a right hit is started in the first round of a big win, the game ball will reach the special winning device 659 after at least 7 seconds from the start of the round. Therefore, when a right hit is performed, the game ball will reach the special winning device 659 around the start of the last opening period in the opening pattern where a V win is possible (8 seconds have passed since the start of the first round). Therefore, if a right hit is performed in the first round, it is possible to make the game ball enter the right special winning port 659a only in the last opening period out of the six opening periods.

On the other hand, if you continue to hit left in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball will reach the lower area of the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the special winning device 659, etc. are arranged) in about 1 to 2 seconds, so if you hit left immediately at the start of the first round, you can make the game ball reach the specific winning port 650a from the first opening period. In other words, you can get up to six opportunities to make the ball enter the right special winning port 659a. However, as mentioned above, the game ball that rolls from the left side toward the right special winning port 659a has a shorter period in which it can enter the right special winning port 659a during one opening period (0.8 seconds from the start of opening to complete closure) compared to the game ball that rolls from the right side. Furthermore, when you hit left, more game balls cannot reach the special winning device 659 compared to when you hit right. That is, by slipping through the nails planted between the curved member 820 and the curved member 810, the game ball may not reach the curved member 810 and enter the out hole 66, or may enter the first ball entry hole 64. Therefore, when an opening pattern that allows V entry is set, by hitting from the left in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the right probability winning hole 659a while it is open is large, but the rate of ball entry is low and there are many wasted balls. On the other hand, when hitting from the right in the first round of a jackpot, the number of game balls that reach the right probability winning hole 659a while it is open is small, but the rate of ball entry is high. Therefore, the game play of the first round can be changed according to the launch direction of the game ball, so that the interest of the player in the first round of a jackpot can be improved. The opening period and board configuration are set so that the chances of the game ball entering the jackpot during one round are roughly the same (for example, about 80%) whether the first round of the jackpot is hit from the right or the left.

Figure 130 (b) is a diagram showing the change over time in the state of the right variable probability winning port 659a when an opening pattern in which a V winning is difficult (an opening pattern set in the first round of the jackpot B11) is set. When an opening pattern in which a V winning is difficult is set, as shown in Figure 130 (b), the right variable probability winning port 659a opens at the same time as the start of the first round, and closes immediately after it is completely opened. Therefore, whether a left hit is made or a right hit is made, it is extremely difficult to make a game ball enter the right variable probability winning port 659a while it is open (the possibility of a game ball entering during one round is almost 0%). Therefore, when a jackpot is won, the player can expect that the jackpot type will be jackpot A11 (an opening pattern in which a V winning is possible is set).

Figure 131 is a diagram showing in more detail the state of the opening door 659f1 during one opening period when an opening pattern that allows V winning is set. As shown in Figure 131, the upper part of the right special winning opening 659a is blocked by the opening door 659f1 until the opening operation is started, so that the game ball cannot enter the right special winning opening 659a (see Figure 131 (a)). Then, when the opening and closing door 659f1 starts to open, the opening and closing door 659f1 slides leftward as viewed from the front, and is stored inside the curved member 810. When 0.1 seconds have passed since the start of the opening operation, the width of the part of the right special winning opening 659a that is not blocked by the opening and closing door 659f1 at the top becomes the width of one game ball or more (see Figure 131 (b)). As a result, the game ball rolling from the right direction can enter the right special winning opening 659a. On the other hand, the game ball rolling from the left direction is prevented from entering the right variable prize winning port 659a by the inclination upward to the upper right direction formed by the part of the opening and closing door 659f1 that is not stored inside the curved member 810 and the convex part 659g1. In other words, the game ball rolling from the left side cannot enter the right variable prize winning port 659a, just like when the opening and closing door 659f1 is completely closed. This state in which the game ball rolling from the right side can enter the right variable prize winning port 659a and the game ball rolling from the left side cannot enter continues for 0.1 seconds, and when 0.1 seconds have passed (i.e., when 0.2 seconds have passed from the start of the opening operation), most of the opening and closing door 659f1 is stored inside the curved surface 810 (the width between the convex portion 659g1 and the right end of the left floor surface 810b is less than one game ball), so that the game ball that has reached the right end of the left floor surface 810b can pass directly above the convex portion 659g1 without passing through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 659f1 (see FIG. 131(c)). Therefore, even for the game ball rolling from the left side when viewed from the front of the variable prize winning device 659, it can pass through the convex portion 659g1 and enter the right variable prize winning port 659a. That is, both game balls rolling from the right (game balls launched by hitting with the right) and game balls rolling from the left (game balls launched by hitting with the left) can enter the right special prize opening 659a. From then on, until the opening and closing door 659f1 is completely opened, game balls rolling from both directions (both the right and left) can enter the right special prize opening 659a.

As shown in FIG. 131, when 0.3 seconds have elapsed since the opening operation started, the opening/closing door 659f1 is completely stored inside the curved member 810, and only the convex portion 659g1 is exposed to the outside (the opening/closing door 659f1 is completely open) (see FIG. 131(d)). This completely open state continues for 0.2 seconds as described above, and when 0.2 seconds have elapsed, the closing operation starts. This closing operation is performed in the same time (i.e., 0.3 seconds) as the opening operation and the reverse operation. Therefore, the period during which the game ball can enter the probability winning device 659a from the start of the opening operation until the opening/closing door 659f1 is closed again is 0.6 seconds from 0.1 seconds after the start of the opening operation to 0.1 seconds before the opening/closing door 659f1 is completely closed when hitting from the right. On the other hand, when hitting from the left, the period is 0.4 seconds from 0.2 seconds after the opening operation begins until 0.2 seconds before the opening/closing door 659f1 is completely closed. In other words, the percentage of game balls that reach the special prize winning device 659 and enter the prize winning device is higher when hitting from the right than when hitting from the left.

In this way, in the eleventh embodiment, the period during which the game ball is available for the right variable prize winning port 659a is variable depending on whether the game ball arrives from the right side or the left side of the variable prize winning device 659. As a result, when the game ball arrives from the right side of the variable prize winning device 659, it is more likely that the ball will enter the right variable prize winning port 659a. Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, as described above, more game balls reach the variable prize winning device 659 in the first round of the jackpot when the player hits from the left than when the player hits from the right. Therefore, when the player hits from the left in the first round of the jackpot, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right variable prize winning port 659a, but a gameplay in which there are many opportunities to enter the ball can be realized, while when the player hits from the right, it is easy for the game ball to enter the left variable prize winning port 659a, but a gameplay in which there are few opportunities to enter the ball can be realized. This allows the gameplay in the first round of a jackpot to be changed depending on the direction in which the game ball is launched, which can increase the player's interest in the game in the first round.

In the eleventh embodiment, a protrusion 659g1 is provided on the right end of the door 659f1 to make the period during which a game ball rolling from the left side can enter the right special prize opening 659a shorter than the period during which a game ball rolling from the right side can enter, but it is not necessary to provide the protrusion 659g1. Even if the protrusion 659g1 is removed, the upward slope formed by the door 659f1 to the upper right can prevent a game ball rolling from the left side from entering the right special prize opening 659a during the opening operation of the door 659f1 (for example, the arrangement shown in FIG. 131(b)).

Next, referring to FIG. 132, the display mode in the first round of the jackpot A11 (a jackpot in which an opening pattern that allows V winning is set) in this eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 132 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first round of the jackpot A11. As shown in FIG. 132, when the first round of the jackpot A11 starts, the text "Left-handed hit multiple times to win mode", the text "Many hits, but it's hard to get into the V!", and an image imitating a left-facing arrow are displayed in the display area HR15 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that hitting from the left will allow more game balls to reach the probability winning device 659, while making it more difficult for the game ball to enter the right probability winning port 659a (making it harder to win the V).

As shown in FIG. 132, the text "Hit to the right for one-hit kill mode," the text "The number of hits is low, but it's easy to get a V!", and an image resembling an arrow pointing to the right are displayed in the display area HR16. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that, while hitting to the right will result in fewer game balls reaching the special chance winning device 659, it will be easier for game balls to enter the right special chance winning port 659a (easier to win a V).

As shown in FIG. 132, the display area HR17 in the third symbol display device 81 displays an image that resembles the special chance winning device 659 and the curved member 810. The right special chance winning device 659 is displayed on the front side as viewed from the front with a decoration that resembles the letter "V", and the upper left side of the display area HR17 as viewed from the front displays a display area HR20 with the words "Aim for the V!!" displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that by getting the game ball to enter the special chance winning device 659 decorated with the letter "V", a favorable result will be achieved for the player (the special chance winning state will be reached after the big win).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 132, in the display area HR17, an image of an arrow pointing in the direction of the probability winning device 659 is displayed on the left side as viewed from the front and on the upper right side as viewed from the front of the image simulating the probability winning device 659. The image of the arrow displayed on the left side as viewed from the front of the image simulating the probability winning device 659 has the words "If you hit it many times, you will win," and the image of the arrow displayed on the upper right side as viewed from the front has the words "One hit kill." These display contents allow the player to easily understand that when the player hits left according to the display contents of the display area HR15 (selecting the mode where you hit it many times and you will win), the game ball will roll from the left direction as viewed from the front toward the right probability winning device 659. Also, when the player hits right according to the display contents of the display area HR16 (selecting the one hit kill mode), the player can easily understand that the game ball will roll from the upper right direction as viewed from the front toward the right probability winning device 659. This allows the player to easily understand which direction to look in to see if the game ball will enter the right special prize slot 659a.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment is configured to provide two types of variable winning devices, the variable winning device 65 and the right special winning device 659, which are variable winning devices that provide a bonus (prize ball) to the player when a game ball enters the device during a jackpot game (special game state). The right special winning port 659a of the right special winning device 659 is set to an open state that allows balls to enter during the first round of the jackpot, and when a game ball enters the device during the jackpot, in addition to the prize balls, a special pattern special special state is provided after the jackpot ends. Therefore, whether or not a game ball enters the right special winning port 659a determines whether or not the game state after the jackpot is advantageous to the player, so the player can play the game while paying attention to whether or not a game ball enters the right special winning port 659a during the first round of the jackpot.

The right special chance winning port 659a is located in a position where the game ball can reach whether the player hits from the left or the right, and if the player continues hitting from the left in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the right special chance winning device 659 while the right special chance winning port 659a is in a ball-ready state will increase, but the rate at which the game balls that reach the right special chance winning port 659a enter will be low. On the other hand, if the player continues hitting from the right in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the right special chance winning device 659 while the right special chance winning port 659a is in a ball-ready state will decrease, but the rate at which the game balls that reach the right special chance winning port 659a enter will be high. That is, the number of game balls that reach the right probability winning device 659 during a predetermined period (the period until the opening pattern of one round is completed) (the number of opportunities to win the right probability winning port 659a) is configured to be more advantageous for left-handed hits than for right-handed hits. Also, the ease of ball entry into the right probability winning device 659 (ball entry rate) is configured to be more advantageous for right-handed hits than for left-handed hits. As a result, the playability in the first round of a jackpot can be made different depending on the direction in which the game ball is launched, so that each player can select their preferred playability (either a playability in which the ball entry rate into the right probability winning port 659a is low but the number of game balls that reach it is high, or a playability in which the number of balls that reach it is low but the ball entry rate is high). Therefore, playability that meets the tastes of more players can be realized, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, during the specified period (first round) of the jackpot, right-handed hits are more advantageous in terms of ball entry rate compared to left-handed hits (the game balls that reach the right-handed winning device 659 are more likely to enter the right-handed winning port 659a), while left-handed hits are more advantageous in terms of the number of balls reached compared to right-handed hits (more game balls are more likely to reach the right-handed winning device 659). This realizes a game that allows the player to choose between right-handed hits and left-handed hits by differentiating the advantages and disadvantages of right-handed hits and left-handed hits, but the difference in advantage between right-handed hits and left-handed hits is not limited to this. For example, a specific winning hole may be provided at a position where the game ball is easy to enter when the player hits from the left (difficult to enter when the player hits from the right), with a short opening time (for example, maximum 1 second) but many prize balls awarded when the game ball enters (for example, 15 balls per entry), and a specific winning hole may be provided at a position where the game ball is easy to enter when the player hits from the right (difficult to enter when the player hits from the left), with a long opening time (for example, maximum 5 seconds) but few prize balls awarded (for example, 3 balls per entry). The specific winning hole to be opened may be alternately switched for each round, and the interval between rounds may be extremely short (for example, 0.1 seconds). By configuring in this way, if the player continues to hit from the left during a jackpot, the number of game balls that enter the specific winning hole is likely to be small, but a large number of prize balls are awarded when the ball enters the specific winning hole. On the other hand, if the player continues to hit the right side during a big win, more game balls are likely to enter the specific winning hole, but fewer prize balls are given when the ball enters the specific winning hole. Therefore, the player can select the game play that he/she likes and play the game. Also, for example, the variable winning device 65 is provided at a position where the game ball is likely to enter when the player hits the left side (it is difficult to enter when the player hits the right side), and the right variable winning device 659 is provided at a position where the game ball is likely to enter when the player hits the right side (it is difficult to enter when the player hits the left side), and the period during which the right variable winning device 659 is opened during one big win is shorter than the period during which the variable winning device 65 is opened. That is, if the player continues to hit the right side in one big win, the ball will enter the right special winning port 659a, and the probability of the special winning state being granted after the big win will increase, while the number of prize balls obtained will decrease. If the player continues to hit the left side, many game balls will enter the specific winning port 65a, making it possible to obtain a large number of prize balls, while it will become difficult to make the ball enter the right special winning port 659a, making the game state after the big win unfavorable. Even in this configuration, the advantage can be made different for each launch direction during the big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In this case, the positional relationship between the variable winning device 65 (a variable winning device in which only prize balls are awarded for balls entering) and the right special winning device 659 (a variable winning device in which prize balls are awarded for balls entering and a special winning state is also awarded) may be reversed. In addition, the setting of the side (element) in which the right side is more advantageous and the side (element) in which the left side is more advantageous is not limited to the first round of the big win. For example, during normal play, a configuration may be provided in which a left hit is more advantageous than a right hit, and a right hit is more advantageous than a left hit. More specifically, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a left ball entry port into which a game ball shot by a left hit can enter, and a right ball entry port into which a game ball shot by a right hit can enter, and a configuration may be configured in which a lottery for a special pattern is executed when a game ball enters either ball entry port. In addition, in a time-saving state of a normal pattern, a right hit aimed at the right ball entry port is more advantageous in terms of game efficiency than a left hit, while a left hit is less advantageous in terms of game efficiency than a right hit, but when a jackpot is won, a jackpot type (a type that is more advantageous in terms of the number of rounds or the continuation rate of an advantageous state) that is more advantageous than a right hit is more likely to be selected.

In the eleventh embodiment, in a predetermined period (first round) of a jackpot, when a right hit is made, the game ball that reaches the right probability winning device 659 is more likely to enter the right probability winning port 659a than when a left hit is made, while when a left hit is made, more game balls are more likely to reach the right probability winning device 659 than when a right hit is made. In addition to this, a sensor or the like capable of detecting the launch direction of the game ball in the first round of a jackpot may be provided on the game board 13. Then, a corresponding performance may be executed according to the launch direction detected by the sensor. More specifically, for example, when a left hit is detected, the display mode of the first round (see FIG. 132) may be set to a display mode in which the display area HR15 is lit and the display area HR16 is turned off, while when a right hit is detected, the display mode in which the display area HR16 is lit and the display area HR15 is turned off may be set. This configuration allows players to more easily understand the gameplay they have selected.

In the eleventh embodiment, the opening and closing door 659f1 of the right probability winning device 659 is configured to be opened by sliding leftward when viewed from the front, so that the period during which a game ball rolling from the right side of the right probability winning device 659 can enter is longer than the period during which a game ball rolling from the left side can enter the right probability winning device 659, but the shape and operation of the opening and closing door 659f1 are not limited to this. For example, the opening and closing door 659f1 may be configured to open from the front side when viewed from the front toward the back side. The length of the opening and closing door 659f1 on the right front side when viewed from the front may be shorter than the length of the left front side when viewed from the front by one game ball or more. That is, when the opening and closing door 659f1 is being stored toward the back side when viewed from the front, the right side of the opening and closing door 659f1 can receive game balls earlier than the left side, and when the opening and closing door 659f1 is closed, when the opening and closing door 659f1 protrudes forward in front of the front, the left side of the opening and closing door 659f1 can receive game balls earlier. Even when configured in this way, as in the eleventh embodiment described above, it can be configured so that the period during which game balls rolling from the right side into the right special winning device 659 can receive game balls is longer than the period during which game balls rolling from the left side can receive game balls.

In the eleventh embodiment, the board configuration is configured to provide a surface where left-handed hits are physically more advantageous than right-handed hits (i.e., the rate at which game balls that reach the right-handed winning device 659 enter the right-handed winning port 659a) and a surface where right-handed hits are more advantageous than left-handed hits (i.e., the number of game balls that can reach the right-handed winning device 659 during one round), but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be realized by control. More specifically, for example, the right-handed winning port 659a is provided at a position where the arrival rate of game balls is the same whether the player hits right or left. Then, in the first round of a jackpot, it may be configured to detect whether the player hits right or left, and the opening pattern may be different when it is detected that the player hits right and when it is detected that the player hits left. That is, when a right hit is detected, the right probability variation winning port 659a is opened less frequently, but the opening period of each opening is relatively long, and when a left hit is detected, the right probability variation winning port 659a is opened more frequently, but the opening period of each opening is relatively short, and the right probability variation winning port 659a may be opened in such a pattern. Also, the player may select the playability of the jackpot by operating an operating means such as a button, rather than the direction in which the game ball is launched.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 139 to 151. In the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment described above, two specific winning holes (left specific winning hole 650La, right specific winning hole 650Ra) in which a ball can enter during a big win game are arranged opposite each other, and movable members corresponding to each specific winning hole are arranged between the specific winning holes, and the corresponding movable members are protruded to form a downward inclination toward the corresponding specific winning hole.

In contrast to this, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 12th embodiment, instead of the left specific winning port 650La, a left second winning port 640L having the same performance as the first winning port 64 is provided. In other words, the left second winning port 640L and the right specific winning port 650Ra are arranged opposite each other. When a normal symbol is hit, the electric device 640La provided in place of the movable member 650Lb in the sixth embodiment is caused to protrude, forming a downward slope toward the left second winning port 640L.

In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, when a normal pattern is hit at a specific timing during the execution of a jackpot game, a special state is formed in which it is possible to win more prize balls than usual in the jackpot game. More specifically, in each round of the jackpot, when eight or nine game balls enter the right specific winning port 650Ra (i.e., when the remaining number of balls entering is two or less compared to the maximum number of winning balls of 10 balls in each round), a normal pattern is hit, and when the electric role 640La moves to the protruding position, both the electric role 640La and the movable member 650Rb are protruding during the opening period (2 seconds) based on the normal pattern hit, and instead of guiding the game ball to either the right specific winning port 650Ra or the left second ball entrance port 640L, it becomes possible to store (accumulate) the game ball around the intersection position of the electric role 640La and the movable member 650Rb. When the electric device 640La is closed in this state (i.e., when the opening period based on a winning normal symbol has elapsed), the stored (accumulated) game balls are guided by the movable member 650Rb to the right specific winning opening 650Ra, making it possible to have more game balls enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra than the number specified for that round.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 12th embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the 6th embodiment in that the left second ball entrance 640L is provided instead of the left specific winning entrance 650La, that the electric role 640La is provided instead of the movable member 650Lb, that the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 6th embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 6th embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 139, the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 12th embodiment will be described. FIG. 139 is a front view of the game board 13 in the 12th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 139, in the 12th embodiment, the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 provided in the left flow path of the variable display unit 80 in the 6th embodiment is deleted, and the appearance of the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 provided in the right flow path is changed from the 6th embodiment. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 139, it is changed to a state in which a decoration imitating the character "GO" is applied. In addition, in the game board 13 in the 12th embodiment, a left second ball entry port 640L is provided instead of the left specific winning port 650La in the 6th embodiment. Another difference is that the electric device 64 attached to the first ball entrance 64 has been removed, and an electric device 640La has been installed instead of the movable member 650Lb. When a normal symbol is hit, this electric device 640La is positioned in a protruding position for a predetermined period of time (2 seconds x 1 time, or 2 seconds x 2 times), creating a state in which a game ball that has reached a specific area (the area below the first ball entrance 64) can easily enter the left second ball entrance 640L.

In the twelfth embodiment, when the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set (time-saving game state, probability variable game state) is reached, an image (right-hit notification image) for notifying the player that a game will be played by right-hitting is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In the time-saving state of the normal pattern (time-saving game state, probability variable game state), the right-hit notification image is displayed because, due to the board configuration, it takes a shorter time for a game ball that is hit to the right and reaches a specific area to enter the left second ball entrance 640L than a game ball that is hit to the left and reaches a specific area. The correspondence between the direction of launch of the game ball and the time it takes for the ball to enter the ball is the same as that described in the seventh embodiment with reference to FIG. 95, so it will be explained briefly here. When the electric role 640La is placed in the protruding position, the game ball that is hit from the right and reaches the specific area from the right rolls along the slope that descends from the upper right side to the lower left side of the electric role 640La, and enters the left second ball entrance 640L in a relatively short period of time. On the other hand, when the electric role 640La is placed in the protruding position, the game ball that is hit from the left and reaches the specific area from the left rolls in the opposite direction to the slope formed by the electric role 640La (rolls in the direction climbing the slope). After that, the momentum of the roll is reduced by gravity, and when the momentum in the direction climbing the slope becomes zero, the ball is guided to the left second ball entrance 640L along the slope formed by the electric role 640La. In other words, compared to a game ball that is hit to the right and reaches a specific area from the right direction, a game ball that is hit to the left and reaches from the left direction takes an extra period from climbing the slope to starting to descend the slope, so the period until it reaches the left second ball entrance 640L is likely to be long. For this reason, if a left hit is performed in a game state in which a time-saving state for normal symbols is set, it may be difficult for a game ball that reaches a specific area during an opening period (a period in which the electric role 640a is placed in a protruding position) based on a winning normal symbol to go down the slope formed by the electric role 640La and enter the left second ball entrance 640L by the end of the opening period. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, a right hit notification image is displayed during a game state in which a time-saving state for normal symbols is set, thereby encouraging the player to play by hitting to the right. This configuration allows the player to hit to the right during the time-saving state of the normal pattern, so that the game ball that reaches the specific area during the opening period based on the hit of the normal pattern can be guided to the left second ball entrance 640L in a shorter period of time. Therefore, the game can be played more efficiently during the time-saving state of the normal pattern.

On the other hand, in a game state where the time-saving state for normal symbols is not set, the launch direction is not specified, even during the execution of a jackpot game. In each round of a jackpot, if the specified number of game balls (10 balls) can be entered before 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round, the same number of prize balls can be won. Here, game balls can be launched at intervals of 0.6 seconds at the shortest, so the period required to launch 10 game balls is around 6 seconds. In addition, it takes about 1 second for a game ball launched by a left hit and reaching the movable member 650Rb from the left direction to flow down the slope formed by the movable member 650Rb in the lower right direction and enter the right specific winning hole 650Ra, and it takes about 3 seconds for a game ball launched by a right hit and reaching the movable member 650Rb from the right direction to flow down the slope formed by the movable member 650Rb in the lower right direction and enter the right specific winning hole 650Ra. Therefore, whether a right hit is performed or a left hit is performed during the execution of a jackpot game, if game balls are continuously launched, 10 or more game balls can be made to enter the right specific winning hole 650Ra in about 10 seconds. Therefore, regardless of the launch direction, a specified number (10 balls) of game balls can be made to enter the right specific winning hole 650Ra within a specified time (30 seconds).

Even during the execution of a jackpot game, if a winning normal pattern is selected based on the game ball passing through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the electric device 640La is moved to the protruding position. That is, the movable member 650Rb and the electric device 640La are both placed in the protruding position. In this case, the movable member 650Rb and the electric device 640La are in a state of intersecting at their respective intermediate positions, so that the game ball that has reached the specific area tends to remain in the area formed by the upper half of the movable member 650Rb and the upper half of the electric device 640La. That is, the game ball cannot be guided to either the right specific winning entrance 650Ra or the left second winning entrance 640La. This state is essentially a disadvantage for the player, since game balls cannot enter either of the ball entrances (left second ball entrance 640L, right specific winning entrance 650Ra). However, depending on the timing at which the electric device 640La is placed in the protruding position, this state can also be advantageous for the player. The relationship between the timing at which the electric device 640La is placed in the protruding position and the degree of advantage for the player will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 140.

Figure 140 (a) shows the state in which the electric role 640a is moved to the protruding position when a normal pattern is hit (i.e., the opening period of the left second ball entrance 640L begins) during the round period of the big win (the period during which the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruding position). As shown in Figure 140 (a), when both the electric role 640La and the movable member 650Rb are arranged in the protruding position, the electric role 640La and the movable member 650Rb cross each other, thereby preventing (blocking) the inclination of each other near the middle position. In other words, a downward inclination is formed from both the left and right sides toward the position where the electric role 640La and the movable member 650Rb cross each other. As a result, the game ball that has reached the specific area is blocked by the upper half (right half) of the electric role 640La and the upper half (left half) of the movable member 650Rb, making it impossible for it to enter either the left second ball entrance 640L or the right specific winning hole 650Ra, so the game ball continues to remain in the specific area until at least one of the electric role 640La and the movable member 650Rb is moved to a recessed position (buried position). During this state (when both the electric role 640La and the movable member 650Rb are positioned in the protruding position), the game ball that has reached the specific area cannot enter either ball entrance, so it can be said that this is a disadvantageous state for the player compared to a state in which only one of the electric role 640La and the movable member 650Rb is positioned in the protruding position. In the following explanation, for simplicity, the state in which the electric device 640La and the movable member 650Rb are both positioned in the protruding position (the state in which the jackpot round period and the opening period associated with a normal symbol win overlap) will be referred to as the "protruding overlap state."

When game balls continue to be launched toward a specific area in the overlapping protruding state, multiple game balls are stored (parked) in the area (upper area) formed by the upper half of the electric role 640La and the upper half of the movable member 650Rb. When multiple game balls are stored (parked) in the upper area, at least one of the electric role 640La and the movable member 650Rb moves to a sunk position (submerged position), causing the stored (parked) game balls to flow down toward one of the ball entrances. Below, the flow path of the game balls stored (parked) in the upper area is explained for each type of member (electric role 640La, movable member 650) that was previously moved to the sunk position (submerged position) in the overlapping protruding state.

Figure 140 (b) shows a case where the jackpot round ends before the opening period associated with the normal symbol hit after the overlapping protruding state, and the movable member 650Rb moves to the recessed position (buried position). The case where the jackpot round ends first is, for example, when the normal symbol hits just before 30 seconds have elapsed (for example, 29 seconds have elapsed) after the start of the jackpot round, and the electric device 640La moves to the protruding position, or when the 10th game ball rolls downstream from the middle position of the movable member 650Rb just before the normal symbol hits, and the 10th game ball enters the right specific winning hole 650Ra just after the normal symbol hits.

In the overlapping protruding state, when the movable member 650Rb moves to the immersion position (buried position), the game balls stored (parked) in the upper area are guided to the left second ball entrance 640L by the inclination formed by the electric device 640La. As a result, multiple game balls enter the left second ball entrance 640L together. Note that the number of prize balls awarded when a ball enters the left second ball entrance 640L is set to one, so the number of game balls that entered is simply returned as prize balls, and the number of balls held does not increase. In other words, the degree of advantage is less than when a game ball is entered into the right specific prize entrance 650Ra (when 10 prize balls are awarded for one ball entering). In particular, if the electric device 640La is moved to the extended position just before 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of a round, and the movable member 650Rb is moved to the retracted position before the electric device 640La is moved to the retracted position, then less than the specified number (10 balls) for that round will be able to enter the right specific winning slot 650Ra, which will put the player at a disadvantage in terms of the number of winning balls that can be won compared to when the electric device 640La is not moved to the extended position.

Figure 140 (c) shows a case where the opening period associated with the winning of the normal pattern ends before the end of the jackpot round after the overlapping protrusion state, and the electric device 640La moves to the sinking position (buried position). The case where the opening period associated with the winning of the normal pattern ends first is a case where the winning of the normal pattern occurs before 28 seconds have elapsed since the start of the jackpot round, and the specified number (10 balls) of game balls have not entered the right specific winning hole 650Ra. In this case, the game balls that have been stored (remained) in the upper area are guided to the right specific winning hole 650Ra by the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb. As a result, multiple game balls will enter the right specific winning port 650Ra in succession, and particularly when the total number of game balls that have already entered the right specific winning port 650Ra in that round and the number of game balls stored in the upper area exceeds a specified number, the electric device 640La can be moved to a sinking position to allow more than the specified number of game balls to enter. In other words, since prize balls can be paid out for more than the specified number of balls entering in one round, more prize balls can be won. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be won during a jackpot is greater than usual, which is advantageous for the player.

Here, in the twelfth embodiment, when a normal pattern is hit during a jackpot, an opening pattern of "2 seconds x 1 time" is set for the electric role 640La. Since the shortest firing interval of game balls is 0.6 seconds, about three game balls can reach the upper area during the two seconds that the electric role 640La is placed in the protruding position. Therefore, when eight or nine game balls have entered the right specific winning port 650Ra and the electric role 640La is placed in the protruding position, it is highly likely that more game balls than the 10 balls that are the specified number of balls that enter each round will enter the right specific winning port 640La. In the following explanation, for the sake of simplicity, entering more game balls than the 10 balls that are the specified number of balls that enter each round into the right specific winning port 640La will be referred to as "over winning". In the twelfth embodiment, a performance (right-hit navigation performance, see FIG. 141(a)) is configured to be executable, which notifies the player of the timing of passing through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, which is likely to result in an over-winning if the normal symbol is assumed to be a winning symbol. If the game ball is passed through the through gate 67 according to this right-hit navigation performance and a normal symbol is hit as intended, it becomes a state in which an over-winning is likely to occur (see FIG. 140(c)), so that the player's interest in the big win game can be further improved. In addition, if the player hits the right according to the right-hit navigation performance and passes the game ball through the through gate 67, resulting in a winning of a normal symbol, a performance (storage performance, see FIG. 141(b)) is executed to encourage the game ball to be stored in the upper area based on the start of the winning of the normal symbol (the electric role 640La is moved to the protruding position). This storage performance allows the player to aim for an over-winning more easily.

Although not shown in the figures, if the electric device 640La and the movable member 650Rb move to the submerged position (buried position) with almost no time difference, the game balls stored (parked) in the upper area cannot enter either the left second ball entrance 640L or the right specific winning entrance 650Ra, and instead flow down to the outlet 66 located below the game board 13. Therefore, if the electric device 640La and the movable member 650Rb move to the submerged position with no time difference (for example, within 0.5 seconds), the player cannot win a prize ball and the number of reserved balls does not increase, which is the most disadvantageous for the player.

Next, the details of the right-hit navigation effect described above will be described with reference to FIG. 141(a). FIG. 141(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the right-hit navigation effect occurs. As shown in FIG. 141(a), during the interval period of the big win, a display area HR21 having a horizontally elongated rectangular shape is formed below the display area HR8 in the main display area Dm, and a display area HR22 having a vertically elongated rectangular shape is formed below the display area HR9. As shown in FIG. 141(a), the words "Hit right and pass GO!!" are displayed inside the display area HR21. In addition, inside the display area HR22, an image imitating the through gate 67 and an image imitating an arrow in a direction passing through the image imitating the through gate 67 are displayed, and the words "Pass!!" are displayed inside the image imitating the arrow. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that there is some advantage to be gained by hitting right so that the game ball passes through the through gate 67.

In this embodiment, the right-hit navigation effect is executed for the first 1 second of the 2 seconds set as the interval period. If the right hit is performed during this 1 second and the right-hit game ball passes through the through gate 67, the possibility that the normal pattern variation time will pass with 8 to 9 game balls entering the right specific winning port 650Ra can be increased. In other words, if the normal pattern is a winning lottery, the electric role 640La is configured to be more likely to be placed in the protruding position with 8 to 9 game balls entering the right specific winning port 650Ra. As described above, when the electric role 640La moves to the protruding position with 8 to 9 game balls entering the right specific winning port 650Ra, a protruding overlap state is created in which both the movable member 650Rb and the electric role 640La are placed in the protruding position. If game balls are continued to be fired during this protruding overlap state, about 3 game balls can be stored (retained) in the upper area. In this state, when the open period (2 seconds) has elapsed and the electric device 640La moves to the immersion position, the stored game balls are guided together to the right specific winning port 650Ra, increasing the possibility of an over-winning. Therefore, if an over-winning occurs as intended, the player's interest can be further enhanced.

In the twelfth embodiment, the probability of winning a normal pattern is 1/10. That is, when a right hit is performed according to the right hit navigation performance, a protruding overlap state can be created with 8 to 9 game balls entering the right specific winning port 650Ra on average once in 10 times. During the protruding overlap state, as described above, about three game balls can be stored in the upper area, so when the electric role 640La moves to the immersion position, on average three game balls enter the right specific winning port 650Ra at once. When eight game balls have already entered the right specific winning port 650Ra and three more game balls enter, one more game ball will enter the right specific winning port 650Ra than the specified number (10), so the number of prize balls paid out will be 10 more than usual (the number of prize balls paid out for the specified number of balls entering). In addition, when nine game balls have already entered the right specific winning port 650Ra, if three more game balls enter the right specific winning port 650Ra, two more game balls than the specified number (10 balls) will enter the right specific winning port 650Ra, so the number of prize balls paid out will be 20 more than usual (the number of prize balls paid out for the specified number of balls entering). Therefore, with a probability of 1/10, it is possible to win about 10 to 20 more prize balls than usual, so that the expected number of prize balls that can be won during the execution of the jackpot game is higher if the player hits the ball to the right according to the right hit navigation effect (see FIG. 141(a)) every time during the jackpot interval and passes through the through gate 67. Therefore, when the right hit navigation effect is executed, the player can be made to hit the ball to the right proactively.

Next, the above-mentioned storage effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 141(b). FIG. 141(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 when the storage effect is executed. This storage effect is executed when, during each round of a jackpot, the electric device 640La is moved to the protruding position with eight or nine game balls entering the right specific winning port 650Ra, and 0.5 seconds have passed. This storage effect encourages game balls to be stored in the upper area while the electric device 640La is open, and is an effect intended to create a state in which over-winning is likely to occur.

As shown in FIG. 141(b), when the accumulation effect is executed, the text "Is it so profitable that balls accumulate at the intersection?!" is displayed in the display area HR21. In addition, an image of the electric role 640La and the movable member 650Rb in the overlapping protruding state is displayed in the display area HR22, and an image of an arrow pointing to the intersection of the electric role 640La and the movable member 650Rb is displayed. Inside the image of the arrow, the text "Aim!!" is displayed. These display contents allow the player to actively launch game balls into the upper area during the overlapping protruding state. This makes it easy for even players who have not played much with the pachinko machine 10 in this twelfth embodiment to generate an over-winning win. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

The reason why the storage performance is not executed immediately when the protruding overlap state is reached, but is executed after 0.5 seconds has elapsed, is to prevent the storage performance from being executed when a specified number of game balls enter the right specific winning port 650Ra immediately after the protruding overlap state is reached and the round ends. If there is a game ball flowing down the movable member 650Rb immediately before the protruding overlap state is reached, the game ball will flow down the movable member 650Rb and enter the right specific winning port 650Ra within 0.5 seconds after the protruding overlap state is reached. Therefore, if the round has not ended even after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the protruding overlap state, there is no possibility of the jackpot round ending until the opening period associated with the normal pattern hit has elapsed, so it is an advantageous state in which the game balls can be stored in the upper area to generate an over-winning with a high probability. Therefore, in this twelfth embodiment, the storage performance is executed only when the round has not ended even after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the protruding overlap state is reached. This allows the storage effect to be executed accurately only when an over-winning combination is possible, further increasing the player's interest when the storage effect is executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 142, the change over time in the presentation mode when a normal pattern is hit during the round period of the big win in the 12th embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 142, when the interval period of the big win begins, the right hit navigation presentation (see FIG. 141(a)) is executed. This right hit navigation presentation is executed for one second. During this time, if a right hit is performed to pass the game ball through the through gate 67 and a normal pattern is selected as a winning lottery, a state is created in which it becomes easier to win an over prize. Taking into account the period from when the right hit navigation presentation is viewed to when the game ball is launched and when the launched game ball passes through the through gate 67, the timing of passing through the through gate 67 is mostly in the latter half of the interval period (when 1 second has passed to when 2 seconds have passed). Note that FIG. 142 illustrates an example in which a right hit is performed during the execution of the right hit navigation presentation, and the game ball passes through the through gate 67 1.5 seconds after the start of the interval period.

After one second has elapsed since the right-hit navigation performance was executed, the right-hit navigation performance ends and switches to the normal interval performance. After another second has elapsed, the interval period (2 seconds) has elapsed and the next round begins. When the round begins, the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruding position and the right specific winning hole 650Ra is ready for ball entry. As described above, the shortest interval between game balls is 0.6 seconds, so if the player continues to shoot game balls at the shortest interval, the game balls will enter the right specific winning hole 650Ra at intervals of about 0.6 seconds. Therefore, about five seconds after the start of the jackpot round, eight or nine game balls will have entered the right specific winning hole 650Ra. In the twelfth embodiment, the normal symbol variation time during the jackpot game is set to 5.5 seconds, so the normal symbol variation period elapses 4.5 to 5.5 seconds after the start of the round (if the normal symbol wins, the electric device 640La is moved to the protruding position). Therefore, if the normal symbol wins in the lottery, the electric device 640La is moved to the protruding position with about eight game balls having entered the right specific winning slot 650Ra. Note that FIG. 142 illustrates an example in which the electric device 640La is moved to the protruding position with eight game balls having entered (won).

As shown in FIG. 142, if 0.5 seconds have passed since the opening period of the electric role 640La started and the round period of the jackpot has not ended, the storage performance (see FIG. 141(b)) will start. By firing game balls during the execution of this storage performance, about three game balls can be stored (parked) in the upper area. The storage performance ends at the same time as the opening period of the electric role 640La (the period during which it is placed in the protruding position, which is 2 seconds) has passed. When the electric role 640La moves to the immersion position (buried position), the game balls stored in the upper area are guided to the right specific winning port 650Ra at once. Then, the balls enter the right specific winning port 650Ra with almost no time difference in about 0.5 seconds. This makes it possible to enter (win) game balls in excess of the specified number of balls (10 balls) that enter the right specific winning port 650Ra in one round of the jackpot. This can increase players' interest in big win games.

<Electrical configuration of the twelfth embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 143, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. Fig. 143 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in Fig. 143, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see Fig. 14 (b)) in that a storage performance standby flag 223ba, a standby period timer 223bb, and a winning number counter 223bc are provided.

The storage performance standby flag 223ba is a flag indicating whether or not it is a standby period (0.5 seconds) between the establishment of the execution condition of the storage performance (see FIG. 141 (b)) and the actual start of the storage performance. If the storage performance standby flag 223ba is on, it indicates that it is a standby period until the storage performance is started, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not a standby period. As described above, the storage performance is executed during the jackpot round period and when 8 or 9 game balls have entered the right specific winning port 650Ra, the electric role 640La is placed in the protruding position, and the storage performance standby flag 223ba is set to on (see S5704 in FIG. 149). In this state, if the standby period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed without the jackpot round ending, the storage performance is started and the storage performance standby flag 223ba is set to off (see S5610 in FIG. 147). Also, if the jackpot round ends during the waiting period, the storage effect waiting flag 223ba is set to off (see S5604 in FIG. 147).

The waiting period timer 223bb is a timer for timing the waiting period from when the execution conditions for the storage effect (see FIG. 141(b)) are met until the storage effect actually starts. A timer value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in this waiting period timer 223bb at the start of the waiting period (see S5705 in FIG. 149). During the waiting period, this waiting period timer 223bb is updated each time the jackpot process is executed (see S5607 in FIG. 147), and when the timer value is updated to 0, the storage effect starts to be executed (see S5609 in FIG. 147). In addition, the waiting period timer 223bb is reset to 0 if the round ends before the waiting period has elapsed (see S5604 in FIG. 147).

The winning number counter 223bc is a counter for counting the number of winning balls in the right specific winning opening 650Ra in each round of the jackpot. The winning number counter 223bc is initially set to 0, and the value is updated by adding 1 each time the main control unit 110 detects a winning ball (ball entry) in the right specific winning opening 650Ra and notifies the winning ball by the large opening winning command (see S4972 in FIG. 150). The winning number counter 223bc is also reset to 0 each time each round of the jackpot ends (see S5603 in FIG. 147). If a normal symbol wins during a jackpot round and the electric device 640La is moved to the extended position, the counter value of the winning number counter 223bc is referenced, and if the value is 8 or 9 (i.e., if the number of winnings in the right specific winning slot 650Ra in that round is 8 or 9), a standby period is set (see S5704 in FIG. 149).

<Regarding control processing of the main control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 144, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 12th embodiment will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol fluctuation process 12 (S151) executed in place of the normal symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 26) in the 6th embodiment (and the 1st embodiment). In the normal symbol fluctuation process 12 (S151) in the 12th embodiment, the same processes as the normal symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 26) in the 6th embodiment (and the 1st embodiment) in S501 to S515, S517 to S520, and S523 are executed.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation process 12 (see FIG. 144) in the 12th embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S514 that the normal symbol is not in the time-saving state (the probability variation flag 203e is off and the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0) (S514: No), the normal symbol variation time is set to 5.5 seconds (S541) and this process is terminated. As described above, this 5.5 seconds is a variation period during which, if the game ball is passed through the through gate 67 by hitting from the right in accordance with the right-hit navigation performance (see FIG. 141(a)) executed during the interval period of the jackpot, it is highly likely that 8 or 9 game balls have already entered the right specific winning port 640Ra at the variation end timing.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation process 12 (see FIG. 144) in the 12th embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S520 that the normal symbol is not in the time-saving mode (the high probability flag 203e is off and the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0) (S520: No), the opening pattern of the electric role 640La is set to an opening pattern of "2 seconds x 1 time" for the opening time and number of times (S542), and the process proceeds to S523. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S520 that the normal symbol is in the time-saving mode (the high probability flag 203e is on or the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 1 or more) (S520: Yes), the opening pattern of the electric role 640a is set to an opening pattern of "2 seconds x 2 times" for the opening time and number of times (S543), and the process proceeds to S523.

In the normal symbol variation process 12 (see FIG. 144) in the 12th embodiment, when the process of S523 ends, a normal symbol opening command is set to notify the sound lamp control device 113 that the opening period of the electric role 640La (the state in which it is placed in the protruding position) has started (S544), and this process ends. The normal symbol opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the normal symbol opening command, it determines whether 8 or 9 game balls have entered the right specific winning hole 650Ra in the big win (i.e., whether the electric role 640La has been moved to the protruding position at the timing when an over-winning can be aimed for), and if it is the timing when an over-winning can be aimed for, it sets the waiting period for the storage performance (see FIG. 141 (b)).

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 145 to Fig. 151. First, the main process 12 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 145. This main process 12 is a process executed in place of the main process (see Fig. 33) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

In the main processing 12 (see FIG. 145) in the 12th embodiment, the same processing as S4001 to S4011 and S4014 to S4019 in the main processing (see FIG. 33) in the 6th embodiment (and the 1st embodiment) is executed in each of the steps S4001 to S4011 and S4014 to S4019. In addition, in the main processing 12 (see FIG. 145) in the 12th embodiment, when the processing of S4011 is completed, the performance update processing 12 is executed (S4081) instead of the performance update processing (see FIG. 36) in the 6th embodiment (and the 1st embodiment), and then the command determination processing 12 is executed (S4082) instead of the command determination processing (see FIG. 41) in the 6th embodiment (and the 1st embodiment), and the processing proceeds to S4014. Details of the performance update process 12 (S4081) and the command determination process 12 (S4082) will be explained with reference to Figures 146 to 151, respectively.

First, the details of the above-mentioned performance update process 12 (S4081) will be explained with reference to FIG. 146. This performance update process 12 (S4081) is a process executed in place of the performance update process (see FIG. 36) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process for updating the display mode, etc., while various performances are being executed. Of the performance update process 12 (S4081) in the 12th embodiment, each of the processes S4301 to S4311 is the same as each of the processes S4301 to S4311 in the performance update process (see FIG. 36) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

In addition, in the performance update process 12 (see FIG. 146) in this 12th embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the variable display is not being executed (S4301: No), a process during the jackpot is executed to update the performance mode during the jackpot (S4351), and this process is terminated. Details of this process during the jackpot (S4351) will be described with reference to FIG. 147.

Figure 147 is a flow chart showing the process during the jackpot (S4351). In this process during the jackpot (S4351), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is being played (S5601), and if it is determined that a jackpot game is not being played (S5601: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5601, if it is determined that a jackpot game is being played (S5601: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is time for the jackpot round to end (S5602), and if it is determined that it is time for the round to end (S5602: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 223bc is reset to 0 (S5603). Next, the storage performance standby flag 223ba is set to OFF, and the timer value of the standby period timer 223bb is reset to 0 (S5604), and it is determined whether or not the completed round is the final round (S5605).

If it is determined in the processing of S5605 that the completed round is not the final round (S5603: No), this means that it is time to start a new interval period, so the start of the right-hit navigation presentation (see FIG. 141(a)) is set (S5606) and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5605 that it is time to end the final round (S5603: Yes), there is no next round, and an over win cannot be generated even if the game ball is passed through the through gate 67 by hitting to the right, so the processing of S5606 is skipped and this processing ends as it is.

In contrast, if it is determined in the process of S5602 that the round period for the big win is not ending (S5602: No), then it is determined whether the storage effect standby flag 223ba is on (i.e., whether it is a standby period for waiting for the start of the storage effect execution) (S5607). If it is determined in the process of S5607 that the storage effect standby flag 223ba is off (S5607), this means that it is not a standby period and there is no possibility of executing the storage effect, so this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5607 that the storage effect standby flag 223ba is on (S5607: Yes), first, the value of the standby period timer 223bb is updated by subtracting 1 (S5608), and then it is determined whether the timer value after subtraction has become 0 (S5609).

If it is determined in the process of S5609 that the timer value after subtraction has reached 0 (S5609: Yes), this means that the waiting period has elapsed, so the start of the storage presentation is set (S5610), the storage waiting flag 223ba is set to off (S5611), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5609 that the timer value of the waiting period timer 223bb after subtraction is not 0 (S5609: No), this means that it is not time to start the storage presentation, so the processes of S5610 and S5611 are skipped and this process ends.

By executing this jackpot process (see FIG. 147), the elapsed waiting period can be accurately determined and the execution of the storage effect can be set. By executing the waiting effect, over winning can be more easily generated, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 148, the command determination process 12 (S4082) in this twelfth embodiment will be described. This command determination process 12 (S4082) is executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process for performing control according to the type of command received from the main control device 110. In the command determination process 12 (S4082) in this twelfth embodiment, the processes of S4901 to S4910 and S4918 are the same as the processes of S4901 to S4910 and S4918 in the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

In addition, in the command determination process 12 (see FIG. 148) in the 12th embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4909 that the command received from the main control device 110 does not include a winning information command (S4909: No), it is then determined whether or not the received command includes a normal symbol release command (S4961). If it is determined in the process of S4961 that the normal symbol release command is included (S4961: Yes), this means that the release period based on the winning of the normal symbol will begin, so a normal symbol release command process is executed to execute control according to the start timing of the release period (S4962), and this process is terminated. Details of this normal symbol release command process (S4962) will be described later with reference to FIG. 149.

In addition, in the command determination process 12 (see FIG. 148) in the 12th embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4961 that the unprocessed commands received from the main control device 110 do not include a normal map opening command (S4961: No), it is then determined whether or not the unprocessed commands include a win-related command (S4963). If it is determined in the process of S4963 that the unprocessed commands include a win-related command (S4963: Yes), a win-related command process 12 is executed to perform control according to the type of win-related command (S4964), and this process is terminated. Details of this win-related command process 12 (S4964) will be described later with reference to FIG. 150.

In the command determination process 12 (see FIG. 148) in the twelfth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4963 that a win-related command has not been received (S4963: No), it is then determined whether or not a status command is included in the unprocessed commands received from the main control device 110 (S4965). This status command is a command indicating that the game state has been changed. Specifically, when a sure-variant jackpot ends and a sure-variant game state is set, a status command indicating a transition to the sure-variant game state is output, when a normal jackpot ends and a time-saving game state is set, a status command indicating a transition to the time-saving game state is output, and when 100 special symbol lotteries are completed in the time-saving game state and a transition is made to the normal game state, a status command indicating a transition to the normal game state is output.

If it is determined in the processing of S4965 that a status command is included among the unprocessed commands (S4965: Yes), status command processing is executed (S4966) to perform control according to the game status notified by the status command, and this processing ends. Details of this status command processing (S4966) will be described later with reference to FIG. 151. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4965 that a status command is not included among the unprocessed commands (S4965: No), processing proceeds to S4918.

Next, referring to FIG. 149, the details of the above-mentioned normal map opening command processing (S4962) will be described. As described above, this normal map opening command processing (S4962) is a processing for executing control according to the start timing of the opening period. In this normal map opening command processing (S4962), first, it is determined whether or not it is in a jackpot (S5701), and if it is determined that it is in a jackpot (S5701: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is in a round period of the jackpot (S5702). In the processing of S5702, if it is determined that it is in a round period (S5702: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 223bc is either 8 or 9 (S5703), and if the counter value is 8 or 9 (S5703: Yes), the storage performance standby flag 223ba is set to on to set the storage performance standby period (S5704). Then, the standby period timer 223bb is set to a timer value corresponding to 0.5 seconds (S5705), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5701 that the jackpot game is not being played (S5701: No), if it is determined in the process of S5702 that the round is not in progress (S5702: No), or if it is determined in the process of S5703 that the value of the winning number counter 223bc is neither 8 nor 9 (S5703: No), the standby period for the storage effect is not set and this process ends.

By executing this normal symbol release command process (see FIG. 149), if a normal symbol win occurs at a timing when an over win is possible and the electric device 640La is moved to the protruding position, it is possible to set the execution of the storage effect. This allows the player to easily understand that there is a chance of an over win.

Next, the details of the hit-related command process 12 (S4922) described above will be explained with reference to FIG. 150. As described above, this hit-related command process 12 (S4964) is a process for performing control according to the type of hit-related command received from the main control unit 110. Of this hit-related command process 12 (S4964), the processes of S4911 to S4917 are simply transplants of the processes of S4911 to S4917 executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted here.

In the winning-related command processing in the 12th embodiment (see FIG. 150), if it is determined in the processing of S4913 that the unprocessed commands received from the main control unit 110 do not include a round number command (S4913: No), it is then determined whether or not the unprocessed commands include a large opening winning command (S4971). Note that, as described above, the large opening winning command is a command that is output from the main control unit 110 each time a ball enters the right specific winning port 650Ra (winning) during the execution of a big winning game in this 12th embodiment.

If it is determined in the processing of S4971 that the unprocessed commands include a large opening winning command (S4971: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 223bc (S4972), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4971 that the unprocessed commands do not include a large opening winning command (S4971: No), the processing proceeds to S4916. By executing this winning-related command processing 12 (see FIG. 150), the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately determine the number of winning balls each time a game ball wins the right specific winning port 650Ra.

Next, the above-mentioned state command processing (S4966) will be described with reference to FIG. 151. As described above, this state command processing (S4966) is a processing for performing control according to the game state notified by the state command. In this state command processing (S4966), first, it is determined whether the game state notified by the state command is a time-saving game state (S5801), and if it is determined that it is a command indicating a transition to a time-saving game state (S5801: Yes), the processing is shifted to S5803. On the other hand, in the processing of S5801, if it is determined that it is not a command indicating a transition to a time-saving game state (S5801: No), then it is determined whether it is a command indicating a transition to a probability game state (S5802), and if it is a command indicating a transition to a probability game state (S5802: Yes), the processing is shifted to S5803. In the process of S5803, which is executed when a transition to the time-saving game state or the probability variation game state is notified, the display of a right-hit notification image indicating the start of the right-hit state is set (S5803), and this process ends.

The reason why the right-hit notification image is displayed in the time-saving game state in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set and in the probability-changing game state is to more efficiently allow the game ball to enter the left second ball entrance 640L. That is, as described above, if a left hit is performed while the electric role 640La is placed in the protruding position, it may be difficult for the game ball that reaches a specific area during the opening period (the period in which the electric role 640a is placed in the protruding position) based on the winning of the normal pattern to go down the slope formed by the electric role 640La and enter the left second ball entrance 640L by the end of the opening period. Therefore, in this twelfth embodiment, the right-hit notification image is displayed during the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set, so that the player is encouraged to play by hitting to the right. This configuration allows the player to hit to the right during the time-saving state of the normal pattern, so that the game ball that reaches the specific area during the opening period based on the winning of the normal pattern can be guided to the left second ball entrance 640L in a shorter period of time. Therefore, the game can be played more efficiently during the time-saving state of the normal pattern.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5802 that the command is not an indication of a transition to a special game state (S5802: No), then it is determined whether or not the command is an indication of a transition to a normal game state (S5804), and if it is determined that the command is an indication of a transition to a normal game state (S5804: Yes), an image is set to be displayed to notify that the right-hit state has ended (S5805), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5804 that the command is not an indication of a transition to a normal game state, the processing of S5805 is skipped and this processing ends as is.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 12th embodiment, the left second ball entrance 640L and the right specific winning hole 650Ra are arranged opposite each other, and when a normal symbol is hit, the electric device 640La provided between the left second ball entrance 640L and the right specific winning hole 650Ra is caused to protrude, forming a downward slope toward the left second ball entrance 640L. In the time-saving game state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, and in the probability game state, the player is notified of a right hit (a right hit notification image is displayed) in order to match the direction of the slope formed by the electric device 640La with the flow direction of the game ball. By configuring it in this way, the time required for the game ball that reaches the electric device 640La to flow down the slope formed by the electric device 640La can be minimized, so the launched game ball can be efficiently inserted into the left second ball entrance 640L. Therefore, the game can be played efficiently in the time-saving game state and the probability variation game state.

In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, when a normal pattern is hit at a specific timing during the execution of a jackpot game, a special state is formed in which it is possible to win more prize balls than usual in the jackpot game. More specifically, in each round of the jackpot, when eight or nine game balls enter the right specific winning port 650Ra (i.e., when the remaining number of balls entering is two or less compared to the maximum number of winning balls of 10 balls in each round), a normal pattern is hit, and when the electric role 640La moves to the protruding position, both the electric role 640La and the movable member 650Rb are protruding during the opening period (2 seconds) based on the normal pattern hit, and instead of guiding the game ball to either the right specific winning port 650Ra or the left second ball entry port 640L, it becomes possible to store (accumulate) the game ball around the intersection position of the electric role 640La and the movable member 650Rb. When the electric device 640La is closed in this state (i.e., when the opening period based on the winning of the normal pattern has elapsed), the game balls that have been stored (accumulated) are guided to the right specific winning port 650Ra by the movable member 650Rb, making it possible to generate an over-winning. This can further increase the player's interest in the game during the execution of the jackpot game. In addition, in the 12th embodiment, the right-hit navigation effect (see FIG. 141(a)) is configured to notify the player of the timing of launching to the through gate 67, when the normal pattern variation period is likely to elapse when 8 or 9 game balls have entered the right specific winning port 650Ra. This allows the player to actively aim the game ball at the through gate 67 each time the right-hit navigation effect is executed, thereby preventing (suppressing) the jackpot game from becoming monotonous.

In the twelfth embodiment, the game method (launch method) is not specified except when the right-hit navigation effect or the storage effect is displayed during the execution of the jackpot game, but this is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be used in which a left-hit is notified except when the right-hit navigation effect is being executed. By configuring in this way, the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb and the flow direction of the game ball that entered the specific area can be matched, so that the period until the game ball enters the right specific winning port 650Ra can be further shortened. Therefore, the jackpot game can be progressed more quickly. In addition, since the through gate 67 is provided only on the flow path on the right side when viewed from the front with respect to the variable display unit 80, by notifying a left-hit except when the right-hit navigation effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent the winning of a normal pattern from frequently occurring during a jackpot. As described above, if a normal symbol hits during a jackpot round, a protruding overlap state (see FIG. 140(a)) occurs, and the game ball cannot enter either the left second ball entry port 640L or the right specific winning port 650Ra. For this reason, unless eight or nine game balls have already been entered into the right specific winning port 650Ra, the game ball cannot be entered into the right specific winning port 650Ra, and it is also difficult to aim for an over-winning, which is an undesirable state for the player. In contrast, if the left hit is notified when the right hit navigation performance is not being executed, it is possible to prevent a normal symbol hit being unnecessary (i.e., at a time when it is difficult to aim for an over-winning), which would prevent the game ball from being prevented from entering the right specific winning port 650Ra.

In the twelfth embodiment, the left second ball entry port 640L and the right specific winning port 650Ra are arranged opposite each other, and the ball entry port through which the ball can enter (the degree of advantage for the player) is variable depending on the combination of the movable position of the electric role 640La and the movable member 650Rb provided between them, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the second ball entry port and the specific winning port may be arranged in a vertical direction, and the ball entry port through which the ball can enter may be changed depending on the combination of the opening and closing states of the ball entry port. More specifically, for example, the second ball entry port may be provided upstream of one flow path, and the specific winning port may be provided downstream, so that when the second ball entry port is open, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific winning port regardless of whether the specific winning port is open or not. Conversely, the specific winning port may be arranged on the upstream side and the second winning port on the downstream side, and when the specific winning port is open, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning port regardless of whether the second winning port is open or not. In addition, when the ball entrances are arranged vertically, the two ball entrances may be arranged so that it is more advantageous for the player if the game ball does not enter than if the game ball enters. Specifically, for example, the ball entrance may be arranged with a small number of prize balls (1 or 0) awarded for the game ball entering, and a general winning port may be arranged downstream of each ball entrance with a large number of prize balls (for example, 10) awarded for the game ball entering. By configuring in this way, when both ball entrances are open, it is most difficult to enter the general winning port. That is, it is more difficult for the game ball to reach the general winning port than when only one ball entrance is open or when both ball entrances are closed. This allows the state where all ball entrances are open to be the most unfavorable state for the player, realizing a novel gameplay feature where the player can play the game in the hope that none of the ball entrances will be opened. This increases the player's interest in the game.

<Modification of the twelfth embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 152 and Fig. 153. In the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment described above, the left second ball entrance 640L and the right specific winning hole 650Ra are arranged opposite to each other, and the electric role 640La and the movable member 650Rb are provided between them. When a normal pattern is hit, the electric role 640La is placed in a protruding position to form a downward inclination toward the left second ball entrance 640L, while during a round period of a big win, the movable member 650Rb is placed in a protruding position to form a downward inclination toward the right specific winning hole 650Ra. In addition, when a normal symbol wins during the jackpot round, both the electric role 640La and the movable member 650Rb are positioned in the protruding position, forming a protruding overlap state in which game balls can be stored (parked) in the upper area above the electric role 640La and the movable member 650Rb. The protruding overlap state occurs when eight or nine game balls have already entered the right specific winning port 650Ra, and by storing multiple game balls in the upper area, it is possible to enter more than the specified number (10 balls) of game balls into the right specific winning port 650Ra when the opening period of the electric role 640La has elapsed. This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to the timing of the normal symbol win.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the 12th embodiment, the left second ball entrance 640L and the right specific winning entrance 650Ra, which are arranged opposite to each other, are provided with an opening/closing plate 6400La and an opening/closing plate 6500Rb that can open and close the left second ball entrance 640L and the right specific winning entrance 650Ra, respectively. The opening/closing plates 6400La and 6500Rb are structured so that they do not interfere with each other, and even if a normal pattern hit and a round period of a jackpot overlap, one opening/closing plate is configured to be able to open without preventing balls from entering the other ball entrance. By configuring in this way, even if a normal pattern hit occurs during the execution of a jackpot game (i.e., when the opening conditions of the left second ball entrance 640L and the right specific winning entrance 650Ra overlap and are established), it is possible to make it possible for game balls to enter both the left second ball entrance 640L and the right specific winning entrance 650Ra. Therefore, regardless of the frequency with which normal symbols win, players can play efficiently during the jackpot game.

The surface configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board 13 in this modified example of the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 152, in this modified example, a tilted member 6500b having a generally triangular shape when viewed from the front is disposed between the left second ball entrance 640L and the right specific winning entrance 650Ra. As shown in FIG. 152, both the left and right side surfaces of this tilted member 6500b form a slope that slopes downward to the lower left and lower right, respectively, so that a game ball that reaches the specific area is guided downward to the lower left or lower right when viewed from the front by the slope formed by the tilted member 6500b.

As shown in FIG. 152, the left second ball entrance 640L in this modified example is provided with an opening/closing plate 6400La that can open and close the left second ball entrance 640L. This opening/closing plate 6400La is normally configured to stand upright in the vertical direction, preventing game balls from entering from the right direction when viewed from the front. On the other hand, when a normal pattern is hit, the opening/closing plate 6500La tilts to the right toward the inclined member 6500b, forming a downward slope toward the left second ball entrance 640L. This creates a state in which game balls that have reached a specific area can be guided to the left second ball entrance 640L.

As shown in FIG. 152, the right specific winning opening 650Ra in this modified example is provided with an opening/closing plate 6500Rb that can open and close the right specific winning opening 640Ra. This opening/closing plate 6400Rb is normally configured to stand upright in the vertical direction, preventing game balls from entering from the left direction when viewed from the front. On the other hand, when a jackpot round starts, the opening/closing plate 6500Rb tilts leftward toward the inclined member 6500b, forming a downward slope toward the right specific winning opening 650Ra. This creates a state in which game balls that have reached the specific area can be guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra.

Next, referring to FIG. 153, the flow direction of the game ball when the opening and closing plates 6500La, 6500Rb are open will be described. First, referring to FIG. 153(a), the flow direction of the game ball when the opening and closing plate 6500Rb is open will be described. As shown in FIG. 153(a), when the opening and closing plate 6500Rb is opened, the opening and closing plate 6500Rb leans against the right side of the inclination member 6500b. That is, as shown in FIG. 153(a), the inclination member 6500b and the opening and closing plate 6500Rb form a downward inclination toward the right specific winning hole 650Ra. In this state, the game ball that reaches the right side of the inclination member 6500b is guided to the right specific winning hole 650Ra. On the other hand, the game ball that reaches the left side of the inclined member 6500b passes through the flow path between the opening/closing plate 6500La and the inclined member 6500b and flows down to the outlet 66.

Next, referring to FIG. 153(b), the flow direction of the game ball when the opening/closing plate 6500La is open will be described. As shown in FIG. 153(b), when the opening/closing plate 6500La is opened, the opening/closing plate 6500La leans against the left side of the inclination member 6500b. That is, as shown in FIG. 153(b), the inclination member 6500b and the opening/closing plate 6500La form a downward inclination toward the left second ball inlet 640L. In this state, the game ball that reaches the left side of the inclination member 6500b is guided to the left second ball inlet 640L. On the other hand, the game ball that reaches the right side of the inclination member 6500b passes through the flow path between the opening/closing plate 6500Rb and the inclination member 6500b and flows down to the outlet 66.

In this way, in this modified example, if the opening and closing plate 6500La is open, a state is created in which the game ball can easily enter the left second ball entry port 640L, regardless of whether the opening and closing plate 6500Rb is open or not. Similarly, if the opening and closing plate 6500Rb is open, a state is created in which the game ball can easily enter the right specific winning port 650Ra, regardless of whether the opening and closing plate 650La is open or not. By configuring in this way, even in a situation in which the opening conditions of the left second ball entry port 640L and the right specific winning port 650Ra may overlap and be satisfied, such as during the execution of a jackpot game, a state in which the game ball can easily enter the open ball entry port can always be created. That is, unlike the overlapping protruding state of the twelfth embodiment described above, a state in which game balls cannot enter either the left second ball entry port 640L or the right specific winning port 650Ra is not created temporarily, so the jackpot game can proceed smoothly. Therefore, the player can play the jackpot game without feeling stressed about not being able to enter the right specific winning port 650Ra during the jackpot game, so the player can enjoy the jackpot game more.

<Second Modification of Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, a second modified example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 154. In the above-mentioned twelfth embodiment, the left second ball entrance 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are arranged opposite to each other, and the electric device 640La provided between them is arranged in a protruding position, forming a downward inclination toward the left second ball entrance 640L, so that the game ball is easily allowed to enter the left second ball entrance 640L. Also, the movable member 650Rb provided between the left second ball entrance 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra is arranged in a protruding position, forming a downward inclination toward the right specific winning opening 650Ra, so that the game ball is easily allowed to enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra. In addition, while the electric device 640La and the movable member 650Rb are both in the protruding overlap state, a state in which it is impossible to enter any ball into any of the ball entrances is temporarily created. In other words, when the protruding overlap state is reached, it becomes difficult to enter the game balls into the various ball entrances, which is disadvantageous to the player.

In contrast to this, in the second modified example of the twelfth embodiment, a central second ball entrance 640C is provided at the intersection of the electric device 640Ca, which is provided in place of the electric device 640La, and the movable member 650Ra, so that the game ball is more likely to enter the central second ball entrance 640C when the electric device 640Ca is in the overlapping protruding state than when only the electric device 640Ca is positioned in the protruding position.

The flow direction of game balls around a specific area (area below the first ball entrance 64) of the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154(a) is a diagram showing the flow direction of game balls when the electric role 640Ca is positioned in a protruding position while the movable member 650Ra is positioned in a recessed position. This state is mainly formed when a normal symbol hits in a state other than a jackpot. In other words, this state is likely to be formed in a time-saving game state or a probability-change game state where the probability of a normal symbol hit is high (1/1.2).

When only the electric role 640Ca is positioned in the protruding position, as shown in FIG. 154(a), the game ball is guided to the lower left by the downward slope formed by the electric role 640Ca. As shown in FIG. 154(a), in this second modified example, the central second ball inlet 640C is provided at approximately the middle position of the electric role 640Ca, so that some of the game balls that flow down along the slope formed by the electric role 640Ca enter the central second ball inlet 640C, and some pass through the central second ball inlet 640C. In this second modified example, since no ball inlet is provided downstream of the electric role 640Ca, the game balls that pass through the electric role 640Ca fall downward and flow down to the outlet 66. Therefore, since only a portion of the game balls that reach the specific area are guided to the central second ball entrance 640C, even if the game state is set to a time-saving state for normal patterns, it is relatively difficult to execute a lottery based on balls entering the central second ball entrance 640C.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 154(b), in the overlapping protruding state, in addition to the case where the game ball that flows down along the slope formed by the electric device 640Ca enters directly into the central second ball entrance 640C, the game ball that passes the position of the central second ball entrance 640C and rolls to the slope on the movable member 650Ra side is also ultimately guided to the central second ball entrance 640C. More specifically, the game ball that rolls to the slope on the movable member 650Rb side climbs the slope formed by the movable member 650Rb until its momentum becomes 0. Then, when its momentum becomes 0, it rolls to the lower right along the slope formed by the movable member 650Ra. As a result, the game ball is guided again to the intersection position where the central second ball entrance 640C is provided. Even if the ball passes through the central second ball entrance 640C again and proceeds to the slope formed by the electric role 640Ca, it will climb up the electric role 640Ca, as if it had climbed the movable member 650Rb, its momentum will become zero, and it will descend to the lower left on the electric role 640Ca and be guided to the central second ball entrance 640Ca. Therefore, a game ball that reaches a specific area while in a protruding overlap state will always be guided to the central second ball entrance 640C unless the protruding overlap state is released along the way. Therefore, in this second modified example, the protruding overlap state makes it easier for the ball to enter the central second ball entrance 640C than a state in which only the electric role 640Ca is positioned in the protruding position, so in terms of the ball entry rate into the central second ball entrance 640C, the protruding overlap state is the most advantageous state.

In particular, if the lottery for the second special symbol (lottery based on balls entering the second central ball entrance 640C) is more likely to be favorable (the more favorable jackpot type is more likely to be determined in the event of a jackpot) than the lottery for the first special symbol (lottery based on balls entering the first ball entrance 64), it is possible to encourage players to want to save more reserved balls for the second special symbol during the jackpot game, and this makes it possible to encourage players to actively pass through the through gate 67 and play while hoping for a protruding overlap state. This makes it possible to prevent the jackpot game from becoming merely a task for obtaining prize balls, thereby increasing the player's interest in the jackpot game.

In the second modified example, the time-saving game state continues until the lottery for the special symbol is executed 100 times, and the probability variable game state continues until the next jackpot, but this is not limited to this. For example, the time-saving game state and the probability variable game state may be limited only until the lottery for the special symbol is executed four times. And, the lottery for the second special symbol may be executed preferentially over the lottery for the first special symbol. By configuring in this way, when only reserved balls for the first special symbol are present at the end of the jackpot game, the number of lotteries for the time-saving game state or the probability variable game state is subtracted by the lottery for the first special symbol, which has a low degree of advantage. Therefore, for a player who wants all the lotteries executed while the time-saving game state or the probability variable game state is set to be lotteries for the advantageous second special symbol, it is possible to make him/her want to acquire more reserved balls for the second special symbol during the execution of the jackpot game. This makes it possible to encourage players to create a situation in which it is easier for the ball to enter the central second ball entrance 640C by creating a protruding overlap state as many times as possible during the jackpot game, and allows players to focus on the results of the lottery for the normal symbols while playing the jackpot game. This prevents the jackpot game from becoming monotonous, and increases the player's interest in the game.

In the second modified example of the twelfth embodiment, the central second ball entry port 640C is located at the intersection of the electric device 640Ca and the movable member 650Rb, but this is not limited to the configuration. For example, the second ball entry port and the specific winning port may be interchanged. By configuring it in this way, if a normal symbol is hit during a jackpot game, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the specific winning port at the intersection, so the player can play with high hopes of hitting a normal symbol during a jackpot game.

In each of the above embodiments, the continuous transformation performance is set for one variable display, but it is not necessary to fit the continuous transformation performance within the variable display time of one variable display, and the continuous transformation performance may be executed over the variable display time of multiple variable displays. In other words, when multiple reserved balls exist at the start of the variation, the configuration may be such that it is determined whether or not to set the continuous transformation performance based on the pre-reading results of each reserved ball (whether each reserved ball is a hit or a hit, the type of variation, etc.), and if it is determined that the continuous transformation performance is set, the continuous transformation performance is continued until which variable display corresponding to which reserved ball. In addition, it may be configured to calculate the performance time of the continuous transformation performance from the pre-reading results of each reserved ball, and set the upper limit number of transformations according to the performance time. By configuring in this way, the performance time of the continuous transformation performance can be made longer, and the upper limit number of success notification modes can be increased. Therefore, since the player can be given more opportunities to display the success notification mode, when the continuous transformation performance is executed, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved. In addition, by configuring the continuous transformation effect to continue across multiple variable displays, it is possible to make it more difficult for players to predict how long the transformation will be successful (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed). This makes it possible to provide an unexpected effect.

In addition, when the continuous transformation performance is continued over the change time of a plurality of change displays, the number of changes until the continuous transformation performance ends and the upper limit number of success notification modes may be increased or decreased according to the progress of the continuous transformation performance (the number of success notification mode displays, the remaining number of changes, the change time of the reserved ball, etc.). This will be explained more specifically by taking as an example a case where the continuous transformation performance is executed over the display period of three change displays including the change (the change + two reserved balls) at the start of the change, and it is determined that the jackpot is notified in the third change display. For example, if the player presses the frame button 22 almost without intervals from the start of the effective operation period, the majority of the effective operation period is shortened, and the display of the upper limit number of success notification modes ends in the middle of the second change display, the continuous transformation performance may be completed in the second change display. And, in the third change display, which was originally supposed to continue the continuous transformation performance, a completely different performance from the continuous transformation performance may be executed. Also, if the final operation effective period of the continuous transformation performance ends immediately after the start of the third change display, for example, the upper limit number of transformations may be increased to prevent the third change display performance time from being left over. In this way, the performance mode can be flexibly changed according to the progress of the continuous transformation performance, making it possible to further diversify the performance mode.

In each of the above embodiments, the continuous transformation effect is set as the effect during the execution of the variable display, but this is not limited to this. For example, the continuous transformation effect may be executed during the execution of a jackpot (for example, 1 to 5 rounds). In this case, for example, the continuous transformation effect may be executed when a jackpot is notified by the same normal pattern (main pattern imitating an even number) being stopped and displayed (i.e., when it is difficult to distinguish whether it is a jackpot A or a jackpot B). And, the more transformations (the number of times the successful notification mode is displayed) in the continuous transformation effect, the higher the expectation of a probability change state (the current jackpot is a jackpot A) after the jackpot ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from becoming merely a task to obtain a promotion, and to make the game during the jackpot more enjoyable.

In this case, the condition for terminating each operation valid period may be, for example, the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the specific winning hole 65a, instead of the pressing of the frame button 22. In this configuration, a player can participate in the continuous transformation performance simply by firing game balls into the specific winning hole 65a to win prize balls during a jackpot. This increases the convenience for the player.

In the above embodiments, the explanation is given on the premise of a continuous transformation performance in which the performance of whether or not the character 811 transforms is executed once or multiple times, but the technical ideas described in the above embodiments are not limited to application to continuous transformation performance. For example, it may be configured to be applied to a performance (single performance) in which one of two types of results (success or failure, victory or defeat, confirmation or miss, etc.) is notified in a single shot. In other words, it may be configured to vary the subsequent display mode and the selection method of the performance period, etc., depending on whether or not a press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation effective period set in the single performance. In addition, it is not necessarily necessary to vary the display mode and the selection method of the performance period, etc., depending on whether a press is detected. In some or all of the operation effective period, a configuration may be configured to display the exact same notification mode (for example, a success notification mode) at the same timing (for example, the end timing of the operation effective period, etc.) when a press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation effective period and when the operation effective period ends without detecting a press. That is, the only difference is that when a frame button 22 is pressed, a notification is given that the press has been detected, and the timing of determining the notification mode and the display timing may be the same. Also, when a press of a frame button 22 is detected, it is not necessary to notify that the press has been detected. Furthermore, it is not necessary to provide a frame button 22 that can be operated (pressed) by the player.

In each of the above embodiments, the continuous transformation effect is configured to be executed as one type of entertainment effect executed in the third pattern display device 81 during the variable display of the special pattern, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be executed as one type of entertainment effect during the execution of a jackpot, as one type of so-called hold notice effect, or during a so-called demo effect.

In each of the above embodiments, the duration of the transition effects and the like is set so that the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variable display of the third pattern coincide, but the end timing does not need to coincide completely and may be flexible. Specifically, for example, the duration of the transition effects and the like may be set so that the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variable display of the third pattern are within a predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds). By configuring in this way, the calculation of the duration of the transition effects and the like can be made approximate, thereby reducing the processing load required for the calculation.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly called a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until a jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value after the jackpot pattern is displayed, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters a predetermined area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, a lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information, and then displays the determined identification information, and that starts the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a lever), stops the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

The above-mentioned embodiments may be combined in whole or in part.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<Feature A Group> (The total valid period is longer than the performance period)
a specific period setting means for setting a specific period based on a predetermined set condition being satisfied during the performance period; a first mode display means for displaying the specific display mode based on a first condition being satisfied during the specific period set by the specific period setting means; and a second mode display means for displaying the specific display mode based on a second condition different from the first condition being satisfied during the specific period before the first condition is satisfied, wherein the specific period setting means sets the specific period of such a length that the performance period ends before the specific display mode is displayed the maximum number of times when the specific display mode is displayed only by the first mode display means during one performance period.

According to the gaming machine A1, a specific effect capable of displaying a specific display mode is executed by a specific effect execution means. The upper limit number of times that a specific display mode is displayed in one specific effect is set by an upper limit number setting means. A specific period is set by a specific period setting means based on a preset setting condition being satisfied during a performance period, and a specific display mode is displayed by a first mode display means based on a first condition being satisfied during the specific period set by the specific period setting means. Meanwhile, a specific display mode is displayed by a second mode display means based on a second condition different from the first condition being satisfied during the specific period before the first condition is satisfied. When a specific display mode is displayed only by the first mode display means during one performance period, a specific period of such length that the performance period ends before the upper limit number of times that the specific display mode is displayed is set by the specific period setting means.

As a result, if a specific display mode is displayed only by the first mode display means during one presentation period, the presentation period for the specific display mode will end before the specific display mode is displayed the maximum number of times, so the player can play the game in the hope that the specific display mode will be displayed by the second mode display means. Therefore, the player can play the game while paying attention to whether or not the second condition is met during the specific period, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine A1, the first mode display means displays the specific display mode based on the lapse of the specific period, and the second mode display means ends the specific period and displays the specific display mode based on the establishment of the second condition during the specific period. Gaming machine A2.

According to gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of gaming machine A1, a specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means based on the lapse of a specific period, while a specific period is ended and a specific display mode is displayed by the second mode display means based on the establishment of a second condition during the specific period. Therefore, the earlier the second condition is established, the earlier the specific display mode can be displayed and the earlier the specific period can be ended. Therefore, the earlier the second condition is established, the easier it is to increase the number of times the specific display mode is displayed in one presentation period, so that there is an effect that a player who wishes to display more of the specific display mode can play the game in the hope that the second condition will be established early.

A gaming machine A3 is characterized in that it is equipped with an operating means operable by a player in the gaming machine A1 or A2, and the second mode display means displays the specific display mode based on detecting a predetermined number of operations on the operating means during one of the specific periods.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines A1 and A2, gaming machine A3 has a second mode display means that displays a specific display mode based on the detection of a predetermined number of operations on the operation means that the player can operate during one specific period, so that a player who wishes to see more specific display modes can actively operate the operation means during the specific period. This has the effect of increasing the player's motivation to participate in specific presentations.

A gaming machine A4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the specific period setting means is capable of setting the specific period based on the end of the display period of the specific display mode.

According to gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines A1 to A3, a specific period is set by the specific period setting means based on the end of the display period of the specific display mode, so that the specific period and the display period of the specific display mode are repeated. Therefore, the earlier the specific period ends, the more times the specific display mode can be displayed, so that when a specific period is set, a player who wishes more specific display modes to be displayed can play the game in the hope that the second condition will be satisfied sooner.

A gaming machine A5, which is any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, is provided with a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means, and the upper limit number setting means sets one number from a plurality of numbers including at least a first number and a second number different from the first number as the upper limit number, and the first number is set at a higher rate than the second number when the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination means.

Gaming machine A5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines A1 to A4. Based on a specific determination result by the determination means, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. One number from a plurality of numbers including at least a first number and a second number different from the first number is set as the upper limit number by the upper limit number setting means. The first number is configured so that when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination means, the proportion of the first number set by the upper limit number setting means is higher than the second number.

As a result, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, the set ratio of the first number of times as the upper limit number of times becomes high, so that the player can infer the judgment result by the judgment means from the upper limit number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that a player who wishes to know the exact upper limit number of times can play during the specific presentation in the strong hope that the second condition will be met.

Gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the first number of times is greater than the second number of times in gaming machine A5.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine A5, gaming machine A6 has the effect of making the player expect that the specific display mode will be displayed at least a number of times greater than the second number of times, since the first number of times is greater than the second number of times. This has the effect of making the player expect that the second condition will be met a greater number of times.

A gaming machine A7 is any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, and is provided with a display means for displaying identification information, a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute a dynamic display of the identification information, and a dynamic display time determination means for determining a dynamic display time for the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the specific effect execution means is capable of executing the specific effect while the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed by the dynamic display execution means.

Gaming machine A7 provides the following effect in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines A1 to A6. That is, the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. While the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed by the dynamic display execution means, a specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means.

This has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored between the time the dynamic display of the identification information is started and the time it ends.

A gaming machine A8 is characterized in that it is provided with a second performance execution means for executing a second performance different from the specific performance after the specific performance ends, and a second performance time determination means for determining the performance time of the second performance executed by the second performance execution means based on the remaining dynamic display time.

According to gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine A7, after the specific effect ends, a second effect different from the specific effect is executed by the second effect execution means. The performance time of the second effect executed by the second effect execution means is determined by the second effect time determination means based on the remaining dynamic display time. Therefore, even if the specific effect ends, the second effect can be executed in the remaining dynamic display time, which has the effect of preventing the player from becoming bored between the end of the specific effect and the end of the dynamic display of the identification information.

<Feature B> (During the transformation performance in 1, the fewer the number of button pushes, the longer the period until the transformation)
A gaming machine B1 comprising: a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in which a specific effect is displayed at least once during one presentation period; a condition determination means for determining whether a predetermined specific condition has been established during at least the previous display of the specific effect mode during one said presentation period; and a display time setting means for determining and setting the display time of the specific effect mode based on the determination result by the condition determination means, wherein the display time setting means is more likely to set a longer display time when it is determined by the condition determination means that the specific condition has not been established than when it is determined that the specific condition has been established.

According to the gaming machine B1, during one presentation period, a specific presentation in which a specific presentation mode is displayed at least once is executed by a specific presentation execution means. During one presentation period, a condition determination means determines whether a predetermined specific condition has been met at least during the display of the previous specific presentation mode, and a display time for the specific presentation mode is determined and set by a display time setting means based on the determination result by the condition determination means. A longer display time is set by the display time setting means more frequently when the condition determination means determines that the specific condition has not been met than when the condition determination means determines that the specific condition has been met.

As a result, if the specific condition is not met, the display time of the specified presentation mode is likely to become longer, and the number of times the specified presentation mode is executed in one presentation period will decrease. Therefore, players who wish to see the specified presentation mode displayed more times can expect the specific condition to be met each time the specified presentation mode is displayed. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game, as the player can focus on whether or not the specific condition is met while playing the game.

Gaming machine B2 is characterized in that it is equipped with an operating means operable by a player in gaming machine B1, and the condition determination means determines that the specific condition has been established when an operation on the operating means is detected.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B1, gaming machine B2 has the effect of having the condition determining means determine that a specific condition has been met by the player operating the operating means, so that a player who wishes to shorten the display time of a specific presentation mode can be made to actively operate the operating means each time the specific presentation mode is displayed. This has the effect of making the player more actively participate in the game.

Gaming machine B3, characterized in that in gaming machine B1 or B2, the condition discrimination means discriminates the number of consecutive occurrences of the predetermined presentation mode in which the specific condition is not satisfied during one presentation period, and the display period setting means sets a higher percentage of long display times as the number of consecutive occurrences discriminated by the condition discrimination means increases.

Gaming machine B3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines B1 and B2. That is, during one presentation period, the number of consecutive occurrences of a predetermined presentation mode in which a specific condition is not satisfied is determined by the condition determination means. The greater the number of consecutive occurrences determined by the condition determination means, the higher the percentage of long display times set by the display period setting means.

As a result, the longer the sequence of predetermined presentation modes in which the specific condition is not met, the easier it is to set a longer display time, and the fewer number of predetermined presentation modes that can be displayed in one presentation period. This has the effect of allowing players who wish to see more predetermined presentation modes to play in the hope that the specific condition will be met each time a predetermined presentation mode is displayed.

A gaming machine B4 is any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, and is characterized by having an upper limit number setting means for setting an upper limit on the number of times the specified presentation mode is displayed during one of the presentation periods.

In game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of game machines B1 to B3, the upper limit of the number of times a specific presentation mode is displayed during one presentation period is set by the upper limit setting means, so that the player can be made to want to see as many presentation modes as possible within the upper limit. This has the effect of allowing the player to focus on whether a specific condition is met while playing the game.

A gaming machine B5 is characterized in that it is provided with an end determination means for determining whether the predetermined presentation mode for the determined display time will end after a predetermined threshold value based on the display time determined by the display time setting means, and an avoidance means for avoiding the setting of the display time determined by the display time setting means based on the end determination means determining that the predetermined presentation mode will end after the threshold value.

Gaming machine B5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines B1 to B4. Based on the display time determined by the display time setting means, the period discrimination means discriminates whether a predetermined presentation mode for the determined display time will end after a predetermined threshold, and based on the determination by the end discrimination means that the predetermined presentation mode will end after the threshold, the avoidance means prevents the display time determined by the display time setting means from being set.

This has the effect of preventing issues with certain effects becoming too long.

Gaming machine B6 is characterized in that it is provided with a setting determination means for determining whether to set the display time to a length shorter than the display time that was avoided from being set when the avoidance means avoids setting the display time in the gaming machine B5.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine B5, gaming machine B6 has the effect that, when the setting of the display time is avoided by the avoidance means, the setting determination means determines whether to set a display time that is shorter than the display time that was avoided from being set, so that more predetermined presentation modes can be displayed without the presentation time of a specific presentation becoming too long.

Gaming machine B7 is characterized in that in gaming machine B6, the display time setting means sets the display time to the shortest length that can be set based on the determination by the setting determination means that the short display time is to be set.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine B6, gaming machine B7 has the effect of more reliably preventing the presentation time of a particular presentation from becoming too long, because the display time setting means sets the shortest possible display time based on the determination made by the setting determination means that a short display time should be set.

Gaming machine B8 is any one of gaming machines B5 to B7, and is characterized by having an end determination means for determining whether to end the specific presentation when the avoidance means prevents the display time from being set.

According to gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines B5 to B7, if the avoidance means prevents the display time from being set, the end determination means determines whether to end the specific presentation, so that if a display time exceeding a predetermined threshold is determined, the end determination means may determine that the specific presentation has ended. This has the effect of allowing the player to play in the hope that the shortest possible display time will be set.

<Feature C Group> (Control that increases the success rate of transformation when the button is pushed compared to when the valid period has elapsed without pushing)
a first mode display discrimination means for discriminating whether a specific display mode is to be displayed based on the determination by the condition discrimination means that the specific condition has been established, whether the specific display mode is to be displayed based on the fact that the determination period has elapsed without the condition discrimination means determining that the specific condition has been established, and a rate setting means for setting a rate at which the first mode display discrimination means discriminates that the specific display mode is to be displayed higher than a rate at which the second mode display discrimination means discriminates that the specific display mode is to be displayed, as a rate at which the first mode display discrimination means discriminates that the specific display mode is to be displayed.

According to the gaming machine C1, the specific performance is executed by the specific performance execution means. In the performance period of one specific performance, the number of times of the discrimination period for executing the predetermined discrimination is determined by the discrimination period number determination means. In the performance period of one specific performance, the discrimination period of the number of times determined by the discrimination period number determination means is set by the discrimination period setting means. As the predetermined discrimination, the condition discrimination means determines whether a predetermined specific condition is established during the discrimination period, and based on the fact that the condition discrimination means determines that the specific condition is established, the first mode display discrimination means determines whether to display a specific display mode. Based on the fact that the discrimination period has elapsed without the condition discrimination means determining that the specific condition is established, the second mode display discrimination means determines whether to display a specific display mode. The ratio setting means sets a ratio higher than the ratio at which the second mode display discrimination means determines that the specific display mode is displayed as the ratio at which the first mode display discrimination means determines that the specific display mode is displayed.

As a result, if the specific condition is met during the discrimination period, the specific display mode will be displayed at a higher rate. This allows players who wish to see the specific display mode to play in the hope that the specific condition will be met. Furthermore, when the specific condition is met, the player can be made to more strongly expect that the specific display mode will be displayed. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game while the specific presentation is being executed.

Gaming machine C2 is characterized in that it is equipped with an operating means that can be operated by a player in gaming machine C1, and the condition determination means determines that the specific condition has been established when an operation on the operating means is detected.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine C1, gaming machine C2 has the effect that, when an operation of an operating means operable by a player is detected, the condition determination means determines that a specific condition has been established, so that by operating the operating means during the determination period, the rate at which a specific display mode is displayed can be increased. This has the effect of encouraging the player to actively operate the operating means.

Gaming machine C3, which is equipped with a discrimination means for discriminating based on the establishment of a discrimination condition in a gaming machine C1 or C2, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result in the discrimination by the discrimination means, the specific effect execution means being configured to be able to execute the specific effect based on the discrimination made by the discrimination means, and the ratio setting means setting a higher ratio for discriminating that the specific display mode will be displayed during the execution of the specific effect executed based on the specific discrimination result than during the execution of the specific effect executed based on the discrimination made by the discrimination means resulting in a loss discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result.

Gaming machine C3 achieves the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines C1 and C2. A determination is made by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result. A specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means based on the determination made by the determination means. The ratio setting means sets a higher ratio for determining that a specific display mode will be displayed during the execution of a specific effect executed based on a specific determination result than during the execution of a specific effect executed based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a loss determination result different from the specific determination result.

This makes it easier for a specific display mode to be displayed when a specific determination result is reached, which has the effect of creating anticipation in the player for a bonus game to be played when a specific display mode is displayed.

In the gaming machine C3, the ratio setting means sets a first ratio as the ratio at which the first mode discrimination means determines that the specific display mode is to be displayed during the execution of the specific performance executed based on the specific discrimination result, sets a second ratio lower than the first ratio as the ratio at which the second mode display discrimination means determines that the specific display mode is to be displayed during the execution of the specific performance executed based on the specific discrimination result, sets a third ratio lower than the first ratio as the ratio at which the first mode display discrimination means determines that the specific display mode is to be displayed during the execution of the specific performance executed based on the loss discrimination result, and sets a fourth ratio lower than the second ratio as the ratio at which the second mode display discrimination means determines that the specific display mode is to be displayed during the execution of the specific performance executed based on the loss discrimination result, and the difference between the first ratio and the third ratio is greater than the difference between the second ratio and the fourth ratio.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, the following effect is achieved. That is, the first rate is set by the rate setting means as the rate at which the first mode discrimination means discriminates that a specific display mode is to be displayed during the execution of a specific performance executed based on a specific discrimination result. The rate setting means sets a second rate lower than the first rate as the rate at which the second mode display discrimination means discriminates that a specific display mode is to be displayed during the execution of a specific performance executed based on a specific discrimination result. The rate setting means sets a third rate lower than the first rate as the rate at which the first mode display discrimination means discriminates that a specific display mode is to be displayed during the execution of a specific performance executed based on a loss discrimination result. The rate setting means sets a fourth rate lower than the second rate as the rate at which the second mode display discrimination means discriminates that a specific display mode is to be displayed during the execution of a specific performance executed based on a loss discrimination result. The difference between the first rate and the third rate is set to be greater than the difference between the second rate and the fourth rate.

This allows the player to recognize that the expectation of a bonus game is higher when it is determined that a specific display mode is to be displayed by the first mode display discrimination means than when it is determined that a specific display mode is to be displayed by the second mode discrimination means. This has the effect of allowing the player to play in the hope that a specific display mode will be displayed after a specific condition is established during the discrimination period.

Gaming machine C5 is characterized in that in gaming machine C3 or C4, the discrimination period count determination means is such that it is easier to set the discrimination period count to a higher number for the specific performance executed based on the specific discrimination result than for the specific performance executed based on the loss discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines C3 and C4, gaming machine C5 has the effect that the number of discrimination periods is more likely to be set by the discrimination period number determination means to be greater for a specific effect executed based on a specific discrimination result than for a specific effect executed based on a loss discrimination result, so that the greater the number of discrimination periods, the greater the player's expectations for the bonus game.

A gaming machine C6 is characterized in that it is provided with a specific effect ending means for ending the specific effect based on the first mode display discrimination means or the second mode display discrimination means determining that the specific display mode is not to be displayed, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5.

According to gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines C1 to C5, the specific presentation is ended by the specific presentation ending means based on whether the first presentation type discrimination means or the second presentation type discrimination means has determined that the specific presentation type will not be displayed, so that players who wish to enjoy the specific presentation for longer can have a stronger expectation that the specific presentation type will be displayed. This has the effect of allowing players to play with a stronger hope that the specific condition will be met during the discrimination period.

A gaming machine C6, comprising a display means for displaying identification information, a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute a dynamic display of the identification information, and a dynamic display time setting means for setting a dynamic display time for the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, the specific performance execution means executing the specific performance within the range of the dynamic display time set by the dynamic display time setting means, a remaining time determination means for determining the remaining dynamic display time based on whether the first mode display determination means or the second mode display determination means has determined that the specific display mode is not to be displayed, and a performance time determination means for determining the performance time of a performance to be executed after the specific performance is ended by the specific performance ending means based on the remaining dynamic display time determined by the remaining time determination means.

Gaming machine C7 provides the following effects in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine C6. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is set by the dynamic display time setting means. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means within the range of the dynamic display time set by the dynamic display time setting means. The remaining dynamic display time is determined by the remaining time determination means based on whether the first mode display determination means or the second mode display determination means has determined that the specific display mode is not to be displayed. The performance time determination means determines the performance time of the performance to be executed after the specific effect is ended by the specific effect ending means based on the remaining dynamic display time determined by the remaining time determination means.

This has the effect that, in the dynamic display of one identification information, the effect can be executed appropriately in the remaining dynamic display time after the specific effect ends, regardless of the timing of the end of the specific effect.

Gaming machine C8 is characterized in that in gaming machine C7, the presentation time determination means determines one presentation time from among a plurality of different presentation times that are predefined, within a range in which the end timing of the presentation does not exceed the dynamic display time.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine C7, gaming machine C8 has the effect of reducing the processing load when determining the presentation time, since a presentation time determination means determines one presentation time from among a number of different presentation times that are predefined, within a range in which the timing at which the presentation ends does not exceed the dynamic display time.

<Feature D group> (Whether or not transformation can be performed and the performance mode after the transformation performance are changed depending on the remaining change time and the number of transformations when the button is pushed)
a specific display mode execution means for executing a specific display mode consisting of at least a first display mode in one display period and a second display mode executed after the first display mode has ended; an upper limit number setting means for setting an upper limit number of times that the specific display mode will be displayed in one of the first displays; a discrimination period setting means for setting a specific discrimination period in which it is determined whether a predetermined specific condition has been established or not, one or more times during the execution of the first display mode; a first mode display means for displaying the specific display mode based on the lapse of the specific discrimination period; a second mode display means for terminating the specific discrimination period and displaying the specific display mode based on the specific condition being established during the specific discrimination period; a mode display number counting means for counting the number of times that the specific display mode has been displayed during the execution of one of the first displays; and a performance time determination means for determining a performance time of the second display mode based on at least one of the number of times that the display mode has been counted by the mode number counting means and the remaining performance period during the execution of the first display mode.

According to the gaming machine D1, a specific performance consisting of at least a first performance in which a specific performance mode is displayed at least once during one performance period and a second performance executed after the end of the first performance is executed by a specific performance execution means. The upper limit number of times that the specific display mode is displayed during one first performance is set by an upper limit number setting means. A specific judgment period in which it is judged whether a predetermined specific condition is established is set one or more times during the execution of the first performance by a judgment period setting means. Based on the lapse of the specific judgment period, a specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means. Based on the establishment of a specific condition during the specific judgment period, the specific judgment period is ended by the second mode display means and a specific display mode is displayed. The number of times that the specific display mode is displayed during the execution of one first performance is counted by a mode display number counting means. During the execution of the first performance, the performance time of the second performance is determined by a performance time determination means based on at least one of the number of times counted by the mode number counting means and the remaining performance period.

This allows the duration of the second effect to vary depending on the situation of the first effect, which has the effect of diversifying the variations in a particular effect.

A gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the gaming machine D1 is provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player, the discrimination period setting means sets a period during which an operation on the operating means is valid as the specific discrimination period, and the specific condition is met when an operation on the operating means is detected.

Gaming machine D2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine D1. That is, a period during which an operation on the operating means is valid is set by the determination period setting means as a specific determination period. When an operation on the operating means is detected, a specific condition is established.

This has the effect of encouraging players who wish to display the second performance, which has a longer duration, to actively operate the operating means.

Gaming machine D3, which is a gaming machine D1 or D2, is provided with a display means for displaying identification information, a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute a dynamic display of the identification information, and a dynamic display time determination means for determining a dynamic display time for the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect within the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means, and the effect time determination means determines the effect mode of the second effect based on at least one of the number of times of display counted by the mode number counting means and the remaining dynamic display time.

Gaming machine D3 provides the following effects in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines D1 and D2. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. Within the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means, a specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means. The effect mode of the second effect is determined by the effect time determination means based on at least one of the number of displays counted by the mode number counting means and the remaining dynamic display time.

This allows specific effects to be executed within the dynamic display time while the dynamic display of the identification information is in progress, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest while the dynamic display of the identification information is in progress.

Gaming machine D4 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines D1 to D3, the presentation time determination means determines, from among a plurality of different presentation times defined as the presentation time of the second presentation, the longest presentation time within a range in which the second presentation ends before the presentation period of the specific presentation ends.

According to gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines D1 to D3, the longest presentation time in the range in which the second presentation ends before the presentation period of the specific presentation ends is determined by the presentation time determination means from among a plurality of different presentation times defined as the presentation time of the second presentation, so that the presentation time of the second presentation can be made longer. This has the effect of further increasing the interest of the player.

Among the gaming machines D1 to D4, the specific effect is configured to include a third effect that is different from both the first effect and the second effect, and the gaming machine D5 is characterized in that it is equipped with a third effect time determination means that determines the effect time of the third effect based on at least one of the effect time determined by the effect time determination means and the remaining effect period.

Gaming machine D5 produces the following effect in addition to the effect produced by any of gaming machines D1 to D4. That is, a third effect different from both the first effect and the second effect is included in the specific effect. The performance time of the third effect is determined by the third performance time determination means based on at least one of the performance time determined by the performance time determination means and the remaining performance period.

This allows a third performance that is different from both the first and second performances to be executed while a specific performance is being executed, which has the effect of diversifying the performance patterns during execution of the specific performance.

Gaming machine D6 is characterized in that in gaming machine D5, the third performance is executed after the first performance ends and before the second performance starts, and the third performance time determination means determines the performance time of the third performance based on the difference between the remaining performance period at the time when the first performance ends and the performance time determined by the performance time determination means.

According to gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of gaming machine D5, a third effect is executed after the first effect ends and before the second effect starts. The third effect time determination means determines the performance time of the third effect based on the difference between the remaining performance period at the time the first effect ends and the performance time determined by the performance time determination means.

This has the effect of allowing the first, second, and third effects to be executed in accordance with the performance period of a specific effect.

Gaming machine D7 is any one of gaming machines D1 to D6, and is characterized by having a presentation mode determination means for determining the presentation mode of the second presentation based on the number of times of display counted by the number of times of presentation counting means.

According to gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect produced by any of gaming machines D1 to D6, the presentation mode of the second presentation is determined by the presentation mode determination means based on the number of times displayed counted by the number of times of presentation counting means, so that the player can be given the impression that the first presentation and the second presentation are related. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in playing a specific presentation.

Gaming machine D7 is characterized in that it is provided with a storage means for storing execution information used to execute the second performance for each performance mode of the second performance, a selection means for selecting the corresponding execution information from the storage means based on the performance mode determined by the performance mode determination means, and a specification means for specifying a range of the execution information selected by the selection means to be used in the execution of the second performance this time based on the performance time determined by the performance time determination means, and a second performance execution means for executing the second performance based on the execution information of the range specified by the specification means.

Gaming machine D8 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine D7. That is, execution information used to execute the second performance is stored in storage means for each performance mode of the second performance. Based on the performance mode determined by the performance mode determination means, corresponding execution information is selected from the storage means by selection means. Based on the performance time determined by the performance time determination means, the determination means identifies the range of execution information selected by the selection means to be used for executing the current second performance. Based on the range of execution information identified by the determination means, the second performance is executed by the second performance execution means.

This allows multiple second performances with different performance times to be executed from each execution information, which has the advantage of reducing the memory area required to store the execution information compared to storing execution information separately for each performance time.

<Feature E group> (The expected degree is suggested differently depending on the tendency of the button push)
a specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance in which a predetermined performance mode is displayed multiple times during one performance period; a performance mode determination means for determining one performance mode from a plurality of modes previously determined as the predetermined performance mode based on the establishment of a predetermined display condition during the execution of the specific performance by the specific performance execution means; a performance mode setting means for setting the display of the performance mode determined by the performance mode determination means; a specific discrimination means for executing a specific discrimination during one of the performance periods; and a determination ratio variable means for varying a performance mode which has a high probability of being determined by the performance mode determination means when determining at least one of the predetermined performance modes, depending on the discrimination result by the specific discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine E1, a specific presentation in which a predetermined presentation mode is displayed multiple times during one presentation period is executed by a specific presentation execution means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined display condition during the execution of a specific presentation by the specific presentation execution means, one presentation mode is determined from multiple modes previously determined as the predetermined presentation mode by a presentation mode determination means. The display of the presentation mode determined by the presentation mode determination means is set by a presentation mode setting means. A specific determination is executed by a specific determination means during one presentation period, and in accordance with the determination result by the specific determination means, a presentation mode that is determined with a high probability by the presentation mode determination means is varied by a determination ratio varying means when at least one predetermined presentation mode is determined.

This makes it easier to determine different presentation modes depending on the results of the specific discrimination means, so the impression of the specific presentation can be made to differ depending on the results of the specific discrimination. This has the effect of providing presentations that players are unlikely to tire of.

A gaming machine E2, comprising a condition determination means for determining whether a predetermined specific condition is established while the specific presentation mode is displayed in the gaming machine E1, the specific determination means determining the result of the determination by the condition determination means executed in at least one of the specific presentation modes set in one presentation period as the specific determination, and the determination ratio variable means varying the presentation mode that has a high ratio of being determined by the presentation mode determination means for the specific presentation modes set by the presentation mode setting means after the specific presentation mode that was the subject of determination by the specific determination means in one presentation period.

Gaming machine E2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine E1. That is, the condition determination means determines whether a predetermined specific condition is established while a specific presentation mode is displayed. As the specific determination, the specific determination means determines the determination result by the condition determination means executed in at least one specific presentation mode set in one presentation period. During one presentation period, for the specific presentation modes set by the presentation mode setting means after the specific presentation mode that was the subject of determination by the specific determination means, the determination ratio variable means varies the presentation mode that is determined more frequently by the presentation mode determination means.

As a result, while the specified presentation mode that is the subject of discrimination by the specific discrimination means is displayed, the player can play the game while paying attention to the discrimination status by the specific discrimination means, while in the specified presentation mode that is set thereafter, the player can play the game while paying attention to which presentation mode is displayed. Therefore, since the points to focus on can be changed depending on the timing at which the specified presentation mode is set, there is an effect of further increasing the interest during the execution of the specific presentation.

In the gaming machine E2, the specific discrimination means discriminates, as the specific discrimination, the number of times that the specific presentation mode is determined by the condition determination means to have been established among at least one of the specific presentation modes set in one presentation period. Gaming machine E3.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine E2, gaming machine E3 has a specific determination function that determines the number of times a specific performance mode that is determined by the condition determination means to have a specific condition established among at least one specific performance mode set in one performance period, so that the performance mode that is likely to be set can be varied depending on the number of times the specific condition is established. This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game while paying attention to the number of times the specific condition is established.

Gaming machine E4 is any one of gaming machines E1 to E3, and is equipped with an operation means that can be operated by a player, and the specific condition is met when an operation on the operation means is detected while the predetermined presentation mode is being displayed.

According to gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect provided by any of gaming machines E1 to E3, if an operation on the operating means is detected while a specific presentation mode is being displayed, a specific condition is met, so the presentation mode can be changed depending on whether or not the player operates the operating means. Therefore, since the presentation mode can be changed according to the player's selection, it has the effect of providing a presentation that is less likely to become boring.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination by the discrimination means resulting in a specific discrimination result, the specific performance execution means executes the specific performance based on the discrimination by the discrimination means, the determination ratio variable means, when the discrimination result by the specific discrimination means is a first discrimination result and the specific performance executed based on the specific discrimination result is being executed, varies the ratio of determining the first mode to be higher than other performance modes when determining the predetermined performance mode to be displayed a predetermined number of times when the discrimination result by the specific discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result and the specific performance executed based on the specific discrimination result is being executed, When the specific performance is being executed based on the fact that the result of the determination by the specific discrimination means is the first discrimination result and that the result of the determination is a miss discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result, the rate at which the second mode is determined to be higher than the other performance modes is variable when determining the specific performance to be displayed the specific number of times during a row, and when the specific performance is being executed based on the fact that the result of the determination by the specific discrimination means is the second discrimination result and that the result of the determination is a miss discrimination result, the rate at which the first mode is determined to be higher than the other performance modes is variable when determining the specific performance to be displayed the specific number of times during a row, and when the specific performance is being executed based on the fact that the result of the determination by the specific discrimination means is the second discrimination result and that the result of the determination is a miss discrimination result, the rate at which the first mode is determined to be higher than the other performance modes is variable when determining the specific performance to be displayed the specific number of times.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effect is achieved. That is, a determination is made by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result. A specific performance is executed by the specific performance execution means based on the determination by the determination means being executed. When the determination result by the specific determination means is a first determination result and a specific performance executed based on the specific determination result is being executed, the determination ratio variable means is varied so that the ratio of determining the first mode is higher than the other performance modes when determining a specific performance mode to be displayed at a predetermined specific number of times. When the determination result by the specific determination means is a second determination result different from the first determination result and a specific performance executed based on the specific determination result is being executed, the determination ratio variable means is varied so that the ratio of determining the machine 2 mode different from the first mode is higher than the other performance modes when determining a specific performance mode to be displayed at a specific number of times. When the result of the determination by the specific determination means is the first determination result, and when a specific performance is being performed based on the result of a failure determination different from the specific determination result, the determination ratio variable means varies the ratio of determining the second mode to be higher than the other performance modes when determining a specific performance mode to be displayed a specific number of times.When the result of the determination by the specific determination means is the second determination result, and when a specific performance is being performed based on the result of a failure determination, the determination ratio variable means varies the ratio of determining the first mode to be higher than the other performance modes when determining a specific performance mode to be displayed a specific number of times.

This allows the player to guess the likelihood of winning a bonus game based on the result of the determination by the specific determination means and the specified presentation mode for the specific number of times. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine E6 is characterized in that it is provided with a condition determination means for determining whether a predetermined specific condition is established while the predetermined presentation mode is being displayed in gaming machine E1, and the specific determination means performs the specific determination based on a determination result by the condition determination means executed in at least one of the specific presentations executed prior to the current specific presentation.

Gaming machine E6 produces the following effect in addition to the effect produced by gaming machine E1. That is, the condition determination means determines whether a predetermined specific condition is met while a specific presentation mode is being displayed. As a specific determination, the specific determination means performs a determination based on the result of a determination by the condition determination means performed in at least one specific presentation performed prior to the current specific presentation.

This has the effect of diversifying the presentation modes, since the presentation mode in the current specific presentation can be changed depending on the judgment result of the condition judgment means in the previously executed specific presentation.

Gaming machine E7 is characterized in that in gaming machine E6, the specific discrimination means performs discrimination based on the number of times the specific performance mode was displayed in at least one of the specific performances executed prior to the current specific performance, and the number of times the specific performance mode was displayed for which the condition discrimination means determined that the specific condition was met.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine E6, gaming machine E7 has the effect of allowing a player to play a game while paying attention to the number of times the specified presentation mode was displayed in at least one specific presentation executed prior to the current specific presentation, and the number of times the specified presentation mode was displayed for which the condition determination means determined that the specific condition was met.

Gaming machine E8 is characterized in that it is equipped with an identification means for identifying the player playing the game in gaming machine E7, and the specific determination means performs the determination based on the number of times the predetermined presentation mode is displayed while the identification means identifies the same player as playing the game, and the number of times the predetermined presentation mode is displayed for which the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is established.

Gaming machine E8 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine E7. That is, the player playing the game is identified by the identification means. A determination is made by the identification discrimination means based on the number of times a predetermined presentation mode is displayed while the identification means identifies the same player as playing the game, and the number of times a predetermined presentation mode is displayed for which the condition determination means determines that a specific condition has been established.

This has the effect of allowing the tendency for the presentation style to be set to vary depending on the game results of each player, thereby providing presentations that are suited to each player.

<Feature F group> (adjusting the connection between the first half and the second half of the performance)
a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect, which is composed of at least a first effect and a second effect executed after the first effect, within one effect period; an end condition determination means for determining whether a predetermined end condition has been established during execution of the first effect; a first effect end means for ending the first effect based on the end condition determination means determining that the end condition has been established; a period setting means for setting the length of the period from when the first effect is ended by the first effect end means to when the second effect is started based on at least the remaining length of the effect period; and an effect start means for starting the second effect based on the elapse of the period set by the period setting means.

According to the gaming machine F1, a specific effect consisting of at least a first effect and a second effect executed after the first effect is executed by a specific effect execution means within one effect period. During execution of the first effect, an end condition determination means determines whether a predetermined end condition has been met, and the first effect is ended by a first effect end means based on the end condition determination means determining that the end condition has been met. The length of the period from when the first effect is ended by the first effect end means to when the second effect is started is set by a period setting means based on at least the length of the remaining effect period. Based on the lapse of the period set by the period setting means, a second effect is started by a performance start means.

This allows the period between the end of the first performance and the start of the second performance to be varied according to the remaining performance time, which has the effect of allowing a specific performance to be executed optimally.

In the gaming machine F1, the period setting means sets the length of the period from the end of the first performance to the start of the second performance, so that the second performance ends before the first performance period ends. Gaming machine F2.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine F1, gaming machine F2 has the effect of being able to execute a specific performance more optimally because the length of the period between the end of the first performance and the start of the second performance is set by the period setting means so that the length of the second performance ends before the end of the first performance period.

A gaming machine F3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine F1 or F2, a type selection means is provided for selecting, as the second effect, one of a plurality of effect types having at least different effect times, and the period setting means sets the length of the period between the end of the first effect and the start of the second effect based on the effect time of the effect type selected by the type selection means.

Gaming machine F3 produces the following effect in addition to the effect produced by gaming machines F1 and F2. That is, as the second effect, one effect type is selected by the type selection means from among a plurality of effect types having at least different effect periods. Based on the effect period of the effect type selected by the type selection means, the length of the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect is set by the period setting means.

This allows the start timing of the second performance to be set according to the performance time of the second performance, which has the effect of allowing the second performance to be executed more optimally.

A gaming machine F4 is characterized in that it is provided with an upper limit number setting means for setting an upper limit of the number of times a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in one of the first performances, and a number counting means for counting the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during execution of one of the first performances, and the end condition is satisfied at least when the number of times counted by the number counting means is equal to or greater than the upper limit number set by the upper limit setting means.

Gaming machine F4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines F1 to F3. That is, in the first performance of 1, an upper limit on the number of times a predetermined specific condition is met is set by an upper limit number setting means. The number of times the specific condition is met during the execution of the first performance of 1 is counted by a number counting means. At least the end condition is met when the number of times counted by the number counting means is equal to or greater than the upper limit number set by the upper limit setting means.

This has the effect of making it possible to suitably set the start of the second performance even if the end timing of the first performance varies depending on the upper limit number set by the upper limit setting means.

A gaming machine F4, comprising: an operating means operable by a player; an effective operation period setting means for setting an effective operation period during which an operation on the operating means is effective one or more times during execution of the first presentation; a first mode display means for displaying a specific display mode based on the lapse of the effective operation period set by the effective operation period setting means; and a second mode display means for terminating the effective operation period and displaying the specific display mode based on the detection of an operation on the operating means during one of the effective operation periods set by the effective operation period setting means, wherein the specific condition is met when the specific display mode is displayed.

Gaming machine F5 provides the following effects in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine F4. That is, a valid operation period during which an operation on an operation means operable by a player is valid is set by the valid operation period setting means one or more times during execution of the first presentation. A specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means based on the lapse of the valid operation period set by the valid operation period setting means. The valid operation period is terminated by the second mode display means and a specific display mode is displayed based on the detection of an operation on the operation means during one valid operation period set by the valid operation period setting means. A specific condition is met when a specific display mode is displayed.

This has the effect of varying the end timing of the effective operation period depending on the timing at which the player operates the operating means, so that even if the end timing of the first performance is variable, the start of the second performance can be suitably set.

A gaming machine F6, which is any one of gaming machines F1 to F5, is characterized by comprising: a third effect execution means for executing a third effect different from either the first effect or the second effect during the period of time set by the period setting means; effect data storage means for storing effect data for executing the third effect; data reading means for reading one of the effect data from the effect data storage means based on the length of the period set by the period setting means; and data range setting means for setting, from the one of the effect data read by the data reading means, data within a range according to the length of the period set by the period setting means as data for executing the third effect.

Gaming machine F6 produces the following effect in addition to the effect produced by any of gaming machines F1 to F5. That is, a third effect different from both the first effect and the second effect is executed by the third effect execution means for a period of a length set by the period setting means. Effect data for executing the third effect is stored in the effect data storage means. Based on the length of the period set by the period setting means, one piece of effect data is read out from the effect data storage means by the data reading means. Of the one piece of effect data read out by the data reading means, data within a range according to the length of the period set by the period setting means is set as data for executing the third effect by the data range setting means.

This has the effect of preventing the amount of data required to execute the third performance from increasing because data with a different duration can be set based on one performance data when executing the third performance.

Gaming machine F7, characterized in that in gaming machine F6, at least a portion of the performance data is composed of data for displaying a specific still image, and the data range setting means sets the range of data for executing the third performance so that the display time of the specific still image varies depending on the length of the period set by the period setting means.

Gaming machine F7 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine F6. That is, at least a portion of the performance data is composed of data for displaying a specific still image. The data range for executing the third performance is set by the data range setting means so that the display time of the specific still image varies according to the length of the period set by the period setting means.

As a result, even if the presentation time of the third presentation is variable, only the display time of a specific still image is changed, which has the effect of preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable about the displayed content.

A gaming machine F8 is any one of gaming machines F1 to F7, and is characterized in that it comprises a display means capable of displaying identification information, a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute a dynamic display of the identification information, and a dynamic display time determination means for determining a dynamic display time for the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect within the determined dynamic display time based on the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means.

Gaming machine F8 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by any of gaming machines F1 to F7. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by a dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display time of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by a dynamic display time determination means. Based on the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means, a specific effect is executed by a specific effect execution means within the determined dynamic display time.

This has the effect of allowing specific effects to be executed within the dynamic display time.

<Feature Group G> (Adjusting the behavior after the end of a performance with an indefinite duration)
a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect including at least a predetermined first effect during one effect period; an end condition determination means for determining whether a predetermined end condition has been established before the effect period elapses while the first effect is being executed; an effect end means for ending the first effect based on the end condition determination means determining that the end condition has been established; and an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode from the end of the first effect by the effect end means to the end of the effect period based on at least the length of the remaining effect period.

According to the gaming machine G1, during one presentation period, a specific presentation including at least a predetermined first presentation is executed by a specific presentation execution means. During the execution of the first presentation, a presentation condition determination means determines whether a predetermined end condition is met before the presentation period elapses. Based on the end condition determination means determining that the end condition is met, the first presentation is ended by a presentation end means. The presentation mode from the end of the first presentation by the presentation end means to the end of the presentation period is set by a presentation mode setting means based on at least the length of the remaining presentation period.

This allows you to set the presentation style according to the length of the remaining presentation time, which has the effect of allowing you to execute a specific presentation in an optimal way.

A gaming machine G2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine G1, a type selection means is provided for selecting one type from among a plurality of types of the presentation modes, each of which has at least a different presentation time, as the presentation mode set by the mode setting means.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine G1, gaming machine G2 has the effect that, as the presentation mode set by the mode setting means, at least one type is selected by the type selection means from among a plurality of presentation mode types with different presentation times, so that a presentation mode with a presentation time that matches the length of the remaining presentation period can be set.

A gaming machine G3, which is characterized by having a period setting means for setting the period from the end of the first performance to the start of the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means, based on the performance time of the performance mode selected by the type selection means and the length of the remaining performance period.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine G2, gaming machine G3 has the effect of being able to suitably set the interval between the first performance and the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means, because the period setting means sets the period from when the first performance ends to when the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means starts, based on the performance time of the performance mode selected by the type selection means and the length of the remaining performance period.

A gaming machine G3, characterized in that the period setting means sets the period so that the timing at which the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means ends and the timing at which the presentation period ends are within a predetermined period. A gaming machine G4.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine G3, gaming machine G4 has the effect of being able to suitably set the end timing of the presentation mode, since the period setting means sets the period so that the timing at which the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means ends and the timing at which the presentation period ends are within a predetermined period.

Gaming machine G5 is characterized in that in gaming machine G3 or G4, the period setting means sets the period to the difference between the length of the remaining presentation period at the time when the first presentation ends and the presentation time of the presentation mode of the type selected by the type selection means.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine G3 or G4, gaming machine G5 has the effect of matching the end timing of the presentation period and the end timing of the presentation mode, since the difference between the length of the remaining presentation period at the time when the first presentation ends and the presentation time of the presentation mode selected by the type selection means is set by the period setting means.

A gaming machine G6 is characterized in that it is provided with a storage means for storing performance data used to execute the performance mode in the gaming machine G1, and the performance mode setting means selects and sets a range of data from one of the performance data that corresponds to the length of the remaining performance period.

Gaming machine G6 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine G1. That is, the performance data used to execute the performance mode is stored in the storage means. Of the performance data, the range of data corresponding to the length of the remaining performance period is selected and set by the performance mode setting means.

This allows multiple performance modes with different performance times to be set from a single performance data, which has the effect of reducing the amount of data required to display the performance modes.

A gaming machine G7 is characterized in that it is provided with a data selection means for selecting one of the performance data to be used for setting the performance mode by the performance mode setting means from the multiple performance data stored in the storage means, and the performance mode setting means selects and sets a range of data corresponding to the length of the remaining performance period from the one of the performance data selected by the data selection means.

Gaming machine G7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine G6. That is, one piece of performance data to be used for setting the performance mode by the performance mode setting means is selected by the data selection means from the multiple performance data stored in the storage means. Of the one piece of performance data selected by the data selection means, the range of data corresponding to the length of the remaining performance period is selected and set by the performance mode setting means.

This has the effect of diversifying the presentation style.

A gaming machine G8 is characterized in that it is provided with a discrimination means for making a judgment based on the establishment of a discrimination condition in a gaming machine G7, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on a specific judgment result obtained in the judgment by the discrimination means, and the data selection means selects one of the performance data from the storage means based on at least the judgment result by the discrimination means.

Gaming machine G8 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine G7. That is, a determination is made by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result. One piece of performance data is selected from the storage means by the data selection means based on at least the determination result by the determination means.

This allows the player to predict whether or not a bonus play will occur based on the presentation mode, which has the effect of encouraging the player to pay more attention to the presentation mode when playing.

<Feature Group H> (The time it takes for a ball hit from the right to reach the attacker is longer than when the ball is hit from the left)
a first flow path through which a gaming ball launched in a first direction can flow down; a second flow path through which a gaming ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can flow down; a ball entry means provided at a position where at least a gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path and a gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter; and a bonus granting means that grants a predetermined bonus based on a gaming ball entering the ball entry means, wherein the second flow path is configured so that the period until a gaming ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entry means is longer than the period until a gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, transition to a winning state in which the large prize opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times if the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting prize opening is a winning one. In such conventional gaming machines, a predetermined number of prize balls are awarded each time a gaming ball enters the large prize opening during the winning state, so that the player can enjoy the winning state as part of their gameplay.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, in order to make the gaming ball enter the big prize opening, it is necessary to shoot the gaming ball in a direction that is determined for each gaming machine, which creates the problem that the game becomes monotonous during the winning state.

In contrast, according to gaming machine H1, a gaming ball launched in a first direction flows down a first flow path, and a gaming ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction flows down a second flow path. A ball entry means is provided at a position where at least a gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path and a gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter. A predetermined bonus is granted by a bonus granting means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the ball entry means. The second flow path is configured so that the period until a gaming ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entry means is longer than the period until a gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means.

This allows players who want the game ball to reach the ball entry means as quickly as possible to shoot the game ball toward the first flow path, while players who want the game ball to reach the ball entry means over a relatively long period of time can shoot the game ball toward the second flow path. This has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous, as each player can select the shooting direction of their choice to play.

Gaming machine H2 is characterized in that in gaming machine H1, the ball entry means is disposed at a position where the rate at which gaming balls that flow down the second flow path enter the ball is higher than the rate at which gaming balls that flow down the first flow path enter the ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H1, gaming machine H2 has the ball entry means located at a position where the proportion of game balls that flow down the second flow path that enter the ball is higher than the proportion of game balls that flow down the first flow path that enter the ball, so when a ball flows down the first flow path, the time it takes to reach the ball entry means is shorter, but it becomes more difficult for the ball to enter the ball entry means. On the other hand, when a ball flows down the second flow path, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the ball entry means, but the time it takes to reach the ball entry means is longer. This has the effect of allowing the player to select the launch direction that suits their own preferences.

Gaming machine H3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a deceleration means for decelerating the flow speed of gaming balls flowing down the second flow path in gaming machine H1 or H2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines H1 and H2, gaming machine H3 has the effect that the speed at which the gaming ball flows down the second flow path is slowed down by the deceleration means, so that the period until a gaming ball shot in the second direction reaches the ball entry means can be made longer than the period until a gaming ball shot in the first direction reaches the ball entry means.

A gaming machine H4 is characterized by comprising: a variable means capable of varying the ball entry means between a first position where the ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the ball entry means than the first position; a discrimination means for discriminating based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means varies from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means.

Gaming machine H4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines H1 to H3. That is, the variable means is variable between a first position where the gaming ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the ball entry means than the first position. A determination is made by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition. Based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination means, a variable game is executed by the variable game execution means in which the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times.

This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game in the hope that a specific judgment result will be obtained through the judgment by the judgment means.

A gaming machine H4, comprising: a launching means capable of launching game balls in the first direction and the second direction at a launching interval equal to or greater than a specific launching interval; a first variable control means for varying the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined number of game balls or more having entered the ball entry means since the variable means was varied from the second position to the first position during the execution of the variable game; and a second variable control means for varying the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined specific period having elapsed since the variable means was varied from the second position to the first position during the execution of the variable game, the specific period being at least longer than the period from the start of launching game balls in the second direction to the end of the specific number of game balls launched in the second direction at the specific launching interval flowing down the second flow path.

Gaming machine H5 has the following effects in addition to those of gaming machine H4. That is, the launching means is configured to be capable of launching gaming balls in the first direction and the second direction at a launch interval equal to or greater than the specific launch interval. During the execution of a variable game, the first variable control means changes the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined specific number or more of gaming balls entering the ball entry means after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position. During the execution of a variable game, the second variable control means changes the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined specific period having elapsed after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position. The specific period is configured to be at least longer than the period from the start of launching gaming balls in the second direction to the end of the specific number of gaming balls launched in the second direction at the specific launch interval flowing down the second flow path.

As a result, when game balls are launched in the second direction during variable play, a specific number of game balls can be made to enter the ball entry means before the specific period has elapsed, which has the effect of preventing the player from incurring losses.

In the gaming machine H4, the variable game execution means controls the variable means to be variable in a specific variable pattern including a first variable action, in which the variable means is changed to the first position a predetermined number of times after a first period has elapsed since the variable means was changed to the first position, when a specific condition is met during the execution of the variable game, and the execution period of one or more of the first variable actions in the specific variable pattern is such that a gaming ball launched in the first direction after the specific variable pattern is started can reach a target, and a gaming ball launched in the second direction after the specific variable pattern is started cannot reach a target. Gaming machine H6.

Gaming machine H6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine H4. That is, when a specific condition is met during execution of a variable game, the variable means is controlled by the variable game execution means to be variable in a specific variable pattern including a predetermined number of first variable actions in which the variable means is changed to a first position and then a predetermined first period has elapsed after the variable means is changed to a second position. The execution period of one or more first variable actions in the specific variable pattern is such that a gaming ball launched in a first direction after the specific variable pattern is started can reach the target, and a gaming ball launched in a second direction after the specific variable pattern is started cannot reach the target.

As a result, when the game ball is shot in the second direction, there is less opportunity for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than when the game ball is shot in the first direction, which has the effect of making the player want to shoot in the first direction.

Gaming machine H7 is characterized in that it is equipped with a game state setting means for setting a first game state as the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed in the case where a game ball does not enter the ball entry means in one of the variable games, and for setting a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state in the case where a game ball enters the ball entry means in one of the variable games.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H6, gaming machine H7 has the following effect: if the gaming ball does not enter the ball entry means in one variable game, the gaming state setting means sets a first gaming state as the gaming state after the execution of the variable game is completed; on the other hand, if the gaming ball enters the ball entry means in one variable game, the gaming state setting means sets a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. This has the effect of allowing the player to pay more attention to whether the gaming ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game.

In the gaming machine H6 or H7, the first flow path allows the game ball that has flowed down to reach the ball entry means from a third direction, and the second flow path allows the game ball that has flowed down to reach the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the third direction, the variable means is configured so that the game ball can flow down its upper surface while it is changed to the second position, and is arranged at an incline so that the fourth direction side is higher than the third direction side, the ball entry means allows the game ball to enter from above when the variable means is changed to the first position, and is blocked from above by the variable means when the variable means is changed to the second position, and the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by sliding in a direction from the fourth direction side toward the third direction side. Gaming machine H8.

Gaming machine H8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine H6 or H7. That is, while the gaming ball that flows down the first flow path reaches the ball entry means from the third direction, the gaming ball that flows down the second flow path reaches the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the third direction. The variable means is configured so that the gaming ball can flow down its upper surface while it is changed to the second position, and is tilted so that the fourth direction side is higher than the third direction side. The ball entry means is configured so that the gaming ball can enter from above when the variable means is changed to the first position. Also, when the variable means is changed to the second position, the upper part of the ball entry means is blocked by the variable means. The variable means changes from the second position to the first position by sliding in a direction from the fourth direction side toward the third direction side.

As a result, while the variable means is being changed to the first position, it becomes more difficult for a game ball arriving from the third direction to enter the ball entry means, while it becomes easier for a game ball arriving from the fourth direction to enter the ball. This has the effect of increasing the likelihood that a game ball that reaches the ball entry means will enter the ball entry means when the game ball is launched in the second direction rather than in the first direction during variable play.

<Characteristic Group I> (When you hit the jackpot, hitting the right hand side will be more advantageous than hitting the left hand side in some ways, but more disadvantageous than hitting the left hand side in other ways.)
a launching means for launching at least a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction; a discrimination means for making a judgment based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on a specific judgment result obtained by the discrimination means; a first element advantage means for making a first element related to the player's degree of advantage in the bonus game more advantageous to the player if the game ball is continuously launched in the first direction than if the game ball is continuously launched in the second direction during a specific period included in the execution period of the bonus game; and a second element advantage means for making a second element different from the first element more advantageous to the player if the game ball is continuously launched in the second direction during the specific period than if the game ball is continuously launched in the first direction.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, transition to a winning state in which the large prize opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times if the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting prize opening is a winning one. In such conventional gaming machines, by allowing a gaming ball to enter the large prize opening during a winning state, a predetermined benefit that is advantageous to the player, such as a prize ball, is awarded, so that the winning state can be one of the enjoyments for the player while playing the game.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, in order to make the gaming ball enter the big prize opening, it is necessary to shoot the gaming ball in a direction that is determined for each gaming machine, and since the degree of advantage in the winning state (the amount of a predetermined bonus that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the winning state will simply become a task of continuing to shoot the gaming ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem with conventional gaming machines in that it is difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

In contrast, according to gaming machine I1, the launching means is configured to be capable of launching game balls at least in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. A determination is made by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result. The first element advantageous means determines that a first element relating to the player's degree of advantage in the bonus game is more advantageous if the game ball is continuously launched in the first direction than if the game ball is continuously launched in the second direction during a specific period included in the execution period of the bonus game. The second element advantageous means determines that a second element relating to the player's degree of advantage in the bonus game is more advantageous if the game ball is continuously launched in the second direction than if the game ball is continuously launched in the first direction during a specific period included in the execution period of the bonus game.

This allows the game ball to be launched in a first direction for a player who wants to gain an advantage in the first element during bonus play, while the game ball can be launched in a second direction for a player who wants to gain an advantage in the second element. This has the effect of providing gameplay that suits the preferences of each player.

A gaming machine I2, comprising: a ball entry means provided at a position where at least a game ball launched in the first direction and a game ball launched in the second direction can enter; a bonus granting means for granting a predetermined bonus based on a game ball entering the ball entry means; a variable means for changing the ball entry means between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the ball entry means than the first position; and a variable control means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position a predetermined first number of times during the execution of the bonus game.

Gaming machine I2 provides the following effects in addition to the effects of gaming machine I1. That is, a ball entry means is provided at a position where at least a gaming ball launched in a first direction and a gaming ball launched in a second direction can enter. A predetermined bonus is granted by a bonus granting means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the ball entry means. The variable means is changed between a first position where the gaming ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the ball entry means than the first position. During the execution of a bonus game, the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position a predetermined first number of times by the variable control means.

This allows players to focus on whether or not the game ball will enter the ball entry means, which has the effect of further increasing interest during the bonus game.

Gaming machine I3 is characterized in that in gaming machine I2, the first element advantage means increases the rate at which gaming balls enter the ball entry means when gaming balls continue to be launched in the first direction during the execution period of the bonus game compared to when gaming balls continue to be launched in the second direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine I2, gaming machine I3 has the effect that the first element advantage means increases the rate at which game balls enter the ball entry means when game balls are continuously fired in the first direction during the execution period of the bonus game compared to when game balls are continuously fired in the second direction, so that players who wish to play a game with a high rate of balls entering the ball entry means during the execution of the bonus game can be made to actively fire game balls in the first direction.

Gaming machine I4 is characterized in that in gaming machine I2 or I3, the second element advantage means increases the number of gaming balls that reach the ball entry means during the specified period when gaming balls continue to be launched in the second direction compared to when gaming balls continue to be launched in the first direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines I2 and I3, gaming machine I4 has the effect that, since the number of gaming balls that reach the ball entry means during a specific period is increased by the second element advantage means when gaming balls are continuously launched in the second direction rather than the first direction, a player who wishes more gaming balls to reach the ball entry means can be made to actively launch gaming balls in the second direction.

In gaming machine I4, the variable control means executes a first variable action, in which the variable means is changed to the first position after a first predetermined period has elapsed, the first number of times during the specific period, and the second element advantage means prevents a gaming ball launched in the first direction from reaching the ball entry means during the period from the start of the specific period until the end of the execution period of the first variable action a predetermined number of times, and at least a portion of the execution period of the first variable action a predetermined number of times is a period during which a gaming ball launched in the second direction can reach the ball entry means after the start of the specific period. Gaming machine I5.

Gaming machine I5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine I4. That is, a first variable operation in which the variable means is changed to a first position and then a predetermined first period has elapsed, and the first variable operation is changed to a second position, is executed a first number of times during a specific period by the variable control means. A gaming ball launched in a first direction after the start of the specific period is prevented from reaching the ball entry means during the period in which the first variable operation is executed a predetermined number of times until the execution period of the first variable operation is completed by the second element advantage means. At least a portion of the execution period of the predetermined number of first variable operations is composed of a period during which a gaming ball launched in a second direction after the start of the specific period is reachable.

As a result, by shooting the game ball in the second direction, the game ball can reach the ball entry means during the execution of the first variable action more times than when the game ball is shot in the first direction, which has the effect of providing more opportunities for the ball to enter the ball entry means.

Gaming machine I6 is characterized in that in gaming machine I5, the second element advantage means suppresses the flow speed of the gaming ball launched in the first direction so that the period until the gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means is longer than the period until the gaming ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entry means.

According to gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine I5, the flow speed of the gaming ball launched in the first direction is suppressed by the second element advantage means so that the period until the gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means is longer than the period until the gaming ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entry means, so that the gaming ball launched in the first direction can be more reliably prevented from reaching the ball entry means before the predetermined number of first variable operations are completed. Therefore, there is an effect that launching the gaming ball in the second direction can more reliably increase the opportunity for the ball to enter the ball entry means.

Gaming machine I7, characterized in that in gaming machine I5 or I6, the first variable operation is such that the variable means is varied so that the period from when the variable from the second position to the first position begins to when the variable to the first position ends is a predetermined second period, and the first element advantage means makes it easier for a gaming ball launched in the first direction to enter the ball entry means if it reaches the ball entry means during the second period than if the gaming ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entry means during the second period.

Gaming machine I7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine I5 or I6. That is, in the first variable operation, the variable means is variable so that the period from when the variable from the second position to the first position starts to when the variable to the first position ends is a predetermined second period. The first element advantage means makes it easier for a gaming ball launched in the first direction to enter the ball entry means if it reaches the ball entry means during the second period than if the gaming ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entry means during the second period.

As a result, when a game ball is launched in the first direction, there is a possibility that the ball will enter the ball entry means not only during the first period in which the variable means is changed to the first position, but also during the second period in which the variable means is changing from the second position to the first position, so launching the game ball in the first direction can extend the period in which the ball can enter the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that launching the game ball in the first direction can increase the possibility that a game ball that reaches the ball entry means will enter the ball entry means compared to launching the game ball in the second direction.

A gaming machine I7 includes a first flow path through which a gaming ball launched in the first direction can flow down and which allows the flowing down gaming ball to reach the ball entry means from a third direction, and a second flow path through which a gaming ball launched in the second direction can flow down and which allows the flowing down gaming ball to reach the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the third direction, and the variable means is configured so that the game ball can flow down its upper surface while it is changed to the second position, and is configured to be inclined so that the third direction side of the upper surface is higher than the fourth direction side, and the ball entry means is configured so that the game ball can enter from above when the variable means is changed to the first position, and is blocked from above by the variable means when the variable means is changed to the second position, and the first element advantage means changes the variable means from the second position to the first position by sliding the variable means in a direction from the third direction side toward the fourth direction side.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I7, the following effects are achieved. That is, a gaming ball launched in a first direction reaches the ball entry means from a third direction by the first flow path. A gaming ball launched in a second direction reaches the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the third direction by the second flow path. While the variable means is changed to the second position, a gaming ball can enter the ball entry means on its upper surface. Also, the variable means is configured to be inclined so that the third direction side of the upper surface is higher than the fourth direction side. When the variable means is changed to the first position, a gaming ball can enter the ball entry means from above, while when the variable means is changed to the second position, the upper part of the ball entry means is blocked by the variable means. When the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position, the variable means is slid in a direction from the third direction side toward the fourth direction side by the first element advantage means.

As a result, the inclination of the upper surface of the variable means can act on a game ball that is launched in the second direction and reaches the upper surface of the variable means from the fourth direction side during the second period with gravity acting in a direction returning the ball to the fourth direction side, making it difficult for the ball to enter the ball entry means. On the other hand, the third direction side above the ball entry means becomes ready for a ball to enter from above earlier than the fourth direction side, making it easier for a game ball that is launched in the first direction and reaches the ball entry means from the third direction side during the second period to enter the ball. Therefore, the ball entry rate can be higher for game balls launched in the first direction when they reach the ball entry means more reliably than for game balls launched in the second direction.

Gaming machine I8 is characterized in that it is equipped with a game state setting means for setting a first game state as the game state after the execution of the bonus game is completed when a game ball does not enter the ball entry means during the execution of the bonus game 1, and setting a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state when a game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the bonus game 1, in any one of gaming machines I2 to I8.

According to gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines I2 to I8, if a gaming ball does not enter the ball entry means during the execution of bonus game 1, a first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means as the gaming state after the execution of bonus game is completed. On the other hand, if a gaming ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of bonus game 1, a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. Therefore, by the gaming ball entering the ball entry means, the gaming state after the execution of bonus game is completed is set to the advantageous second gaming state, so that there is an effect that the game during the execution of bonus game can be played by focusing on whether or not the gaming ball enters the ball entry means.

<Feature J Group> (Variable attacker that makes it easier for game balls that reach the same area to win)
a first bonus granting means for granting a first bonus based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means; a second bonus granting means for granting a second bonus different from the first bonus based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means; a variable means for varying at least between a first position where a game ball that has reached the specific area can enter the first ball entry means and has difficulty entering the second ball entry means and a second position where it has difficulty entering the first ball entry means and has possibility of entering the second ball entry means; and a variable control means for varying the variable means to the first position based on the establishment of a first condition, and to the second position based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, transition to a winning state when a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot results in a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and by varying the gaming value that can be obtained, they aim to increase the excitement during the winning period (for example, Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, in order to make the gaming ball enter the big prize opening, it is necessary to shoot the gaming ball in a direction that is determined for each gaming machine, and since the degree of advantage in the winning state (the amount of a predetermined bonus that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the winning state will simply become a task of continuing to shoot the gaming ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem with conventional gaming machines in that it is difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to decide when the winning state begins if they win, but like other conventional gaming machines, the gaming value that can be acquired during a win is roughly constant for each type of win, making it difficult to increase the player's interest in the game during the winning state.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine J1, a specific area is provided at a position where a gaming ball launched by a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball can reach. A first ball entry means and a second ball entry means are provided at a position where a gaming ball that has reached the specific area can enter. A first privilege is granted by a first privilege granting means based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means, and a second privilege different from the first privilege is granted based on the gaming ball entering the second ball entry means. The variable means is configured to be variable at least between a first position where a gaming ball that has reached the specific area can enter the first ball entry means and has difficulty entering the second ball entry means, and a second position where it has difficulty entering the first ball entry means and has possibility of entering the second ball entry means. The variable means is variable to the first position by the variable control means based on the establishment of a first condition, while the variable means is variable to the second position by the variable control means based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition.

As a result, the ball entry means through which a game ball that has reached a specific area can enter the game can be changed depending on the variable position of the variable means, allowing the player to play the game while paying attention to the variable position of the variable means. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine J2 is characterized in that in the gaming machine J1, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at a predetermined distance apart on the board, and the variable means is arranged between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means.

In addition to the effects of game machine J1, game machine J2 has a first ball entry means and a second ball entry means arranged on the board at a predetermined distance apart. A variable means is arranged between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means.

This has the effect of simplifying the configuration compared to a case in which separate variable means are provided for the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means.

Gaming machine J3, in which the variable means in gaming machine J1 or J2 is configured to be variable at least between the first position, the second position, and a third position where it is difficult to score in either the first or second ball entry means, and the variable control means varies the variable means from the third position to the first position based on the establishment of the first condition, and varies the variable means from the third position to the second position based on the establishment of the second condition.

Gaming machine J3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine J1 or J2. That is, the variable means is configured to be variable to at least the first position, the second position, and the third position where it is difficult to score through either the first or second ball entry means. The variable means is varied from the third position to the first position by the variable control means based on the establishment of the first condition, while the variable means is varied from the third position to the second position by the variable control means based on the establishment of the second condition.

This has the effect that if neither the first nor the second condition is met, it will be difficult to score through either the first or second scoring means, so that the player can play the game in the hope that either the first or second condition will be met.

Gaming machine J4, characterized in that in gaming machine J3, the first ball entry means is provided in a first direction relative to the specific area, the second ball entry means is provided in a second direction different from the first direction relative to the specific area, the first position is a position where the direction of travel of a gaming ball that has reached the specific area is likely to be the first direction, the second position is a position where the direction of travel of a gaming ball that has reached the specific area is likely to be the second direction, and the third position is a position where the direction of travel of a gaming ball that has reached the specific area is likely to be a direction different from both the first direction and the second direction.

Gaming machine J4 achieves the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine J3. That is, the first ball entry means is provided in a first direction relative to the specific area, while the second ball entry means is provided in a second direction different from the first direction relative to the specific area. When the variable means is placed in the first position, the direction of travel of a gaming ball that has reached the specific area is likely to be the first direction, while when the variable means is placed in the second position, the direction of travel of a gaming ball that has reached the specific area is likely to be the second direction. In contrast, when the variable means is placed in the third position, the direction of travel of a gaming ball that has reached the specific area is likely to be a direction different from both the first and second directions.

As a result, the possibility of a game ball that reaches the specific area proceeding in the first or second direction without the first or second condition being satisfied is reduced, so the configuration between the specific area and the first ball entry means, and the configuration between the specific area and the second ball entry means can be kept to a minimum. This has the effect of making the configuration compact.

Gaming machine J4, the first ball entry means is configured to make it difficult for a gaming ball that has traveled from the specific area in a direction other than the first direction to enter the ball, and the second ball entry means is configured to make it difficult for a gaming ball that has traveled from the specific area in a direction other than the second direction to enter the ball, characterized in that the gaming machine J5.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine J4, gaming machine J5 has the effect of preventing a gaming ball from entering the first ball entry means when the gaming ball travels from the specific area in a direction other than the first direction from entering the first ball entry means, while the second ball entry means has the effect of preventing a gaming ball from entering the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means when the first condition or the second condition is not satisfied, because the first ball entry means is configured to make it difficult for a gaming ball traveling from the specific area in a direction other than the second direction to enter the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means.

Among any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the variable means is composed of a first variable member capable of appearing and disappearing on the board surface and a second variable member different from the first variable member, the first position is an arrangement in which the first variable member protrudes toward the front side of the board surface when viewed from the front and the second variable member is embedded in the board surface, the second position is an arrangement in which the first variable member is embedded in the board surface and the second variable member protrudes toward the front side of the board surface when viewed from the front, and the third position is an arrangement in which the first variable member and the second variable member are embedded in the board surface, the first variable member protrudes from the board surface to form a flow path that can guide a gaming ball that has reached the specific area to the first ball entry means, and the second variable member protrudes from the board surface to form a flow path that can guide a gaming ball that has reached the specific area to the second ball entry means. Gaming machine J6.

Gaming machine J6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of gaming machines J1 to J5. That is, the variable means is composed of a first variable member that can appear and disappear on the board surface, and a second variable member different from the first variable member. In the first position, the first variable member protrudes toward the front side of the board surface when viewed from the front, and the second variable member is buried in the board surface. In the second position, the first variable member is buried in the board surface, and the second variable member protrudes toward the front side of the board surface when viewed from the front. In the third position, the first variable member and the second variable member are buried in the board surface. The first variable member protrudes from the board surface to form a flow path that can guide a gaming ball that has reached a specific area to the first ball entry means. The second variable member protrudes from the board surface to form a flow path that can guide a gaming ball that has reached a specific area to the second ball entry means.

This has the effect of allowing the player to easily identify the ball-scoring means that allows the ball to be scored based on the type of protruding variable member.

In the gaming machine J6, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged on the board at a predetermined distance from each other in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, the first ball entry means is configured so that a gaming ball arriving from the direction of the second ball entry means can enter the ball, and a gaming ball arriving from other directions has difficulty entering the ball, and the second ball entry means is configured so that a gaming ball arriving from the direction of the first ball entry means can enter the ball, and a gaming ball arriving from other directions has difficulty entering the ball, and the second ball entry means is configured so that a gaming ball arriving from the direction of the first ball entry means can enter the ball, and a gaming ball arriving from other directions has difficulty entering the ball, characterized in that the gaming machine J7.

Gaming machine J7 has the following effects in addition to the effects of gaming machine J6. That is, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged on the board at a predetermined distance from each other in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The first ball entry means is configured so that a gaming ball arriving from the direction of the second ball entry means can enter the ball, and gaming balls arriving from other directions have difficulty entering the ball. The second ball entry means is configured so that a gaming ball arriving from the direction of the first ball entry means can enter the ball, and gaming balls arriving from other directions have difficulty entering the ball.

This has the effect of preventing the game ball from entering the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means when the variable means is positioned in the third position.

Gaming machine J8 is characterized by having a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition in gaming machine J6 or J7, and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position or the second position a predetermined number of times based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means.

Gaming machine J8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine J6 or J7. That is, a determination is made by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition. A variable game is executed by the variable game execution means in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position or the second position a predetermined number of times based on a specific determination result being obtained in the determination by the determination means.

This allows the player to focus on the results of the determination made by the determination means while playing the game, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine J8 is provided with a type determination means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a first variable game in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position a predetermined number of times during the execution of the variable game, and a second variable game in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the second position a predetermined number of times, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, and the first benefit is a benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the second benefit. A gaming machine J9 is characterized in that the first benefit is a benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the second benefit.

Gaming machine J9 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine J8. That is, as the type of variable game executed by the variable game execution means, one type is determined by the type determination means from among a plurality of types including at least a first variable game in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position a predetermined number of times during execution of the variable game, and a second variable game in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the second position a predetermined number of times. The first benefit is composed of a benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the second benefit.

As a result, when the first variable game is executed, it is more advantageous for the player than when the second variable game is executed, so the player can play the game while paying attention to the type of variable game determined by the type determination means. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine J10, characterized in that in the gaming machine J9, the first variable game is one in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position a first number of times, and the second variable game is one in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the second position a second number of times that is less than the first number of times.

According to gaming machine J10, in addition to the effects of gaming machine J9, in the first variable game, the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position a first number of times, while in the second variable game, the variable means is changed from the third position to the second position a second number of times that is less than the first number of times. Therefore, when the first variable game is executed, the first benefit, which is more advantageous than the second benefit, is more likely to be awarded, and the variable means is changed to the first position more often. This has the effect of further increasing the advantage of the first variable game.

A gaming machine J11, in any one of gaming machines J1 to J5, is characterized in that the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged on the board at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, the variable means is configured to be able to vary the distance between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, the first position is a position where the variable means is close to the first ball entry means, the second position is a position where the variable means is close to the second ball entry means, and the third position is a position between the first position and the second position.

Gaming machine J11 achieves the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines J1 to J5. That is, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged on the board at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The variable means is configured to be able to vary the distance between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. When the variable means is arranged at the first position, the variable means is close to the first ball entry means, whereas when the variable means is arranged at the second position, the variable means is close to the second ball entry means. When the variable means is arranged at the third position, the variable means is arranged between the first position and the second position.

This has the advantage that the position can be changed by the relatively simple action of moving the variable means left and right, making it possible to realize variable operation of the variable means with a simple configuration.

In the gaming machine J11, the variable means has a left side that slopes downward from the upper right to the lower left when viewed from the front, and a right side that slopes downward from the upper left to the lower right when viewed from the front, the first ball entry means is configured so that a game ball arriving from the direction of the second ball entry means can enter, and a game ball arriving from another direction is difficult to enter, the second ball entry means is configured so that a game ball arriving from the direction of the first ball entry means can enter, and a game ball arriving from another direction is difficult to enter, the first position is a slope formed by the left side of the variable means that allows a game ball that has reached the specific area to flow down to reach the first ball entry means from the direction of the second ball entry means, and the second position is a slope formed by the right side of the variable means that allows a game ball that has reached the specific area to flow down to reach the second ball entry means from the direction of the first ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine J12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J11, the following effects are achieved. That is, the left side surface of the variable means forms a slope that slopes downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front, and the → side surface of the variable means forms a slope that slopes downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front. The first ball entry means is configured so that a game ball arriving from the direction of the second ball entry means can enter, and a game ball arriving from another direction has difficulty entering. The second ball entry means is configured so that a game ball arriving from the direction of the first ball entry means can enter, and a game ball arriving from another direction has difficulty entering. When the variable means is placed in the first position, the slope formed by the left side surface of the variable means allows a game ball that has reached a specific area to flow down to reach the first ball entry means from the direction of the second ball entry means. When the variable means is placed in the second position, the slope formed by the right side of the variable means allows game balls that reach a specific area to flow down from the direction of the first ball entry means to the second ball entry means.

This has the effect of further simplifying the configuration of the variable means, since the game ball can be made to enter both the first and second ball entry means simply by flowing the game ball down along the inclined side of the variable means.

Gaming machine J13 is characterized in that in the third position of gaming machine J12, there is a distance between the left end of the variable means and the first ball entry means that is equal to or greater than the width of one gaming ball, and there is a distance between the right end of the variable means and the second ball entry means that is equal to or greater than the width of one gaming ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine J12, gaming machine J13 has the effect that, when the variable means is arranged in the third position, a distance of at least the width of one gaming ball is provided between the left end of the variable means and the first ball entry means, and a distance of at least the width of one gaming ball is provided between the right end of the variable means and the second ball entry means, so that when the variable means is arranged in the third position, it is possible to more reliably prevent a gaming ball from entering the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means.

<Feature K Group> (The time period from when the ball reaches a specific area until it hits the attacker is changed depending on the launch direction)
The game machine includes a launching means capable of launching a game ball at least in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, a specific area provided at a position where the game ball launched by the launching means in the first direction and the game ball launched in the second direction can reach, a ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball that has reached the specific area can enter the game ball, a bonus granting means for granting a predetermined bonus based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, a variable means capable of at least changing the position between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, a second position different from the first position and where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a third position where it is difficult to enter the ball entry means, and a predetermined and a variable control means for controlling the variable means to be variable in any one of a plurality of variable operations including at least a first variable operation in which the variable means is variable from the third position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a specific condition, and a second variable operation in which the variable means is variable from the third position to the second position for the predetermined period, wherein, when the variable means is variable to the first position, a game ball that is launched in the first direction and reaches the variable means is more likely to take a shorter time to enter the ball entry means than a game ball that is launched in the second direction and reaches the variable means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, transition to a winning state when a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot results in a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and by varying the gaming value that can be obtained, they aim to increase the excitement during the winning period (for example, Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, in order to make the gaming ball enter the big prize opening, it is necessary to shoot the gaming ball in a direction that is determined for each gaming machine, and since the degree of advantage in the winning state (the amount of a predetermined bonus that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the winning state will simply become a task of continuing to shoot the gaming ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem with conventional gaming machines in that it is difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to decide when the winning state begins if they win, but like other conventional gaming machines, the gaming value that can be acquired during a win is roughly constant for each type of win, making it difficult to increase the player's interest in the game during the winning state.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine K1, the launching means is configured to be capable of launching the gaming ball at least in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. A specific area is provided at a position where the gaming ball launched by the launching means in the first direction and the gaming ball launched in the second direction can reach. A ball entry means is provided at a position where the gaming ball that has reached the specific area can enter, and a specific benefit is granted by the bonus granting means based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. The variable means is configured to be variable at least to a first position where the ball can enter the ball entry means, a second position different from the first position and where the ball can enter the ball entry means, and a third position where the ball cannot enter the ball entry means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, the variable means is controlled by the variable control means to be variable in any one of a plurality of variable operations including at least a first variable operation where the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position for a predetermined period, and a second variable operation where the variable means is changed from the third position to the second position for a predetermined period. When the variable means is in the first position, the game ball that is launched in the first direction and reaches the variable means is configured to take a shorter time to enter the ball entry means than a game ball that is launched in the second direction and reaches the variable means.

As a result, when the variable means is changed to the first position, a player who wishes to have the game ball enter the ball entry means in a short period of time can select a game method in which the game ball is launched in a first direction, while a player who does not wish to have the game ball enter the ball entry means immediately can select a game method in which the game ball is launched in a second direction. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine K1, the predetermined period is a period of time during which it becomes difficult for a gaming ball launched in the second direction to reach the variable means that has been changed to the first position and enter the ball entry means. Gaming machine K2.

According to gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine K1, the specified period is configured to be a period of such length that it is difficult for a gaming ball launched in the second direction to reach the variable means that has been changed to the first position and enter the ball entry means. Therefore, when the variable means is changed to the first position, it is difficult to get the gaming ball to enter the ball entry means unless the gaming ball is launched in the first direction. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the timing of the change to the first position is predicted and the gaming ball is launched in the first direction. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine K2, when the variable means is changed to the second position, a gaming ball that is shot in the second direction and reaches the variable means is more likely to enter the ball entry means in a shorter period of time than a gaming ball that is shot in the first direction and reaches the variable means, and the predetermined period is a period of time that makes it difficult for a gaming ball shot in the second direction to reach the variable means that is changed to the first position and enter the ball entry means. Gaming machine K3.

Gaming machine K3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine K2. That is, when the variable means is set to the second position, a gaming ball launched in the second direction and reaching the variable means is more likely to take a shorter time to enter the ball entry means than a gaming ball launched in the first direction and reaching the variable means. The specified period is configured to be a period of time long enough that it becomes difficult for a gaming ball launched in the second direction to reach the variable means, which has been set to the first position, and enter the ball entry means.

This allows the game to be played in a way that allows the player to quickly determine the launch direction that will make it easier for the ball to land in the ball-entering means. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine K4 is characterized by having a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition in any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game including at least the variable operation of the variable means by the variable control means based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means.

In addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the gaming machine K4 has the effect that a determination is made by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition, and based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result, a variable game including at least the variable operation of the variable means by the variable control means is executed by the variable game execution means, so that a game can be played while paying attention to the result of the determination by the determination means.

A gaming machine K4 is characterized by having a gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state favorable to the player as the gaming state after the execution of the variable game in case a gaming ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game in 1, and for setting a second gaming state less favorable to the player than the first gaming state as the gaming state after the execution of the variable game in case a gaming ball does not enter the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game in 1.

According to gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of gaming machine K4, if a gaming ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of one variable game, the game state setting means sets a first game state that is advantageous to the player as the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed, while if a gaming ball does not enter the ball entry means during the execution of one variable game, the game state setting means sets a second game state that is less advantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed, so that the player can play the variable game while paying attention to whether or not the gaming ball enters the ball entry means. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the variable game.

Gaming machine K6 is characterized in that it is equipped with a variable game type determination means for determining, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means in the gaming machine K4 or K5, a first variable game controlled by the first variable operation of the variable means during execution of the variable game at a first ratio, and determining a second variable game controlled by the second variable operation of the variable means at a second ratio higher than the first ratio.

According to gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of gaming machines K4 and K5, as the type of variable game executed by the variable game execution means, the first variable game in which the variable means is controlled by the first variable operation during execution of the variable game is determined at a first rate by the variable game type determination means, while the second variable game in which the variable means is controlled by the second variable operation is determined at a second rate higher than the first rate by the variable game type determination means, so that when a variable game is executed, the player can be made to think that it is easier for the ball to enter the ball entry means if the game ball is fired in the second direction. In other words, it is possible to provide a gameplay that predicts the firing direction that is more likely to enter the ball entry means based on the rate at which the type is determined by the variable game type determination means, and this has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine K6, comprising a variable ball entry means that can change between a first state where a game ball can enter and a second state where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first state, and a second benefit granting means that grants a specific benefit based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means, and the variable game execution means changes the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state a number of times that are predetermined according to the type of variable game during the execution of the variable game, and controls the variable control means so that the variable ball entry means operates in the first variable operation or the second variable operation during the specified period during which the variable ball entry means is in the second state.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the variable ball entry means is configured to be variable between a first state in which the gaming ball can enter and a second state in which the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state. A specific benefit is granted by the second benefit granting means based on the entry of the gaming ball into the variable ball entry means. During the execution of the variable game, the variable game execution means controls the variable control means so that the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state a number of times predetermined according to the type of variable game, and the variable game execution means controls the variable control means so that the variable means operates variably with the first variable operation or the second variable operation during a predetermined period during which the variable ball entry means is in the second state. Therefore, even if the gaming ball cannot be entered into the entry means during the execution of the variable game, an opportunity to enter the gaming ball into the variable ball entry means is provided. This has the effect of preventing players who are unable to get the ball into the ball entry means from becoming disappointed.

A gaming machine K7, characterized in that the first variable game is one in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state more times during one variable game than the second variable game. A gaming machine K8.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine K7, gaming machine K8 has the effect that, when the first variable game is played, the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state more times during one variable game than in the second variable game, so that the player can play with a stronger expectation of entering the first variable game.

<Feature L Group> (During the V round, the game ball is launched by predicting the direction in which the V is likely to be won)
The present invention relates to a game ball launching device that is capable of launching a game ball at least in a first direction and in a second direction different from the first direction, a specific area that is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction by the launching device and a game ball launched in the second direction can reach, a ball entry device that is provided at a position where a game ball that has reached the specific area can enter the specific area, a variable means that can perform a variable operation in a predetermined variable pattern, and a variable pattern that is set for the variable means based on the establishment of a first predetermined condition, the variable means being configured to select a game ball that has been launched in the first direction and has reached the specific area more quickly than a game ball that has been launched in the second direction and has reached the specific area. The gaming machine L1 is characterized by comprising: a variable pattern determination means for determining a first variable pattern in which a gaming ball that has reached the specific area is more likely to enter the entry means, and, based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, for determining a second variable pattern in which a gaming ball that has been launched in the second direction and reached the specific area is more likely to enter the entry means than a gaming ball that has been launched in the first direction and reached the specific area; and a specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance in a performance mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether the first condition or the second condition has been established, based on the establishment of the first condition or the second condition.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, transition to a winning state when a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot results in a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and by varying the gaming value that can be obtained, they aim to increase the excitement during the winning period (for example, Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, in order to make the gaming ball enter the big prize opening, it is necessary to shoot the gaming ball in a direction that is determined for each gaming machine, and since the degree of advantage in the winning state (the amount of a predetermined bonus that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the winning state will simply become a task of continuing to shoot the gaming ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem with conventional gaming machines in that it is difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to decide when the winning state begins if they win, but like other conventional gaming machines, the gaming value that can be acquired during a win is roughly constant for each type of win, making it difficult to increase the player's interest in the game during the winning state.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine L1, the launching means is configured to be capable of launching a gaming ball at least in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. A specific area is provided at a position where the gaming ball launched by the launching means in the first direction and the gaming ball launched in the second direction can reach. A ball entry means is provided at a position where the gaming ball that has reached the specific area can enter the ball entry means. The variable means is configured to be variable in a predetermined variable pattern. As a variable pattern to be set for the variable means, based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition, the variable pattern determination means determines a first variable pattern in which a gaming ball launched in the first direction and reaching the specific area is more likely to enter the ball entry means than a gaming ball launched in the second direction and reaching the specific area, while based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, the variable pattern determination means determines a second variable pattern in which a gaming ball launched in the second direction and reaching the specific area is more likely to enter the ball entry means than a gaming ball launched in the first direction and reaching the specific area. Based on whether the first condition or the second condition is met, a specific performance in which it is difficult to recognize whether the first condition or the second condition is met is executed by the specific performance execution means.

As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish from the presentation whether the variable means is variable in the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern, and it is possible to realize a game feature in which the game ball is launched by predicting the direction in which it is most likely to enter the ball entry means. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine L1, the first variable pattern is such that a gaming ball shot in the first direction during a specific period after the first condition is satisfied can enter the ball entry means, and a gaming ball shot in the second direction during the specific period has difficulty entering the ball entry means, and the second variable pattern is such that a gaming ball shot in the first direction during the specific period after the second condition is satisfied has difficulty entering the ball entry means, and a gaming ball shot in the second direction during the specific period can enter the ball entry means, and the specific performance execution means executes the specific performance for at least the specific period.

Gaming machine L2 has the following effects in addition to the effects of gaming machine L1. That is, when the first variable pattern is set, gaming balls shot in the first direction during the specific period after the first condition is met are unable to enter the ball entry means, and gaming balls shot in the second direction during the specific period have difficulty entering the ball entry means. When the second variable pattern is set, gaming balls shot in the first direction during the specific period after the second condition is met have difficulty entering the ball entry means, and gaming balls shot in the second direction during the specific period can enter the ball entry means. A specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means for at least the specific period.

This allows the game to predict the direction in which the ball is likely to score, and then launch the ball in that predicted direction within a specific period of time, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine L3 is characterized by having a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition in gaming machine L1 or L2, and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game including at least a variable operation of the variable means in a variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines L1 and L2, gaming machine L3 has the effect that, based on a specific judgment result obtained by the judgment means, which is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition, a variable game including at least a variable operation of the variable means is executed by the variable game execution means in a variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means, so that each time a judgment is executed by the judgment means, a game can be played in the hope of a specific judgment result.

Gaming machine L3 is characterized in that it is provided with a game state setting means for setting a first game state advantageous to the player as the game state after the execution of the variable game in case a game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game in 1, and for setting a second game state disadvantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state after the execution of the variable game in case a game ball does not enter the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game in 1.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine L3, gaming machine L4 has the effect of increasing the player's interest in a game when a game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of one variable game. The game state setting means sets a first game state that is favorable to the player as the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed, while the game state setting means sets a second game state that is less favorable to the player than the first game state as the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed when a game ball does not enter the ball entry means during the execution of one variable game. This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game during the execution of the variable game.

Gaming machine L5 is characterized in that it is equipped with a variable game type determination means for determining, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means in the gaming machine L3 or L4, a first variable game in which the first variable pattern is set in the variable means during execution of the variable game at a first ratio, and determining a second variable game in which the second variable pattern is set in the variable means at a second ratio higher than the first ratio.

According to gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects of gaming machines L3 and L4, as the types of variable games executed by the variable game execution means, a first variable game in which a first variable pattern is set in the variable means during execution of the variable game is determined at a first rate by the variable game type determination means, while a second variable game in which a second variable pattern is set in the variable means is determined at a second rate higher than the first rate by the variable game type determination means, so that when a variable game is executed, the player can be made to think that it is easier for the ball to enter the ball entry means if the game ball is shot in the second direction. In other words, it is possible to provide a gameplay that predicts the shooting direction that is more likely to enter the ball entry means based on the rate at which the type is determined by the variable game type determination means, and this has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine L6 is provided with a variable ball entry means that can change between a first state where a game ball can enter and a second state where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first state, and a second bonus granting means that grants a specific bonus based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means, and the variable game execution means executes a variable action that changes the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state a number of times that are predetermined according to the type of the variable game during the execution of the variable game, and a variable action that changes the variable means in a variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means.

Gaming machine L6 has the following effects in addition to those of gaming machine L5. That is, the variable ball entry means is configured to be variable between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the first state. A specific benefit is granted by the second benefit granting means based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means. During the execution of a variable game, the variable game execution means executes a variable action that changes the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state a number of times that are predetermined according to the type of variable game, and a variable action that changes the variable means in a variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means.

This has the effect of preventing players who are unable to get the game ball to enter the ball entry means from becoming discouraged, because even if the player is unable to get the game ball to enter the ball entry means during variable play, the player is given an opportunity to do so.

Gaming machine L7 is characterized in that it is equipped with: an avoidance means for preventing the specific performance execution means from executing the specific performance when the first condition or the second condition is fulfilled and a predetermined specific condition is fulfilled in any one of gaming machines L1 to L6; and a notification performance execution means for executing a notification performance that notifies information indicating whether the first condition or the second condition has been fulfilled based on the avoidance means preventing the execution of the specific performance.

Gaming machine L7 produces the following effect in addition to the effect produced by any of gaming machines L1 to L6. That is, when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied and a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the avoidance means prevents the specific effect from being executed by the specific effect execution means. Based on the avoidance means preventing the execution of the specific effect, the notification effect execution means executes a notification effect that notifies information indicating whether the first condition or the second condition has been satisfied.

This has the effect of allowing players to play in the hope that the notification effect will be executed, as it is possible to identify the launch direction that will make it easier for the ball to enter the ball entry means when the notification effect is executed.

<Feature M Group> (The attacker that is likely to win changes depending on the moving position of the attacker from the start to the end of the movement)
A gaming machine M1 comprising a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a second ball entry means, a variable means capable of changing between a first position at which the gaming ball can enter the first ball entry means and a second position at which it becomes difficult for the gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means, and a variable control means for controlling the variable means to change from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, wherein the second ball entry means changes the ease of entry of a gaming ball that has reached the variable means depending on the variable position between the time when the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, transition to a winning state when a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot results in a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and by varying the gaming value that can be obtained, they aim to increase the excitement during the winning period (for example, Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, in order to make the gaming ball enter the big prize opening, it is necessary to shoot the gaming ball in a direction that is determined for each gaming machine, and since the degree of advantage in the winning state (the amount of a predetermined bonus that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the winning state will simply become a task of continuing to shoot the gaming ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem with conventional gaming machines in that it is difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to decide when the winning state begins if they win, but like other conventional gaming machines, the gaming value that can be acquired during a win is roughly constant for each type of win, making it difficult to increase the player's interest in the game during the winning state.

In response to this, according to gaming machine M1, the variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the gaming ball can enter the first ball entry means and a second position where it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, the variable means is controlled by the variable control means so as to be variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time. Depending on the variable position of the variable means during the period from the second position to the first position, the ease with which a gaming ball that has reached the variable means can enter the second ball entry means varies.

As a result, depending on the variable position of the variable means, it becomes easier to score the ball in the first scoring means or the second scoring means, so the player can play the game while paying attention to the variable position of the variable means. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine M1, the second ball entry means is characterized in that a gaming ball that reaches the variable means while the variable means is variable within a specific range between the second position and the first position can be entered into the gaming machine M2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine M1, gaming machine M2 allows a gaming ball that reaches the variable means while the variable means is changing the specific range between the second position and the first position to be able to enter the second ball entry means, so that a game can be played by devising a way to make the gaming ball reach the variable means while the variable means is changing the specific range. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In gaming machine M2, the specific range is configured to be a range that does not include at least the first position, and the second ball entry means is configured to make it difficult for a gaming ball that has reached the variable means to enter the ball entry means when the variable position of the variable means is outside the specific range. Gaming machine M3.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine M2, gaming machine M3 has the effect that the specific range is configured to be a range that does not include at least the first position, and when the variable position of the variable means is outside the specific range, it becomes difficult for the gaming ball that has reached the variable means to enter the second ball entry means, so that the timing of launching the gaming ball can be more devised.

In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at a predetermined distance from each other in the left-right direction, the variable means is provided between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and is composed of at least a first inclination member that forms a slope that allows the game ball to flow down in the direction in which the first ball entry means is provided, and a second inclination member that forms a slope that allows the game ball to flow down in the direction in which the second ball entry means is provided, the first position is a position where the game ball that has reached the variable means is easily able to flow down the first inclination member and is difficult to flow down the second inclination member, and the second position is a position where the game ball that has reached the variable means is difficult to flow down the first inclination member and the second inclination member. Gaming machine M4.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the gaming machine M4 has the following effect. That is, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction. The variable means is composed of at least a first inclination member that is provided between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means and forms a slope that allows the gaming ball to flow down in the direction where the first ball entry means is provided, and a second inclination member that forms a slope that allows the gaming ball to flow down in the direction where the second ball entry means is provided. When the variable means is arranged in the first position, the gaming ball that reaches the variable means is more likely to flow down the first inclination member and less likely to flow down the second inclination member, while when the variable means is arranged in the second position, the gaming ball that reaches the variable means is less likely to flow down the first inclination member and the second inclination member.

As a result, the game balls can be made to flow down to each entry means by the inclination formed by each inclined member, and there is no need for complex control to guide the game balls to each entry means. This has the effect of simplifying the configuration.

In gaming machine M4, the variable means is configured to be able to appear and disappear on the board surface, and the first position is a position in which both the first inclined member and the second inclined member, which is provided further forward than the first inclined member when viewed from the front, protrude forward from the board surface when viewed from the front, and the second position is a position in which both the first inclined member and the second inclined member are buried in the board surface. Gaming machine M5.

Gaming machine M5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine M4. That is, the variable means is configured to be able to appear and disappear above the board surface. When the variable means is placed in the first position, both the first tilting member and the second tilting member, which is provided further forward than the first tilting member as viewed from the front, are positioned to protrude toward the front side of the board as viewed from the front.

This has the effect of allowing the ball-scoring means to be changed so that it can be scored by simply controlling the variable means to appear and disappear.

A gaming machine M6 is characterized in that it is provided with a variable pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of variable patterns set by the variable control means for the variable means, the variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern that tends to cause a greater number of times the ball changes from the second position to the first position, and a second variable pattern that tends to cause a smaller number of times the ball changes from the second position to the first position than the first variable pattern, in any one of gaming machines M1 to M5.

In addition to the effect of any of gaming machines M1 to M5, gaming machine M6 has a variable pattern set for the variable means by the variable control means, and the variable pattern determination means determines one variable pattern from among a plurality of patterns including at least a first variable pattern that tends to cause a large number of changes from the second position to the first position, and a second variable pattern that tends to cause a smaller number of changes from the second position to the first position than the first variable pattern, so that it has the effect of allowing a player to play by focusing on the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means.

A gaming machine M7 is characterized by comprising a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition in a gaming machine M6, and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the specific condition is established a predetermined number of times during one execution period based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine M6, gaming machine M7 has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game, because a variable game execution means executes a variable game in which a specific condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times during one execution period based on a specific result being obtained in a judgment by the judgment means, which is executed based on the satisfaction of a judgment condition. This allows the player to play in the hope of a specific judgment result being obtained each time a judgment is made by the judgment means.

The gaming machine M8 is characterized in that it is provided with a variable game type determination means for determining, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means in the gaming machine M7, one type from among a plurality of types including at least a first variable game in which the first variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determination means when the specific condition is met, and a second variable game in which the second variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determination means when the specific condition is met.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine M7, gaming machine M8 has the effect of determining one type of variable game by the variable game type determination means from among a plurality of types including at least a first variable game in which a first variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determination means when a specific condition is met, and a second variable game in which a second variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determination means when a specific condition is met, and therefore the number of times that it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry means varies depending on the type of variable game, and therefore has the effect of allowing the player to play while paying attention to the type of variable game.

A gaming machine M9 is characterized in that in the gaming machine M8, the first variable game is one in which the specific condition is more likely to be met less frequently in one of the variable games than in the second variable game.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine M8, gaming machine M9 has the effect of preventing players from becoming disappointed by the low number of times that a specific condition is met in the first variable game, since the number of times that a specific condition is met is more likely to be less in the first variable game than in the second variable game.

<Feature N Group> (During the electric support, it is easier to win more prize balls with opening patterns that make it difficult for the ball to enter the electric chute than with opening patterns that make it easy for the ball to enter the electric chute)
a variable means for varying a position between a first position at which the game ball can enter the entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the entry means than the first position; a variable control means for controlling the variable means to vary in a predetermined variable pattern based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition; and a variable pattern determination means for determining one variable pattern from a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which it is easier for the game ball to enter the entry means than the first variable pattern, as the variable pattern in which the variable means is controlled by the variable control means, wherein while the variable means is controlled by the first variable pattern, a second condition that is advantageous to a player is more easily established than while the variable means is controlled by the second variable pattern.

According to the gaming machine N1, a bonus is awarded by a bonus awarding means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the ball entry means. The variable means is variable between a first position where the gaming ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the gaming ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position. Based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition, the variable means is controlled by a variable control means so as to be variable in a predetermined variable pattern. As the variable pattern in which the variable means is controlled by the variable control means, one variable pattern is determined by a variable pattern determination means from among a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which the gaming ball is easier to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern. While the variable means is controlled by the first variable pattern, the second condition advantageous to the player is more easily established than while the variable means is controlled by the second variable pattern.

This allows the variable pattern expected by the player to be different depending on whether priority is given to the ease of achieving the second condition or the ease of the ball entering the ball entry means. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine N2 is characterized in that the first variable pattern is configured such that the number of times the variable means is changed to the first position from the start to the end of one variable pattern is greater than the second variable pattern, and the second variable pattern is configured such that the total period during which the variable means is changed to the first position from the start to the end of one variable pattern is longer than the first variable pattern.

Gaming machine N2 has the following effects in addition to those of gaming machine N1. That is, the first variable pattern is configured so that the number of times the variable means is varied to the first position between the start and end of one variable pattern is greater than that of the second variable pattern. The second variable pattern is configured so that the total period during which the variable means is varied to the first position between the start and end of one variable pattern is longer than that of the first variable pattern.

This has the advantage that it is easy to distinguish between the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern based on the number of times it is changed to the first position.

Gaming machine N3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a second ball entry means, which is provided in a position where a gaming ball can enter the variable means and where a gaming ball that reaches the variable means while the variable means is operating within a predetermined range between the first position and the second position can be easily guided by the variable means, in the gaming machine N1 or N2, and a second benefit granting means that grants a second benefit that is greater than the predetermined benefit based on the gaming ball entering the second ball entry means.

Gaming machine N3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine N1 or N2. That is, a second ball entry means into which the gaming ball can enter is provided at a position where the gaming ball that reaches the variable means while the variable means is operating within a predetermined range between the first position and the second position is easily guided by the variable means. A second benefit that is greater than the predetermined benefit is awarded by the second benefit awarding means based on the gaming ball entering the second ball entry means.

As a result, by setting the first variable pattern, the player can have more opportunities to obtain the second benefit, so that the player can play the game with a stronger expectation that the first variable pattern will be set.

In gaming machine N3, the second ball entry means is provided at a position where a gaming ball that has reached a specific area on the board can enter, and the variable means, when variable within the specified range, makes it easier to reflect a gaming ball that has flowed down toward the specific area, and the specific area is an area that is difficult for a gaming ball that has flowed down toward the variable means to reach when the variable means is positioned at least in the first position or the second position. Gaming machine N4.

Gaming machine N4 achieves the following effects in addition to those achieved by gaming machine N3. That is, a second ball entry means is provided at a position where a gaming ball that has reached a specific area on the board can enter. When the variable means is performing a variable operation within a predetermined range, the gaming ball that has flowed down is more likely to be reflected toward the specific area. The specific area is configured so that it is difficult for a gaming ball that has flowed down to the variable means to reach it when at least the variable means is disposed in the first position or the second position.

This allows the player to devise a way to make the game ball reach the variable means while it is being varied within a specified range, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Any of the gaming machines N1 to N4 includes a first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination based on a gaming ball entering the ball entry means, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the first discrimination result obtained by the first discrimination means, and a second discrimination means capable of executing a second discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined discrimination condition that is at least different from the ball entering the ball entry means, and the variable control means controls the variable means to vary in the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means when the discrimination by the second discrimination means results in the second discrimination result, which is the establishment of the first condition. Gaming machine N5 is characterized in that it includes a first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination based on a first discrimination result obtained by the first discrimination means, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the first discrimination result obtained by the first discrimination means, and a second discrimination means for executing a second discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined discrimination condition that is at least different from the ball entering the ball entry means.

Gaming machine N5 achieves the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines N1 to N4. That is, a first determination is made by a first determination means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the ball entry means, and a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by a bonus game execution means based on the first determination result obtained by the determination by the first determination means. A second determination is made by a second determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition that is at least different from the entry of a ball into the ball entry means. The establishment of the first condition is determined by the determination by the second determination means that the variable control means controls the variable means to be variable in the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means.

As a result, the first judgment is executed when the ball enters the ball entry means, so that the game can be played by focusing on whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means while the variable means is being varied in the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern.

Gaming machine N5 is provided with bonus game type determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of bonus games executed by the bonus game execution means, including at least a first bonus game in which the game state after the execution of the bonus game is completed is set to a first game state, and a second bonus game in which the game state after the execution of the bonus game is completed is set to a second game state different from the first game state, and the first game state is less likely to result in the second determination in the second determination than the second game state. Gaming machine N6 is characterized in that:

Gaming machine N6 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine N5. That is, as the type of bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, the bonus game type determination means determines one type of bonus game from among a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game in which the game state after the execution of the bonus game is completed is set to a first game state, and a second bonus game in which the game state after the execution of the bonus game is completed is set to a second game state different from the first game state. The first game state is configured to be less likely to result in the second determination result in the second determination than the second game state.

This has the effect of allowing the player to play while paying attention to the type of bonus game determined by the bonus game type determination means.

In the gaming machine N6, the first variable pattern is configured so that the number of times the variable means is changed to the first position is greater than the second variable pattern between the start and end of one variable pattern, the second variable pattern is configured so that the total period during which the variable means is changed to the first position is longer than the first variable pattern, and the first gaming state is characterized in that the rate at which the second variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determination means when the second determination result is obtained by the second determination means is higher than the second gaming state.

Gaming machine N7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine N6. That is, the first variable pattern is configured so that the variable means is changed to the first position more times between the start and end of one variable pattern than the second variable pattern. In the first gaming state, the rate at which the second variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determination means when the second determination result is obtained by the second determination means is higher than in the second gaming state.

As a result, in the first gaming state, the gaming balls enter the ball entry means relatively frequently, so that the first judgment can be executed efficiently. Also, when the first variable pattern is determined in the first gaming state, the second condition is more likely to be satisfied. This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game while paying more attention to the type of variable pattern.

In the gaming machine N7, a second ball entry means is provided at a position where a gaming ball can enter and where a gaming ball that reaches the variable means while the variable means is operating in a variable range between the first position and the second position is easily guided by the variable means; a second benefit granting means that grants a second benefit greater than the predetermined benefit based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second ball entry means; a specific ball entry means that is provided at a position where a gaming ball shot in a first direction can enter and executes the first determination by the first determination means when the gaming ball enters; and a suggestion effect execution means that executes a second direction suggestion effect that suggests the launch of a gaming ball in a second direction different from the first direction based on the second determination result in the second game state and the first variable pattern being determined by the variable pattern determination means, and the ball entry means is provided at a position where a gaming ball shot in the second direction can enter.

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N7, the following effects are achieved. That is, a second ball entry means is provided at a position where the gaming ball that reaches the variable means while the variable means is operating in a predetermined range between the first position and the second position is easily guided by the variable means. Based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second ball entry means, a second benefit greater than the predetermined benefit is granted by the second benefit granting means. A specific ball entry means is provided at a position where the gaming ball shot in the first direction can enter, where a first determination is performed by the first determination means when the gaming ball enters. Based on the second determination result in the second game state and the first variable pattern being determined by the variable pattern determination means, a second direction suggestion effect that suggests the launch of the gaming ball in a second direction different from the first direction is executed by the suggestion effect execution means. A ball entry means is provided at a position where the gaming ball shot in the second direction can enter.

This has the effect of ensuring that the player is given an opportunity to win the second benefit when the first variable pattern is determined.

<Feature O group> (Generates navigation in the direction of the electric support when an unfavorable electric support opening pattern occurs)
a variable means for varying a position between a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first position; a variable control means for controlling the variable means to vary a position in a predetermined variable pattern based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition; a variable pattern determination means for determining one variable pattern from a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern, as the variable pattern in which the variable control means controls the variable means; and an effect execution means for executing a suggestive effect suggesting the launch of the game ball in the specific direction at least while the variable means is controlled in the first variable pattern by the variable control means.

According to the gaming machine O1, a ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in a specific direction by a launch means capable of launching a game ball can enter the ball entry means. A predetermined bonus is granted by a bonus granting means based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. The variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first position. Based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, the variable means is controlled by a variable control means so that the variable means can be variable in a predetermined variable pattern. As the variable pattern by which the variable means is controlled by the variable control means, one variable pattern is determined by a variable pattern determination means from among a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable combination pattern which makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern. At least while the variable means is controlled by the variable control means in the first variable pattern, a suggestive performance suggesting the launch of the game ball in a specific direction is executed by a performance execution means.

This has the effect of giving the player the maximum opportunity to score a game ball into the ball entry means.

A gaming machine O2, comprising: a second ball entry means provided at a position where a gaming ball shot in a second direction different from the specific direction can enter; a second bonus granting means for granting a second bonus based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second ball entry means; and a game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which the specific condition is more likely to be established and a second game state in which the specific condition is less likely to be established than the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, and the performance execution means for executing the suggestive performance based on the first variable pattern being determined by the variable pattern determination means when the second game state is set.

The gaming machine O2 provides the following effects in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O1. That is, a second ball entry means is provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in a second direction different from the specific direction can enter the ball. A second benefit is granted by a second benefit granting means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second ball entry means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, a gaming state is set by a gaming state setting means from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state in which the specific condition is more likely to be established and a second gaming state in which the specific condition is less likely to be established than the first gaming state. A suggestive performance is executed by a performance execution means based on the first variable pattern being determined by the variable pattern determination means when the second gaming state is set.

This allows the launch direction of the game ball to be changed depending on the game status, which has the effect of giving the player the fun of hitting the game ball in different launch directions.

A gaming machine O3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a discrimination means capable of discriminating based on a gaming ball entering the ball entry means or the second ball entry means in the gaming machine O2, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine O2, gaming machine O3 has the effect of allowing players to expect a specific result each time the discrimination means discriminates based on a gaming ball entering the ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and thus has the effect of allowing players to expect a specific result each time the discrimination means discriminates.

A gaming machine O3, the gaming state setting means sets a gaming state to 1 when the end condition for the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution means is satisfied, which is regarded as the satisfaction of the predetermined setting condition. A gaming machine O4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine O3, gaming machine O4 has the effect that a game state 1 is set by the game state setting means when a predetermined setting condition is met when a termination condition for the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution means is met, so that a game can be played while paying attention to the game state that is set after the bonus game ends.

Gaming machine O5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines O1 to O4, the variable means creates a state in which a third benefit greater than the predetermined benefit is likely to be awarded when the variable means is varying a predetermined variable range between the second position and the first position.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, gaming machine O5 creates a state in which a third score, which is greater than the specified bonus, is likely to be awarded when the variable means is variable within a specified range between the second position and the first position, so that the player can play the game by devising a way to make the game ball reach the variable means while it is variable within the specified range. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine O6 is characterized in that it is provided with a third ball entry means in which a gaming ball can enter and which is provided at a position where a gaming ball that reaches the variable means while the variable means is varying the predetermined movable range can be easily guided by the variable means, and a third benefit granting means that grants the third benefit based on the gaming ball entering the third ball entry means.

Gaming machine O6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine O5. That is, a third variable means into which the gaming ball can enter is provided at a position where the gaming ball that reaches the variable means while the variable means is varying the predetermined movable range is easily guided by the variable means. A third benefit is awarded by a third benefit awarding means based on the gaming ball entering the third ball entry means.

This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game while paying attention to whether or not the game ball will enter the third ball entry means.

In the gaming machine O6, the third ball entry means is provided at a position where a gaming ball that has reached a specific area on the board can enter, and the variable means, when variable within the predetermined movable range, makes it easier to reflect a gaming ball that has flowed down toward the specific area, and the specific area is an area that is difficult for a gaming ball that has flowed down toward the variable means to reach when the variable means is positioned at least in the first position or the second position. Gaming machine O7.

Gaming machine O7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine O6. That is, a third ball entry means is provided at a position where a gaming ball that has reached a specific area on the board can enter. When the specified movable range is being varied, a gaming ball that has flowed down is more likely to be reflected to the specific area by the variable means. The specific area is difficult to reach for a gaming ball that has flowed down to the variable means when the variable means is located at least in the first or second position, and for a gaming ball that has flowed down to the variable means when the variable means is located at the first or second position.

This allows players to focus on the path of the game ball while playing, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Feature P group> (Two parts can be moved independently by one driving source)
A gaming machine P1 comprising: a first variable means capable of being varied between a first position and a second position different from the first position; a second variable means capable of being varied between a third position and a fourth position different from the third position; and a driving means for driving the first variable means from the first position to the second position by driving in a first direction starting from a specific reference position, and for driving the second variable means from the third position to the fourth position by driving in a second direction different from the first direction starting from the specific reference position.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include variable components operated by motors, such as opening and closing plates for opening and closing specific winning slots. Some of these gaming machines can perform a wide variety of performance actions by operating multiple variable components (for example, Patent Publication No. 2514417).

One such conventional gaming machine is one that has multiple large openings that open when a winning lottery based on the initial winnings is selected, and aims to increase excitement during a winning move by switching the large opening that opens depending on the type of winning move or the number of rounds.

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, as the number of variable components increases, the operation control of each variable component becomes more complicated, which can make it difficult to set appropriate operations for multiple variable components.

In contrast, according to gaming machine P1, the first variable means is configured to be variable between a first position and a second position different from the first position. The second variable means is configured to be variable between a third position and a fourth position different from the third position. The first variable means is variable from the first position to the second position when the drive means drives in a first direction starting from a specific reference position. On the other hand, the second variable means is variable from the third position to the fourth position when the drive means drives in a second direction different from the first direction starting from a specific reference position.

As a result, both the first variable means and the second variable means can be varied by the driving means, which has the effect of allowing the multiple variable means to be varied more suitably.

In the gaming machine P1, the drive means changes the first variable means from the second position to the first position by driving in the second direction while the first variable means is changed to the second position, and changes the second variable means from the fourth position to the third position by driving in the first direction while the second variable means is changed to the fourth position. Gaming machine P2.

Gaming machine P2 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine P1. That is, when the drive means drives in the second direction with the first variable means being changed to the second position, the first variable means is changed from the second position to the first position. Also, when the drive means drives in the first direction with the second variable means being changed to the fourth position, the second variable means is changed from the fourth position to the third position.

This has the effect of further simplifying the configuration of the drive means, since the variable direction of each variable means can be switched simply by switching the drive direction of the drive means.

A gaming machine P3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine P2, it is provided with a variable suppression means that suppresses the second variable means from being changed from the third position while the first variable means is being changed from the second position to the first position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine P2, gaming machine P3 has the effect of more suitably varying the multiple variable means because the variable suppression means suppresses the second variable means from varying from the third position while the first variable means is being varied from the second position to the first position.

A gaming machine P4 is characterized in that it is provided with a second variable suppression means for suppressing the first variable means from being changed from the first position while the second variable means is being changed from the fourth position to the third position in the gaming machine P3.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine P3, gaming machine P4 has the effect of more suitably varying the multiple variable means because the second variable suppression means suppresses the first variable means from varying from the first position while the second variable means is being varied from the fourth position to the third position.

A gaming machine P5 is any one of gaming machines P1 to P4, and is provided with a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and the first position is a position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means than the second position, the second position is a position where it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means than the first position, the third position is a position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than the fourth position, and the fourth position is a position where it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than the third position.

Gaming machine P5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines P1 to P4. That is, when the first variable means is in the first position, it becomes more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means than when it is in the second position, while when it is in the second position, it becomes easier for the gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means than when it is in the first position. When the second variable means is in the third position, it becomes more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than when it is in the fourth position, while when the second variable means is in the fourth position, it becomes easier for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than when it is in the third position.

As a result, the ball entry means through which the ball can be entered varies depending on the variable positions of the first variable means and the second variable means, which has the effect of allowing the player to play the game while paying attention to the variable position of the variable means.

Gaming machine P6 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines P1 to P5, the drive means is composed of a motor that can be driven to rotate in a first rotation direction and a second rotation direction opposite to the first rotation direction, and the first direction is the first rotation direction, and the second direction is the second rotation direction.

Gaming machine P6 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by any of gaming machines P1 to P5. That is, the drive means is composed of a motor that can be driven to rotate in a first rotation direction and a second rotation direction opposite to the first rotation direction. The first direction is the first rotation direction, and the second direction is the second rotation direction.

This has the effect of simplifying the configuration for varying each variable means, since the movement of each variable means can be controlled simply by switching the direction of rotation of one motor.

A gaming machine P6, comprising a first gear for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the first variable means, a second gear for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the second variable means, and a third gear configured to be meshable with the first and second gears and attached to the rotating shaft of the motor, the first gear being configured to mesh with the third gear while the drive means rotates in a first rotation range that may be positioned while the drive means rotates in the first rotation direction starting from the specific reference position, and not to mesh with the third gear while the drive means rotates outside the first rotation range, and the second gear being configured to mesh with the third gear while the drive means rotates in a second rotation range that may be positioned while the drive means rotates in the second rotation direction starting from the specific reference position, and not to mesh with the third gear while the drive means rotates outside the second rotation range. A gaming machine P7.

According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the driving force of the drive means is transmitted to the first variable means by the first gear. The driving force of the drive means is transmitted to the second variable means by the second gear. The third gear attached to the rotating shaft of the motor is configured to be able to mesh with the first gear and the second gear. The first gear is configured so that the first gear and the third gear mesh while the drive means rotates in a first rotation range that can be placed while the drive means rotates in a first rotation direction starting from a specific reference position, while the first gear and the third gear do not mesh while the drive means rotates outside the first rotation range. The second gear is configured so that the second gear and the third gear mesh while the drive means rotates in a second rotation range that can be placed while the drive means rotates in a second rotation direction starting from a specific reference position, while the second gear and the third gear do not mesh while the drive means rotates outside the second rotation range.

This allows the first and second gears to be driven by only one third gear attached to the rotating shaft of the motor, which has the effect of further simplifying the configuration for varying each variable means.

In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the driving means changes the first variable means from the second position to the first position by driving in the second direction while the first variable means is changed to the second position, and changes the second variable means from the fourth position to the third position by driving in the first direction while the second variable means is changed to the fourth position, and includes a variable suppressing means that suppresses the second variable means from being changed from the third position while the first variable means is changed from the second position to the first position, a second variable suppressing means that suppresses the first variable means from being changed from the first position while the second variable means is changed from the fourth position to the third position, and a second driving means that can change the first variable means between the first position and the second position regardless of the variable position of the second variable means, and the first variable means is changed by the second driving means while a predetermined specific condition is established, and is changed by the driving means while the specific condition is not established. Gaming machine P8.

Gaming machine P8 achieves the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines P1 to P7. That is, when the first variable means is variable to the second position, the drive means drives in the second direction to vary the first variable means from the second position to the first position. Also, when the second variable means is variable to the fourth position, the drive means drives in the first direction to vary the second variable means from the fourth position to the third position. While the first variable means is variable from the second position to the first position, the variable suppression means suppresses the second variable means from varying from the third position. While the second variable means is variable from the fourth position to the third position, the second variable suppression means suppresses the first variable means from varying from the first position. Regardless of the variable position of the second variable means, the first variable means is variable between the first position and the second position by the second drive means. While a predetermined specific condition is met, the first variable means is varied by the second driving means, while while the specific condition is not met, the first variable means is varied by the driving means.

This has the effect of providing greater freedom when moving the first variable means.

In the gaming machine P8, a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a first discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined first discrimination condition, a variable control means for controlling the first variable means so that the first variable means is variable from the first position to the second position for a predetermined period of time based on the discrimination by the first discrimination means resulting in a first discrimination result, a second discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the second variable means is variable from the third position to the fourth position a predetermined number of times based on the discrimination by the second discrimination means resulting in a second discrimination result, and the first position is the second position. The first position is a position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means than the first position, the second position is a position where it is easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means than the first position, the third position is a position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than the fourth position, and the fourth position is a position where it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than the third position, and the variable control means controls the first variable means to be variable by the second drive means when the first determination result is obtained during the execution of the variable game, and controls the first variable means to be variable by the drive means when the first determination result is obtained while the variable game is not being executed.

According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P8, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first discrimination means executes discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined first discrimination condition. Based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the first discrimination means, the first variable means is controlled by the variable control means so as to be variable from the first position to the second position for a predetermined period of time. Based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, the second discrimination means executes discrimination based on the second discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the second discrimination means, and a variable game in which the second variable means is variable from the third position to the fourth position a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game execution means. When the first variable means is variable to the first position, it becomes more difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means than the second position, while when it is variable to the second position, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means than the first position. When the second variable means is changed to the third position, it becomes more difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than when it is in the fourth position, whereas when the second variable means is changed to the fourth position, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than when it is in the third position. When the first determination result occurs while a variable game is being played, the variable control means controls so that the first variable means is varied by the second drive means, whereas when the first determination result occurs while a variable game is not being played, the variable control means controls so that the first variable means is varied by the drive means.

This has the effect of allowing the drive means for varying each variable means to be switched depending on whether or not there is a possibility that the first variable means and the second variable means will move simultaneously, thereby allowing the movable means to be moved more suitably.

<Feature Q Group> (There are variable patterns that allow the ball to be scored regardless of the launch direction, and variable patterns where the ball scoring rate differs depending on the launch direction)
The present invention relates to a game system including: a launching means capable of launching a game ball at least at a first launch intensity and a second launch intensity different from the first launch intensity; a ball entry means capable of entering the game ball launched by the launching means; a variable means provided at a position reachable by at least the game balls launched at the first launch intensity and the second launch intensity, and capable of changing the ball entry means between a first position at which the ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which the ball cannot enter the ball entry means; a first variable pattern setting means for setting a first variable pattern for the variable means based on the establishment of a first predetermined condition; and a second variable pattern setting means for setting the variable pattern based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. and a second variable pattern setting means for setting a second variable pattern different from the first variable pattern for the variable means, wherein the first variable pattern allows a game ball that reaches the variable means from a first direction in which a game ball launched with the first launch intensity is likely to travel, and a game ball that reaches the variable means from a second direction in which a game ball launched with the second launch intensity is likely to travel, to enter the ball entry means, and the second variable pattern allows a game ball that reaches the variable means from at least the second direction to be more difficult to enter the ball entry means, compared to the first variable pattern.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, transition to a winning state when a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot results in a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and by varying the gaming value that can be obtained, they aim to increase the excitement during the winning period (for example, Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, in order to make the gaming ball enter the big prize opening, it is necessary to shoot the gaming ball in a direction that is determined for each gaming machine, and since the degree of advantage in the winning state (the amount of a predetermined bonus that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the winning state will simply become a task of continuing to shoot the gaming ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem with conventional gaming machines in that it is difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to decide when the winning state begins if they win, but like other conventional gaming machines, the gaming value that can be acquired during a win is roughly constant for each type of win, making it difficult to increase the player's interest in the game during the winning state.

In contrast, gaming machine Q1 provides the following effects. That is, the launching means is configured to be capable of launching gaming balls at least at a first launching intensity and a second launching intensity different from the first launching intensity. The variable means is configured to be capable of varying positions that can be reached by at least the gaming balls launched at the first launching intensity and the second launching intensity between a first position where the ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the ball cannot enter the ball entry means. A first variable pattern is set for the variable means by the first variable pattern setting means based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition. A second variable pattern different from the first variable pattern is set for the variable means by the second variable pattern setting means based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. When the first variable pattern is set, a game ball that reaches the variable means from a first direction in which a game ball launched with a first launch intensity tends to travel, and a game ball that reaches the variable means from a second direction in which a game ball launched with a second launch intensity tends to travel, can enter the ball entry means. When the second variable pattern is set, a game ball that reaches the variable means from the first direction is more likely to enter the ball entry means than a game ball that reaches the variable means from the second direction.

This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game, since the strength of the game balls can be varied depending on whether the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern is set.

In gaming machine Q1, the ball entry means is at least composed of a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and the variable means is configured to be variable to a first ball entry position where the gaming ball can enter the first ball entry means and a second ball entry position where the gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means as the first position, and the first variable pattern is a variable pattern in which the variable means is variable to the first ball entry position for a first period, and the second variable pattern is a variable pattern in which the variable means is variable to the second ball entry position for a second period different from the first period. Gaming machine Q2.

Gaming machine Q2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine Q1. That is, the variable means is configured to be variable to a first ball entry position where the gaming ball can enter the first ball entry means, and a second ball entry position where the gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means, as the first position. When the first variable pattern is set, the variable means is variable to the first ball entry position for a first period, while when the second variable pattern is set, the variable means is variable to the second ball entry position for a second period different from the first period.

This has the effect of allowing a player to play in the hope that the game ball will enter either the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means.

Gaming machine Q3 is characterized in that in gaming machine Q2, the second ball entry position is such that the period between the game ball being launched and the ball entering the first ball entry means is more likely to be shorter for a gaming ball launched at the first launch intensity than for a gaming ball launched at the second launch intensity.

In addition to the effects of game machine Q2, game machine Q3 has the effect that when the variable means is changed to the second ball entry position, the period between when the game ball is launched and when it enters the first ball entry means is more likely to be shorter for a game ball launched at the first launch intensity than for a game ball launched at the second launch intensity, so that when the variable means is changed to the second ball entry position, the game ball can be launched to the player at the first launch intensity.

In gaming machine Q2 or Q3, when the variable means is arranged at the second ball entry position, the period required for a game ball that is launched at the first launch intensity and reaches the variable means to enter the second ball entry means tends to be shorter than the second period, and gaming machine Q4 is characterized in that when the variable means is arranged at the second ball entry position, the period required for a game ball that is launched at the second launch intensity and reaches the variable means to enter the second ball entry means tends to be longer than the second period.

Gaming machine Q4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine Q2 or Q3. That is, when the variable means is positioned at the second ball entry position, the period required for a gaming ball that is launched with the first launch intensity and reaches the variable means to enter the second ball entry means tends to be shorter than the second period, while the period required for a gaming ball that is launched with the second launch intensity and reaches the variable means to enter the second ball entry means tends to be longer than the second period.

As a result, if the game ball is launched at the second launch strength while the variable means is positioned at the second ball entry position, there is a high possibility that the variable means will be changed to the second position before the ball enters the second ball entry means, so the game ball can be launched at the first launch strength. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine Q5 is any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, and is provided with a passing means provided at a position where at least the gaming ball launched at the first launch intensity can pass through, and a passing discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination based on the gaming ball passing through the passing means, and the second variable pattern setting means sets the second variable pattern based on the discrimination by the passing discrimination means resulting in a specific discrimination result.

According to gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines Q1 to Q5, a passing means is provided at a position where at least a gaming ball launched at a first launch intensity can pass through. A predetermined judgment is executed by a passing discrimination means based on the passing of the gaming ball through the passing means. A second variable pattern is set by a second variable pattern setting means based on a specific judgment result being obtained by the judgment by the passing discrimination means.

This has the effect of allowing a player to play the game in the hope that a specific judgment result will be obtained from the judgment by the passage judgment means.

A gaming machine Q6 is characterized by comprising: a gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state in which the specific discrimination result is determined by the passing discrimination means with a first probability based on the establishment of a first set condition in the gaming machine Q5; and setting a second gaming state in which the specific discrimination result is determined with a second probability higher than the first probability based on the establishment of a second set condition different from the first set condition; and a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect that encourages the launch of a gaming ball with the first launch strength based on the second gaming state being set by the gaming state setting means.

Gaming machine Q6 produces the following effect in addition to the effect produced by gaming machine Q5. That is, based on the first setting condition being established, the gaming state setting means sets a first gaming state in which the passing determination means determines a specific determination result with a first probability, while based on the second setting condition different from the first setting condition being established, the gaming state setting means sets a second gaming state in which the specific determination result is determined with a second probability higher than the first probability. Based on the second gaming state being set by the gaming state setting means, a specific effect that encourages the player to launch the gaming ball with a first launch strength is executed by the specific effect execution means.

As a result, when the second game state is set, a game method that makes it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry means can be performed, which has the effect of allowing the player to play efficiently.

Gaming machine Q7 is characterized by being equipped with a discrimination means for discriminating based on a gaming ball entering the second ball entry means in any one of gaming machines Q2 to Q4, and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied in the first variable pattern a predetermined number of times based on the first discrimination result determined by the discrimination means.

According to gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effect produced by any of gaming machines Q2 to Q4, a determination is made by the determination means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second ball entry means. Based on the determination by the determination means being the first determination result, a variable game is executed by the variable game execution means in which the variable means is changed a predetermined number of times in a first variable pattern.

This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game in the hope that the discrimination by the discrimination means will result in the first discrimination result.

In any of the gaming machines Q2 to Q4 and Q7, the variable means is composed of a first variable member that can appear and disappear on the board surface and a second variable member different from the first variable member, the first ball entry position is an arrangement in which the first variable member protrudes toward the front side of the board surface when viewed from the front and the second variable member is buried in the board surface, the second ball entry position is an arrangement in which the first variable member is buried in the board surface and the second variable member protrudes toward the front side of the board surface when viewed from the front, the second position is an arrangement in which the first variable member and the second variable member are buried in the board surface, the first variable member protrudes toward the board surface to form a flow path that can guide a game ball that has reached the variable means to the first ball entry means, and the second variable member protrudes toward the board surface to form a flow path that can guide a game ball that has reached the variable means to the second ball entry means. Gaming machine Q8.

Gaming machine Q8 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any one of gaming machines Q2 to Q4, and Q7. That is, the variable means is composed of a first variable member capable of appearing and disappearing on the board surface, and a second variable member different from the first variable member. When the variable means is changed to the first ball entry position, the first variable member protrudes toward the front side of the board surface when viewed from the front, and the second variable member is arranged to be buried in the board surface. When the variable means is changed to the second ball entry position, the first variable member is buried in the board surface, and the second variable member protrudes toward the front side of the board surface when viewed from the front. When the variable means is changed to the second position, the first variable member and the second variable member are arranged to be buried in the board surface. By the first variable member protruding from the board surface, a flow path is formed that can guide the gaming ball that has reached the variable means to the first ball entry means. By the second variable member protruding from the board surface, a flow path is formed that can guide the game ball that has reached the variable means to the second ball entry means.

This has the effect of allowing the player to easily identify the ball-scoring means that allows the ball to be scored based on the type of protruding variable member.

<Feature R Group> (The degree of advantage varies depending on the timing of the attacker and the electric chute opening)
a first entry means through which a game ball can enter, a second entry means different from the first entry means, a first variable means for varying the position between a first position at which the game ball can enter the first entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first position, a second variable means for varying the position between a third position at which the game ball can enter the second entry means and a fourth position at which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the third position, a first variable control means for varying the first variable means from the second position to the first position for a first period based on the establishment of a first predetermined condition, and and a second variable control means for varying the position from the fourth position to the third position for a second period based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition, wherein a state in which the first variable means is varied to the first position and the second variable means is varied to the third position, a state in which the first variable means is varied to the second position and the second variable means is varied to the third position, and a state in which the first variable means is varied to the first position and the second variable means is varied to the fourth position have mutually different degrees of advantage for a player.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, transition to a winning state when a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot results in a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and by varying the gaming value that can be obtained, they aim to increase the excitement during the winning period (for example, Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, in order to make the gaming ball enter the big prize opening, it is necessary to shoot the gaming ball in a direction that is determined for each gaming machine, and since the degree of advantage in the winning state (the amount of a predetermined bonus that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the winning state will simply become a task of continuing to shoot the gaming ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem with conventional gaming machines in that it is difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to decide when the winning state begins if they win, but like other conventional gaming machines, the gaming value that can be acquired during a win is roughly constant for each type of win, making it difficult to increase the player's interest in the game during the winning state.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine R1, the first variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the gaming ball can enter the first ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the first position. The second variable means is configured to be variable between a third position where the gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and a fourth position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the third position. Based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition, the first variable means is varied from the second position to the first position by the first variable control means for a first period. Based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition, the second variable means is varied from the fourth position to the third position by the second variable control means for a second period. The state in which the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the third position, the state in which the first variable means is changed to the second position and the second variable means is changed to the third position, and the state in which the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the fourth position are each configured to have a different degree of advantage for the player.

As a result, the degree of advantage varies depending on the combination of the variable positions of the first variable means and the second variable means, which has the effect of allowing players to play the game while paying attention to the variable positions of each variable means.

A gaming machine R2, characterized in that in the gaming machine R1, a state in which the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the fourth position is more advantageous to the player than a state in which the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the third position and a state in which the first variable means is changed to the second position and the second variable means is changed to the third position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine R1, gaming machine R2 has the effect of providing novel gameplay that makes the player want to avoid a situation in which both the first and second ball entry means are capable of scoring, because the state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position is more advantageous to the player than the state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, and the state in which the first variable means is variable to the second position and the second variable means is variable to the third position.

A gaming machine R3, characterized in that in the gaming machine R1 or R2, when the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the third position, it becomes more difficult for a gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than when the first variable means is changed to the second position and the second variable means is changed to the third position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines R1 and R2, gaming machine R3 achieves a novel operation when the first variable means is set to the first position and the second variable means is set to the third position, since it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than when the first variable means is set to the second position and the second variable means is set to the third position. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine R3, which is any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, is characterized in that when the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the third position, it becomes more difficult for a gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means than when the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the fourth position.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines R1 to R3, gaming machine R3 achieves a novel operation when the first variable means is set to the first position and the second variable means is set to the third position, since it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means than when the first variable means is set to the first position and the second variable means is set to the fourth position. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine R4 is characterized in that it is equipped with a first benefit granting means for granting a first benefit based on a gaming ball entering the first ball entry means, and a second benefit granting means for granting a second benefit greater than the first benefit based on a gaming ball entering the second ball entry means, in any one of the gaming machines R1 to R4.

Gaming machine R4 provides the following effects in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines R1 to R4. That is, a first benefit is provided by the first benefit providing means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first ball entry means. A second benefit is provided by the second benefit providing means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second ball entry means. A second benefit greater than the first benefit is provided by the second benefit providing means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second ball entry means.

This has the effect of allowing players to play with a stronger expectation of the ball scoring into the second scoring means.

A gaming machine R5 is characterized in that it is provided with a third variable control means for varying the second variable means to the fourth position, regardless of whether the second period has elapsed, based on the fact that the number of gaming balls that have entered the second ball entry means after the second variable control means has varied the second variable means to the third position by the second variable control means has reached a specific number.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine R4, gaming machine R5 has the effect of preventing an excessive number of gaming balls from entering the second ball entry means and awarding too many second benefits because the second variable means is changed to the fourth position by the third variable control means based on the fact that the number of gaming balls that have entered the second ball entry means becomes equal to or exceeds a specific number after the second variable control means has changed the second variable means to the third position, regardless of whether the second period has elapsed. This has the effect of preventing an excessive number of gaming balls from entering the second ball entry means and awarding too many second benefits.

Gaming machine R6 is characterized in that in gaming machine R5, the first period is configured to be a period of a length that allows multiple gaming balls to reach the first variable means.

Gaming machine R6 has the same effect as gaming machine R5, but the length of the first period is long enough to allow multiple gaming balls to reach the first variable means, so that multiple gaming balls can enter the second ball entry means at once when the first period has elapsed with multiple gaming balls reaching the first variable means. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game, as the second benefit can be obtained consecutively in a short period of time.

The gaming machine R7 is characterized in that it is equipped with a passing means through which the gaming ball can pass, and a first discrimination means which executes a first discrimination based on the passing of the gaming ball through the passing means, and the first variable control means changes the first variable means to the first position when the discrimination by the first discrimination means results in a first discrimination result, which is the establishment of the first condition.

Gaming machine R7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines R5 or R6. That is, a first determination is executed by a first determination means based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a passing means through which the gaming ball can pass. When the determination by the first determination means results in a first determination result, it is considered that a first condition is satisfied, and the first variable means is varied to a first position by a first variable control means.

This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to the result of the determination made by the first determination means, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine R8 is characterized by comprising a second determination means for performing a second determination based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first ball entry means in the gaming machine R7, and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the second variable control means changes the second variable means to the third position a predetermined number of times based on the second determination result obtained by the second determination means.

In gaming machine R7, in addition to the effects of gaming machine R8, a variable game is executed by a variable game execution means in which the second variable control means changes the second variable means to the third position a predetermined number of times based on the second judgment result executed by the second judgment means based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, so that the game can be played while paying attention to the result of the judgment by the second judgment means. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Feature S group> (The winning status of each winning port is set independently of the status of the other winning port by a distribution member provided between the two winning ports)
a first ball entry means through which the game ball can enter; a second ball entry means provided at a predetermined distance from the first ball entry means and through which the game ball can enter; a first variable means provided between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means and variable between a first position at which the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first position; a third position provided between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means and through which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means; a second variable control means for varying the first variable means from the second position to the first position for a first period based on the satisfaction of a predetermined first condition, and a second variable control means for varying the second variable means from the fourth position to the third position for a second period based on the satisfaction of a predetermined second condition, wherein the first condition can be satisfied regardless of the arrangement of the second variable means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, transition to a winning state when a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot results in a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and by varying the gaming value that can be obtained, they aim to increase the excitement during the winning period (for example, Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, in order to make the gaming ball enter the big prize opening, it is necessary to shoot the gaming ball in a direction that is determined for each gaming machine, and since the degree of advantage in the winning state (the amount of a predetermined bonus that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the winning state will simply become a task of continuing to shoot the gaming ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem with conventional gaming machines in that it is difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to decide when the winning state begins if they win, but like other conventional gaming machines, the gaming value that can be acquired during a win is roughly constant for each type of win, making it difficult to increase the player's interest in the game during the winning state.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine S1, a second ball entry means is provided that allows the game ball to enter the ball at a predetermined distance from the first ball entry means through which the game ball can enter. A first variable means is provided between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and is configured to be variable to a first position where the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball than the first position. In addition, a second variable means is provided between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and is configured to be variable to a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a fourth position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball than the third position. The first variable means is varied from the second position to the first position by the first variable control means for a first period based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition. The second variable means is varied from the fourth position to the third position by the second variable control means for a second period based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition. The first condition is a condition that can be met regardless of the arrangement of the second variable means.

This allows the player to focus on the state of the two variable means provided between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means while playing the game, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine S2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine S1, the second condition can be satisfied regardless of the arrangement of the first variable means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine S1, gaming machine S2 has the effect of simplifying control since the second condition can be met regardless of the arrangement of the first variable means and the first variable means and the second variable means can be varied regardless of their respective arrangements.

Gaming machine S3, characterized in that in gaming machine S1 or S2, a state in which the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the third position, a state in which the first variable means is changed to the second position and the second variable means is changed to the third position, and a state in which the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the fourth position each have a different degree of advantage for the player.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines S1 and S2, gaming machine S3 has the following advantages for the player: the state in which the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the third position; the state in which the first variable means is changed to the second position and the second variable means is changed to the third position; and the state in which the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the fourth position. As a result, the player can play the game while paying attention to the combination of the arrangement of the first variable means and the second variable means. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine S4, characterized in that in the gaming machine S3, a state in which the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the fourth position is more advantageous to the player than a state in which the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the third position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine S3, gaming machine S4 is configured so that the state in which the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the fourth position is more advantageous to the player than the state in which the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the third position, thereby realizing an innovative gameplay that makes the player hope that a state in which it is possible to score a ball through both the first and second ball entry means will not occur.

A gaming machine S5, characterized in that in the gaming machine S4, when the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the third position, it becomes more difficult for a gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means than when the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the fourth position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine S4, gaming machine S5 is configured so that when the first variable means is set to the first position and the second variable means is set to the third position, it is more difficult for a gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means than when the first variable means is set to the first position and the second variable means is set to the fourth position. This allows a player to play in the hope that the first condition will be met while the second variable means is set to the fourth position. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine S6 is characterized in that, in a state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, the first variable means and the second variable means form a holding area capable of holding arriving gaming balls without letting them flow away.

According to gaming machine S6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine S5, when the first variable means is changed to the first position, the first variable means and the second variable means form a holding area that can hold the arriving gaming ball without letting it flow away, so that the ball entry means through which the gaming ball can enter can be changed depending on whether the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means becomes difficult to enter. This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game while paying attention to the operation of each variable means.

A gaming machine S7 is characterized in that it is provided with a first bonus awarding means for awarding a first bonus based on a gaming ball entering the first ball entry means, and a second bonus awarding means for awarding a second bonus less than the first bonus based on a gaming ball entering the second ball entry means.

Gaming machine S7 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine S6. That is, a first benefit is provided by the first benefit providing means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first ball entry means, while a second benefit less than the first benefit is provided by the second benefit providing means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second ball entry means.

This has the effect of making it possible to expect that the second variable means will be variable to the fourth position first when a game ball is held in the holding area.

A gaming machine S8, which is any one of the gaming machines S1 to S7, is provided with a passing means through which a gaming ball can pass, a passing discrimination means which makes a discrimination based on the passing of the gaming ball through the passing means, a ball entry discrimination means which makes a discrimination based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first ball entry means, and a variable game execution means which executes a variable game in which the second variable means is varied to the third position by the second variable control means a predetermined number of times based on the first discrimination result obtained by the ball entry discrimination means, and the first variable control means varies the first variable means to the first position based on the second discrimination result obtained by the ball entry discrimination means.

Gaming machine S8 provides the following effects in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines S1 to S7. That is, a passing determination means performs a determination based on the passing of a gaming ball through a passing means through which the gaming ball can pass. A ball entry determination means performs a determination based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first ball entry means. A variable game is executed by a variable game execution means in which the second variable means is varied to the third position by the second variable means a predetermined number of times based on the determination by the ball entry determination means resulting in a first determination result. The first variable means is varied to the first position by the first variable control means based on the determination by the passing determination means resulting in a second determination result.

This allows the player to focus on the results of the pass determination means and the score determination means while playing the game, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Feature T group> (The distribution member provided between the two winning slots is moved so that the winning states do not overlap)
a first ball entry means through which the game ball can enter; a second ball entry means provided at a predetermined distance from the first ball entry means and through which the game ball can enter; a distribution means provided between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means and distributing the traveling direction of the game ball that has arrived thereto into one of a plurality of directions including at least a first traveling direction in which the game ball is likely to enter the first ball entry means, a second traveling direction in which the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entry means, and a third traveling direction in which the game ball is unlikely to enter either the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means; and a first state setting means for setting the state of a stage to a first state in which arriving game balls are more likely to be distributed to the first traveling direction than to the third traveling direction during a first period of time, and a second state setting means for setting the state of the distribution means to a second state in which arriving game balls are more likely to be distributed to the second traveling direction than to the third traveling direction during a second period of time, wherein the distribution means is prevented from being set to the first state by the first state setting means at least while it is set to the second state.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include variable components operated by motors, such as opening and closing plates for opening and closing specific winning slots. Some of these gaming machines can perform a wide variety of performance actions by operating multiple variable components (for example, Patent Publication No. 2514417).

One such conventional gaming machine is one that has multiple large openings that open when a winning lottery based on the initial winnings is selected, and aims to increase excitement during a winning session by switching the large openings that open depending on the type of winning or the number of rounds.

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, as the number of variable components increases, the operation control of each variable component becomes more complicated, which can make it difficult to set appropriate operations for multiple variable components.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine T1, a second ball entry means into which the game ball can enter is provided at a predetermined distance from a first ball entry means into which the game ball can enter. Between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, a distribution means is provided for distributing the traveling direction of the arriving game ball to one of a plurality of directions including at least a first traveling direction in which the game ball can easily enter the first ball entry means, a second traveling direction in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means, and a third traveling direction in which the game ball cannot easily enter either the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. The state of the distribution means is set by the first state setting means to a second state in which the arriving game ball is more likely to be distributed to the second traveling direction than the third traveling direction during the first period, while the second state setting means is set to a second state in which the arriving game ball is more likely to be distributed to the second traveling direction than the third traveling direction during the second period. At least while the sorting means is set to the second state, the first state setting means prevents the sorting means from being set to the first state.

This has the effect of allowing the state of the distribution means to be set appropriately.

Gaming machine T2 is characterized in that in gaming machine T1, the allocation means is prevented from being set to the second state by the second state setting means at least while the allocation means is set to the first state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine T1, gaming machine T2 has the effect of more suitably setting the state of the allocation means, since the second state setting means prevents the allocation means from being set to the second state at least while the allocation means is set to the first state.

In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the distribution means is composed of at least a first variable member that can be changed to a first position where the gaming ball can enter the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is more difficult to enter, and a second position where the first ball entry means is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a second variable member that can be changed to a third position where the gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and the first ball entry means is more difficult to enter, and a fourth position where the second ball entry means is more difficult to enter than the third position, and the first state setting means changes the first variable member from the second position to the first position during the first period, and the second state setting means changes the second variable member from the fourth position to the third position during the second period.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine T1 or T2, the gaming machine T3 has the following effects. That is, the distribution means is composed of at least a first variable member and a second variable member. The first variable member is configured to be variable to a first position where the gaming ball can enter the first ball entry means and is difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and a second position where the gaming ball is more difficult to enter the first ball entry means than the first position. The second variable member is configured to be variable to a third position where the gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and is difficult to enter the first ball entry means, and a fourth position where the gaming ball is more difficult to enter the second ball entry means than the third position. The first state setting means changes the first variable member from the second position to the first position during the first period, while the second state setting means changes the second variable member from the fourth position to the third position during the second period.

This has the advantage that each state can be set by relatively simple control of varying the variable components that correspond to the state, thereby reducing the processing load when switching states.

In any of the gaming machines T1 to T3, the first ball entry means is such that, at least when the distribution means is set to the first state, a gaming ball arriving from a second direction different from the first direction is more likely to enter the ball than a gaming ball arriving from the first direction to the distribution means, and the second ball entry means is such that, at least when the distribution means is set to the second state, a gaming ball arriving from the first direction is more likely to enter the ball than a gaming ball arriving from the second direction to the distribution means. Gaming machine T4 is characterized in that, at least when the distribution means is set to the second state, a gaming ball arriving from the first direction is more likely to enter the ball than a gaming ball arriving from the second direction to the distribution means.

Gaming machine T4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines T1 to T3. That is, the first ball entry means is configured so that, at least when the distribution means is set to the first state, game balls arriving from a second direction different from the first direction are more likely to enter the ball than game balls arriving from the first direction to the distribution means. Also, at least when the distribution means is set to the second state, the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls arriving from the first direction are more likely to enter the ball than game balls arriving from the second direction.

This allows the player to adjust the direction of the game ball when it reaches the distribution means so that the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entry means that corresponds to the state of the distribution means, which has the effect of further increasing the player's motivation to participate in the game.

Gaming machine T5 is characterized in that in gaming machine T4, the distribution means is configured so that the length of time it takes for a gaming ball arriving from the second direction to be distributed in the first traveling direction and reach the first ball entry means is likely to be longer than the first period, and the length of time it takes for a gaming ball arriving from the first direction to be distributed in the second traveling direction and reach the second ball entry means is likely to be longer than the second period.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T4, the distribution means is configured so that the length of time it takes for a gaming ball arriving from the second direction to be distributed in the first direction of travel and reach the first ball entry means is more likely to be longer than the first period, and the length of time it takes for a gaming ball arriving from the first direction to be distributed in the second direction of travel and reach the second ball entry means is more likely to be longer than the second period. Therefore, when a gaming ball arrives at the distribution means from the second direction in the first state and when a gaming ball arrives at the distribution means from the first direction in the second state, it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter each ball entry means. Therefore, the player can be made to more seriously adjust the direction of arrival of the gaming ball relative to the distribution means depending on the state of the distribution means, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine T6, which is provided with a discrimination means for making a judgment based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on a specific judgment result obtained by the judgment means, and a type determination means for determining one type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means from a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game different from the first bonus game, the first state setting means for setting the allocation means to the first state based on the first bonus game being determined by the type determination means, and the second state setting means for setting the allocation means to the second state based on the second bonus game being determined by the type determination means.

Gaming machine T6 provides the following effects in addition to those provided by gaming machine T5. That is, a determination is made by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition. A bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination means. As the type of bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, one type is determined by the type determination means from among a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game different from the first bonus game. Based on the first bonus game being determined by the type determination means, the allocation means is set to the first state by the first state setting means. Based on the second bonus game being determined by the type determination means, the allocation means is set to the second state by the second state setting means.

This allows the direction in which the game ball reaches the distribution means to be changed so that the game ball can enter one of the entry means depending on the type of bonus game, realizing a game feature in which the ball can be played by selecting the direction in which it reaches depending on the type of bonus game. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine T7 is characterized in that it is provided with a game state setting means for setting a first game state favorable to the player as the game state after the execution of the bonus game is completed in gaming machine T6 based on a game ball entering either the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means during the execution of the bonus game, and for setting a second game state less favorable to the player than the first game state based on a game ball not entering either the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means during the execution of the bonus game.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine T6, gaming machine T7 sets a first game state that is advantageous to the player by having the gaming ball enter the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, so that when a bonus game is executed, the state to be set for the distribution means can be predicted more seriously and the game can be played so that the corresponding arrival direction is achieved. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine T8 is characterized in that it is equipped with an operating means operable by a player and a launching means capable of launching gaming balls into a gaming area with a launch strength according to the operation content of the operating means in the gaming machine T6 or T7, and the period from when the gaming ball launched by the launching means reaches the sorting means from the first direction until it enters the first ball entry means is likely to be shorter than the first period, and the period from when the gaming ball launched by the launching means reaches the sorting means from the second direction until it enters the second ball entry means is likely to be shorter than the second period.

Gaming machine T8 provides the following effects in addition to the effects provided by either gaming machine T6 or T7. That is, gaming balls are launched into the gaming area by the launching means with a launch strength according to the operation content of the operation means that the player can operate. The period from when the gaming ball launched by the launching means reaches the sorting means from the first direction until it enters the first ball entry means is likely to be shorter than the first period. The period from when the gaming ball launched by the launching means reaches the sorting means from the second direction until it enters the second ball entry means is likely to be shorter than the second period.

As a result, if a game ball is launched after the distribution means is set to the first or second state, the game ball will be unable to enter the corresponding ball entry means regardless of the direction in which the game ball reaches the distribution means, so it is possible to realize a game feature in which the game ball can be launched by selecting the direction in which it will reach the distribution means before the first or second state is set. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine Z1 is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I8, J1 to J13, K1 to K8, L1 to L7, M1 to M9, N1 to N8, O1 to O7, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q8, R1 to R8, S1 to S8, and T1 to T8. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is equipped with an operating handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined play area in response to the operation of the operating handle, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, with the necessary condition that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the play area. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) located at a specific position within the game area opens in a specific manner, allowing balls to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) is awarded according to the number of winning balls.

Gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I8, J1 to J13, K1 to K8, L1 to L7, M1 to M9, N1 to N8, O1 to O7, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q8, R1 to R8, S1 to S8, T1 to T8, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, and equipped with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever) and stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and requiring that the definitive identification information at the time of stopping be a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of gaming media include coins, medals, etc.

Gaming machine Z3 is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine in any of gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I8, J1 to J13, K1 to K8, L1 to L7, M1 to M9, N1 to N8, O1 to O7, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q8, R1 to R8, S1 to S8, and T1 to T8. In particular, the basic configuration of the combined gaming machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means which dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, variation of the identification information is started due to operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and which generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the definitive identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification information, and which uses balls as gaming media, requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and is configured so that a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state is generated."
＜Other＞
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device displays a variable pattern, and the pattern is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby awarding the player an advantageous jackpot. In addition to the patterns, the display device also displays various images such as characters and landscapes, and a wide variety of exciting effects are performed to increase the excitement of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-325886 A).
However, there is a demand for further improvement.
This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's interest in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Idea 1 comprises: launching means capable of launching a gaming ball at least in a first direction and in a second direction different from the first direction; a specific area provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in the first direction by the launching means and a gaming ball launched in the second direction can reach; a ball entry means provided at a position where a gaming ball that has reached the specific area can enter; a variable means provided in the specific area and capable of variable operation in a predetermined variable pattern; and a variable pattern set for the variable means, which, based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition, outputs a game ball launched in the second direction and reaching the specific area. The game machine is provided with a variable pattern determination means which determines a first variable pattern in which a game ball launched in the first direction and reaching the specific area is more likely to enter the ball entry means than a game ball, and, based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, determines a second variable pattern in which a game ball launched in the second direction and reaching the specific area is more likely to enter the ball entry means than a game ball launched in the first direction and reaching the specific area; and a specific performance execution means which, based on the establishment of the first condition or the second condition, executes a specific performance of a performance mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether the first condition or the second condition has been established.
The gaming machine of technical idea 2 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 1, wherein the first variable pattern is such that a gaming ball launched in the first direction during a specific period after the first condition is satisfied can enter the ball entry means, and a gaming ball launched in the second direction during the specific period has difficulty entering the ball entry means, the second variable pattern is such that a gaming ball launched in the first direction during the specific period after the second condition is satisfied has difficulty entering the ball entry means, and a gaming ball launched in the second direction during the specific period can enter the ball entry means, and the specific performance execution means executes the specific performance for at least the specific period.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, and is equipped with a discrimination means which executes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a variable game execution means which executes a variable game including at least a variable operation of the variable means in a variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means based on the discrimination by the discrimination means resulting in a specific discrimination result.
A gaming machine of technical idea 4 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 3, and is equipped with a gaming state setting means which, when a gaming ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the variable game of 1, sets a first gaming state which is advantageous to the player as the gaming state after the execution of the variable game is completed, and, when a gaming ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of the variable game of 1, sets a second gaming state which is less advantageous to the player than the first gaming state as the gaming state after the execution of the variable game is completed.
The gaming machine of technical idea 5 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 3 or 4, and is equipped with a variable game type determination means for determining, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, a first variable game in which the first variable pattern is set to the variable means during execution of the variable game, at a first ratio, and determining a second variable game in which the second variable pattern is set to the variable means, at a second ratio higher than the first ratio.
＜Effects＞
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 1, there is provided a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball at least in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, a specific area provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in the first direction by the launching means and a gaming ball launched in the second direction can reach, a ball entry means provided at a position where a gaming ball that has reached the specific area can enter the ball entry means, a variable means provided in the specific area and capable of variable operation in a predetermined variable pattern, and a variable pattern set for the variable means, which, based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition, causes a gaming ball launched in the second direction and that has reached the specific area to enter the ball entry means. The ball entry device is provided with a variable pattern determination means which determines a first variable pattern in which a game ball launched in the first direction and reaching the specific area is more likely to enter the ball entry means than a game ball launched in the first direction and reaching the specific area, and, based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, determines a second variable pattern in which a game ball launched in the second direction and reaching the specific area is more likely to enter the ball entry means than a game ball launched in the first direction and reaching the specific area; and a specific performance execution means which, based on the establishment of the first condition or the second condition, executes a specific performance of a performance mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether the first condition or the second condition has been established.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the first variable pattern makes it possible for a gaming ball launched in the first direction to enter the entry means during a specific period after the first condition is met, and makes it difficult for a gaming ball launched in the second direction during the specific period to enter the entry means; the second variable pattern makes it difficult for a gaming ball launched in the first direction to enter the entry means during the specific period after the second condition is met, and makes it possible for a gaming ball launched in the second direction during the specific period to enter the entry means; and the specific performance execution means executes the specific performance for at least the specific period.
This allows the player to predict the direction in which the ball will be more likely to enter the ball entry means, and allows the game ball to be launched in the predicted direction within a specific period of time, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1 or 2, it is equipped with a discrimination means which executes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a variable game execution means which executes a variable game including at least a variable operation of the variable means in a variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means.
This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game in the hope of a specific determination result each time the determination means executes a determination.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 3, the gaming machine is equipped with a gaming state setting means which, when a gaming ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the variable game of 1, sets a first gaming state which is advantageous to the player as the gaming state after the execution of the variable game is completed, and, when a gaming ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of the variable game of 1, sets a second gaming state which is less advantageous to the player than the first gaming state as the gaming state after the execution of the variable game is completed.
This allows the player to play while paying attention to whether or not the game ball will enter the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game during the execution of the variable game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 3 or 4, the gaming machine is provided with a variable game type determination means which determines, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, a first variable game in which the first variable pattern is set to the variable means during execution of the variable game at a first ratio, and determines a second variable game in which the second variable pattern is set to the variable means at a second ratio higher than the first ratio.
This allows the player to predict the launch direction that is likely to result in the ball entering the ball entry means, taking into account the rate at which the type is determined by the variable game type determination means, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
111 Payout control device (first bonus giving means, second bonus giving means)
112 Launch control device (launch means)
650La left specific prize opening (first ball entry means, second ball entry means)
650Ra right specific prize opening (first ball entry means, second ball entry means)
650Lb, 650Rb Movable member (variable means)
655La Left chance winning hole (ball entry method)
655Ra Right chance winning hole (ball entry means)
658 Rotating member (variable means)
S214: Variable game execution means S305: Discrimination means S306: Variable game type determination means
S1021 Variable control means
S1103 Variable pattern determination means S1202, S1203 Game state setting means

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine having a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball,
A specific area that the game ball launched by the launching means can reach;
A first ball entry means and a second ball entry means are provided at a position where the game ball that has reached the specific area can enter the ball;
A first benefit awarding means for awarding a first benefit based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
A second benefit awarding means for awarding a second benefit different from the first benefit based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means;
A variable means for varying at least between a first position where a predetermined game ball that has reached the specific area can enter the first ball entry means and has difficulty entering the second ball entry means, and a second position where the game ball has difficulty entering the first ball entry means and has the ability to enter the second ball entry means ;
and a variable control means for varying the variable means to the first position based on the satisfaction of a first condition, and to the second position based on the satisfaction of a second condition different from the first condition ,
The variable means is composed of one variable member,
A game ball that has reached the specific area in a predetermined game state is controlled so as to be difficult to enter either the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means,
The gaming machine includes:
a driving means capable of supplying at least a first driving force for varying the variable means to the first position and a second driving force for varying the variable means to the second position,
The first position is a position where the game ball can be guided toward the first ball entry means by causing the game ball that has arrived thereto to flow down in a first direction,
The second position is a position where the game ball can be guided toward the second ball entry means by flowing the game ball in a second direction different from the first direction,
The gaming machine is configured such that, at least when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area and reached a predetermined area does not enter either the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means but flows downstream of the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, the gaming machine is capable of allowing the gaming ball that has reached the predetermined area to flow downstream of the variable means without changing its direction of travel,
The gaming machine, wherein the driving means is composed of a single driving source .

Images